” “f, , 4 iu is ~ e ee ee ee ee —— b> we et me o » SO aan cif peers ‘ PLA Hf) * Dae Sate Lier Wi ih Noh nhs ie a ik i Me THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY, INCLUDING ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY. (BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS ’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND CHARLESWORTH’S ‘MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. ) CONDUCTED BY PRIDEAUX JOHN SELBY, Esa, F.LS., CHARLES C. BABINGTON, Ese., M.A., F.B.S., F.LS., F.G.S., JOHN EDWARD GRAY, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.LS., V.P.ZS. &c., AND WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.LS, VOL. X.—THIRD SERIBSApcorian ans \ 242105 SS ey oe fonal Musev™: LONDON: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS. SOLD BY LONGMAN, GREEN, LONGMANS, AND ROBERTS j SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO.; PIPER AND CO.; BAILLIERE, REGENT STREET, AND PARIS: LIZARS, AND MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH, HODGES AND SMITH, DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN. 1862, Se **Omnes res create sunt divine sapientie et potentiz testes, divitiz felicitatis humane :—ex harum usu bonitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini; €x ceconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper zstimata; a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper inimica fuit.”— LINNZUs. “ Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour voir qu'elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rapportent toutes ses opérations.”—BRuCKNER, Théorie du Systeme Animal, Leyden, 1767. ree see s+ « « » « » Lhe sylvan powers Obey our summons ; from their deepest dells The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild And odorous branches at our feet ; the Nymphs That press with nimble step the mountain thyme And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed, But scatter round ten thousand forms minute Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles, Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread, The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne, All, all to us unlock their secret stores And pay their cheerful tribute. J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818. FLAMMAM, CONTENTS OF VOL. X. [THIRD SERIES.] NUMBER LV. I. Description of some new Species of Entomostracous Crustacea. Page By bALED, M.D. WLS. (Plate ].) --css:eccccecsecsenenrnpecssgen oes } II. On the Systematic Position of the Charybdede. By Fritz WVRUINGETEE weletedces os csi sseesaasacciratt Uso sbi bene oseeacieeaneaes suena sms axe 6 III. On the Occurrence of a Species of Regalecus among the Rocks at St. Andrews; with a few Notes on its Anatomy. By Rosert Wa Lxer, Assistant-Curator of the St. Andrews Museum.......--...00 15 IV. Descriptions of new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. By SUING ESAS onion deen eevee cs ce eW ede esaguaruannes eae dang ean ecle peesese= 17 V. Revision of the Natural Order Bignoniacee. By BERTHOLD SSEUEENIPAUNENAU ELE) Soe Bie Mer Sistecar ae al aiarelslelaieiiere le:e'siiets soiele wets a'slelsletcleinetein tieteieisteit= 29 VI. On the Functions of the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. By NM MA RRIGA Wij ules So naiesn ine sy cis civat ss anne’ deal msins naidvisees)p acelneinie'gs.s wae VII. On the Rhizocephala, a new Group of Parasitic Crustacea. By Dr. Frirz Mtuuer, of Desterro. (Plate IL.) .........ssesseeneeeeees 44 New Books :—Manual of British Botany, by Charles Cardale Babing- ton, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., Professor of Botany in the University of Cambridge. — British Conchology; or, an Account of the Mollusea which now inhabit the British Isles and the surrounding Seas, by John Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S., F.G.S. &c. ....seceeeeeees 50—57 Proceedings of the Royal Society; Zoological Society ............ 57—76 On the Animal of Zonites excavatus, &c., by J. Gwyn Jeffreys ; On the Occurrence of Gyrodactylus elegans in Shropshire, by the Rev. W. Houghton ; Experiments on the Migratiens of the Ento- zoa, by MM. Pouchet and Verrier; On the Early Stages of Mi- iv CONTENTS. Page crodom mutabilis, by M. Elditt; On anew Species of Bird of the Genus Lipaugus of Boié, by P.L. Sclater, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S. 76—80 NUMBER LVI. VIII. On the Age of the New South Wales Coal- fields. By the Rev. W. B. CLARKE, M.A., F.G.S. &e. weeeeeeeeees oe scene tee Penner 81 IX. On Entoniscus Porcellane, a new Parasitic Isopod Crustacean. By Dr. Fritz Muuuer, of Desterro. (Plate IL. figs.8-16.) ......... 87 X. Notice of the Discovery, by the Barao do Castello de Paiva, of the Fossil Helix coronula recent, and other new Land-Mollusea, in Madea: “By RT. Lowk, MA: 2. scoscccacsecsamaaccsssanasyeveseress siecee) BOO XI. Notice of a new Species of the Carabideous Genus Mormolyce. By J. O. WESTWOOD, M.A. Ses. ssnenesassstnescscererecccerecasnceverssras 96 XII. Notes on Cambridge Geology. By Harry Srecey, F.G.S., Woodwardian Museum. I. Preliminary Notice of the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata ....... Spuqpenodb gd aocssoes sag atess-coe ecHicoeseca-tsunecs 97 XIII. On the Functions of the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. By 11S Vas CU Gr Ot ae Seer ieengadichoorrer Dab dese adareasebonoco-1 Mancsda iedas. ses 111 XIV. Notice of a second Species of Paragorgia discovered in Madeira by Mr. James Yate Johnson. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R,S.. 125 XV. A Revision of the History, Synonymy, and Geographical Distribution of the recent Cranie and Orbicule. By Lovett Rinmiviis (LIS; iG. sco coneks swat enetelstoadse bole soncncen cpeeeneaines acon neaee 126 XVI. On Ephedra. By Joun Miers, F.R.S., F.L.S. &c. ...... 133 New Books :—The British Ferns, by Sir W. J. Hooker; with Drawings by W. Fitch.—Catalogue of a Collection of American Birds be- longing to Philip Lutley Sclater, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., See. Z.S., Editor of ‘The Ibis.’ Tlustrated by 20 Plates ............ 140—143 Proceedings of the Royal Society; Zoological Society ......... 144—157 Notice of a new Species of Cyclemys from the Lao Mountains, by Dr. J. E. Gray; On the Transformation of Entozoa, by P. J. Van Beneden; Description of a new Genus of Tree-frogs, from Ecuador, by W. Peters; Discovery of Microscopic Organisms in the Siliceous Nodules of the Paleozoic Rocks of New York 157—160 NUMBER LVII. XVII. Notes on rare and little-known Fishes taken at Madeira. By James YATE JOHNSON, Cor. Mem. Z.S..........cccsececoncacsenecees 161 CONTENTS. Vv Page XVIII. On the Mexican Species of Hydroport. By the Rey. US ROEOn (SEAR MALY LUIS. veccsccecsacstvecstasuorsesdevecectee EE ERED 173 XIX. Descriptions of Indian and Burmese Species of the Genus Prarivetz.. By W. EH. BENSON, sq. cosets tc.Seccossaviak dus cevstce even dE XX. Notes on some Chinese Condiments obtained from the Xan- thorylacee. By W. F. Dante.tu, M.D., F.L.S., Staff-Surgeon, Army Medical Staff. (Plate V.) .........0000 Wetec cor See seeping aeiesswesenk 195 XXI. On some additional Species that are common to Carboniferous and Permian Strata; with Remarks on the Recurrency of Carboni- ferous Species. By James W. Kirxsy. (Plate IV.) .......... eves DOD XXII. On Synapta digitata and its supposed Parasite. By A. PVA Ul Maascnsncntat. «tasaasansecases Sdetsniet as'gaisiedelsntiaclWale'na de obacists Ensen asm anne en 216 XXIII. On the Discovery of Ancient Remains of Emys lutaria in Norfolk. By ALrrep Newron, M.A., F.L.S. (Plates VI. & VII.) 224 Proceedings of the Zoological Society ........scsesscsescsseseeeeeee 228-239 On the Hyracotherian Character of the Lower Molars of the supposed Macacus from the Eocene Sand of Kyson, Suffolk, by Prof.Owen ; On a new British Mygale .......0...cessee paconnnsscmae ¥agiua ess tanseess 240 NUMBER LVIII. XXIV. Contributions to the Natural History of the Infusoria. By T.W. ENGELMANN. (Plate III.) .............+. daqasecd sidadearacnnss ean ust od XXYV. Descriptions of a new Genus and some new Species of Naked Mollusea. By Josaua ALDER and ALBANY Hancock, F.L.S. ... 261 XXVI. A Synopsis of the Species of Crocodiles. By Dr. J. E. Gi AGES OCs) aa ceatsteenencs entoatioetuniad telgse's sorcinee Gar eecwas kein neces 265 XXVII. Notes on rare and little-known Fishes taken at Madeira. By James YATE JoHNSON, Cor. Mem. Z.5. ..........0c00e neleruiretet aero 274 XXVIII. On Additions to the Madeiran Coleoptera. By T. Ver- NONGWOLLASTON,| MGA, FRiLiiSe coscdscsccseecerescocvnasees Weiss sees ceetacses 287 XXIX. On the Animal and Affinities of the Genus Alaba; with a Review of the known Species, and Descriptions of some new Species. Py EE RATA WES. OS RECs os UE ioe cot te duasececnegrsevdstectevedesstss 293 XXX. On an apparently undescribed Spider from Cochin China. By Dr, Ausept GounTuer. (Plate VIII, fig. A.) ...s00...sessesrcescoers 299 XXXI. Some Remarks on the Genus Trachinus. By Dr. ALBERT Conver, -(Llate WM tigss BC, D2). ts. csccvecsodvesoersseecdetaabies 301 vi CONTENTS. New Book :—The Natural History of the Tineina, by H. T. Stainton, assisted by Prof. Zeller, J. W. Douglas, and Prof. Frey. Vols. IV. EOMVIDN cn) cea enaescaeevenmeneeese ccc sander anciseeneens@ccee ae tae eaee eee Eee Page XXXII. Note on the Discovery of an extremely minute Vertebrate Lower Jaw in Mud dredged at St. Helena. By Dr. Wauuicu, F.L.S. 304 Proceedings of the Zoological Society ......s+++ Sanwneeneeecrsatire 308—319 Notice of a New Leopard from Japan, and Description of a New “Wild Goat”? (Capricornus Swinhoei) from the Island of Formosa, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; Death of Fishes in the Sea during the Monsoon ...... Poe Spade! SSS 0H yarade nogU Satna AR sSemetnan ote NUMBER LIX. XXXIII. On the Pro-Embryos of the Chare. By M. PRINGSHEIM XXXIV. Description of a new Species of Hydroporus, Clairv. By the Rev. HamueT Cxiark, M.A., F.L.S. He ser eee tere reeresoseses weores XXXV. A Synopsis of the Species of Alligators. By Dr. J. E. GR ARs HenRGS. eC, cece eaiciacon as «a eniscs aesnewamenalcae ech asy Mee REM se > ene eee eae : XXXVI. On Additions to the Madeiran Coleoptera. By T. Ver- NON WiOHEAST ON, IMGA HeIS. Saacccccascies asec iceirecisactaacce nee eeerts XXXVII. On a Species of Limopsis now living in the British Seas; with Remarks on the Genus. By J. Gwyn Jerrreys, F.R.S., HUNG aSe gOGGs, crac csmpin onsdiejas sajaician bessnaneaeaaiiestent: mataemenme nes saech ee se areamenaeee XXXVII. On some new Species of Scissurellide from*the Seas of China and Japan. By ArTHUR ADAMS, F.L.S., &. ....csscseeeees XXXIX. Descriptions of newly discovered Spiders captured in Rio Janeiro by John Gray, Esq., and the Rev. Hamlet Clark. By Joun SANG W AUD RIGS 2 «1 come tuigs ce scisistss's peseeee Seinieiclasjsteinietesieistae « eetancteepianinetta XL. A Catalogue of the Zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall. By the Rev. Tuomas Hincxs, BA. ...... eiieeteseneschotee XLI. On the Unicorn of the Ancients. By the Rev. W. Hovucuron, TRUE GSA ean Sener Gr era se Saue ti ance soc dencnageusasa scogasasborran ARE New Books :—Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift (Journal of Natural History), founded by Dr. H. Kroyer; edited by Prof. T. C. Schjodte at Copenhagen. Third Series, 1861. [Kréyer, “ Contributions to the History of Myside;” Meinert, “ Anatomy of the Larva of Gastrus Equi; Didrichsen, “ Botanical Observations ;” Schjédte, “ Danish Harpalini” and “ Larvee of Coleoptera,”’ &c.] —The North-Atlantic Sea-bed; comprising a Diary of the Voyage 320 321 326 > oon 331 343 346 360 . 363 CONTENTS. vil Page on board H.M.S. Bulldog in 1860, and Observations on the Pre- : sence of Animal Life, and the Formation and Nature of Organic Deposits, at great Depths in the Ocean, by G. C. Wallich, M.D., F.LS., F.G.S. &c. (Part I.)—On the various Contrivances by which British and Foreign Orchids are Fertilized by Insects, and on the good effects of Intercrossing, by Charles Darwin, M.A., oll) Gs I BRORSAGee RE BOce coe eC CRCOCRER EC dC CUCOED) Mee Eur SNe Sane 370—388 Proceedings of the Zoological Society ........csssssscssaseecsaecens 388—397 Notice of a New Species of Cynopterus from Morty Island; the King Crab (Limulus Polyphemus) found on the English Coast; and Notice of a new Species of Bosh-Buck (Cephalophus bicolor) from Natal, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.; On the Larve of Hypo- derma, by F. Brauer; On the Natural and Artificial Production of Cork in the Cork-oak, by M. Casimir de Candolle...... 397 —400 NUMBER LX. XLII. On the Phenomena of Motion in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda, and especially on the so-called Granular Movement and the supposed Coalescence of the Pseudopodia. By Prof. Reicnrerr 401 XLII. Description of a singular Shell from Southern India, allied to Tanalia; with Remarks on a Travancore Batissa, and on the Himalayan Form Tricula. By W. H. BENSON, Esq. .........eceeesees 414 XLIV. On the Unicorn of the Ancients. By the Rev. W. Houcu- TONG Vite Aue Rl se teniiaciaisiennt ces sbuiavwincle cadet aeemeabesersorsececcewesciessess 416 “XLY. On the Animal and Float of Janthina. By ARTHUR ADAMS, Lill 9 CAGE Ga Gaoe: pecan an poe hb: God cacece sacnadeeacecaceanc Sead dtecnerseecseenee 417 _ XLVI. On the Animal and Affinities of Scalide, a genus of Mol- lusea from Japan. By ArTHuR ADAMS, F.L.S. &e. ........seeeseeeee 420 XLVII. Descriptions of newly discovered Spiders captured in Rio Janeiro. By JOHN BLACKWALL, FLAS. ....ccccsccscsscrcsscecssescccece 42] XLVIII. Note on the supposed “ Discovery of an extremely minute Vertebrate Lower Jaw in Mud dredged at St. Helena, by Dr. Wallich, Pees osbwe. spENce BATH, FLR.S. BUS, Se: vsdscs.ce.ce cs. sunen 440 XLIX. On the supposed Vertebrate Lower Jaw, dredged in Mud at et. Helena. By Dr. WALLICcH, F.L.S., F.G.S..” -.cc..cccecececnecene 44] L. Descriptions of a few West-African Birds. By G.R. Gray ... 443 LI. Onthe Aquiferous and Oviducal System in the Lamellibranchiate Mollusks. By Grorer RouuEston, Esq., M.D., F.L.S., Linacre Professor of Anatomy; and C. Ropertson, Esq., Demonstrator of Anatomy, Oxford .......... AS EERO OOCE SCORE COS DELCO COL TEEC AREER ECC RODIcaEnacr 446 vill CONTENTS. Page LII. On the Production of similar Gonozooids by Hydroid Polypes belonging to different Genera. By the Rev. Toomas Hincxs, B.A. (Pinte DN ics! 1Gr 21) ole cddccceevecscssceucdastet deers sevaemed at aesedtate 459 New Book :—Memoir of the Rev. John Stevens Henslow, M.A., by the: Rey, lueonard Jemyns, MA, | ccscesade~ tapes taasecge Scnemecionpeciers 461 Proceedings of the Zoological Society ...csscccsssesscsceeeectscees 464—472 Remarks in reference to the Gracula pectoralis of Mr. Wallace, and Note on the Otothrix Hodgsoni, by G. R. Gray; On the Gorilla, by Thomas J. Moore; Note on Pleuronectes sinensis, Lacép., by Dr. A. Giinther; Note on the Size of a Seal at the time of birth, by Drad. Ey Gray; FORUS! Genie tea densscntececmaacaccenare 472—475 PLATES IN VOL. X. PuaTte J. New Species of Entomostracous Crustacea. II. Lernzodiscus Porcellanee.—Sacculina purpurea.—Entoniscus Porcellanz. III. Conjugation in the Infusoria. IV. Carboniferous and Permian Fossils. V. Xanthoxylum Danielli. Vir f Fossil remains of Emys lutaria. VIII. Cyphagogus Mouhotii—Pterygoid teeth of Trachinus draco. IX. Gonozooids of Hydroid Polypes.—New British Zoophytes. THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. [THIRD SERIES.] Srlauadeeanereshsecre per litora spargite muscum, Naiades, et circdm vitreos considite fontes : Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores : Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum. At vos, o Nymphz Craterides, ite sub undas ; Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas Ferte, Dez pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”’ N. Parthenii Giannettasii Ecl,1. No. 55. JULY 1862. I.—Description of some new Species of Entomostracous Crustacea. By W. Barrp, M.D., F.L.S. [Plate I.] IN one or two late Numbers of the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ (Oct. 1859 and Sept. 1861), I have described several new species of exotic Entomostraca bred in this country from mud brought in a dry state from the neighbourhood of Jerusalem, which was placed in pure water and left to stand a certain time during the warm weather of spring and summer. The number of species amounted to six; and it was interesting to observe the great number of individuals of two or three of the species amongst these, that successively made their appearance as the warmth of the weather increased. Since then I have had another opportunity afforded me of observing the extraordinary power the ova of these animals possess in resisting the action of long-continued drought. Sulzer and several other authors assert that the adults themselves possess this power also, and maintain the opinion that, after being completely dried up for a length of time, they revive when placed in water. I am not prepared to deny this in toto, especially when they are in their native haunts, deeply immersed in the soft mud ; but the experiments of Straus and Jurine upon individuals exposed to artificial exsiccation go to prove the contrary of Sulzer’s statement. That the ova of Ann. & Mag. N. Hist, Ser. 3. Vol. x. 1 2 Dr. W. Baird on new Entomostracous Crustacea. many Entomostraca, however, possess this faculty in a great degree there can be no doubt. In the beginning of the spring of this year I had a small quantity of dry mud from South Africa supplied to me by Mr. Henry Woodward of the British Museum, This mud had been given to him by Mr. W.S. M. d’Urban, who received it from Dr. Rubidge as taken by him from the bed of a dried-up “vley” (or large pond) near Port Elizabeth, Cape Colony, in August 1861. In the month of January 1862 it was placed in some pure spring-water, care having been taken to see that it contained no animal or vegetable matter. In April, as the weather became somewhat warm, a number of ,small Entomostracous Crustacea made their appearance. These were all young animals, evidently bred from the ova contained in the mud. Numerous specimens of the carapaces of two or three species were found lodged in the mud; but no-adults-revived-from-their exsiccated state. One of these dried carapaces was that of a Phyllopodous Crus- tacean, a species of Hstheria, which ] have described in a paper read before the Zoological Society this year, and which I have named Estheria Rubidget. No young of this species have as yet made their appearance ; and only one species of the Branchio- poda has showed itself. This is a species of Daphnia, closely resembling in almost every particular the Daphnia longispina of Miller (=D. pulex, var..a of the ‘ British Entomostraca’). This Daphnia would appear to be, along with the D. Atkinsoni from Jerusalem (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. vol. iv. p. 281, pl. 5. fig. 2) and D. Newporti from India (Proe. Zool. Soc. 1860, p.446), the representative in those countries of our common European Daphnia pulex. Two species of Lophyropodous Crustaceans have shown themselves also. One of these, not quite satisfac- torily made out, is a species of Cypris somewhat resembling the English species C.itristriata. The other, which has arrived at a state of maturity, is a very distinct species; and of this I sub- join a figure and description. . Legion LOPHYROPODA. Order OSTRACODA. Family Cypridide. Genus Canpona. Candona d’ Urbani, Baird. PI. I. figs. 1, la, 6. Carapace elongately oval, flattened at both extremities, nar- rower posteriorly than anteriorly. The central portion of the carapace is much swollen, and has a slight indentation at about one-third from the anterior extremity, indicated by a slightly raised knob or protuberance on the side near the dorsal margin. Externally the surface of the carapace is hispid with short strong Dr. W. Baird on new Entomostracous Crustacea. 3 setee, and variously marked with dark-green streaks, and, when examined by the lens, appears entirely covered with punctations. The ventral margin is slightly concave or sinuated in the centre, while the dorsal margin is nearly straight for half its length, then slopes down at each extremity, the anterior of which is rounded, and the posterior somewhat acuminate. The valves of the carapace unite closely in the centre of the ventral margin, but are slightly gaping at both extremities. Internally the centre of the valve is of a dull colour, while the two extremities are shining and smooth, and there is a slight duplicature of the shell at the edge. The spot marked externally by the slight protuberance near the anterior margin is internally represented by a depression. The lucid spots on the carapace are small and indistinct. Length 3 lines ; breadth 14 line. Hab. Freshwater ponds, Cape Colony. > This is about the largest species belonging to the family Cypridide that I have yet seen. A number of dead valves were found in the mud, but only two or three living specimens made their appearance. One, which must have been bred from a dried ovum, made its appearance at the end of April. At first small, it gradually grew to what I suppose, from the size of the dead specimens in the mud, to be its full growth, about the middle of May. It is the specimen figured. Its habits were rather peculiar. It generally kept close to the bottom of the vessel in which it was preserved, either walking upon the mud or, when the weather was cold, digging under the surface or creeping under the little lumps of earth that remained unincorporated. When it rose to the surface of the water, it was by walking up along the side of the vessel, descending afterwards, as it were, by its own gravitation. A few other species of Ostracodous Entomostraca from other habitats have occurred to me, figures and descriptions of which I here subjoin. 1. Cypris unispinosa, Baird. Plate I. figs. 2, 2 a, d. Carapace elongately oval, a little narrower anteriorly than posteriorly. The carapace is moderately tumid, the most pro- minent portion being near the anterior extremity. Ventral margin nearly straight, slightly sinuated or concave ; the dorsal margin is nearly straight for about half its length, then slopes down to each extremity. Externally the carapace appears to be smooth, until examined by a tolerably high power, when it is seen to be minutely punctate, and it is marked by several dark- ereen streaks and lines. The right valve is peculiarly marked by being at its posterior extremity prolonged into ie sharp 4 Dr. W. Baird on new Entomostracous Crustacea. spine, while the left valve is rounded and free from any such prolongation. The valves are nearly equal in breadth, and do uot overlap each other at their ventral margin, but appear to fit into a slight groove, which, when viewed from the interior, may be seen to run all round the ventral margin and the edges of both extremities. The sete on the pediform antennee are five i in number, long, and finely plumose. Length 2 lines; breadth 1 line. _ Hab. Sandwich Islands; W. Newcomb, Esq. Jamaica; HE. Chitty, Esq. 2. Cypris Texasiensis, Baird. PI. I. figs. 3, 3a. Carapace of an ovoid shape, narrowed and somewhat flattened anteriorly, considerably swollen and tumid posteriorly, and of a dull uniform white colour, with the exception of the margin of the anterior extremity, which is of a dark hue. Ventral margin nearly straight, or only slightly sinuated, but distinctly marked with a notch near the anterior extremity, somewhat resembling that of a Cypridina. Dorsal margin rounded, as well as both extremities. The two valves fit closely to each other. The sur- face of the carapace is quite smooth and shining or only slightly punctate, the punctations being only visible when under a high power. Lucid spots placed near the middle of the valve. Length 13 line; breadth at broadest part 1 line. Hab. Texas; Mr. Cuming. As only the empty carapace remains, I was unable to distin- guish whether this species belongs truly to the genus Cypris or Candona. 3. Cypris Chittyensis, Baird. PI. I. figs. 4, 4a, d. Carapace elongately elliptical, narrow, and of a uniform green colour, marked here and there with streaks of a darker green hue. The ventral margin is sinuated in the centre ; the dorsal margin and the two extremities, which are both of equal size, are rounded. External surface of carapace quite smooth and shining. The edges of the valves, especially internally, are strongly sulcated, and at either extremity there is, on the inside of the shell, a kind of shelf which is also strongly striated. The posterior shelf appears the larger of the two. Pediform antenne each furnished with a bundle of-about four or five setze, which are of exactly the same length as the antenna, but are not plumose. The caudal filaments are of a peculiar form ; ; they are of mo- derate length, flattened, and differing from each other in some respects. One of them is strongly ‘serrated or toothed on its outer edge, while the other (which is somewhat narrower) is simple, or is without the strong teeth or serrations which cha- Dr. W. Baird on new Entomostracous Crustacea. - 5 racterize the first described. Each of them give out, as usual, two short appendages or fingers at its extremity, both of which are strongly serrated. Length 1 line; breadth } line. ; Hab. Yallah’s Hill, Jamaica; Ti. Chitty, Esq. 4. Cypris Verreauxii, Baird. Plate I. figs. 5, 5 a, Carapace oval, elliptic, of a green colour, with darker patches and streaks of the same hue. Ventral margin slightly sinuated about the middle of its length; dorsal margin rounded. Extre- mities nearly equal in size, and rounded. Surface of valves smooth and shining. Internally the valves are furnished with a shelf at each extremity, which, as well as the edgés of the valves themselves, are simply striated. The setz of the pediform antenne are short, and not plumose. Caudal filaments alike, both finely serrated on the edges, and sending off two short appendages, which are rounded and sharp-pointed, and very finely serrated. This species is considerably like the preceding, but is broader and shorter; the edges of the shelf internally are merely striated, while those of Chittyensis are strongly sulcate. The setee of the pediform antenne and the caudal filaments differ also considerably. Length ? line; breadth nearly } line. Hab. Chili; M. Verreaux. 5. Cypris Yallahensis, Baird. PI. I. figs. 6-6, Carapace rotundately ovoid, much swollen, narrower ante- riorly, of a green colour. Ventral margin slightly sinuate at about the middle of its length. Dorsal margin rounded ; greatest height at about its middle. LHxtremities rounded, Externally the surface of the carapace is hispid and strongly punctate. Length about ¢ line; breadth about the same. Hab, Yallah’s Hill, Jamaica; E. Chitty, Esq. EXPLANATION OF PLATE I, Fig. 1. Candona d’Urbani, on its side, magnified 8 diameters: 1a, the same, seen from underneath, magnified 8 diameters, with natural size annexed; 1 @, internal view, magnified 8 diameters. Fig. 2. Cypris unispinosa, on its side, magnified 8 diameters; 2a, the same, seen from underneath, magnified 8 diameters, with natural size annexed; 20, internal view, magnified 8 diameters. Fig. 3. Cypris Texasiensis, on its side, magnified 8 diameters, with natural size annexed; 3a, the same, seen from underneath, magnified 8 diameters. Fig. 4. Cypris Chittyensis, on its side, magnified 20 diameters ; 4 a, the same, seen from underneath, magnified 20 diameters, with natural size annexed; 4, internal view, magnified 20 diameters. & M,F. Miller on the Systematic Position of the Charybdeide. Fig. 5. Cypris Verreauxii, on its side, magnified 20 diameters; 5 a, the same, seen from underneath, magnified 20 diameters. Fig. 6. Cypris Yallahensis, on its side, magnified 40 diameters ; 6 a, the same, seen from underneath, magnified 40 diameters, with natural size annexed, IIl.—On the Systematic. Position of the Charybdeidee. By Fritz MULLER*. EscHscHoutz’s section of the Discophore phanerocarpe formed a well-defined group of closely allied animals, united by a great number of common characters :—the disk a shallow and smooth segment of a sphere, but capable of being more strongly arched during natation, with a notched margin, in the notches of which, always to the number of eight, are the marginal corpuscles with crystals insoluble in acids; round the mouth four arms, and alternating with these, in peculiar pits, the sexual organs, form- ing bowed bands folded lke frills; the stomachal filaments m the same place, and so forth. The mouth, indeed, was sometimes freely open (Meduside) and sometimes closed, and, instead of it, numerous orifices on the arms (Rhizostomide) ; but this pecu- liarity of the Riizostomide, important as it certainly is for their mode of obtaining nourishment, did not disturb the morpho- logical unity of the group, as it is derived without difficulty from the ordinary form of mouth+. Some subsequently diseovered somewhat anomalous forms of Meduside likewise did not pre- judice the unity of the general picture, which they only served to completet. * Translated from Wiegmann’s ‘Archiv,’ 1861, by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S, + Gegenbaur (Zeitschr. fiir wiss. Zool. viii. p. 210, note) declares the polystomism of the Rhizostomide to be a paradox not reconcilable with the general plan of the Meduse, and even doubts the fact. The fact is easily ascertained, and has lately been repeatedly proved, even by myself. Its explanation also seems to me to be pretty easy. A temporary poly- stomism, if it may be so called, may be easily seen in Hydroid Meduse, where the margins of a much-folded four-lobed oral fringe lie upon each other here and there.. Thus also the polystomism of the Rhizostomide will result from the growing together of the membranous laminz which sur- round the arms of the Phanerocarpe. When the orifices of the arms have the form of long slits, often continued into strap-like tentacles, as in a Cephea of the South-Brazilian coast, scarcely any doubt can remain as to this mode of production. It seems more difficult to explain the perfora- tion of the peduncle of the arms, or its “‘ origin with four roots,” as occurs in the same Cephea, and, according to Forskal, in C. octostyla. { Such as Nausithoé, Koll., with its eight extremely simple sexual glands, and Trichoplea, nu. g., with marginal corpuscles in deep niches on the under surface, two inches from the undivided margin of the disk, which measures two spans in diameter. Amongst the older, less accurately-known species, Medusa persea, Forsk. (Rhizostoma, Eschsch.), is certainly to be placed with the “ Acraspeda,” notwithstanding its undivided margin and large velum. M. F. Miller on the Systematic Position of the Charybdeide. 7 ’ It is otherwise, however, with the family of the Charybdeide, which Gegenbaur arranged with his Acraspeda, the Phanero- carpe of Eschscholtz. Charybdea marsupialis, Péron, and still more Zamoya haplonema and T. quadrumana, described by me, are opposed most decidedly in almost all the essential features of their structure to the above general picture: a bell with deeply furrowed sides and a broad velum, scarcely capable of any alteration of form; the marginal corpuscles four in number, distant from the margin, im deep niches of the outer surface of the bell; along oral funnel, after the fashion of Thaumantias ; sexual organs in the form of broad membranous lamine in the wide:lateral pouches of the stomach, and therefore remote from the stomachal: filaments; tentacles upon peculiar clavate or hand-like processes ; a distinctly marked nervous system, &c. 2 In its external form (and this only is known) the Charybdea periphylla, Péron, is almost still more strikingly in contrast to. the ordmary Medusa ; it’ is, as it were, a Tamoya quadrumana with hand-like appendages increased to sixteen in number, and deprived of their tentacles. ae It appears, therefore, scarcely possible to imagine transition-. forms between the Charybdeide, on the one side, and the Medu- side and Rhizostomide, on the other, or even to derive the two. groups from a common fundamental form containing essentially anything more than the general features of all Hydromeduse. The intuitively clear picture of Eschscholtz’s Phanerocarpe would fade into a shadow by the reception of the Charybdeide, and at any rate their union would be perfectly unnatural. ; And yet, if we will retain the usual bipartition of the Disco-, phorous Acalephs, in which the systems of Forbes, Liitken, and, Gegenbaur .have altered nothing but the names*, and which even recurs (in respect of the Medusoid forms) when the Disco-: phore, and rightly, are no longer recognized as. a systematic, unity, as in the Acalephe and Hydroida of RK. Leuckart, the Charybdeide can only find a place among the higher Medusa, with which they have in common at least the stomachal filaments and the insoluble contents of the marginal corpuscles. It can- not be disputed that they are still further removed from the Medusoid brood of the Hydroida. On a former occasion, in describing the Tamoye, I already thought of a preferable tripartition of the Discophore, and anti- * Not the foundation, or principle of division, as Gegenbaur will have it. Eschscholtz by no means regards the “ germ-cushions ” as either the sole or most important character of the Phanerocarpz : he placed, like Gegen- baur, the emargination of the margin in the first rank, and was very well acquainted with “ the soft, membranous, annular lobe on the margin of the disk,” as the common character of his Cryptocarpz. wi a 8 M.F, Miller on the Systematic Position of the Charybdeide. cipated that this would derive support from the developmental history. Still earlier, although information of the fact did not penetrate to the place of my exile until subsequently, R. Leuckart, following the same idea, had formed the section of Ceratostera, but soon gave it up again; for his supposition has, as is well known, proved to be quite destitute of foundation. Krohn saw Pelagia noctiluca reproduce without change of brood, whilst Busch traced the brood of Chrysaora, which is scarcely separable generically from Pelagia, up to the polype-form. Among the Hydroida, it has been shown by Gegenbaur that Trachynema ciliatum, and by myself that Geryonia (Liriope) catharinensis, are probably developed directly from the egg; whilst, on the contrary, the supposition of the direct evolution of the #ginida, founded solely upon the ciliary coat of the young of Aginopsis, has lost its support by the discovery of ciliated brood in the stomach of Cunina Kollikert. Nevertheless, my formerly imagined grouping of the Disco- phore has become more and more plausible with every new in- vestigation. It appears to me that in this case, as in so many others, the unfettered intuition of the older observers has hit the right course in uniting with Charybdea marsupialis and peri- phylla the Charybdea bitentaculata, which is now usually placed, under the name of ginopsis mediterranea, J. Miull., or 4. bi- tentaculata, Koll.*, in the family ginide, at the end of the Cryptocarpe. Not that I would support the union of Cha- rybdea and Afginopsis in the same genus, or even, after the ex- ample of Liitken, in the same family ; but I am of opinion that the families Charybdeide and Aiginide, Gybr., are to be united to form a group of the Hydromeduse equivalent to the Siphono- phora, Hydroida, and Acalephe (in Leuckart’s sense). To group together the most highly organized of all known Hydromeduse, and perhaps of all Coelenterata, the Tamoya quadrumana, and the ginide, which apparently represent the lowest step in the series of Hydromeduse, and some of which, such as Eurystoma, Koll., only digest by the cavity of the lower surface, which is partially closed by the velum +, certainly long appeared to me to be rather a doubtful course. Since I have been able to examine care- fully a species extremely similar to this Zurystoma both in form * The difference of colouring can hardly be accepted as a specific di- stinction in a group of animals in which, as in the Acalephze (Rhizostoma, Chrysaora, &c.) and Hydroida (Corymorpha), the greatest variability of coloration within the species may almost be regarded as the rule. T I did not think I might doubt this representation of Kélliker’s (which is probably erroneous) upon Gegenbaur’s authority alone, as in other Me- duse I had not always found his statements perfectly well founded,—still Las on account of any d-priori notions respecting “a general plan of the eduse. M. F. Miiller on the Systematic Position of the Charybdeide. 9 and in the development of the brood budding in the stomach, and since I have again obtained Eschscholtz’s admirable ‘ System der Akalephen,’ this hesitation has disappeared ; and I now regard my view as sufficiently well founded to venture to submit it to the judgment of zoologists. The incompatibility of the Charybdeide with the Acalephe of Leuckart has already been spoken of. Cunina, A¢ginopsis, and their allies stand in a precisely similar position towards the other Cryptocarpz or Hydroid Medusz. The disk of the latter, although very variable in form, is still always entire at the mar- gin, and either smooth, as in the other Acalephs, or furnished with slightly projecting ridges running from the middle of the back; they have always radiating vessels and an annular canal, and the former, except when very numerous, in a fixed number; the marginal vesicles, when present, are always roundish and sessile ; the marginal filaments, although very variable in struc- ture, always occupy the immediate vicinity of the annular vessel. Lastly, in the structure of the sexual organs, the Hydroid Medusee approach the Acalephze (Leuckt.) or Phanerocarpe ; for, although their forms are exceedingly numerous, the extremes are united by a tolerably close series of intermediate forms (from the astomatous sexual clubs of the Medusz of Corymorpha to the densely appressed ramifications along the radiating vessels of Olindias*), they still always occupy the external wall of the gastrovascular system, and empty their products externally. On the other hand, the disk of Cunina and its allies is frequently, if not always, notched at the margin+, and, as in the Charybdeide, * Olindias, nov. gen. Habitus of Thaumantias mediterranea, Ggh. ; four radiating vessels, and numerous (more than 100) retrograde vessels ; at the margin extremely extensible filaments and slightly moveable tenta- cles, both hollow and of indefinite number ; at the base of the tentacles are the marginal vesicles in pairs; the sexual organs are arborescently ramified along the radiating vessels. It is probable that the filaments (Fangfiden) on the radiating vessels of Melicertum are nothing but sexual organs, and this the rather, as even in the structure of the marginal filaments Olindias approaches most closely to Melicertum. As a transitional structure from the stomachal to the peripheral sexual organs, I may cite, not to refer to undescribed forms, Lizzia Kollikeri, in which, according to Gegenbaur’s observation, confirmed by me on a nearly allied species, the sexual gland lying on the stomach is traversed by a branch of the radiating vessel. t+ Gegenbaur is of opinion that the possession of a velum presupposes an entire margin of the body, and for this reason, apparently, he denies, in opposition to Eschscholtz and Kolliker and in contradiction to himself, the notching of the margin in the 4/ginide; for in Agineta flavescens he shows the gelatinous substance continuing itself in considerable thickness upon the stomachal sacs; in the intervals, therefore, there are gaps or notches of the gelatinous substance, z.e. “the body,” over which only membrane is stretched; as in the ginide, which are destitute of an annular vessel, only the cessation of the gelatinous substance can indicate 10 M. F. Miller on the Systematic Position of the Charybdeide. traversed by deeper or shallower furrows, extending’a greater or less distance upon the dorsal surface; the stomach has broad lateral sacs, often in variable number, no radiating vessel or an- aular canal; the marginal vesicles are usually pedunculate ; the tentacles, never exceeding the number of the stomachal sacs, are. always situated on the back, often springing very far from the margin; they are, moreover, ‘characterized : sometimes by a pecu- liar rigidity,:and sometimes by “a mobility not observed im gther Medusee”’ (Eschscholtz*). The sexual materials of Cunina are formed:im the interior of the lateral sacs, and, indeed, in: their lateral angles, from which their place of formation extends’ in the form of a horse-shoe from one sac to another. From all this, the alliance of Cunina, Afginopsis, &e. with the Hydroida is equally loose and forced, and as little effected by. any transitions as that of the Charybdeide with the Acalephe.. If, therefore, the separation of these two families from their pre- sent alliances is not subject to any serious doubt, neither does any such appear to present itself against their union. It is true that a wide gap exists between Cunina and Tamoya, but not wider than between the Medusoid of Corymorpha, without ten- tacles, eyes, or mouth, and Olindias, or between Nausithoé and. Cephea—a gap like that between the young brood and the ma- ture animal, over which fancy readily finds a gradual passage by intermediate steps, and not a wall of separation set up by incom-. patible characters. From the shallow furrows in the flat, slightly notched disks, often (according to Gegenbaur) of a cartilaginous hardness, of many Cunine,. the intermediate form of gina citrea leads to Charybdea marsupialis, and to the complex bells of the Tamoye, whilst, even in both the extreme genera, the combination of a velum with a disk not entire at the margins, observed neither in Hydroida nor in Acalephie, occurs as a com- mon character. From the flatly stretched stomachal membrane the boundary between body and velum. As in the 4/ginide the muscular membrane of the lower surface is continued over a notched margin, the marginal membrane may, in like manner, be wanting in disks with entire margins, even in Hydroid Medusz; at least, 1 am unable to detect any trace of it in a small Campanularia-bud, Tintinnabulum resupinatum, u.s., which always swims with the disk reversed. _* This is the case in gina sulfurea, as it is called in Eschsch. System p- 9, or Aig. citrea, at p. 113. The second Eschscholtzian species, Agina rosea, is probably to be separated from this, and referred to Cunina, as, according to Eschscholtz’s figure (tab. x. fig. 3 a), it appears more natural to ascribe to the stomach six lateral sacs excavated opposite to the origin of the tentacles, than twelve such organs. If, with Gegenbaur, we charac- terize the Avginide by “rigid tentacles,” the choice of the name after that of a species distinguished from all other Medusz by the exact opposite caunot be described as particularly happy. i M, F: Miiller on thé Systematic Position of the Charybdeide.. 11 of Cunina, with its simple proteiform mouth, closely repeated in: Atgineta, Polyxenia, and Aiginopsis bitentaculata, the four arms, on the mouth of Aiginopsis Laurentii, Brdt., lead to the struc- ture of the stomach in Charybdea and Tamoya. In the same way the form of the sexual organs of Tamoya may be deduced without constraint from those of Cunina; but neither the one nor the other can be referred to the fundamental form’ deve- loped in Hydroida and Acalephe. If Tamoya quadrumana has an entire series of perfectly new parts not even indicated in Cu- nina, such as a well-developed nervous system, there is nothing remarkable in this; some of them, such as the eight finger-like processes in the base of the bell and the Po: glands, are totally wanting even in 7. haplonema. The formation of the marginal eorgunelea 1S certencily essen- tially different ; but we still know nothing about their develop- ment in Char, ybdea and Tamoya, or of their structure in the intermediate forms Aigina citrea and Aiginopsis Laurentii; and, again, their difference is not more considerable than between the eye-spots and marginal vesicles of the Hydroida, The formation of the tentacles also is perfectly anomalous, but nevertheless by their dorsal origin they contrast equally with the marginal filaments of the Hydroida and Acalephe. The tentacles of Cunina are rigid, those of Tamoya contractile ; but those of the. young brood of Cunina are also contractile. The tentacles of Cunzna are solid, those of Tamoya hollow ; but hol- low and solid tentacles are exhibited by otherwise very nearly allied genera, such as the various Campanularia-buds* ; nay, both forms occur simultaneously or successively in the same animal (Liriope). In this, therefore, no ground for the union of our two families can be sought ; but that which especially speaks in favour of it is that at present it is not possible to draw a marked boundary-line between the two, and to refer the median forms . * For the Campanularia-buds with solid and but slightly moveable tentacles, exactly like those of Campanularia itself, I propose to retain Dalyell’s name Tintinnabulum ; it appears that they are always born with a greater number of tentacles. Here belongs also Hucope polystyla, Ggb. What Gegenbaur describes and figures in this species as roundish inflations of the annular vessel, directed into the substance of the disk, may be the thickened roots of the tentacles, judging from the nearly allied Tintinna- bulum resupinatum, n.sp. The Campanularia-buds with hollow filaments dilated at the base and very contractile, of which, when set free, they have only four and the first traces of four more (Hucope, Ggb., excl. E. poly- styla), have, in my opinion, a title to the name of Thaumantias; for it appears to me scarcely doubtful that it is to these, and not to T. mediter- ranea, Ggb., that the two Eschscholtzian species of Thawmantias belong ; and for them, therefore, in a division of the genus, the old name should be retained, : 12 M. F. Miller on the Systematic Position of the Charybdeide. to one or the other. Amongst these are A’gina citrea, which approaches the higher forms in the four arms and the great mobility of the tentacles, and ginopsis Laurentii, which allies itself to them by the four arms at the mouth. So also Charybdea periphylla, Péron, which resembles Tamoya quadrumana in the form of the marginal appendages, but departs from the other Charybdeide in the multiplicity of its tentacles. I would consequently arrange the Charybdeide in the follow- ing manner in the system of the Hydromedusz :— HYDROMEDUSZ. 1, SrpHonorHora, including the free sexual animals (Chryso- mitra). 2. Hyprorpa. a. Tubularine, together with the Hydroid Meduse without organs of sense or with eye-spots. b. Sertularine, with the Hydroid Medusze with marginal vesi- cles*. In respect of the development, there are in this group— a. Polypes without free sexual animals. (3. Polypes with free sexual animals. y. Free sexual animals without polypes (Trachynema, Liriope). 3. AcaALerpHa, R. Leuckt. (Discophore phanerocarpe, Esch.). a. Monostomatous (Meduside, Esch.). b. Polystomatous (Rhizostomide, Esch.). 4, Heino (Agine, Liitk.). a. Lower: Cunina (with Agina rosea, Esch.), Aigineta, Po- lyxenia, Aiginopsis bitentaculata. b. Higher: Charybdeide. A:ginopsis Laurentii?, Aigina (ci= trea), Charybdea (marsupialis), Tamoya, Periphyila (C, periphylla, Pér.). * Gegenbaur was the first, as far as I know, who pointed out the im- portance of the ocelli and marginal vesicles in the Hydroid Medusz, and laid some stress upon the difference of the marginal filaments ; and, indeed, the families of “‘ Craspedota” established by him, from being more natural and depending less upon the exclusive application of one character, con- trast very advantageously with those of Forbes, and even of Liitken, and may serve aS a more convenient starting-point for further systematic at- tempts. To future workers I would especially recommend a careful con- sideration of the marginal filaments, by which, apparently, amongst other things, the Geryonide and Thaumantiade of Gegenbaur might be more sharply defined. Mr. R. Walker on a Species of Regalecus. 13 III.—On the Occurrence of a Species of Regalecus among the Rocks at St. Andrews; with a few Notes on its Anatomy. By Rosrerr Waker, Assistant-Curator of the St. Andrews Museum. In the month of April last, my attention was called by Mr. J. Howie to a fish cast ashore among the west rocks at St. Andrews. This fish proved, after examination, to be a species of Regalecus, very likely Banksii ; but, as it was rather too imperfect for exact specific identification, I propose giving the following description, which may assist zoologists in arriving at that determination :— The fish was perfectly fresh, but much mutilated. The head was entirely destroyed, and a considerable portion of the posterior end of the body was wanting: as it was, it measured from what appeared to be the coracoid (7. e. immediately behind the gills) to the broken end 7 feet 2 inches; 9 inches deep at the coracoid ; 12 inches a little before the anus; and 8} at the broken end. The body was very much compressed, and was of a sword-blade- like shape, the greatest thickness being somewhat below the middle of the depth, where it was 24 inches thick. From this it gradually tapered away to the dorsal and ventral margins, the dorsal edge being considerably the thinnest of the two, scarcely amounting to }inch. There was a dorsal fin extending the whole length, and consisting of 167 rays, which were much broken, as was also their connecting membrane. The longest of these rays measured 23 inches in length. There was no anal fin. On the right side the pectoral and ventral fins were lost. On the left side the pectoral consisted of eleven broken rays, the longest about 1 inch in length; and the ventral, of a spine about # inch in length, and } inch in thickness. The skin was completely covered by what appeared to be bony tuber- cles, the largest of which were arranged in four pretty distinct longitudinal belts, which, from their size, gave to the sur- face of the body a somewhat ridged-like appearance. These belts or ridges varied from 12 to ? inch in breadth, and the spaces between them were occupied by smaller tubercles. None of these tubercles were regularly arranged, but seemed to be placed without any regard to individual connexion or relation to each other. Between some parts of the tubercles there was a beautiful silvery-looking lustre, which was very easily taken off, adhering to the fingers or to any object that came in contact with it. There were a few faint dark streaks on the anterior part of the body, proceeding from the dorsal margin and extend- ing obliquely downwards and backwards, but not appearing to cross the lateral line. The lateral line at the coracoid was about one-third from the dorsal edge ; thence it descended obliquely 14 Mr. R. Walker on the Anatomy of Regalecus. till about. halfway between it.and.the anus. It-then proceeded pretty straight, but still converging towards the ventral edge as it extended outwards. to the posterior end; at the anus it was 21 inches from the margin. The anus was 4 feet 6 inches from the coracoid. The viscera were not particularly examined ; this is the-less to be regretted, as the viscera of Regalecus have been already clearly described by Messrs. Haneock and Embleton*. But, on cutting open the fish, the czcal prolongation of the sto- inach was observed to pass behind the anus for the whole length of the portion preserved, and had evidently extended a consideré able way beyond. This specimen of Régilenis like the others that have tbe found on the British shores, was very tender, and could have been easily broken to pieces ; so niuch so that, on attempting to draw it out of the pool of water in which it lay, with a common crab-hook, which is quite thick and blunt at the point, the hook went right through it. In fact, the use of the hook had to be dispensed with, in order to preserve entire as much as possible of the fish. The internal structure was not further examined at this time. The following description was drawn up from a piece of the fish commencing about 6 inches behind the vent, and extending to 20 inches in front of it, and after it had lain eight months in spirits. The vertebral saliavan was enclosed by a strong fibrous cheat or membrane, two branches of which proceeded from the upper side of es column to form the neural canal; they were at first about {45 inch apart, approximating as they ‘ascended, till they finally coalesced about 4 inch above the vertebral column. From this point a single membrane passed vertically up the middle of the body, and enveloped the lower ends of the interneural spines. From this central membrane there were three septa or bands sent outwards on each side, till they became confluent with the corium or inner skin. From the middle of each side of the vertebral column there was another of these aponeurotic septa sent outwards till they jomed the skin, and formed a strong connecting-band between it and the vertebral column. The hemal canal was formed by two membranes joedemind from the lower side of the vertebral column, and passing down-. wards about # inch, when they coalesced. There was a slight swelling of the membrane at the coalescence, from which a band or septum was sent out on each side to join the skin, and an- other passed vertically downwards for a short distance, when it enlarged considerably immediately above the abdominal cavity. Pron. this enlargement two bands were sent outwards, one on * Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. iv. p. 7 et seq. Mr. R. Walker on the Anatomy of Regalecus. TS ‘each side, to join.the skin; other two proceeded downwards, -and formed the lining of the abdommal cavity, at the lower edge of which they again coalesced; enlarged, ‘and extended down to the ventral margin. The septa or bands connecting the lining membrane of the abdominal: cavity and the corium were very numerous, from a little below its commencement down to the ventral edge of the fish. The vertebral column appeared to be only a stage in advance of the primitive notochord, and presented no’appearance exter- nally of being segmented, but looked like a continuous flexible column, without any. prominence or depression to indicate where the segments were. The only inequality visible was a slight depression on the sides between the neural and hemal arches. ‘The column had a somewhat hexagonal appearance externally, which was partly caused by its enveloping-membrane thickening along the middle of each side, where it proceeded outwards. ‘When the column was bent from side to side, the joints were apparent ; and when cut open, there was a slight depression ob- served at the joints, which was caused by the cartilage of each segment or vertebra not quite meeting that of the next. The centra of the vertebrae were composed of what to the un- aided eye appeared to be simple cartilage, and were entirely de- void of ossification ; they measured on an average about 13 inch in length, and had the appearance of gradually shortening, the centra of the posterior end being slightly shorter than those of the anterior. Each centrum was hollowed out internally at both ends into a conical or hourglass-shaped cavity. The apices of the cavities were separated from each — in the middle of the centra by a layer of cartilage about 4; ich in thickness, through which there was a small ee. virtually connect- ing them together. The vertebral centra were } inch in dia meter, their ‘contiguous cup-margins being very “thin, scarcely amounting to ;4 inch. The cavities of the centra of the verte- bral column were round internally, and were filled with a gela- tinous-looking substance of sufficient consistency to retain its conical shape at both ends after beg removed. This substance had been the base of the primitive embryonic chorda dorsalis, around which the cartilage had afterwards been developed. In its latter condition it consisted of alternate swellings and contractions corresponding to the imternal shape of the column ; in this form it had extended, in all probability, the whole length of the body. The neurapophyses consisted of narrow pieces of cartilaginous-looking laminz developed in the walls of the mem- brane which formed the neural canal. At their lower ends they were firmly anchylosed to the middle of the centrum of each of the vertebre; at their upper ends they coalesced at the same 16 Mr. R. Walker on the Anatomy of Regalecus. point as the membrane, and in this way they formed a series of rudimentary neural arches. The neural spines were about 34 inches long, and consisted, as well as the arches, of what appeared to be the hardest cartilage in the fish; they were con- fluent and perhaps connate with the neurapophyses, from which they extended up to a little beyond the commencement of the interneural spines. These neural spines were slender, flexible, and not easily recognized in the central membranous partition already referred to, in the walls of which they were developed, and remained imbedded. The interneural spines commenced about 44 inches below the dorsal margin. They were at first small, thread-like, and quite hid in the envelopmg membrane, but gradually enlarged as they approached the dorsal margin, where they were about 3 inch across. ‘These spines began to expand on both sides, before and behind, about half an inch from their upper extremities. This expansion went on increasing till each spine was half an inch in breadth, when the enlarged or projecting portion joined that of the spine next to it, before and behind, and thus formed a continuous cartilaginous and strengthening ridge extending along the dorsal margin. The lateral projections of the interneural spines did not extend quite to the upper edge, but sloped away a little from the middle of the upper ends of the spines downwards on both sides, which formed a series of notches extending along the upper edge; each notch corresponded to, and was placed immediately above, the junction of each pair of spines. In these notches or cavities oval-shaped pieces of cartilage were placed, and held by liga- ments, which allowed them a free motion principally from side to side ; to these cartilages the bifurcated fin-rays were attached. There was a small disk-like addition on each side of the lower ends of these double rays, which was in contact with, and firmly held by ligaments to, the lateral surfaces of the oviform carti- lages. The dorsal fin-rays were bifurcated for a considerable part of their length ; it is very likely that they were confluent at the points, but of this I am not certain, as none of them were entire. For upwards of two inches of their length, however, they appeared to have had only a membranous connexion. he parapophyses existed as cartilaginous lamine developed in the membranous walls of the hemal canal, anchylosed at their upper ends to the middle of the lower sides of the vertebral centra, and coalescing at the lower ends about three-eighths of an inch below the vertebral column ; in this way they formed a series of contracted hzemal arches, which contained the aorta and the vena cava. ‘There were thread-like hemal spines con- fluent with and proceeding downwards from the parapophyses, till they were finally lost in the walls of the membrane a little above Mr. J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. 17 the abdominal cavity. From what was observed, it appears that these spines grew longer as the cecal cavity grew less, towards the distal end of the fish. The Regalecus appears to be rather a rare fish everywhere, its first recorded occurrence in Britain being in the ‘ Annual Register’ of 1759. Since that time some eleven or twelve spe- cimens have been observed, all on the north-east coast. Its first recorded occurrence in Scotland was of a specimen stranded at the village of Crovie, in Banffshire, in 1844. Another was stranded in the Bay of Cromarty in 1852. The St. Andrews fish, in 1861, makes the third time it has been noticed on the Scottish coast. IV.— Descriptions of new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. By Josrru 8. Baty. Genus Lema, Fab. Lema frontalis. L. anguste oblonga, subcylindrica, nitida, testacea, pectore antice abdomineque piceis ; capite (fronte excepto) nigro ; antennis sub- filiformibus, articulo ultimo basi fulvo-albo; thorace transverso, subcylindrico, lateribus medio modice constrictis, dorso ante basin transversim sulcato, hie illic fortiter punctato, medio utrinque unifoveolato ; elytris viridi-cyaneis, basi vix elevatis, infra basin transversim depressis, sat profunde striato-punctatis, interspatiis leevibus, remote punctatis, ad apicem subelevatis ; tibiis extrorsum tarsisque fuscis. Long. 2-23 lin. Hab. Lizard Islands, Northern Australia. Narrowly oblong, subcylindrical, nitidous, testaceous ; ante- rior part of breast and the abdomen piceous; elytra cyaneous ; apical half of tibia, together with the tarsi, nigro-piceous. Head black, with the exception of a large oblong rufous patch on the forehead ; face triangular, its lower portion slightly produced ; epistome separated from the face by a deep groove, from the apex of which an oblique sulcation runs upwards on either side along the edge of the orbits ; upper portion of face coarsely punc- tured, bilobed ; antennz moderately robust, subfiliform, basal half of apical joint obscure white. Thorax transverse, sides mode- rately constricted in the middle, the upper surface deeply im- pressed in front of the base with a transverse sulcation, which extends at either end into the lateral constriction, its middle im- pressed with a single deep fovea; surface of disk coarsely punc- tured on the sides in front and down the middle, the latter part impressed on either side by a large deep fovea. Scutellum Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 18 Mr.J.8. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. longitudinally grooved, its apex obtuse. Elytra much broader than the thorax, oblong, parallel in front, their apex rounded ; upper surface transversely depressed below the basilar space, the latter not elevated ; each elytron furnished with nine rows of deep coarse punctures, which become, however, finer and less deeply im- pressed towards the apex; interspaces nearly plane in front, in- distinctly wrinkled transversely below the basilar space, thickened. and subcostate towards the apex of the elytron. Legs pale tes- taceous ; tarsi, apical half of four anterior tibiz, together with the extreme apex of the hinder pair, nigro-fuscous; hinder thighs slightly thickened. Lema Bowringit. L. elongata, subcylindrica, nitida, subtus nigro-cyanea, argenteo pubescens ; capite thoraceque rufo-testaceis, illo pone oculos valde constricto; oculis antennisque subfusiformibus nigris, harum arti- culis ultimis duobus sordide albis, hoc cylindrico lateribus vix pone medium valde constrictis, ante basin tranversim sulcato, sub lente remote punctato; scutello nigro; elytris lete czeruleis, parallelis, basi obsolete elevatis, punctato-striatis, interspatiis antice planis, disco exteriore indistincte transversim corrugatis, ad apicem subcostatis. Var. A. capite thoraceque leete czeruleis, vertice obscure rufo. Long. 23-3 lin. Hab. Pulo-Penang. Elongate, subcylindrical, nitidous, bluish black beneath, and sparingly clothed with adpressed silvery pubescence ; head and thorax rufo-testaceous; elytra deep metallic blue. Head con- stricted behind the eyes; face triangular, epistome separated from the face by a deep, acutely-angled groove; from its apex two others run obliquely upwards, one on either side, along the edge of the orbit ; inner portion of the latter stained with black; labrum piceous; general surface of head minutely and distantly punctured, front impressed with a single distinct fovea: antennze subfusiform, moderately robust, black, their two terminal joints dusky white, basal joints incrassate, ovate; second short, sub- moniliform ; third and fourth each longer than the first, equal, obconic; four basal joints nitidous, the rest opake. Thorax subcylindrical, slightly longer than broad; sides broadly and deeply constricted immediately behind their middle, narrowed at the extreme apex, thickened before their apex; upper surface impressed in front of the base by a deep suleation, which is ex- tended at either end into the lateral constriction ; on the centre of the disk are five or six longitudinal rows of fine subremote punctures, visible only with a lens. Scutellum semiovate, ob- tuse. Elytra much broader than the thorax, parallel, their ba- Mr. J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. 19 silar portion indistinctly elevated ; each elytron impressed with ten rows of deep distinct punctures, the outer row sulcate ; inter- spaces plane in front, subcostate towards the apex, each im- pressed with a row of fine punctures; outer half of external disk obsoletely wrinkled transversely ; hinder thighs ampullate, much shorter than the abdomen, moderately imcrassate. Var. A. In this variety the head and thorax (with the excep- tion of an obscure patch on the vertex of the former) are con- colorous with the elytra. Genus Coxasposoma, Laporte. Colasposoma Downesii. C. anguste oblongum, convexum, metallico-viride ; labro, antennis (his extrorsum nigris) pedibusque rufo-fulvis, genibus viridi-eeneis, tarsis fuscis ; capite thoraceque fortiter subcrebre punctatis ; ely- tris oblongis, subcrebre punctatis, lateribus transversim elevato- reticulatis, intra marginem exteriorem longitudinaliter excavatis, leete cupreis, utroque viridi-zeneo limbato. Long. 3 lin. Hab. Judia. Narrowly oblong, convex. Head and thorax deeply, but not coarsely, punctured ; antennz slender, filiform, two-thirds the length of the body, their basal third rufo-fulvous, the rest black. Thorax more than twice as broad as long, sides rounded, ro- tundate-angustate in front. Elytra oblong, their sides parallel, more coarsely punctured than the thorax, scarcely broader than the latter; disk transversely impressed below the basilar space. Genus Euryorg, Dalm. Huryope monstrosa. E. late subquadrato-oblonga, valde convexa, subgibbosa, sub- nitida, picea; antennis pedibusque pallidioribus; thorace trans- verso, crebre punctato, dorso subrugoso, utrinque excavato ; elytris thorace latioribus, subquadratis, apice obtuse rotundatis, tuberculis magnis elevatis hic illic inter se confluentibus nitide rufo-piceis instructis, interspatiis subremote punctatis. Long. 4—5 lin. Hab. Port Natal. Broadly subquadrate-oblong, convex. Head broad, somewhat closely punctured ; epistome transverse, excavated on either side, not distinctly separated from the face, the latter impressed on its upper portion by a broad transverse groove. Thorax twice as broad as long, its surface irregular, deeply excavated on either side; lateral border rounded, narrowly margined, nar- rowed behind the middle, all the angles produced. LElytra O* 20 Mr.J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. gibbous behind the middle, thence obliquely deflexed to their apex. Genus Curysometra, Linn. Chrysomela eximia. C. elongata, convexa, nitida, czeruleo-zenea, abdominis segmentorum marginibus pedibusque leete eeneis, supra viridi-znea; antennis extrorsum, plaga frontali, thoracis basi utrinque ampliata vittaque centrali, scutello elytrorumque sutura vittaque discoidali lete purpureis; thorace irregulariter punctato, lateribus incrassatis, intra marginem longitudinaliter excavatis, profunde varioloso- punctatis ; elytris sat fortiter subcrebre punctatis, punctis in striis confusis dispositis, interspatiis aciculatis, irregulariter elevatis, ad apicem subverrucosis. Var. A. supra cupro-zenea, signaturis viridi-zeneis. Long. 5-6 lin. Hab. Mantchuria; collected by Mr. Bowring. Elongate, convex, nitidous; body beneath metallic blue, with a greenish tinge; apical border of the abdominal segments, to- gether with the legs, brassy ; body above brassy-green. Head nearly perpendicular ; face broad, distinctly punctured ; epistome slightly depressed, separated from the face by an angular groove, from the apex of which an ill-defined longitudinal grooved line extends upwards on the face; the surface of the latter on either side this groove is irregularly excavated; vertex with a large purple patch ; antenn scarcely half the length of the body, their outer half purple, and covered with a short adpressed fus- cous pubescence. Thorax twice as broad as long; sides mode- rately ampliate-rotundate, nearly straight and obsoletely sinuate at their base; apical margin broadly excavated; upper surface moderately convex, irregularly punctured; sides thickened, lon- gitudinally excavated within, surface of excavated portion covered with large irregularly confluent variolose punctures; a longitu- dinal vitta down the middle of the disk, and a broad basal fascia, dilated at either end, but abbreviated just before reaching the lateral border, bright purple. Scutellum semiovate, obtuse, bright purple, its surface covered with irregular depressions. Elytra narrowly oblong, slightly broader than the thorax, nearly five times its length; sides subparallel; apex rounded ; surface somewhat closely covered with coarse, irregular, deeply impressed punctures, arranged for the most part in irregular longitudinal strie ; general surface of the elytra irregularly thickened, acicu- late, subverrucose towards the apex; a sutural line and a broad vitta on the disk, abbreviated at the base, bright purple. This splendid species is very closely allied to our Ch. fulgida, Stephens ; it is, however, nearly twice the size, and proportionately Mr. J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. 21 longer than that insect: it also differs in the form of the adeagus. Chrysomela Wallacet. C. mas oblonga, parallela, fam. ovata, postice ampliata, convexa, cuprea, nitida, subtus obscurior, purpureo tincta; antennis dimidio corporis longioribus, nigris, articulis basalibus subtus piceis; tho- race modice convexo, disco tenuiter punctato, lateribus rotundatis incrassatis, intra marginem longitudinaliter excavatis et ibi pro- funde varioloso-punctatis ; elytriy maris parallelis, fem. postice ampliatis, valde convexis, subcrebre tenuiter punctatis, punctis in striis confusis irregulariter dispositis. Long. 33-5 lin. Hab. Mantchuria. Oblong and parallel in the male, ovate and enlarged towards the posterior extremity in the female, convex, shining cupreous, more obscure beneath, with a purple tinge. Head punctured ; epistome depressed, bounded above by an acutely-angled grooved line, either end of which is suddenly rounded, and from its apex a faint longitudinal groove runs upwards to the vertex; antennz rather slender, nearly filiform, rather longer in the male than half the body. Thorax twice as broad as long ; apex broadly excavated; sides straight and nearly parallel, rounded and narrowed before the middle ; upper surface moderately convex ; disk subremotely but distinctly punctured ; sides thickened, longitudinally exca- vated immediately within the thickened portion, the excavation itself being broad and deep on its hinder half, shallower and less distinct in front, its surface covered with subremote punctures, larger and deeper than those of the disk. Hlytra much more closely and coarsely punctured than the thorax, the punctures arranged in numerous irregular ill-defined rows. The sides of the thorax vary somewhat in form in different individuals ; rarely (in the male) they are rotundate-ampliate from the base; in the female they are always less straight behind the middle than in the other sex. Chrysomela Krishnu. C. anguste oblongo-ovata, convexa, cuprea, nitida; thorace modice convexo, disco fere impunctato, lateribus rotundatis, a medio ad basin angustatis, valde incrassatis, intus foveolatis, hic illic punctis magnis sparse impressis; elytris ovatis, postice subattenuatis, profunde gemellato-striatis, punctis purpureo-cupreis magnis in- eequidistanter et remote positis in striis, strils nonnullis ponemedium omnino deletis. j Long. 4 lin. Hab. India. Narrowly oblong -ovate, convex, bright cupreous. Head 22 Mr.J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. nearly impunctate ; clypeus depressed, separated from the face by an angular grooved line, from the apex of which a longitu- dinal groove runs upwards to the vertex; antenne rather longer than the head and thorax, moderately robust. Thorax twice as broad as long; sides moderately rounded, narrowed from the middle to the base; disk moderately convex, nearly impunc- tate, a few minute punctures being visible only under a lens ; sides thickened, bounded within by an irregular longitudinal fovea, on which, and also for a short space on the outer surface of the disk, are to be seen a few deep punctures congregated in irregular rows and patches. Scutellum semiovate, obtuse. Elytra scarcely broader at the base than the thorax, oval, some- what narrowed towards their apex, the latter subacutely rounded; surface of each elytron with about five double rows of large coppery-purple, deep, circular impressions, placed remotely and at unequal distances in each row, but rather more crowded at the base, more distant on the hinder half of the disk, the fourth double row from the suture being there entirely obsolete ; inter- spaces smooth, impunctate. Chrysomela Grutii. C. oblongo-ovata, convexa, nitido-cuprea ; antennis nigris, ore tarsis- que obscure virido-seneis; thorace sparse hic illic fortiter punc- tato, lateribus paulo incrassatis, intra marginem leniter longitudi- naliter excavatis et ibi profunde varioloso-punctatis, punctis con- fluentibus ; elytris profunde et subremote punctatis, punctis sat magnis, ad latera et pone medium in striis gemellatis dispositis. Long. 33 lin. Hab. Rangoon. Oblong-ovate, convex, shining cupreous; antenne black ; mouth beneath and tarsi obscure metallic green. Head remotely punctured ; epistome and lower portion of face depressed, the former separated from the latter by an angular groove, from the upper edge of which three grooved lines run upwards on the face—viz. one from the apex, extending to the vertex, and one on either side, short, and running obliquely outwards towards the eye. Thorax twice as broad as long; apex concavely exca- vated; sides slightly rounded and narrowed, more quickly rounded before the middle, above moderately convex; disk somewhat sparingly impressed with coarse, deep, irregularly congregated punctures, sides slightly thickened on the outer margin, longitudinally excavated within, the excavated portion covered with large, deeply impressed, confluent, variolose punc- tures. Elytra ovate, impressed with numerous subremote, large, deeply impressed punctures, confused on the anterior two- thirds of the disk, arranged on the posterior third of each elytron Mr. J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. 23 in about four double longitudinal rows, the outer one extending the whole length of the elytron, just within its lateral border ; interspaces smooth. Chrysomela Bonvouloirii. C. anguste oblonga, modice convexa, nitida, cuprea, pedibus obscure eneis ; antennis nigris ; thoracis disco remote punctato, lateribus paulo incrassatis profunde subvarioloso-punctatis ; elytris fortiter striato-punctatis, striis nonnullis pone medium obsoletis. Var. A. obscure zenea. Long. 33 lin. Hab. India; collected by Mr. Bretingham. Narrowly oblong, moderately convex, bright cupreous, niti- dous; legs obscure neous. Head punctured; epistome de- pressed, separated from the face by an angular line; antennz half the length of the body, black. Thorax two and a half times as broad as long; sides rotundate-angustate from base to apex, rather more quickly narrowed in front ; anterior margin broadly concave ; upper surface smooth, distinctly but sparingly punc- tured on the disk, the punctures being irregularly crowded ; sides thickened on the lateral border, a narrow band along this latter being entirely free from punctures, a longitudinal space immediately within, however, is covered with numerous large deeply impressed subvariolose punctures, which extend also a short distance along the base of the thorax, Scutellum semi- ovate, smooth and impunctate. Elytra slightly broader than the thorax, their sides subparallel, the apex rounded ; surface of each elytron covered with rows of deeply impressed punctures ; on the posterior half of the surface, many of the rows are obso- lete, causing the remaining rows to appear gemellate ; inter- spaces remotely punctate; outer half of anterior disk indi- stinctly wrinkled transversely. This species varies somewhat in the amount and also in the depth of the punctation of its surface. Chrysomela Stevensit. C, anguste oblonga, modice convexa, nitida, leete cuprea; capite. scutello pedibusque obscure zeneis ; antennis nigris ; thoracis disec hic illic fortiter punctato, lateribus extus incrassatis, intus obsolete longitudinaliter depressis, rude varioloso-punctatis, fere rugosis ; elytris rude punctato-striatis, striis irregulariter dispositis. Long. 42 lin. Hab. Rangoon. Narrowly oblong, moderately convex, bright cupreous, niti- dous; head, scutellum, and legs obscure xneous. Head irre- gularly but not closely punctured; clypeus nearly occupied by 24 Mr.J.8. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. a narrowly ovate transverse depression ; face with a longitudinal groove running down the middle; antennz half the length of the body, black. Thorax more than twice as broad as long; sides nearly straight and parallel, subsinuate behind their middle, rounded and narrowed in front, anterior angles subacute, poste- rior acute ; surface slightly convex, impressed here and there with deep punctures, congregated in irregular rows; sides thickened at their outer edge, broadly but obsoletely excavated within, their surface covered with large, irregular, deeply-im- pressed, conflueut punctures. Scutellum semiovate, subacute. Elytra broader than the thorax, subovate; surface covered with numerous irregular rows of deeply-impressed punctures ; inter- spaces somewhat irregular, indistinctly wrinkled transversely on the anterior half of the outer disk. This species is more coarsely and closely punctured than C. Bonvouloirui ; the rows of punctures on the elytra are more nu- merous, and the general surface of the latter is irregular. Genus Ausrratica, Chevr. Australica erudita. A. oblongo-ovata, convexa, flavo-fulva, nitida; vertice, antennis ex- trorsum, thoracis vittis duabus brevibus, infra apicem positis, fasciaque basali, utrinque abbreviata, medio sinuata, scutello pe- dibusque (femoribus anticis quatuor basi subtus exceptis) nigris ; elytris punctato-striatis, nigro signatis ; pectore nigro-piceo. Long. 3 lin. Hab. Dawson’s River, Australia. Oblong-ovate, convex, shining flavo-fulvous; the outer two- thirds of the antennz, the vertex, two short subapical vittz and a narrow basal fascia on the thorax, the scutellum and legs (the basal half of the under surface of the four anterior thighs ex- cepted) black. Head broad and flat, minutely punctured; epi- stome scarcely distinct from the face; antennz slender. Thorax three times as broad as long; sides rounded and narrowed from their base to their apex ; upper surface convex, finely punctured, sides obsoletely excavated ; lateral margin rather more coarsely punctured. LElytra broadly oblong, scarcely broader than the base of the thorax, each elytron impressed with ten rows of punctures, the first ‘short ; interspaces. very minutely punctured ; the suture, a curved line which, commencing at the base on the humeral callus, runs obliquely downwards and inwards to the lower edge of the basilar space, where it abruptly terminates at a short distance from the suture, a narrow wedge-shaped patch on the outer disk below the shoulder, placed parallel to the curved line, and three longitudinal’vittz on the hinder disk, the first commencing at the outer edge of the oblique line just before its Mr. J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. 25 apex, running parallel to the suture, and terminating long be- fore reaching the apex of the elytron, the other two commencing about the middle of the outer disk, connected at their base by an obliquely transverse line, the inner one extending nearly to the sutural angle, the outer one short, black. Breast nigro-piceous. Australica (Stethomela) gibbosa. A. subquadrata, apice subangulata, dorso valde convexa, gibbosa, nitido-cuprea; thorace hic illic punctis magnis rotundatis viridi- metallicis profunde impresso ; elytris postice declivibus, utrinque apicem versus ad latus longitudinaliter excavatis, punctis mag- nis rotundatis remotis viridi-metallicis in seriebus decem in- zequidistanter positis profunde impressis; antennis pallide flavis, articulis intermediis fuscis. Long. 43-53 lin. Hab. Dawson’s River, Richmond River. Subquadrate, subangulate at the apex of the elytra, very con- vex, gibbous, shining cupreous. Head broad, flat ; face divided down the middle by a longitudinal groove, which extends nearly to the anterior margin of the epistome; the latter transverse, short, separated from the face by a nearly horizontal grooved line ; antenne rather more than half the length of the body, slender, filiform, pale yellow; intermediate joints fuscous. Thorax more than twice as broad as long; apex concavely excavated; sides nearly straight and parallel behind, rounded and narrowed in front ; upper surface smooth, impressed here and there with irregularly congregated, large, round, deep, obscure metallic- green punctures. LElytra scarcely broader than the thorax at their base, slightly narrowed behind, conjointly angled at their apex, very convex, somewhat abruptly deflexed behind the mid- dle; each elytron on its outer side covered with a broad but shallow depression, which extends from just before the com- mencement of the posterior third of the elytron, and reaches to immediately within the sutural border, leaving the apical por- - tion of the suture itself elevated, and forming with its fellow a distinct ridge; on the surface of each elytron are ten rows of remote impressions similar to those on the thorax; they are rather larger and more deeply impressed, and are placed at un- equal distances on each row; on the extreme outer border is a single row of smaller and more crowded punctures, concolorous with the disk; interspaces subremotely covered with faintly- impressed reticulations. Genus PLAaciopERA, Redt. Plagiodera Triment. P. ovato-rotundata, modice convexa, nitida, late cupreo-zenea; an- 26 Mr.J.8. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. tennis fulvis, extrorsum nigris; thorace medio longitudinaliter canaliculato; elytris irregulariter subseriatim punctatis, viridi- eeneis, cupreo vix micantibus, marginibus basali et suturali limbo- que submarginali leete cupreis ; abdominis limbo fulvo maculato. Var. A. obscure cerulea aut nigro-cerulea; elytris viridibus, marginibus concoloribus. Long. 3-4 lin. Hab, Cape of Good Hope; collected by Mr. Trimen. Ovate-rotundate, moderately convex, nitidous, bright cupreo- eeneous ; antenne moderately subincrassate, fulvous, their outer half black. Thorax narrowed from base to apex; sides nearly straight, suddenly narrowed and rounded at the apex; surface of disk slightly irregular, sides indistinctly thickened, impressed here and there with a few deep scattered punctures; central portion of disk impressed with a short longitudinal groove. Elytra with their outer margin moderately dilated, its surface irregular, somewhat thickened; bright metallic green, with a slight cupreous reflexion, an ill-defined line on the sutural and basal margins, and a submarginal stripe on the outer border, bright cupreous. Sides of abdomen marked with a row of ful- vous spots. Var. A. Body obscure metallic blue or bluish black ; elytra metallic green, the cupreous markings obsolete. Plagiodera viridivittata. P. subrotundata, modice convexa, nitida, obscure viridi-zenea ; an- tennis nigris ; thorace hic illic leviter excavato, irregulariter punc- tato, punctis ad latera profundius impressis ; elytris irregulariter punctatis, punctis prope suturam subseriatim dispositis, cupreis, utriusque margine laterali, linea suturali yittisque duabus, plus mi- nusve distinctis, metallico-viridibus. Long. 4—43 lin. Hab, Port Natal. Very closely allied to the last species, rather larger, more rotundate ; sides of elytra obsoletely angled; thorax more deeply pitted, and more coarsely punctured; longitudinal groove on disk obsolete, sides less straight, rather more distinctly rounded; antennz entirely black ; abdomen without the marginal spots, Plagiodera cinctipennis. P. rotundata, convexa, fulva aut pallide rufo-fulva, nitida ; elytris punctatis, punctis subseriatim dispositis, obscure zeneo-cupreis, fulvo marginatis; antennis extrorsum nigris. Long. 23 lin. Hab. India; collected by Mr. Bretingham. Rotundate, moderately convex, nitidous ; antennz short, sub- Mr. J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles, 27 incrassate, their outer half black. Thorax rounded on the sides, narrowed in front. Elytra distinctly punctured, the puncturing varying in depth in different individuals, indistinctly arranged in irregular rows. Genus Gontocrrena, Redt. Gonioctena scutellaris. G. oblonga, modice convexa, fulva, nitida, pectore pedibusque (fe- moribus quatuor anticis basi exceptis) nigro-piceis; antennis ex- trorsum scutelloque nigris; elytris regulariter punctato-striatis. Long. 3 lin. Hab. Northern China. Oblong, convex. Head coarsely punctured; epistome de- pressed, separated from the face by an angular groove, from the apex of which a short, ill-defined, longitudinal depression runs upwards on the face; antenne scarcely longer than the head and thorax, their outer two-thirds black. Thorax more than twice as broad as long; sides angustate-rotundate from base to apex; disk distinctly but finely punctured, sides coarsely punctate. Scutellum nearly semirotundate, shining black. Ely- tra scarcely broader than the base of the thorax, sides below the shoulders slightly excavated ;-each elytron impressed with eleven regular rows of punctures, the first short; interspaces plane, minutely but not closely punctured. Body beneath deeply punctured ; abdomen obscure fulvous, its puncturing subremote, Gonioctena thoracica. G. oblonga, convexa, nigra, nitida, thorace facieque inferiore obscure tufis ; antennarum basi fulva; elytris regulariter punctato-striatis. Long. 23 lin. Hab. Northern China. Very similar to the preceding, but (with the exception of the entire thorax above, together with its sides beneath, the lower portion of the face, and the base of the antennz) entirely black. Head less coarsely punctured; the longitudinal depression on the face is wanting, but replaced by two indistinct grooves, which run one on either side obliquely upwards from the apex of the epistome; antenne thicker towards their apex than in G. scutellaris. Gonioctena eneipennis. G. oblonga, convexa, testacea, nitida; elytris viridi-metallicis, punc- tato-striatis, punctis in striis ad latera minus regulariter dispositis; antennis flavis; scutello nigro. Long. 23 lin, Hab. Northern China. 28 Mr.J.S. Baly on new Species of Phytophagous Beetles. Oblong, convex, shining testaceous; elytra bright metallic green, punctate-striate, the punctures less regularly placed on the striz on the outer disk than in the foregoing species; face somewhat broader, slightly swollen, irregularly punctured; epi- stome separated from the face by a nearly semicircular groove, the middle of which is slightly produced upwards and angular. Gonioctena rubripennis. G. oblonga, convexa, nigra, nitida; elytris punctato-striatis, sordide rufo-fulvis ; antennis basi fulvis. Long. 23-3 lin. Hab. Japan. Oblong, convex, shining black ; elytra obscure rufo-fulvous. Thorax at the base more than twice as broad as long; sides narrowly margined, rotundate-angustate, all the angles acute ; above convex, sparingly covered with fine punctures on the disk; sides coarsely and more closely punctured, their outer edge, just within the lateral border, slightly thickened. Scutellum semi- ovate. LElytra scarcely broader than the base of the thorax ; sides subparallel ; apex regularly rounded; above convex, trans- versely depressed on the disk below the humeral callus; each elytron impressed with eleven regular rows of distinct punctures, the first abbreviated, interspace between the tenth and eleventh rows slightly thickened, the others flat, subremotely covered with fine but distinct punctures; under surface of body coarsely punctured. Gontoctena nigro-plagata. G. oblonga, convexa, fulva, nitida; elytris punctato-striatis ; scutello elytrorumque puncto apicali plagisque octo, 4 vix infra basin, 4 pone medium, transversim positis, nigris. Var. A. elytrorum maculis inter se confluentibus, facie inferiore piceo tincta. Long. 3-33 lin. Hab. Japan. Oblong, convex. Thorax more than twice as broad as long, sides rotundate-angustate, very narrowly margined, posterior angles acute, the anterior subacute ; above convex ; sides coarsely punctured, a narrow space just within the outer border thickened, impunctate ; disk remotely punctured ; medial line near the base impressed with a short longitudinal groove. Elytra similar in form and sculpture to the preceding species, the punctures being, however, rather coarser and somewhat less regularly placed on the striz; each elytron marked with a small spot at the sutural angle and four large patches on the disk, shining black ; these latter, which vary in shape, are placed in two transverse rows, Dr. B. Seemann on the Bignoniacez. 29 viz. one immediately below the base and extending nearly to the middle, the other just below the middle; the two outer spots are generally elongate, and sometimes form a submarginal vitta, interrupted in its middle. V.—Revision of the Natural Order Bignoniacee. By BrerrHoip SEEeMANN, Pu.D., F.L.S. Brrore proceeding to publish the results of my examination of Bignoniacez, I shall give a list of all the genera I hold to be true members of the order. They will have to be grouped very differently when the whole of them shall have been subjected to closer investigation, and a number of new ones added. The two tribes Eubignoniee and Catalpez, founded upon important carpological characters, must stand, and a third one (Jacarandez) be added to them. I. Eubignoniee, having a marginicidal fruit, and a septum placed parallel with the direction of the valves of the capsule. II. Catalpee, having a loculicidal fruit, and a septum placed contrary to the direction of the valves of the capsule. III. Jacarandee, having a marginicidal fruit, and a septum placed contrary to the direction of the valves of the capsule. From the subjoined it will be seen that all c7rrhose Bigno- niaceze are confined to America, and that, with only one excep- tion (Dolichandra), they are Enbignoniee; again, that, with the exception of two Asiatic genera (Millingtonia and Calos- anthes) all the erect Bignoniaceze belong to Catalpeze and Jaca- randez. Synopsis generum Bignoniacearum. Tribus I. EvsBigNoniE&. Capsula marginicida, septum valvis parallelum.— Frutices scandentes cirrhosi Americani, rarissime arbores Asiaticze. Divisio I. Monostictides. Semina ad quodque septi latus uniserialia. * Frutices scandentes cirrhosi American. Bignonia, Tournef. Amer. trop. Pachyptera, Mart. Amer. trop. Fridericia, Mart. Amer. trop. Cydista, Miers (Barteria, Seem., non Hook. fil.). Amer. trop. et subtrop. Cuspidaria, DeCand. Amer. trop. Macfadyena, DeCand. (Spathodea, sp. auct.). Amer. trop. Lundia, DeCand. Amer. trop. Mansoa, DeCand. Amer. trop. 30 Dr. B. Seemann on the Bignoniacee. Arrabidea, DeCand. Amey. trop. Adenocalymna, Mart. Amer. trop. Haplolophium, Endl. (Aplolophium, Cham.). Amer. trop. Pyrostegia, Presl. Amer. trop. **® Arybores Asiaticz. Millingtonia, Linn. Ind. or. Calosanthes, Linn. Ind. or. Divisio II. Pleostictides. Semina ad quodque septi latus serie duplici, triplici, vel quadruplici disposita.—Frutices scandentes Americani. Distictis, DeCand. Amer. trop. Amphilophium, Kth. Amer. trop. Pithecoctenium, Mart. Amer. trop. Anemopegma, Mart. Amer. trop. Callichlamys, Mig. Amer. trop. Tribus II. Cara.prm. Capsula loculicida, septum valvis oppositum.—F rutices stantes vel arbores Gerontogzee vel Americe, rarius frutices scandentes cirrhosi, radicantes vel volubiles, rarissime herbe. Divisio 1. Monostictides. Semina ad quodque septi latus uniserialia. * Frutices stantes, Craterotecoma, Mart. Amer. trop. Stenolobium, D. Don. Amer. trop. Tecomella, Seem. Ind. orient. (Tecoma undulata, Don). Tecomaria, Fenzl. Amer. trop. Chilopsis, D. Don. Amer. trop. Rhigozum, Burch (Catophractes, D.Don). Afric. trop. ** Arbores. Rademachera, Zoll. Ind. orient. Spathodea, Beauv. Afric. trop. Stereospermum, Cham. (Dipterosperma, Hassk.). Afric. et Asia trop. Tecoma, Juss. (Tabebuia, Gomez). Amer. trop. Catalpa, Scop. Asia et Amer. trop. et subtrop. Divisio II. Pleostictides. Semina ad quodque septi latus serie duplici, triplici, vel quadruplici disposita. * Frutices cirrhosi, radicantes v. volubiles. Dolichandra, Cham. Amer. trop. Dr. B. Seemann on the Bignoniacee. 31 Campsidium, Seem. et Reisseck. Chile. Campsis, Lour. Asia trop. et subtrop., neenon Amer. subtrop. Pandorea, Endl., Seem. Australasia et Asia trop. ** Arbores. Delostoma, D. Don (Codazzia, Karsnt. et Trian.). Amer. trop. Cybistax, Mart. (Yangua, Spruce). Amer. trop. Zeyhera, Mart. Amer. trop. Sparattosperma, Mart. Amer. trop. Payanelia, DeCand. Amer. trop. *** Herbee. Argylia, D. Don (Oxymitus, Presl). Amer. subtrop. Tribus III. JAcARANDER., Capsula marginicida, septum valvis oppositum.—Arbores . Gerontogzeze vel Americane. Jacaranda, Juss. (Pteropodium, Meisn.). Amer, trop. Dolichandrone, Fenzl, Seem. Ind. or. et Austral. (Spathodee sp. auct.). Astianthus, D. Don. Amer. trop. (Genera 43.) Heterophragma, DeCand. Ind. or. Genera incerte sedis. Monttea, Clos. Chile. Reyesia, Clos. Chile. Oxycladus, Miers. Chile. I shall not follow any particular order in communicating my investigation, but publish the results as the complete materials come to hand. 1. Astrantuus, D. Don. Char. gen. emend.—Calyzx tubulosus, ecostatus, limbo 5-dentato zequali. Corolla infundibuliformis, basi tubulosa, limbo bilabiato, labio inf. 3-, sup. 2-lobo. Stamina 4, didynama, cum rudimento quinti. Anthere parallele, nude. Stigma bilobum. Capsula sili- quosa, echinulata, 2-locularis, marginicida, septo crasso spongioso valvis contrario. Semina in quavis septi fascie pluriseriata, minuta, compressa, alata, ala completa subovali, corpore cordato.—Arbor 30-ped. Mexicana et Guatemalensis, habitu Salicis; ramis glabris ; foliis teris vel superioribus sparsis, elongato-linearibus, integerri- mis, coriaceis (8-14 poll. long., 2-3 lin. lat.) ; racemis terminalibus seepe dichotome paniculatis, floribus flavis—D. Don in Edinb. Phil. Journ. vol. ix. p. 262 (1823); G. Don, Gen. Syst. iv. p. 228; De Cand. Prodr. ix. p.177. Species unica: Astianthus longifolius, D. Don in Edinb. Phil, Journ. vol. ix. p. 262 32 Dr. B. Seemann on the Bignoniacee. (1823); G. Don, Gen. Syst. p. 228; DeCand. Prodr. ix. p.177; Bonplandia, t. 13. Bignonia viminalis, Kunth in Humb. et Bonpl. Nov. Gen. Amer, vol. iii. p. 132; DeCand. Prodr. ix. p. 144. Tecoma saligna, Lindl. Herb. Nomen vernaculum Mexicanum, “‘ Aguejote,”’ teste Gregg. Geogr. Distribution. —On the slopes of the mountains of Western Mexico, between Mescala and Estola (Humboldt and Bonpland! in Herb. Berol.); between Vera Cruz and Oaxaca (Galeotti! n.1017), near Jalapa (Galeotti! n. 20) ; at Aguacatlan, near Tepic (Gregg! n. 946) ; in Guatemala (Skinner! im Herb. Lindl. et Hook.) ; always growing on the banks of rivers, and replacing our willows in those regions. In Dr. Lindley’s Herbarium there are specimens of Astianthus collected by Skmner in Guatemala, the value of which consists in their having both flowers and ripe fruit. The position of the genus, so long doubtful, is by means of these easily cleared up. Instead of belonging to the Eubignoniez, Astianthus must be placed near Dolichandrone, amongst Jacarandex. It has no- thing to do with Catalpa, as was supposed, neither agreeing with it in fruit nor flower, and four of the stamens being fertile, The seeds are not, as D. Don had described them, “ villis nu- merosis papposa.” Don must probably have described the seeds of another Bignoniacea as belonging to Astzanthus, perhaps those of Chilopsis, a Mexican genus very much resembling As- tianthus in habit, and growing also on the banks of rivers, but having purple instead of yellow flowers. Don and DeCandolle describe the corolla of Astianthus as “rubro-purpurea ;” but all those who have seen the plant wild, as yellow. I have identified Bignonia viminalis of Kunth with Astianthus longifolius: the authentic specimens of Humboldt and Bonpland leave no doubt on that pot. The genus consists only of one species, and differs from its alles in its spiny fruit, regular calyx, and parallel anthers. Its seeds are the smallest of any Bignoniacea known to me. 2. Campsrpium, Reiss. et Seem. (gen. nov.). Char. gen.— Calyx campanulatus, ecostatus ; limbo 5-dentato, eequali. Corolla tubulosa, leviter curvata; limbo 5-lobo, lobis subeequalibus. Stamina 4, didynama, cum rudimento quinti. Anthere parallele, nude. Stigma bilobum. Capsula teretiuscula, leevis, loculicida. Septum valvis contrarium. Semina......... Frutex ecirrhosus scandens, Chilensis et Chiloénsis, glaberrimus ; ramis angulatis ; foliis oppositis 4—7-jugis cum impari, petiolo alato, foliolis ovato-oblongis vel ellipticis, utrinque obtusis vel acutis, seepe mucronatis, margine dentatis vel subintegerrimis, supra leete viridi- M. L. Garreau on the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 338 bus, subtus pallidioribus; racemis terminalibus simplicibus, 4- 9-floris, pedicellis elongatis bibracteolatis, bracteolis linearibus acutis, petiolis pedunculis calycibusque purpurascentibus, corollis aurantiacis, intus versus basin filamentisque villosis, ovario glabro. Species unica : Campsidium Chilense, Reiss. et Seem. MSS. in Herb. Vindob. ; Seem. in Bonplandia, vol. x. p. 147, t. 11. Tecoma Guarume, Hook. in Bot. Mag. t. 4896, in adnot. (non DeCand.). Nomen vernaculum Chiloénse “ Pilpil Boqui,”’ teste Bridges. Geographical Distribution. — Chiloé (Bridges! W. Lobb ! n. 474, King !); Island of Huafo, lat. 44° S. (Eights! in Herb. Hook.) ; Arique, near Valdivia (Lechler! Plant. Chil. n. 671). This beautiful plant seems to be rather common between lati- tudes 40° and 44° S., and climbs over trees with a height of 40-50 feet. Nevertheless it is not mentioned in Gay’s ‘ Flora of Chile, and was thought identical with Tecoma? Guarume (Bignonia alata, Pav.) by Sir William Hooker. The authentic specimens of Bignonza alata in the Berlin Herbarium prove, how- ever, to be identical with Tecomaria fulva, Seem. (Tecoma fulva, DeCand.); and the plant to which Sir W. J. Hooker alludes is the type of an entirely new genus, allied in habit to Campsis, Lour., but differing from that genus in the shape of the corolla and parallel, not divaricate, anthers. Campsidium has, however, no rooting branches, climber though it be, nor is it winding hke Pandorea, nor furnished with tendrils like most climbing species peculiar to America. VI.—On the Functions of the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. By M. L. Garreav *, THE numerous researches prosecuted of late years respecting the organic elements of plants, whilst on the one hand adding to our acquaintance with the structure, composition, and relations of their tissues, have, on the other, suggested to several botanists various theories regarding their evolution and their functions. But the physiology of plants being, like that of animals, insepa- rably dependent upon the knowledge of their organs, and this knowledge being far from thoroughly understood, the conse- quence is that every fresh discovery in their organization is fol- lowed by a new interpretation of some question or other in their physiological mechanism. The cell, regarded by most botanists as the primitive element of vegetable organization, is represented as a nearly independent * Translated by Dr. Arlidge, from the ‘ Annales des Sciences Naturelles,’ tome xii. 1860, p. 189. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 3 34 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of organism, formed by a closed membrane, capable of self-increase, of self-multiplication, and of absorbing and transmitting by en- dosmosis fluid materials destined to nourish it. This definition, though true in all its details when an examination is conducted by the aid of too feeble or of too strong magnifying powers, or when experiments are conducted on dead tissue, cannot be entirely sustamed when the investigation 1s pursued by appro- priate amplifying powers, and when the still living organization is submitted to observation ; for, under such circumstances, it becomes possible to demonstrate that the vegetable cell is not so simple in its structure as has been presumed, nor so independent as supposed when it enters into the composition of a tissue. But notwithstanding that the cell is everywhere, whether isolated or aggregated with others, essentially the same in its organization, it 1s necessary, in order to its minute examination, to employ those portions of plants in which an active process of- vegetation is proceeding,—where intra-cellular secretions are absent, and the cellulose and encrusting matters have not as yet so thickened the tissues as to impede the thorough examination of the cell- cavity. If a slice of vegetable tissue be taken, so thin as to consist of not more than two superposed rows of cells (conditions readily realized in hairs, in the tissue of spongioles, in the lamina of fleshy leaves, in young epidermis, in the pith, in the parenchyma of young petioles, in various fruits, &c.), and if this be exammed in a moist state, at a temperature of from 20° to 25° Centigrade, the microscope quickly reveals a small conglomerate mass in each cell, often granular in aspect, and attached to some part of its inner wall. Such is.the little body designated by Robert Brown as the nucleus, and which he regarded, as did also Schleiden and Hugo Mohl, as a structure existing prior to the formation of the cell-wall. It was moreover looked upon by these naturalists, together with Schultz, Slack, and Meyen, as constituted by the more or less intimate aggregation of nitrogenous granules. However, this little organ is not entirely formed by the reunion of agglomerated granules, and one might be easily led into error in making researches for its elucidation if it was assumed that it was always to be met with under the aspect above mentioned ; for in the majority of the simple hairs of herbaceous plants, in epidermis, and in nearly all young tissues, it occurs under the form of an opaline globule, variable dimensions, and refracting light much in the same way as fatty matters. F urther, under an irregular form, it frequently presents itself in the sub-epider- mic cells of leaves, infiltrated with chlorophyl, and with some granules in its middle. Again, in young cells, and in pollen in course of growth, it appears formed of flakes loosely coalesced into the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 35 irregular spheres; whilst in the cells of young specimens of Chara, of Hydrocharis morsus-rane, of Stratiotes alotdes, Caulinia fragilis, and Sagittaria sagittifolia, in the hairs of young shoots of Borago officinalis, in the epidermis of the petioles of young specimens of Arum, &e., it is represented only by some viscous flakes having no determinate figure. The nucleus, therefore, being essentially a variable organ, has not failed to give birth to the most divergent opinions relative to its nature, origin, and functions; and we should not materially err in asserting that there are not two botanists who entirely concur in respect to its composition or to the part it is intended to play in the economy of the cell. Yet, though this body is susceptible of assuming different aspects, the one under which it usually presents itself is that of a spheroid, in the form of a globule of mucus, having at its centre a collec- tion of semi-transparent granules endowed with sufficient soft- ness to make them adhere feebly together. Now, the presence of this granular matter in the centre is suggestive of the existence of a membranous pellicle about the periphery or surface; and some researches which I have made on this point prove to my mind that this supposition is well founded. Thus, to demon- strate the fact in the epidermis of Tradescantia virginica, it is only necessary to treat the slice of tissue under observation with a drop of liquid ammonia, which causes the disappearance of the internal collection of granules, and renders visible a membranous disk, which is no other than the collapsed sac within which the granules were contained. However, this soft pellicle is so very transparent, and of such tenuity, that it is oftentimes very diffi- cult to distinguish its outline with clearness, particularly if, as very often happens, it lies in contact with the wall of the cell. If, in place of employing the epidermis (which, by the way, need always be very transparent), choice be made of parts richer in water, such as the young root-fibres, the spongioles, the stem of young fleshy plants, the petals, &c., the study of this organ is facilitated ; for, under these circumstances, the granular heap is less abundant, and the little membraniform hyaline sac which envelopes it is more perceptible, whilst at the same time the pre- sence of liquid within the sac, apparently of rather stronger re- fracting-power than the fluid in the cell-cavity, may be detected on submitting the preparation to the action of a dilute acid or of alcohol of 86°; the little sac may be seen to contract and shrivel, to force out a portion of the liquid it contains, and to become reduced to one-third or one-fourth of its original dimensions. If the preparation be now moistened with a little liquid ammonia of 12°, the small sac regains its primitive form, though at the same time it acquires a somewhat larger volume than before, 3* 36 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of and is less transparent. This change is the consequence either of the action of the reagents upon it, or of the nature of the contained liquid being modified by them. If the flowers of the Tradescantia virginica be selected for observation at the moment when they begin to wither, and when the colouring-matter is diffused within the cavities of the cells, the nucleus may be still more precisely studied in respect to its form and its chemi- cal characteristics. The constituent matter of the nucleus being readily penetrated by the colouring-material, and still more strongly impregnated by it than the surrounding cellulose wall of the cell, it happens that, on moistening the preparation with very dilute hydrochloric acid, the nuclear matter acquires an intense red colour, and is thrown into folds, but presently re- appears under the eye of the observer with a green tint and of a larger size when the acid reagent is saturated by ammonia or by some other soluble base employed in slight excess. Lastly, on following the appearances along the borders of the film of tissue, and on using slight pressure by the glass covering it, some of these small bodies may be detached and forced out through the ruptured cells, when it becomes evident that they scarcely differ in form or in their nature from mucous globules. It may be added that, if the small body be carefully examimed whilst still under the influence of the acid, its centre will be found to be composed of granules strongly condensed into a little mass of a deeper red colour than the softer wall enclosing it, and to which it is fixed by only a single point. From these facts it is at once evident that the nucleus is not a simple collection of particles adhermg together, as Brown, Slack, Schultz, and others supposed it to be, but that it possesses a cavity limited by an albuminoid, soft and membranous material, containing granules and a fluid, and that its membrane and granules may be condensed in different degrees by the addition of an acid. When similar observations are followed out respecting this particular state of the nucleus in tissues whose cells are of suffi- cient diameter, and their walls transparent enough to permit a just idea of the structure in question to be obtained, then without the help of reagents the above-named facts may be established in the case of most plants, and in all their transparent and actually living parts. But it is a simpler plan, where it is wished only to display the presence of the nucleus, to use a weak solution of iodine in iodide of potassium, which soon tints it of a pale yellow and afterwards of a brown colour. Nevertheless, it is worth noting that this reagent does not act in all plants, or indeed in all parts of a plant, with the same intensity, and that the colour it produces has to be waited for a longer or shorter time, and seems to be influenced by the degree of elaboration of the cellular the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 37 liquid and by the abundance of nitrogenous granules contained within the membraniform envelope. Hitherto the nucleus has been referred to as a nearly spherical globule ; however, this form is not always that which it presents, although it is the most widely met with when the liquid it con- tains completely fills it, which happens in those portions of plants which are gorged with a large quantity of water; but when its cavity is less full, or when it is in motion, it has sometimes a wrinkled appearance (as in Hrodium moschatum), and at others a wrinkled and tuberculated appearance at once (Salvia Sclarea), and is very irregular in its outline. With regard to the dimensions the nucleus may attain, there is great variety ; but in general it bears a pretty direct relation to the size of the cells when these have attained their complete growth, or a little before that period. Thus it is that the nucleus is found highly developed in the Liliaceze, Commelinez, the Orchidaceze, Cactacez, Crassulacee, Aroidee, in most Cheno- podieze and Solanez, and in the fleshy parts of all plants, such as the fruit of Rosacee, Rhamnez, Ampelide, Grossulariacez, &c., which generally exhibit cells of large volume. On the other hand, it is small in most Graminez, Apocynex, Amentaceze, and Jasminez, whose cells are commonly small in size. The volume of the nucleus, compared with that of the cell, when young, is proportionally very great, as may be seen in the epidermis of the unexpanded flower of Helleborus niger, or in the young merithalli, spongioles, leaves, flowers, and pollen in course of growth; for in such examples the dimensions of the nucleus are so considerable that it sometimes occupies one-fourth of the whole of the cell-cavity. But when the cell has attained its full development, it is adherent to it, and occupies a far smaller proportional space within it than heretofore, being then reduced to one-tenth, one-fifteenth part, or even less of its cavity. However, though the nucleus itself does not keep pace with the growth of the cell, we shall find that, in the subsequent modifica- tions it soon undergoes, it will, by means of appendages given off from it, acquire an equal increase with the cell, and a degree of development proportionate to the extent of its walls. When examined relative to its consistence, the nucleus is found to be soft and extensible ; sometimes, when distended by its con- tained liquid, it is ruptured in the attempt to detach by a sudden pull the small lamina of tissue to be submitted to examination. Its surface may be smooth, tuberculated, or wrinkled—varieties of appearance of which we shall presently recognize the cause. Lastly, it is not unusual to see it bordered by little vesicles ; but these by degrees decrease in size under the eye of the observer, and ultimately merge into it. 38 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of The positions it occupies in the cavity of the cell are equally variable ; but its most common place is in the centre of the cell, or adherent to some part of its wall. In the latter case, when the cell is elongated, it is seen to be almost always placed equi- distant from the two extremities; however, it happens in cells which enter into the structure of hairs, that the nucleus is often seen attached to the septa between them, as in Tradescantia vir- ginica and Chelidonium mas. The constancy of this organ in cells in progress of growth led Schleiden to see in it the explanation of an important fact in the physiology of plants; and it was m making an attempt to sub- stantiate this conviction that I was prompted to investigate its different forms, some of its properties, and its relations with the walls of the cell. After having submitted anew to the most attentive and minute observation the majority of the tissues that I had already examined, and which had presented me with cells at once sufficiently developed and transparent, I have been able to satisfy myself that the membranous sac of the nucleus whose characters have been detailed above frequently gives off filaments of the greatest softness, and often anastomosing one with another. Many of their slender extremities hkewise proceed to coalesce with the layer of nitrogenous material that lines the interior of the cell-wall. In this structural condition I perceived that I had to deal with an important modification of the nucleus, which, instead of being applied directly to the cell-wall, occupied the centre of its cavity, suspended there by the medium of the viscous processes extended from its periphery as just described. Slack and Meyen long since suspected the relations of these filaments (or, as they called them, currents) with the nucleus. Schultz and Hugo Mohl still more distinctly appreciated this relation ; but none of these naturalists would seem to have studied the subject under the most favourable conditions, otherwise they could not have failed to recognize the fact I shall proceed to establish, viz., that these processes are capable in many cells of serving the office of contractile canals for the transmission or cir- culation of a granular fluid. On examining, by the aid of a good instrument with a magni- fying power of from 3800 to 400 diameters, according to the dimensions of the cells, and at a temperature of 25° to 30° Centi- grade, a slice of tissue the cells of which presents filamentous nuclei (such as those of the full-grown epidermis of the leaves of the Tradescantia virginica, the hairs of Salvia Sclarea, of Cheli- donium, and of Hrodium moschatum, procured during the summer or autumn), the observer will not fail to recognize the presence of granules streaming in a transparent fluid through a series of canals formed by an extensible membranous matter, continuous the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 39 with that of the nucleus, though of greater transparency. To view this structure better, the rays of light should fall on the object in a direction parallel to their course, whether it be ordi- nary daylight or artificial light. It will further appear that the diameter of these canals is often greatly reduced, and that the fluid circulating through them carries along with it only trans- parent granules of very great tenuity. Now, the existence of such canals within the cell-cavity has always been regarded by the majority of botanists as improbable ; and taking this opinion in connexion with the minuteness of the phenomenon itself, it is easily conceivable that the structures just recorded have escaped the researches of micrographers. However, when the investigator has been made acquainted with these phenomena, it is not diffi- cult to demonstrate them, and this even in cells of medium dimensions, provided they are sufficiently transparent and ex- amined with adequate care and patience. To this end, it is enough to moisten the preparation without soaking it with water, to carefully avoid the presence of air which may adhere to the surface, and after covering it with the glass cover, to examine it assiduously and under those conditions with regard to tempera- ture above pointed out. Should the canals not show themselves, gentle compression may be exercised on the preparation, and then the examination be renewed; for by this process the canals are separated and made to stand out from the cell-wall, in the centre of its cavity, where they display themselves and their anastomoses. It is much preferable to make out the existence of these canals without the aid of reagents; but they may be made more evident by the addition of a solution of iodine in iodide of potassium, which gives them a clear yellow or a reddish-brown colour, as it does to the nucleus. But this reagent, though preferable to alcohol or to the aqueous solution of iodine, does not afford a faithful image of the phenomenon, for it slightly contracts the component matter of the canals and deforms it. Besides, before the manifestation of the colour, there is greater or less delay, according to the condition of the fluid in circulation. It 1s therefore most important, when it is wished to make a critical examination, to abstain from the employment of this reagent, and, indeed, of any other; for, as we shall very soon discover, their vital movements, which such reagents destroy, are the most important of all their properties, and to be studied with the greatest advantage. The canals existing in a cell derived from elsewhere than the hairs of plants may have various origins; but I shall first point out the characters of such as are in connexion with the nucleus, distinguishing those peculiarities in which they differ from the last-named organ. These canals, being constituted by the mem- 40 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of branous matter of the nucleus, arise from the periphery of this organ, and present the greatest variety in size; but from the vital activity in them, and their consequent variability, it is diffi- cult to determine their individual dimensions. Thus, there are some whose diameter is for the moment equal in width to half that of the nucleus, whilst others do not reach the twentieth or thirtieth part of the diameter of that organ. Their number varies equally with their dimensions: at one time a dozen may be seen in the epidermic cells of Tradescantia virginica, from six to eight inthe epidermis of the flowers of Lupinus albus, of Helleborus niger, and of Lilium album, in the leaves of Crassula, in the epidermis and cellular network under the epidermis of the leaves of Aspho- delus luteus, in the hairs of the young merithalli of Lamium and of Geraniums, &c. Lastly, a certain number always escape observation, inasmuch as they cannot be all brought at once within the focus of the lens, and because during the time of ex- amination changes take place among them, both in respect to their relations and dimensions, and create an obstacle to the definite distinction of one from another. Ordinarily these canals radiate from the nucleus towards the periphery to reach the inner wall of the cell. In this course, some decrease in calibre but slightly, others traverse the distance with uniform width, and almost all frequently anasto- mose together, either directly or by the medium of lateral offsets they may give off. By this arrangement a network is produced which varies in character in each cell, and is at one time sus- pended within the cavity of the cell, at another partially attached to the cell-wall. It also happens that at those points where the canals anastomose there is an enlargement, which in its appearance resembles a nucleus additional to the true one, or, in other words, it becomes a centre to and from which a cer- tain number of currents converge or diverge. Before following these canals to their distribution on the cell-walls, we will recall some of their principal physical and chemical characters. They present themselves under the aspect of thin extensile filaments of very great transparency; their component matter has the ap- pearance of a viscid mucus, and seems not to differ, except by its greater consistence, from that which constitutes the small floating flocculi which are observed in circulating or rotatory motion in the young cells of Nitella flextlis and of Chara, in the cells of the hairs of Hydrocharis morsus-rane, and in those of the petiole of Sagittaria sagittifolia, &c. The observer unskilled in the investigation of these canals experiences some difficulty m discovering them, by reason of their great transparency, and especially when they are sought for in tissues much loaded with water, where their refracting power differs little from that the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 41 of the surrounding fluid. Alcohol of 86°, by acting upon them, slightly diminishes their transparency, and at the same time contracts them as it does also animal matter. If its application be continued, it is no unusual occurrence to see some of them, that are greatly distended, rupture and collapse, and retreat thereupon towards the nucleus, or, if the rupture takes place near the nucleus itself (which is a rare occurrence), towards the cell-wall. Hydrochloric acid causes an equal contraction of them, and at the same time diminishes their limpidity. The nitrate of the binoxide of mercury contracts them in the same way, and imparts to them the same rosy hue that it produces with all other albu- minoid matters. Liquid ammonia and the other soluble bases, when diluted, produce a contrary effect, causing them to swell up, and tending to dissolve them. From these characters it is evident that in chemical composition these canals resemble albu- men, as well as the nucleus itself; indeed, it would be difficult to conceive it to be otherwise, even were no reagents employed. This might be deemed the proper place to consider the inter- nal causes which incessantly modify the appearance and relations of these canals ; however, to avoid repetition, it seems preferable to defer these matters to the second part of this paper. Hitherto only that portion of the nuclear apparatus which lies freely in the cell-cavity has received attention in the foregoing remarks ; we will now proceed to follow its connexion with the cell-walls; and in order more correctly to delineate these rela- tions, it is important to recall some facts concerning the cell-wall itself. As early as the year 1836, M. Girou de Buzareingues had regarded the cell-wall, apart from the thickenings of its external membrane, as composed of two distinct tunics, one within the other. Subsequently Harting investigated this subject, and especially studied the action of some chemical agents on the membrane which circumscribes the cell-cavity, as well as on the other two lamine which, according to that observer, are de- posited on its external surface. From these experiments he satisfied himself, as we moreover had done by our own researches, that the internal membrane, which he named the ptychode, behaves with iodine, alcohol, and acids precisely in the same manner as the nucleus. Hugo Mohl also entered on this same inquiry with his customary skill; and his researches went to prove that this internal membrane, which he called ‘ primordial,” is to be met with in all cells that are not too old or thickened by deposits of encrusting matters. Lastly, Harting, in 1846, showed that the internal membrane adheres only feebly to the external wall of the cell. At the period (1845) when I directed my attention to this internal membranous layer, I was in igno- 42 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of rance of a portion of the labours which had been devoted to it ; and it was in the course of my investigation of the nucleus and the intracellular canals that I was led to the discovery of this lamina of the cell in all growing as well as in mature cells when these latter are not too largely coated by encrusting deposits. This lining-membrane of the cell, beg immediately in con- tact with the external wall, cannot be distinguished whilst pre- serving its normal relations, and requires the action of reagents to display it. The solution of iodine in iodide of potassium colours it more or less deeply. yellow, as it does the nucleus and its processes. In the same manner it is coloured red by the acid nitrate of mercury, and is contracted by the action of acids and of alcohol, indicating in these reactions its similarity in che- mical composition to the nucleus and the canals diverging from it. When it has been detached from the external lamina of the cell by means of alcohol, it presents itself under the form of a delicate flexuose sac, of extreme tenuity, and without appreciable structure. However, the same appearances are not met with when the examination is conducted without recourse to reagents, as it may be in the cells of the transparent hairs of Lamium, where the lining-membrane undergoes spontaneous detachment at some points of its periphery, if the hairs are allowed to wither a little. In cells so treated, the relations of this inner membrane being only slightly modified, and its vitality not being destroyed, it becomes a more easy task to prosecute its study, and the ob- server may very soon and easily convince himself that it is hol- lowed out by minute canals permeating its substance, the most capacious of which outspread themselves upon its internal aspect, whilst the most slender constitute a close network of anasto- mosing tubercles within its thickness. Nevertheless it is not necessary, in the case of the cells of the plant mentioned, to wait for the partial detachment of this lamina; for the observer, when apprised of the existence of this structure, may satisfy himself of its characters whilst the membrane still retains its normal position. When the primordial membrane is partially detached from the cell-wall, a very careful examination of the little spaces left between it and the external wall, where the separation is least wide, will reveal the presence of certain very slender filaments implanted in this outer wall; and upon slightly removing this same wall a little out of the focus of the instrument, these fila- ments may be perceived to form salient lines more illuminated than the rest of the cell-wall—a phenomenon which could not present itself if these filaments were situated in the detached portion of the primordial membrane itself. If I am not in error the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 43 on this matter, this last fact affords an explanation of the origin of the materials of the cuticle, which, from its composition, can scarcely be derived from the celiulose wall upon which it is placed. However, if this opinion be admissible—and I grant it amounts only to a hypothesis—still there are facts to prove the permeation of the cellulose cell-wall by the tubular processes derived from the nucleus. Moreover, as these processes do form an anastomotic network in the primordial membrane, it seems fair to suppose that portions of them may penetrate to the under surface of the cuticle, or very nearly to it, and that the detachment of the primordial utricle from the cell-wall is the consequence of the rupture of some of the meshes of this net- work. It has just been stated that the canals which usually radiate from the nucleus to the cell-wall break up into still smaller channels in the primordial membrane; this, however, is not always the case, for some of them, and often the most capacious, instead of stopping short at this lamina, penetrate it here and there to anastomose with other similar canals emanating from the nuclei of adjoming cells. This fact may be demonstrated by fixing, with great care, a delicate slice of the epidermis of the flower of Tradescantia virginica on a glass slide, allowing it to become half dried, so as to secure its adhesion, and then brush- ing it with a camel-hair pencil dipped in dilute solution of am- monia, which effects the removal of the cuticle. This done, a viscous network is displayed, which establishes a communication between all the cells of the epidermis, and mainly resembles the regular reticulations of some laticiferous vessels. In making these experiments, it frequently happens that a portion of this network gets removed with the cuticle: this circumstance seems to confirm the notion advanced, that the processes of the nucleus are prolonged as far as the cuticle; for if it were otherwise, it is not readily conceivable why these meshes should be removed with it from the soft-walled layer of subjacent cells. The communication of the processes of adjoming cells through their walls has a physiological importance; for it explains how it is that the animal living matter which composes them is distri- buted in the different parts of the same plant, and becomes dis- lodged, as the cells advance in age, in its passage elsewhere, and principally to the periphery, to constitute young cells, where it is known this matter abounds. (To be continued. | 4A. Dr. F. Miiller on the Rhizocephala, VII.— On the Rhizocephala, a new Group of Parasitic Crustacea. By Dr. Fritz Mixxer, of Desterro*. [Plate II.] Ratuke’s ‘ Beitraige zur Fauna Norwegens’ close with the de- scription of two animals, Peltogaster Paguri and P. Carcini, which, even on reading the admirable memoir, appeared to me to be the most remarkable of the whole collection, and have since claimed one of the first places im the series of animals which I desired to investigate for myself. For this investigation an opportunity was recently afforded me by the discovery of two nearly allied species; its results were partly so surprising and out of the circle of our ordinary ideas, that, in communicating them, it is really a comfort to me to know of the existence of the two allied forms on the European coasts, and to be able to refer other na- turalists to these in order to test my statements. The head of these apparent worms, which is inserted into the body of the host, emits roots like those of plants—hollow tubes which, being much ramified, cling round its intestines; and their brood holds a middle place between that of the Lene and Cirripedes. They therefore constitute a new section of pa- rasitic Crustacea, to which I give the name of Rhizocephala from the above peculiarity. It is to be expected that in these Rhizo- cephala a rich mine of new forms will be opened up, as each of the two Crabs which I have hitherto been able to examine in large numbers nourishes a species. Unfortunately I am desti- tute of all means of determining these animals; but they will be easily recognized by future visitors to our coast without any de- tailed description. Almost under every stone they will find a blackish-green, smooth-clawed, and uncommonly nimble Porcel- lana, and scarcely less abundantly, a small Pagurus, which seeks shelter almost exclusively in the shells of a Cerithium. The parasite of the Porcellana may be called Lerneodiscus Porcellane ; and that of the Hermit Crab, Sacculina purpurea. I shall describe first the two sexually mature animals, and then their larvee. Lerneodiscus Porcellane (figs. 1-8) occurs pretty commonly, usually single, rarely two together, attached to one of the ante- rior segments of the tail of its host, and often completely fills the space between the tail and the sternum. It has the form of a fleshy and pale-yellowish flesh-coloured disk, which may be upwards of 10 millims. in breadth by a little less in length. In front and behind, the disk is deeply sinuous, and on each side divided into from five to seven lobes, the usually enlarged ex- * Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1862. a new Group of Parasitic Crustacea. 45 tremities of which are also frequently sinuous. On the dorsal surface of the disk, which is turned towards the tail of the Por- cellana, there are often smaller prominences, similar to the above lobes, near the margin. On the ventral surface, which is turned towards the sternum of the Porcellana, the eye is first struck by the ovary (Pl. II. fig. 2, 6), which occupies nearly the whole sur- face up to the origin of the marginal lobes, but has posteriorly a broad and shallow sinus, and anteriorly a narrow emargination dividing it halfway down, and dilated into a clavate form at the posterior end. Below the ovary (nearer the ventral surface) and near the anterior margin of the disk, there lie two very considerable roundish or reniform glands (fig. 2,c), of that peculiar translu- cent appearance that so frequently characterizes the testes of the lower animals; their efferent ducts, which are at first narrow, but afterwards dilated, very thin-walled and difficult to trace, run backwards on their inner side. I suppose that they open at the hinder margin of the ovary in the brood-chamber, which will have to be mentioned immediately. Likewise under the ovary, and corresponding therewith in its outlines, but fillmg up the anterior notch, there stretches a cavity with delicate walls, containing a reddish transparent fluid : that it is a single cavity is evident when it contracts; in the extended state, one might be misled into assuming the presence of a network of tubes passing between the separate groups of eggs, issuing from a vesicle situated in the anterior notch of the ovary, the colour of the thin stratum of fluid over the more prominent eggs becom- ing almost imperceptible, and distinct only in the furrows between them. In the posterior sinus of the disk there is a considerable orifice, surrounded by a notched margin (fig. 2, a), through which water is seen to flow in and out with an alternate extension and con- traction of the body. It leads to a wide brood-chamber, the extent of which is most easily ascertained when it is inflated by means of a fine-pointed glass tube : it is then seen to occupy the whole dorsal surface, except the anterior notch of the ovary, and to extend into the marginal lobes, which are merely diverti- cula of it. The brood-chamber is usually found fully distended with eggs, which adhere especially to its outer wall, and are all of the same age. When they approach maturity, the margin of the disk appears more transparent, and finally the marginal lobes and back are covered with black points, from the eyes of the young brood, which swims out simultaneously. Two days after the swarming, I again found in one animal fresh ova, mn course of complete segmentation in the brood-chamber. The water flowing into the brood-chamber serves, in my opinion, 46 Dr. F. Muller on the Rhizocephala, only for the respiration of the eggs, which must pretty com- pletely stop its access to the body of the mother. In many other Crustacea, also, the attachment of the eggs to the body of the mother may be necessary for the development of the brood, less on account of the protection thus afforded them than on that of the constant change of water; even nearly mature eggs of Crabs and Prawns separated by me from the body of the mother have always come to nothing, whilst the females kept in confinement have hatched with certainty. In the anterior sinus of the disk is an arched chitinous shield (fig. 2.s) with concentric striz, between which brownish-coloured particles are usually deposited. From its middle there springs a short neck, which pierces through the skin of the Porcellana. Within, it is surrounded by a strong chitinous ring, 0°2 to 0°3 mill. in diameter, which is continued into a serrated crown, di- lated above, possessing a golden lustre. This crown is variously developed according to the age of the animal (A, figs. 2,3). It is produced by the chitinization of the skin of the head. Single small chitinous lamelle (fig. 3, 0) are met with sometimes above the crown, beyond which the soft skin of the head extends but little. From the upper surface of the head, on which I found no trace of mouth, eyes, or antenne, there issue numerous tubes (fig. 3, w), as much as 0°15 mill. in diameter, part of which, especially the outer ones, terminate czecally at a very short di- stance, whilst the others, ramifying repeatedly, advance towards the intestine of the Porcellana, embrace this for a long distance, even into the thorax, and at last terminate in blind loops. Not unfrequently cords, more than 0°5 mill. im thickness, formed by the twining together of numerous separate tubes, are seen taking their course towards the intestine of the Porcellana. These roots, as they may be called from both their appearance and function, contain, in their delicate membrane, numerous fat-globules, which are distinguishable, by their much smaller and at the same time uniform size, from the fatty particles in the tail of the Crab. That the roots are united through the neck with the large receptacle of fluid beneath the ovary is proved very simply and certainly by a circumstance which | was unable to explain before their discovery :—When the head of the parasite 1s removed from the body of its host, and sometimes even when the tail of the Porcellana is torn away from the thorax, an instantaneous and very striking pallescence of the Lerneodiscus takes place im con- sequence of the evacuation of the reddish fluid. Whether the cavity for the nutritive fluid, which can hardly be called the digestive cavity, commencing in blind roots, also terminates cecally, I must still leave undecided, although a narrow process a new Group of Parasitic Crustacea. 47 often seen behind the orifice of the brood-chamber makes me think an aperture in this place not improbable. I looked for males of Lerneodiscus the more zealously as Rathke observed in the brood-chamber of Peltogaster Paguri a small Crustacean, his Liriope pygmea, but hitherto without any result. In the fluid obtained from the above-mentioned large glands I have, on the contrary, seen motile particles, the exact form of which my microscope is not capable of showing. From their mode of moving, I scarcely hesitate to regard the fluid as semen. Sacculina purpurea (PI. II. figs. 4&5), the parasite of our small Hermit Crab, appears to be no less plentiful than the Lerneodiscus. After my attention had once been directed to it, I could obtain from the shells collected during a single ebb-tide thirty or more Pagurt with the parasite attached to them. The parasite adheres, in the form of a thick, slightly bowed cushion, of a purple-red colour, which was observed more than 6 millims. in length and half that thickness, to the base of the soft abdomen, and on its left and more convex side; its somewhat thicker pos- terior extremity, with the orifice of the brood-chamber, is turned towards the head of its host, and therefore towards the mouth of the shell. The point of adhesion is on the concave side of the cushion, rather nearer-to the posterior extremity ; from above, the extremities appear to be rounded-off in a spherical form. The parasite is just as much obliquely twisted as its host. If we regard the concave surface, by which the animal adheres, as the lower one, and determine the posterior extremity by the presence of the aperture of the brood-chamber, then, of the two sides, which are distinguished beneath by the intestine and ovary, and on the back by a shallow furrow, the left is most developed posteriorly, and the right anteriorly. In front the difference is inconsiderable ; but posteriorly it is so great, that the orifice of the brood-chamber is completely displaced towards the right angle of the posterior margin. This orifice forms a small longitudinal fissure, and exhibits the same currents of water as in Lerneodiscus. On the left side, the posterior margin runs out into a more or less distinct acute angle. The intestine and the ovary which lies over it form a rather narrow stripe, diminishing anteriorly and posteriorly, which extends from the point of attachment forward nearly to the anterior margin, and backward to the orifice of the brood-chamber. The whole re- mainder of the cushion is brood-chamber. The approaching maturity of the eggs is betrayed by a paler and more translucent coloration. The concentrically grooved shield at the point of attachment 48 Dr. F, Miiller on the Rhizocephala, is but slightly developed; the golden crown in the interior of the host (fig. 6, 4) differs from that of Lernzodiscus in that single broad branches issue from the ring, the wide ramifications of which gradually pass into the thinner skin of the head, whilst Lerneodiscus has acute and distinctly circumscribed teeth. The roots shooting from the head extend backwards upon the left side of the Pagurus, and form, between the hepatic tubes, a dense tuft of tubes springing from a few principal stems. From this tuft the hepatic tubes passing through it may easily be ex- tracted, and it may thus be completely isolated (fig. 4 B, w). The colour of the tuft of roots is dark grass-green: it shines distinctly through the thin wall of the body of the Pagurus. The larvee of the two parasites have so many points of agree- ment, that I describe only that of Lerneodiscus, and shall merely call attention to the differences presented by that of Sacculina. The larva of Lerneodiscus (fig. 6) is 0°2 millim. in length, 0:12 millim. in breadth anteriorly, and diminishes at first slightly, but in the last third more rapidly. At the posterior extremity it bears two short points. The slightly arched ante- rior margin runs out on each side into a short horn, somewhat bent backwards at the apex. The back is covered by a carapace which extends beyond the body in front and at the sides by 0:04 to 0:05 millim. ; posteriorly it scarcely covers the origin of the two points, and also conceals only the base of the horns of the frontal margin. On the lower surface there is, at a short distance from the an- terior margin, a large, somewhat transverse eye, usually slightly emarginate in front, from which a strong nerve may be traced backwards, but which appears to be destitute of a refractive body. I cannot see the bristles at the sides of the eye to which Max Schultze has called attention in the young Cirripedia. The point of origin of the three pairs of feet is situated nearly in the middle between the median line and the lateral margin ; the foremost originates close behind the eye, the hindermost at the end of the second fifth of the length. The foremost has a thick cylindrical basal jomt, and a short terminal joint with two long bristles; the second bears upon a thick basal joint a long outer (and anterior) branch with five, and a shorter inner one with three, long bristles ; the third pair of feet is considerably shorter and weaker than the second ; its outer branch bears four, and its inner one two, long bristles. The longer branches are annulated, but not distinctly jointed. Between the feet of the middle pair there springs a triangular rostrum, with its apex directed backward. The wide intestinal canal, which advances forward a little beyond the rostrum, is still, during the first days, densely filled with brown yelk. Be- anew Group of Parasitic Crustacea. 49 hind the last pair of feet, a slight constriction of the body is sometimes to be seen. . The larva of the Sacculina differs in having a much larger carapace extending far beyond the frontal horns and terminal points, in the want of the eye, in the more oval form of the body, and in its straight frontal horns, directed obliquely forwards. I also found in it the bristles near the anterior margin, which are wanting in Lerneodiscus, and behind the last pair of feet on each side of the intestine an accumulation of brown opake granules (urine ?), of which also I can find nothing in Lerneo- discus. From the descriptions just given, the following peculiarities may be indicated as characteristic of the Rhizocephala, which hold an intermediate position between the Siphonostoma and Cirripedia :— CrustacEA RHIZOCEPHALA. Larva with three pairs of natatory feet, of which the two posterior are biramose, with lateral frontal horns, two points at the extremity of the abdomen, and a membranous carapace. Mature animal soft-skinned, inarticulate, destitute of eyes, antenne, feet, and mouth (?). Head immersed in the host, hardened at the base into a chitinous coronet, taking up nourish- ment by means of rootlike czcal processes. Hermaphrodites with motile spermatozoids (?), without ovisacs (like the Cirri- pedia), and with a wide brood-chamber open posteriorly. GENERA. 1. Peltogaster, Rathke*. 2. Sacculina. Body unsymmetrical, sausage-shaped; head in the middle of the ventral surface. Larva eyeless, with two frontal bristles. 3. Lerneodiscus. Body symmetrical, disciform; head at the anterior margin of the disk. Larva with an eye, without frontal bristles. EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. Fig. 1. Lerne@odiscus attached to the tail of the Porcellana; slightly magnified. Fig. 2. A smaller specimen from the ventral surface, magnified 15 diame- ters: a, aperture of the brood-chamber; 6, ovary; ¢, testes (?) ; * After the lapse of more than fifteen years, the details of Rathke’s descriptions have escaped me too thoroughly to permit my characterizing this genus, or even deciding whether Sacculina should not be united with it. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 4 50 Bibliographical Notices. s, chitinous shield; k, crown. The soft part of the head is wanting. ‘ Fig. 3. The portion of the Lerneodiscus which is situated within the Por- cellana, magnified 25 diameters: 5, chitinous lamelle ; k, crown ; w, roots. Fig. 4. Sacculina purpurea, magnified 3 times: A, from below; 8, from the right side; a, 6, k, as im fig. 2. Fig. 5. The portion of the Sacculina situated within the Pagurus, magnified 15 diameters: k, crown; w, roots. Fig. 6. Earliest larval state of Lerneodiscus, from beneath, magnified 180 diameters. Fig. 7. Earliest larval state of Sacculina, from above, magnified 180 dia- meters. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. Manual of British Botany. By Cuaries CaRDALE BanincTon, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S. &c., &c., Professor of Botany in the Uni- versity of Cambridge. Fifth Edition, with many additions and corrections. London: Van Voorst, 1862. Te ‘Manual of British Botany’ continues to maintain a steadily progressive character. Every page of the new edition bears witness to the industry and care of its author, and to his endeavour to keep pace with the advance of botany on the European continent. The Synopsis of Orders has been altogether remodelled, and is now arranged on the analytical or dichotomous plan so much used by French botanists. The descriptions of several of the more difficult genera and species have been re-written. Many improvements have also been made in defining the places of growth and range of the plants; and we meet with a welcome addition in the form of a glos- sary of botanical terms, which, like the accents now placed over the Latin names, will no doubt be found very serviceable. Professor Babington thus announces his botanical creed :—‘“‘ An attempt has recently been made greatly to reduce the number of our native species. The results seem to be so totally opposed to the teaching of the plants themselves, and the evidence adduced in their favour is so seldom more than a statement of opinion, that they can- not safely be adopted. Also, it has been laid down as a rule by some botanists that no plant can be a species whose distinctive characters are not as manifest in a herbarium as when alive. We are told that our business as descriptive botanists is not ‘to determine what is a species,’ but simply to describe plants so that they may be easily recognized from the dry specimen. The author cannot agree to this rule. Although he, in common with other naturalists, is unable to define what is a species, he believes that species exist, and that they may often be easily distinguished amongst living plants, even when separated with difficulty from their allies when dried specimens only are examined. He also thinks that it is our duty as botanists to study the living plants whenever it is possible to do so, and to de- ' scribe from them—to write for the use of field- rather than cabinet- Bibliographical Notices. 51 naturalists, for the advancement of a knowledge of the plants rather than for the convenience of the possessors of herbaria—also that the . differences which we are able to describe as distinguishing plants being taken from their more minute organs, is not a proof that they constitute only a single species. It seems to be our business to de- cide upon the probable distinctness of plants before we attempt to define them; to make the species afford the character, not the cha- racter form the species”? (preface, pp. ill. iv). That our author is no servile follower of the school of Messrs. Jordan and Boreau is sufficiently proved by a remark which occurs a few pages further on, where the writings of these eminent botanists are recommended as *‘valuable for the study of varieties, for many of their species can claim no higher rank ;”” and this is coupled with the useful caution that “it is necessary to warn students against the very common error of supposing that they have found one of the plants described in a foreign flora, when in reality they have only gathered a variety of some well-known British plant. The risk of falling into such errors renders it necessary to consult such works as those of Messrs. Jordan and Boreau with great caution, lest we should be misled by descriptions, most accurate indeed, but rather those of individuals than species. Amongst plants so closely allied as are many of those called species in some continental works, it is scarcely possible to arrive at a certain conclusion without the inspection of authentic specimens”’ (preface, p. vii.). The moderate views thus taken by Professor Babington in the matter of species are further illustrated by the changes which have been introduced into the ‘ Manual’ itself, where, if, on the one hand, we find a certain number of plants pro- moted to the rank of species, on the other we find some, which in former editions appeared as such, reduced to mere varieties. Much attention has evidently been given to the subject of intro- duced plants; and we are glad to see the marks of naturalization more freely used than in any former edition. As in the ‘ Flora of Cambridgeshire,’ three signs are employed for the different degrees of “certainly,” ‘‘ probably,’ and “‘ possibly”’ introduced. A few of the agricultural weeds (e.g. Ranunculus arvensis, Fumaria micrantha, Chrysanthemum segetum, and all the species of the genus Papaver) are marked as possibly introduced ; but we observe that most of the so-called “colonists”’ are still allowed to pass as native. The following is a summary of the principal alterations made since the fourth edition :— In the genus Thalictrum, T. caleareum (Jord.) is added as a va- riety of T. minus (L.) ; T. saxatile of former editions now appears as T. Kochii (Fries), while a new species is added under the name of T. saxatile (Schleich.). Papaver Lecoqii (Lamot.) is accepted as a species distinct from P. dubium (L.). Instead of Fumaria capreo- lata, we have now three species, viz. F. pallidiflora (Jord.) [to which F. Borai (Jord.) is joined as a variety], F. confusa (Jord.), and F. muralis (Sond.). Barbarea intermedia is new to the British list, but is marked as possibly introduced. Under Viola sylvatica (Fries) are described two forms—a. V. Reichenbachiana (Bor.), and * 4 52 Bibliographical Notices. B. V. Riviniana (Reich.), with the intimation that they are probably distinct species. Moehringia trinervis has been transferred to the genus Arenaria ; Arenaria leptoclados (Guss.) takes its place as a species. The name Hypericum anglicum (Bert.) is still preferred to H. elatum (Ait.); but the plant is enclosed in brackets, as having very slender claims to be accounted British. Ulew strictus (Mackay) is reduced to a variety of U. europeus (Linn.). Lotus tenuis (Smith), which appeared as a species in the ‘Flora of Cambridgeshire,’ is once more joined to Lotus corniculatus (L.). Lathyrus tuberosus (L.) is added, with the brand of a possibly foreign origin. The genus Rubus has been thoroughly revised, and the number of species raised from forty to forty-five. Dryas depressa (Bab.) is reduced to a variety of D. octopetala (L.). Lepigonum now includes four species by the addition of L. rupestre (Kindb.) and L. neglectum (Kindb.). Sedum purpureum (Tausch) is now called 8. Fabaria (Koch). Ga- lium parisiense (L.) changes to G. anglicum (Huds.). Galium elon- gatum (Presl) is now included under G. palustre (L.). Centaurea nigrescens of former editions is reduced to a variety of C. nigra, under the name of C. decipiens (Thuill.). Centaurea paniculata (L.) adds another plant to those peculiar to the Channel Isles. Two Hieracia have changed name: H. cerinthoides is now called H. anglicum (Fries), and H. sfelligerum becomes H. floccosum (Backh.). Cicendia Candollei (Griseb.) is now C. pusilla (Griseb.). Lycitum barbarum (L.) and Veronica peregrina (L.) are added to the list of naturalized plants. Ajuga alpina is removed, with the remark that the plant figured in ‘ English Batany’ seems to be a slight variety of A. reptans (L.). Polygonum laxum of former editions becomes P. nodosum (Pers.). Callitriche peduneulata (DC.) changes to C. hamulata (Kiitz.) ; C. stagnalis (Scop.) is allowed as British, but only in the form of a variety. Parietaria erecta of former editions is now con- sidered a form of P. diffusa, the true P. erecta of Koch not having occurred in Britain. Gladiolus illyricus (Koch) is added, and ap- pears as a true native of Hampshire. Luzula Borreri (Bromf.) is just noticed, as an abortive state of L. pilosa(L.). The plant men- tioned as Potamogeton gracilis (Fries) is now referred to P. pusillus (L.); P. sparganiifolius (Laest.) takes its place as certainly iden- tical with Fries’s plant from Lapland. Carex ericetorum is new. Poa polynoda (Parnell) is united to P. compressa (L.). Festuca ambigua (Le Gall) is admitted. Triticum pungens (Pers.) is another addition to the Grasses. Triticum laxum (Fries) is changed to 7. acutum (DC.). Equisetum Telmateia (Ehr.) becomes F. maximum (Lam.). Allo- sorus crispus (Bernh.) is now called Cryptogramme crispa (R. Br.). Woodsia hyperborea (R. Br.) takes rank as a species distinct from W. ilvensis (R. Br.). The genus Pseudathyrium (Newm.) is now merged in Polypodium. Lastrea remota (Moore) is admitted as a variety of L. spinulosa (Presl). Athyrium fontanum is now placed in the genus Asplenium. Asplenium acutum (Bory) is reduced to a variety of Asplenium Adiantum-nigrum (L.). Isoétes echinospora (Dur.) is new; Lsoétes Hystrix (Dur.) is also new. Bibliographical Notices. 53 The chief alterations and amendments which appear in this edition of the ‘Manual’ will be gathered from what has been already said, and from a study of the preceding analysis. It only remains for us to observe that there is no other work of the kind in which so great pains have been taken to bring the nomenclature of our English plants into conformity with that adopted on the Continent; and it will be seen that not a few of the changes which appear in the edi- tion now before us have been introduced with this aim. We must also remark that in no other English book can we find the same care bestowed on the discrimination of closely allied species and varieties ; and, whatever be thought of the respective value of the different forms, no one can doubt the importance of a careful and discrimi- nating study of varieties, inasmuch as it is only by this means that we can hope to attain to a more exact knowledge of species. It is by a careful and judicious attention to matters such as these that Professor Babington’s ‘ Manual’ has become identified with the progress of British botany; and we have no hesitation in saying that the present edition is in every respect calculated to sustain the high reputation in which its author is so deservedly held. British Conchology; or, an Account of the Mollusca which now inhabit the British Isles and the surrounding Seas. Volume I. Land and Freshwater Shells. By Joun Gwyn JEFYREYS, F.R.S., F.G.S. &c. Nine years have elapsed since the publication of Forbes and Han- ley’s ‘History of British Mollusca’—a period brief indeed in the history of a science, but long enough to have added many species of Mollusca to our fauna, and of these no sufficient description has as yet been given. The elaborate treatise to which reference has just been made will probably remain for some time the chief illustrated work upon the subject. The high price, however, at which it was necessarily published unfortunately placed it beyond the reach of very many, who have thus been hitherto debarred from following up the study of British Conchology ; while its bulk has stood in the way of its utility, and the student has felt the want of a portable volume which should be his companion at the sea-side. The aim of the author whose Manual we are about to review is to supply this want, as well as to bring the history of the Mollusca up to our present state of knowledge, and no one has equal facilities for undertaking and satis- factorily performing the task. Possessed of an unrivalled and well- nigh perfect collection of British shells, and having, moreover, a first- rate conchological library, Mr. Jeffreys has those materials at his own command which previous writers have been compelled to glean from various sources, or search for through the cabinets of many widely scattered collectors. Moreover, he has had upwards of thirty years’ close study of his subject, and is thus thoroughly master of it, as is evidenced in the easy flowing style which characterizes that portion of his work which is now before us. The volume is divided into two parts,—the first consisting of an 54 Bibliographical Notices. Introduction, the second containing a descriptive account of the British Land and Freshwater Mollusca. The Introduction, comprised in six chapters, furnishes much valu- able information condensed into a small compass. It has evidently been drawn up with much care; and the history, habits, structure, and economy of the Mollusca are well handled. The following ex- tracts will give our readers a fair idea of the contents. On hybridism we find the following information :— “Although many surmises have from time to time been hazarded as to the production of abnormal forms of Mollusca by means of an unnatural union between individuals of different species, the only direct experiments or observations that appear to have been published on the subject have been made by French naturalists. M. Gassies, in his descriptive Catalogue of the Land and Freshwater Mollusca found near Agen, mentioned several cases of what he calls ‘ accouplements adultérins,’ which he had observed between individuals of Helix virgata and Helix Pisana, as well as between those species and Buli- mus decollatus. M. Gassies enclosed the snails, during a thunder- storm, in a vessel covered with metallic gauze; and he believed that the electricity with which the air was then charged induced the un- natural union. Great care appears to have been taken to prevent any error in the result, by selecting individuals which had not been previously fertilized, and keeping them, after fecundation, separate from any others. The product of these unions was as follows: the young of H. Pisana had perfectly white shells, their mother having the usual coloured bands; and the young of H. virgata had shells of a darker colour than that of their mother. In the other case, the product of the Helices which had been coupled with the Bulimus was various. Many had shells which were almost scalariform ; the shells of others were pyramidal ; but the greater part of them had shells exactly like that of their mother. The product of the Budimus did not differ from their maternal form. M. Gassies had also ob- served the product of a union between Helix nemoralis and H. hor- tensis, in which the colour of the lips of their shells in each case varied indifferently from brown or rose-colour to milk-white. Prof. Lecoq and M. Miergue have celebrated the voluntary nuptials be- tween individuals of Helix nemoralis and H. aspersa, as well as between Pupa cinerea and Clausilia papillaris; but these unions do not appear to have been blessed with any offspring.” To these instances of hybridism we may add that we have seen some hybrids which had been bred between Helix Pomatia and H. aspersa by an English conchologist. Few subjects have greater interest than the wonderful provision which nature makes for the reproduction of lost members among the lower divisions of the animal kingdom. The following account is given of instances of this phenomenon as evidenced among the Mollusca: “Some Mollusca which had been accidentally deprived of their feet, tentacles, eyes, and even their entire heads, have been known to reproduce them. Nearly a century ago, the experiment of decapitating unfortunate slugs and snails was conducted on a whole- Bibliographical Notices. 55 sale scale on the Continent, and every philosopher was anxious to cut off ahead. Even the great Voltaire followed the universal fashion ; and his experiences were published in the ‘ Questions sur I’ Encyclo- pédie.’ In these he mentions having operated on twenty brown slugs and a dozen snails; and he afterwards records with great pride and satisfaction ‘mes Limaces’ and ‘mes Escargots’ showing their budding heads and horns, and doing as well as might be expected under the circumstances.’’ Accident some years ago enabled us to verify the observations of Voltaire, Miller, and others upon this sub- ject. Unaware at that time of the wonderful tenacity of life in the Helices, and being desirous of examining the jaws of H. aspersa, we suddenly decapitated a snail, while crawling, with a single stroke of a penknife. We believed, in doing this, that we had adopted a plan of killing the snail which would result in instantaneous death, while the mode of death was also best suited to our immediate purpose. The shell containing the carcase was thrown from the open window into the garden, while the head was dissected, and the jaws extracted and mounted. Nothing more was thought of the matter until, about six weeks subsequently, we lighted, while gardening, upon the iden- tical snail-shell, which was easily recognizable in consequence of a repair, and to our astonishment noticed a thin filmy epiphragm closing the mouth of the shell. The mollusk was still alive ; and on tempt- ing it out by immersion in tepid water, the headless trunk was pro- truded from the shell. The poor animal’s neck was healed over, and we found that we had been unintentionally guilty of a barbarous act of mutilation. We were, however, of course extremely interested in the result, and the snail was carefully kept for future observation. It lived for a year and two or three months. During this time it was occasionally dipped in milk, with the hope that nourishment might thus be imbibed through the pores of the skin. Under this stimulus, the snail would protrude its poor guillotined remains from the shell; there were, however, but faint signs of reproduction. The last time it was seen alive, the head was represented by a knob- formed projection, on which two minute tubercular eminences repre- sented the upper antenne. The author gives a brief analysis of the various solutions which have been offered of the much-vexed question of the means by which the burrowing Mollusca penetrate stone, wood, cork, and other sub- stances, and then proceeds to propound a new theory—new, that is, to modern times,—which we give to our readers without comment. «‘T profess myself to be a follower of Sellius,”’ a Dutch philo- sopher who wrote a learned treatise on the Ship-worm about a hun- dred and thirty years ago; ‘and I am convinced that the sole in- strument of perforation, by the Mollusca, of stone, wood, and other substances is in every case their foot, or muscular disk, which is closely applied to the concave end of the hole, and is constantly supplied with moisture through the glandular tissues of the body. The strength of this organ may be easily tested by any one who tries to remove a limpet from its native rock, after having touched it, and thus given it notice of his intention. By this simple yet gradual 56 Bibliographical Notices. process, the fibres of wood or grains of sandstone may easily be de- tached or disintegrated, time and patience being allowed for the operation. When it is considered that the hole made by an adult Pholas or Saxicava is only a few inches deep, and that an aged Pa- tella scarcely penetrates a quarter of an inch into a limestone-rock, there can scarcely be a question that these mollusks have abundance of time to effect their purpose. It is said that even the hardest marble is not proof against the softest impressions, and that the big toe of St. Peter’s statue in the Vatican has been nearly worn away by the lips of fair devotees. The osculatory process is not unlike that of suction.” In the second portion of the work a uniform plan has been adopted. The animal is first described, then the shell and its varieties; and these descriptions are followed by a commentary upon the range, habits, and nomenclature of the species in question. The different parts of the animal and shell are also invariably characterized in the same order—a methodical plan which has great advantages, and which ought always to be adopted in descriptive works on natural history. Mr. Jeffreys’s computation of the number of our inland Mollusca is almost the same as that of Messrs. Forbes and Hanley, the former enumerating 121, and the latter 122 species. There is, however, considerable diversity as to the means by which these numbers are arrived at. The author of ‘ British Conchology’ has struck out of the list the following Mollusca, as being either merely varietal forms or erroneously recorded species :—Pisidium obtusale, Pfeiffer ; Pi- sidium cinereum, Alder ; Pisidiwm Henslowianum, Sheppard ; Arion flavus, Miller; Limax brunneus, Draparnaud; Limax tenellus, Miller; Helix aperta, Born; and Limneus Burnetti, Alder: and, on the other hand, he has given admission to the following :— Spherium ovale, Férussac; Pisidium roseum, Scholtz, separated from Pisidium pulchellum, Jenyns ; Anodonta anatina, Linneus, separated from Anodonta cygnea, Linneeus; Succinea elegans, Risso, separated from Succinea putris, Linneeus; Helix concinna, Jeffreys, separated from Helix hispida, Linneus; Vertigo Moulinsiana, Dupuy, now first recorded as a British species, having been taken by Mr. Jeffreys in the west of Ireland; and Vertigo alpestris, Alder, separated from Vertigo pygmea, Draparnaud. We are unable to acquiesce in many of these changes, though in the majority of in- stances the decision which the author has arrived at appears to be fully justified. But Mr. Jeffreys is not content with species; in this work he introduces to British conchologists no less than one hundred and eighty-four named varieties. It has always appeared to us that the use of names as applied to varieties is most undesirable, and therefore should only be adopted in cases where the forms are so strongly marked as either to have already been characterized as species by previous describers, or at least to be possessed of features so greatly at variance with the type that the description of the nor- mal form would of itself be insufficient for their identification. Names, for instance, have been given, we think, rightly by Mr. Dar- Royal Society. 57 win to distinguish the widely different forms of the variable species of Cirripedia; and in the case of British Mollusca, they may be retained with advantage in such genera as Pisidium, Anodonta, Littorina, &c.; but there is surely much reason to question the ad- visability of introducing varietal nomenclature on slight deviations of form and colour, in the wholesale manner which we find in this volume. For instance, there are distinguishing titles given to no less than five modifications of the well-known Cochlicopa (Zua) lu- brica. These varieties are characterized as follows :— Var. 1. hyalina. Shell greenish-white. Var. 2. lubricoides, Fér. Shell smaller and more slender. Var. 3. viridula. Shell shaped like the last variety, but greenish- white. Var. 4. fusca. Shell smaller and thinner, reddish-brown. Var. 5. ovata. Shell much smaller, and oval; spire shorter.” The views of the author are at variance with those of previous writers upon the subject of geographical distribution. It is his opi- nion that the provinces as constituted by Milne-Rdwards, Woodward, and Forbes are all too limited in area, and that the fauna of Europe should be divided into two provinces only—North European and South European. The division between these provinces he would mark by a “line drawn in the meridian of Bordeaux, which may be assumed as an arbitrary point of demarcation between the two ex- tremes of climate in Europe,” and which roughly defines the limits of the growth of the olive in France. A table at the conclusion of the volume shows the distribution of the British land and freshwater shells in these two provinces, their presence or absence in a fossil state in the Upper Tertiary formations, and their extra-EKuropean range. The illustrations consist of nine plates, which contain figures of the animal and shell of each genus described. In conclusion, we cordially recommend this work to conchologists, and look forward to its completion, believing that the portion which relates to the marine species is yet more required than that which is now before us, and that its publication will give a healthy stimulus to the study of the British Mollusca. PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. ROYAL SOCIETY. March 27, 1862.—Major-General Sabine, President, in the Chair. “‘ Theoretical Considerations on the Conditions under which the Drift Deposits containing the Remains of Extinct Mammalia and Flint-implements were accumulated ; and on their Geological Age.”’ By Joseph Prestwich, Esq., F.R.S., F.G.S. In his former paper on the subject of the Flint-implements*, the author postponed the consideration of the theoretical questions, to. * See Annals, ser. 3. vol. iv. p. 230, for abstract ; Phil. Trans. 1860, p. 277, for the entire memoir. 58 Royal Society :— allow time for a fuller investigation of the physical phenomena. The points then sought to be established were,—the artificial make of the specimens,—their position in undisturbed ground,—and their contemporaneity with the extinct animals. The points fur present consideration relate to the structural and physical phenomena, and to various theoretical questions. In the present paper the author proceeds to show that the flint- implements are found along the line of existing river-plains at heights varying from 20 to 100 feet above the rivers, and that the beds of sand and gravel in which they are imbedded can be divided into two more or less distinct series, one continuous along the bottom of the valleys and rising but little above the river-level, and to which he proposes to apply the term ‘‘ Low-level Gravels,” and the other in detached masses on the heights flanking the valleys, and at 50 to 200 feet above the rivers, and which he designates as the “ High- level Gravels*.’ Both gravels consist of débris derived from rocks in the valleys through which the present rivers or their tribu- taries flow, aud they both occasionally contain organic remains; both are, in fact, related to former plains and present valleys. This structure is then shown to apply to the Waveney, where there is a terrace of gravel on both sides of the valley at a level of about 40 feet above the river, and to which position, but to a more lacustrine condition, the Hoxne deposit belongs. Sections are given of this valley, and also of the valleys of the Lark at Icklingham and of the Ouse at Bedford, showing the constancy of this structure. In the valley of the Thames the phenomena are more complicated and are reserved for future consideration, notice bemg merely taken of the implements found at Herne Bay and Whitstable. Owing to the absence of marine newer and post-pliocene beds in the North of France, these gravels are better exhibited and more distinct, being free from rock-fragments and boulders foreign to their own origin and area. Hence it has arisen that this part of the geological series has been more investigated in France than in England. In the admirable review of the Quaternary formations by M. d’Archiac, two general conclusions are set forth. With the first of these the author perfectly agrees. It is that each large hydro- graphical basin, although the boundaries may not be marked by any important elevation, has its own exclusive drifé, and that in no case is there a mixture of the transported materials of the separate basins. The author, however, dissents from the opinion that these drifts, containing the remains of large extinct mammalia, have in any way depended on or resulted from any general cataclysm destroying these creatures nearly simultaneously over wide continents and entombing their remains in the sand, gravel, and shingle of the valleys and in the earth of the caverns; neither can he consider the excava- tion of the valleys to be anterior to the spread of the drift-gravels. * At the reading of this paper, the author used the terms ‘‘ Terrace Gravels” and “ Valley Gravels ;”’ but he thinks it better to revert, with limitations, to terms which he suggested some years since, but has not hitherto defined. = Mr. J. Prestwich on the Drift Deposits. 59 On the contrary, he refers the phenomena to long-continued river- action. An account is then given of the valley of the Somme, and it is stated that the relation between the high- and low-level gravels, which could not be proved with respect to St. Acheul and St. Roch, has been made clearly apparent at Montiers near Amiens, by the opening of a new ballast-pit on the side of the railway, some 50 feet above the level of the old gravel-pits in the valley just below, and in which latter jlint-implements were first found by the author in the spring of last year. In the upper ballast-pit a considerable number of land and freshwater shells and some mammalian bones have been found, but as yet no flint-implements. This deposit, as also the now well- known flint-implement-bearing beds of St. Acheul, are considered to belong to the high-level gravels, whilst the gravel of St. Roch and that of the old Montiers pits are placed with the low-level gravels. Both sets of gravels are also developed in the neighbourhood of Abbeville, and both there contain flint-implements ; Moulin Quignon belonging to the higher level, and Menchecourt and Mautort (village) to the lower level. In the course of last year M. Gosse discovered flint-implements in association with the remains of the Mammoth in some gravel-pits near the well of Grenelle at Paris. This bed belongs to the low-level gravel. The same gravel is also worked to the S.E. of Paris at the Gare d’Ivry, where, as at Montiers, it abuts against the hill-side. On the hill above, and 115 feet higher, there occurs at Gentilly a deposit of sand and gravel, with land and freshwater shells and mam- malian remains, precisely like that at St. Acheul. At Charonne, on the opposite side of the valley and distant 4 miles, a similar deposit, corresponding in its height above the river, in its collection of fresh- water shells, and in its mineral contents, is met with. No flint- implements have yet been found in these beds, but in every other respect they agree with the gravel of St. Acheul. These deposits, which have been described by M. Duval and M. Charles d’ Orbigny, contain the same débris as the present Seine valley, and amongst it fragments of granite derived from the hills of the Morvan, at a distance of 120 miles from Paris. It is then shown, by reference to the works of M. Leymerie, M. Cornuel and other geologists, that the valleys of the Seine and of its tributaries above Paris are occasionally flanked by heights capped with gravel containing at places remains of the Elephant, Deer, Horse, &c. In some instances these gravels rise to a height of 190 feet above the river, but the general height is from 60 to 150 feet. Sometimes they expand to a breadth of 4 to 5 miles, but they more usually form narrow belts. Various other French authors are then quoted, to show that the same structure prevails in the valleys of the Oise (where one instance of a flint-implement is recorded by M. de Verneuil), of the Marne, the Aire, the Aube, and their numerous tributaries; and in each instance it is shown that the materials, both of the high- and low-level gravels, are derived strictly from the district through which the valley passes; that only the Seine valley 60 Royal Society :— contains granite from the Morvan, the Oise slate-rock débris from the Ardennes, the Marne nothing older than oolitic débris, whilst the Thérain and the Somme valleys contain nothing but débris of the chalk and tertiary strata. The same rule applies to the English area; but the fact is not so apparent, owing to various conflicting elements pomted out by the author, who shows, by a map of the two countries, how great are the range and spread of these beds, and how large a proportion of our drift- gravels are of fluviatile origin. The High-level Gravels.—From the facts re- corded by the several mdependent observers abroad, and from his own observations in this country, the author arrives at a generai proposi- tion illustrated by the accompanying diagram, which shows,—1. D, a major valley or plain of denudation anterior to the excavation of the river- valley. 2. e, anon-fossiliferous drift on the slope and base of D. 3. C, the river-valley. 4. d, the high- and c, the low-level gravels. 5. a, recent alluvium. 6. A, the present river-channel. The high-level gravels (d) appear on both sides of the valley, and their connexion before the ex- cavation of C is pointed out. This is one of the points insisted upon by the author; the two having been generally considered as contempo- raneous, or even sometimes the higher-level de- posits as newer than those of the lower level. It is to be observed that the phenomena here re- ferred to relate to broad valleys, and not merely to river-channels. The loess is not shown in the diagram, other- wise the section represents the condition of the case on the supposition that all the parts are complete. But this rarely happens. Some low- level gravel is constant, but the high-level gravels are only occasionally preserved. Sections are then given to explain the cause of their absence —such as where the valley C being wider than the original bed of the old river which deposited the gravel d, the latter has been necessarily alto- gether removed. That the formation of the higher gravels can be owing to the action of the present rivers is clearly impossible under existing conditions ; for not only are they far above the level reached by the rivers at the highest floods, but also the sectional area of the valleys, compared to ed WN \ \\ \ A a: WLEEZEZEZELE_EE MY Mr. J. Prestwich on the Drift Deposits. 61 that of the present rivers, is so vast, that in no possible way, except by the sea, could they now be filled with water. Sec- tions are given of the valleys of the Waveney, Ouse, Somme, and Seine, showing a disproportion between the rivers at their highest floods and the old valleys, on the average, about 1: 500; and it is shown, with respect te the great flood of the Seine in 1658, when the waters at Paris rose to a height of 29 feet, that it would require a flood of at least one hundred times that magnitude to fill (with the water even in a state of rest) the valley of the Seine to the level of the high-level gravels of Gentilly and Charonne. That the isolated beds of high-level gravels must at one time have been connected in length and breadth is evident from the circum- stance of these detached parts having certain characters in common, and from the fact that if the deep valleys which they overhang, and the transverse valleys which they pass over, had then existed, they would have presented insuperable barriers to the deposition of the gravels at levels so much higher. That the transport of this drift could have been caused by the bursting of lakes, by the sudden melting of the glaciers and snow of mountain-chains, or by the transient passage of a body of water over the land is not possible, because the spread of the débris would have been more general, would have held its course more irrespective of the existing watersheds, and would have shown an amount of wear in proportion to the distance travelled ; whereas in each basin the débris is local, however low the watershed. None of the slate and oolitic débris of the Oise valley traverses into the valley of the Somme, notwithstanding the watershed between them is only six miles broad and eighty feet high. There are two ways in which the author conceives the spread of the débris in the various directions and distinct areas could have been effected ; the one by the rise of the land from beneath the sea, and the other by the action of rivers on a larger scale than the present ones. As the later tertiary deposits show the existence of seas or of lakes over the districts in question, it follows as a necessary consequence that when the land rose from beneath them, a mass of débris, in quantity and length of transport proportionate to the greater or lesser rate of elevation, must have been spread over the bottom of the channels along which the water flowed off. Nearly associated with the high-level gravels there are remnants of another drift which may have had this older and independent origm. This mode of formation could not, however, be applied to the valley gravels, as they contain freshwater shells such as live in rivers, with land shells and mammalian remains, proving the existence of a dry land. The author concludes that the high-level gravels are the result of river-action which took place at a period before the excavation of the present river-valleys. With regard to the mode of formation of these gravels, he remarks on the materials being often transported a considerable distance,—the frequent presence of large blocks or boulders of the harder rocks,—the presence of a certain proportion of angular débris,—and the commonly confused bedding and con- 62 Royal Society :— tortions. He shows this to exist in England and in France, and supports the case by quotations from various French authors. It is then shown that in the valley of the Somme these phenomena are most marked and decisive,—large blocks of sandstone, some weighing four to five tons, and derived from tertiary strata twenty to forty miles above Amiens, being found in the St. Acheul gravels, and the beds being much contorted. These contortiuns do not depend on any pressure exercised by the blocks, but result from some dis- turbing power applied and removed. To illustrate this point refer- ence is made to two sections in his former paper (Phil. Trans. for 1860, p. 299). The author conceives that the only adequate cause to produce many of these effects is river-ice, the transporting power of which is well known, whilst he quotes the observations of travellers in Northern America to prove the power of such ice to pile-up the shore shingle in great conical heaps. That the old pleistocene rivers were also larger and more rapid than the existing rivers is evident from the great quantity of débris, the prevalence of gravels, the coarseness of the sands, and the general absence of mud-sediments. Another agent of considerable power is referred to, viz. ground-ice, but is re- served for consideration further on. The Fauna of the High-level Gravels—The organic remains are considered with reference especially to the climatal conditions of the period ; and it is regretted that, owing to the scarcity of fossils except at a few places, and to the want of specific information with regard to the mammalian remains and the levels, the evidence on many points is unavoidably incomplete. The best-determined group is that of the Mollusca, in examining which the valuable assistance of Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys is acknowledged. The author gives a Table showing the group of land and freshwater shells inhabiting, in England and France, the area now described, from which comes out the striking result, that out of 109 living species 43 are found in the deposits of the high-level gravel period. There is a scarcity of Unionideze and Paludinidee, whereas Limneeidee and Helicide are very common. In many places shells are scarce or altogether want- ing; but this is common in all rivers subject to floods or bringing down much shingle. All the species are of existing forms, and all, with four exceptions, inhabit the same districts as formerly. Their range is then reviewed, and it is shown that though a considerable proportion of them are found in the South of France, a still larger proportion exist in Scandinavia, and that as many as thirty-five out of the forty-three species are met with. in Finland, including the common forms, such as Succinea putris, S. Pfeifferi, Helix hispida, H. nemoralis, H. pulchella, Pupa muscorum, Limneus pereger, L. pa- lustris, L. truncatula, Planorbis corneus, P. vortex, P. marginatus, P. albus, P. spirorbis, Bythinia tentaculata, Valvata piscinalis, Pisi- dium amnicum, &c. From these and other facts it is concluded that, while there is nothing in the Mollusca to necessitate a climate different from that of the present day, there is nothing to require restriction to an identical climate, while at the same time the tendency of deve- Mr. J. Prestwich on the Drift Deposits. 63 lopment of the group is rather in a northern than in a southern direction. The several genera and species of Mammalia are then considered, the principal being Elephas primigenius, Rhinoceros tichorhinus, Bi- son priscus, with several species of Lquus, Bos, Cervus, whilst the Reindeer is found in deposits of the same period; and an opinion is expressed that the evidence with respect to the climatal conditions furnished by the Mammalia, although slight, is more definite than that obtained from the Mollusca, and tends to show the probability of the climate at the period of the high-level gravel having been colder than that of these latitudes at the present day. The flora is scanty and of little avail. It is then remarked that if we had to depend only upon the organic remains for decisive evidence of the nature of the climate of the period under inquiry, we should at present fail to arrive at any safe and exact conclusion. If, however, these indications are taken in conjunction with the physical features, the conjoint evidence has weight and more preciseness; and the author concludes, from a review of all the facts, that there must have been a mean winter cold of not less than 20°, and possibly as low as 10°, or from 19° to 29° below the mean winter temperature (39°) of this part of Europe. The cave evidence would have helped this question. The Flint-Implements.—These works of man are first discovered in beds of the high-level gravel period. The most ordinary shapes are the large spear-head form, either with a sharp point or a flat rounded one, and with the butt end sometimes blunt, and at other times chipped to an edge. With regard to the manner in which they came to be imbedded in the gravel, it can only be surmised from their condition, from our present experience, and by considering the uses to which they could possibly have been applied. These conditions are then reviewed, and it is shown that the flint- implements rarely or never show indications of atmospheric weather- ing; that they are rarely worn, but are usually sharp and angular, like some of the large unworn flints which have been attributed to transport by ice; also that they are most common where the evi- dence of ice-action is the greatest, as at St. Acheul and Moulin Quignon. ‘The climate of the period having been severe, it is essen- tial to keep in mind the usages of tribes under like conditions at the present day. The mode of life of the Chipweyan Indians and the Esquimaux is then considered; and it is shown that a hatchet, an ice-chisel, a file and knives, of stone or metal, are all the instruments they need or use. It is further shown that when in winter the usually abundant supplies of Reindeer fail, these people resort com- monly to fishing in the frozen rivers, and then use their ice-chisels for making holes in the ice. These implements are also in daily use for keeping open the water-holes. Analogous facts are quoted from Wrangel respecting Siberia. The author suggests therefore that some of the mysterious flint-implements (such as fig. 5, pl. 12, Phil. Trans. 1860) of St. Acheul may have been used as ice-chisels. Rea- sons are then assigned for their presence chiefly at particular spots ; and reference is nade to other forms of flint-implements, all of Which 64: Royal Society :— admit of explanation, except those of a flat ovoid shape, common at Abbeville, which are unlike any instrument in use amongst any exist- ing uncivilized tribes. Notwithstanding the probable severity of the climate, it was one by no means unsuited to the existence of man, whilst the character of the contemporaneous animal life of the period was perfectly fitted for his support and sustenance. . A difficulty has been raised because hitherto no human bones have been found in these gravels; but when it is considered how scanty is the population in northern latitudes, and how dispropor- tionately numerous are the great herds of Deer, Oxen, and other animals (fossil remains of which are yet comparatively rare), this fact, taken in conjunction with the foresight of man, indicates how small are the chances of finding his remains. Nevertheless in other deposits probably of the age of these gravels, such as some of the caves near Liége described by Schmerling, the scattered bones of man have been found in association with a like mammalian fauna. The Low-level Gravels.—Connected with this subject is the exca- vation of the valleys, and the duration of that operation. The author mentions how he hesitated to assign at first a much higher antiquity to the higher gravels than to the lower gravels, or rather, admitting a difference of age, to decide whether the excavation of the valleys might not have been effected by some more powerful agency acting through a short interval of time, and by so much contracting the period by whicb the St. Acheul deposit preceded that of St. Roch ; but after repeated visits to Amiens, and looking at the ques- tion from every point of view, he finds himself unable to discover a sufficient explanation in the direction first sought, and obliged to adopt, in part, views differing materially in some points from those he at first thought to be the more probable. The low-level gravels have been frequently described, and the author confines himself chiefly to pointing out the difference between them and the high- level gravels. The climate at the one period has been described as one of considerable severity ; but there is evidence to show that in some part of the pliocene period, previous to that time, the cold was still more severe. At the period referred to the greater part of England was under the sea, whereas Switzerland and the greater part of France had emerged at an earlier or a miocene period, and there is no sufficient proof of their having been subsequently sub- merged. This was the period of the wonderful extension of the old European glaciers, which descended in the Swiss Alps, the Jura, and the Vosges to within 1200 or 1000 feet of the sea-level, the existing glaciers standing at 3400 to 3500 feet. M. Leblanc has cal- culated that such a difference of level might be accounted for by a reduction in the mean annual temperature of 123° Fahr.; but the author questions this, as the gradients of the glacier beds were much less after they had emerged from the mountain-passes. The growth of the old glaciers is rather the result of the great cold than a mea- sure of it. Still it can be conceived that their growth would be Mr. J. Prestwich on the Drift Deposits. 65 checked when the temperature had risen from the extreme cold to a point 123° below the present mean annual temperature. This would reduce the mean annual temperature here to 373°,—that of Moscow and Quebec, with which the climate at the higher gravel period has been before compared, being respectively 40° and 41°,—and would agree with what has been considered the probable mean winter temperature of that period, viz. one between 10° and 20°. Taking this as the starting-point, the effect of such conditions with reference to the quantity of ice and snow stored up during this period of cold, and to its effect on the river-discharges for many years after- wards during the period of the valley gravels, has to be considered. The melting of the winter snow would necessarily cause spring floods. Another cause of floods is the fall of rain whilst the ground is still frozen. These causes, combined possibly with a larger rainfall, must have afforded to the old rivers, either permanently or, at all events, during spring-time, a volume of water far exceeding any present sup- ply, and given them more of a torrential character. Instances are quoted from Sir R. Murchison’s ‘ Russia’ and Wrangel’s ‘ Siberia,’ and others, to show how this is still the case every spring in northern countries, causing a rise in the rivers of from !0 to 40 feet, and inundating the adjacent valleys. Other forces, however, besides an increase in the water-power, seem required to account for the excavation of the great valleys; and the author thinks that cold and ground-ice have performed a very important part in the operation. In support of this view, he adduces . the opinion of Arago and the observations of M. Leclercq and Col. Jackson, both of whom show how constantly this ice is formed in cold climates in rivers with stony and gravelly bottoms, such as the old post-pleiocene rivers must have been. Amongst other obser- vations given are those of M. Weitz, who states that in the north of Siberia the formation of ground-ice can be seen in the rivers at a depth of 14 feet and more, and that in “rising from the bottom the masses of ice bring up with them sand and stones, and let them down at places far distant from whence they came;’’ and he coneludes ‘that not only does the current occasion a change in the bed of the river by its erosion of the looser soil, which it carries from one place to deposit in another, but that the ice, which forms at the bottom of rapid rivers in very cold countries, tends also to effect a change in the beds of those rivers.” Another agent would co-operate with the last; this is the freezing of the ground and the rending of rocks by frost. Taking extreme cases, Crantz shows to how great an extent this operates in Green- land; Dr. Sutherland gives some still more striking instances on the shores of Barrow Strait, and Sir J. Richardson on the Mackenzie River. Even in our country, the disintegration produced during one severe winter on a fresh vertical section of chalk is very striking. A remarkable instance is quoted from Sir R. Murchison’s ‘ Russia,’ of a long terrace of angular blocks of limestone broken up and left by the winter-ice 30 feet above the summer level of the Dwina near Archangel. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. x. 5 66 Royai Society :— With all these combined operations, the author still doubts whether, without an uplifting of the land, the effects in question could have been produced ; and he shows that the coasts of this part of England and France are fringed here and there by a raised beach, which he correlates with the low-level gravel of Abbeville, whilst the high-level gravel of St. Acheul is correlated with beds occupying on the coast a level higher by 50 to 100 feet, marking the difference of level between the two periods. The effect of this slow elevation would be to increase the velocity and erosive power of the rivers. This action, with the other agencies before alluded to, operating upon the successive portions of the substrata, has gradually worn even those deep and long valleys through which so many of the rivers of these districts flow. According to variability in the rate of elevation, to intervals of repose, or to deflections in the current and velocity of the river, there may exist intermediate levels or terraces of gravel, and variations in the inclination of the slopes, which may add much to the complexity of the problem. The Fauna of the Low-level Gravel.—Of the forty-three species of Mollusca found in the higher gravels, thirty-four occur also in the low levels, together with seven others, making a total of forty-one species. Added to these, there are eight marine species found at Men- checourt, with the Cyrena fluminalis of the Nile and of Grays. With this one exception, they are all common living species of England and France. As with the former group, there is nothing to give a definite clue to the character of the climate of the period. The general absence of southern forms, and the preponderance of such as have a wide northern range, may, however, be noticed. With regard to the Mammalia, the number of determined species is small, and the general argument follows nearly the same line as that re- lating to the Mammalia of the higher gravels. As with the Mol- Insea, most of the species are common to the two series, whence it is inferred that there was no great or sudden break, and that the change both of conditions and of climate was transitional. There is one genus only, viz. the Hippopotamus, about which some diffi- culty has been felt with reference to the condition of climate. Four tusk teeth of this creature have been found at St. Roch, and in this country its remains are found associated with those of the Reindeer. Without pretending to explain the difficulty, the author does not see why, if the other large Pachyderms were fitted, as they are now known to have been, by warm covering and special adaptation to inhabit cold climates, this extinct species of Hippopotamus should not also have been so adapted. The physical phenomena point to an increased volume of water in the rivers, and want those marked indications of ice-action seen in the high-level gravels. Still, boulders of considerable size were trans- ported. From this fact, and the general balance of evidence furnished by the fauna, and also from the contraction of the excavation as the valleys became deeper, the author infers a gradual amelioration in the temperature, ending in the present climatal conditions. Flint-implements.—The author observes that flint-implements are Mr. J. Prestwich on the Drift Deposits. 67 nowhere so abundant in the low- as they are in the high-level gravels. The pointed lance-shaped form with blunt butts of the latter is almost wanting in the former, whereas the ovoid disks of Menche- court are rare at St. Acheul; again, flakes or flint-knives are com- mon in the low-level gravels and rare in the higher beds. Of the twenty-four specimens found in the low-level gravel at Paris, twenty- two are mere flint-flakes. The author is disposed to attach some value and significance to this difference of form, and observes that, admitting the climate to have become less severe during the low- level gravel period, it would follow that the necessity of having the strong ice-chisels would have diminished. In all these cases we are of course much limited to conjectures, seeking to make them in accord- ance with what we know of life under like conditions, and guided by the probabilities of the concurring circumstances. The mode of distribution of the flint-implements at the two periods certainly seems to afford some grounds for believing that the difference of form may arise from difference in the pursuits and occupations of the pri- mitive tribes by whom they were used—pursuits necessarily and primarily influenced by the climate and life of the period. Concluding Remarks.—The question of time is then entered upon, and it is shown that the flint-implements must be carried back through the periods of the low- and of the high-level gravels, and that they must be considered to be antecedent to the excavation of many of our great river-valleys. All these phenomena indicate periods of long and great changes. The author only slightly touches upon the formation of the Joess, which he concludes to be the result of temporary floods ; and he remarks that, so far as the question of the antiquity of the fluviatile gravels is concerned, little value need be attached to the additional element presented by this covering of loam and brick-earth. This deposit is sueceeded by the alluvial beds of the valleys connected more immediately with our own times, With regard to a measure of time, the author does not consider that either the excavation of the valleys or the life evidence of the periods furnish available data; nor does he admit the formation of the channel between England and France in the calculation ; and he gives reasons to show that this channel is of older date than generally as- sumed, and that the separation existed at the time of the high-level gravels, and had attained somewhat of its present dimensions at the time of the newer gravels. Most of the land and freshwater shells and the Mammalia had crossed over at a period anterior to this ; and, as even now at the Island of Saghaleen in lat. 52° N., the narrow strait freezing during the winter would admit of the passage of large land animals and man during the cold periods following the more extreme glacial conditions. The author, however, suggests two new modes by which he con- ceives that eventually some approximate and more exact estimate may be made both of the age of the high-level gravels and of the lapse of time since the extreme glacial period, and embracing there- fore the several periods under consideration. At present the evidence is only sufficient to indicate the possibilities of the problem, but it 68 Royal Society. will need many years of careful observation before sufficient data can be obtained for accurate calculation. Ist. With the high-level gravels there are connected a number of sand and gravel pipes, perforating the underlying chalk to the depths generally of from 5 to 50 feet, and from 1 to 10 feet wide, or more. As these are caused by the slow action of carbonic acid in the water gradually percolating through the overlying porous beds, dissolving the chalk or other calcareous strata, and gradually letting down the superincumbent drift, it is evident that, if the rate of solution and removal can be determined, one element for the calculation of a cer- tain period will be obtained. In this, various meteorological questions will have to be considered. 2nd. In conducting observations on the temperature of deep mines, wells, &c., certain discrepancies in the increment of heat at increas- ing depths and at different places have been noticed. No explana- tion of these anomalies has been offered. The author suggests that they may arise from disturbing causes originating with a former period of intense cold. At Yakutsk, where the ground is now frozen to a depth of 382 feet, the permanent line of 53° Fahr. would, taking at an average an increase of 1° for every 60 feet, be found at a depth of 1642 feet. If, from some geological change, the mean tempera- ture of Yakutsk were raised to that of our own climate, this line of 53° would undergo a vertical displacement of 1550 feet. The time required for its uniform re-adjustment over a large area would depend upon various conditions, the chief one being the conductivity of the different strata. The question, therefore, arises, whether traces of perturbation in the temperature of the outer part of the earth’s crust in these latitudes, resulting from the action of the extreme cold of the glacial period, may not yet exist, and, if so, whether they may not admit of exact determination with reference to the time elapsed since the removal of the disturbing cause. In conclusion, the author thinks that in the present state of the inquiry it would be premature to attempt to fix even approximately the lapse of time attaching to the flint-implements. It is obvious, however, that our present chronology with respect to the first appear- ance of Man must be very greatly extended ; but, like a mountain- chain in the distance, its vast magnitude is felt before an exact measurement of its height and size can be taken. Attention is then directed to the remarkable uninterrupted succes- sion of life from the pleistocene period under review to the present time—a succession so large and important, that it is not possible to imagine the occurrence of any intervening catastrophe of such a nature as to destroy the life of the period over this part of Europe at any recent geological period. ‘There are difficulties in the problem, especially the disappearance of the larger animals; but the remark- able and convincing feature in the case is the transmission to our time of so large a proportion of the small and delicate land and freshwater shells, which even now follow almost precisely the same law in their distribution as they did at these latest geological periods. Looking at the special nature of the glacial period, and seeing its Zoological Society. 69 exceptional character, the author feels strongly impressed with the belief that its effect has possibly been to give increased rigidity and immobility to the flexible crust of the earth, and to produce a state of equilibrium which might otherwise have been of long and slow attainment, whereby it has been rendered fit and suitable for the habitation and pursuits of civilized man*. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY. February 11, 1862.—Dr. J. E. Gray, V.P., in the Chair. DESCRIPTION OF SOME NEw SPECIES OF SPOGGODES AND OF A New Atuiep Genus (MorCHELLANA) IN THE COLLECTION or THE British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S., WoP-ZS., PLCS. Eve: The genus Spoggodes was established by Lesson on a coral that was described by Esper under the name of dleyonium floridum. It is characterized by the whole of its substance being membranous, very loosely cellular within, and covered externally with a layer of fusiform spicula which are most abundant round the cells. M. Milne-Edwards, in his ‘Coralliaires,’ only describes a single species. The species of the genus .in the British Museum may be divided into two groups or subgenera. I. The polypes crowded together at the end of the branchlet, and the groups more or less surrounded by larger spicula of the branchlet. Spoggodes. 1. SPOGGODES FLORIDA. The coral pale purplish-red (in spirits); stem thick, much branched, strengthened with very slender elongate purple spicules ; the branchlets short, clustered at the end of the branches, and form- ing convex heads or cells ; cells fringed with the very slender elon- gated spicules, and furnished with white, only partially contracted polypes. Aleyonium floridum, Esper, Pflanz. iii. 49, Alcy. t. 16, dry. Xinia purpurea, Lamk. Hist. A. s. V. ii. 401, from Esper. Neptea florida, Blainv. Man. Act. 523, from Esper. Spoggodes celosia, Lesson, Ill. Zool. t. 21; M.-Edwards, Coral- hatress is 129; t. Bl. f. 1. Spoggodea celosia, Dana, Zoophytes, 626, t. 59. f. 4. Hab. Australia; Sharks’ Bay (Mr. Rayner) ; Philippine Islands (H. Cuming, Esq.). * In this and his former paper the author has used the term “ pleistocene M in the sense of post-pleiocene, including also some beds placed in the newer pleiocene. 70 Zoological Society :— 2. SPOGGODES SPINOSA. The coral whitish, forming roundish spinose masses ; the stem thick, slightly branched, with very numerous short branchlets ; the spicules white, very unequal, some large and thick ; the terminal branchlet furnished, on the inner upper edge, with curved (in spirits) partly retracted purple polypes, which are surmounted and protected by the large opake-white spicules of the branchlets. Hab. New Guinea. This species is easily distinguished by the large size and opake- white colour of the spicula and the purple colour of the polypes. II. The polypes isolated in the prominent isolated spiculose sub- cylindrical cells, scattered on the sides, or forming tips of the branchlets. Spoggodia. 3. SpogGopEs un1coLor. (Woodcut, figs. 1, 2.) The coral uniform pale yellowish (in spirits) ; the spicules very slender, whitish yellow; stem erect; branches scattered in all di- rections, spreading, tapering, with few short tapering branchlets ; cells distinct, distant, spreading, subcylindrical, sometimes very slightly contracted at the base; mouth surrounded by five or six unequal prominent spicules, the one on the outer side of the cell being generally the longest ; polypes retractile. Hab. Bellona Reefs, in 17 fathoms (Rayner). 4. Spoceopes pivaricaTa. (Woodcut, figs. 3, 4.) Coral pale whitish (in spirits); stem thick, slightly branched, with very numerous crowded ramuli forming roundish lobes ; the ramuli divided at the top into three or five diverging cylindrical cells; the cells of the several branchlets forming a sort of roundish-topped cyme ; polypes contracted (in spirits), rose-coloured. Hab. New Guinea (Capt. Sir Edward Belcher, R.N., C.B.). 5, SPOGGODES RAMULOSA. (Woodcut, figs. 5, 6.) The coral dark brown-red (in spirits); stem thick, much branched, strengthened by slender, elongated-fusiform, dark-brown-red spicules ; the branchlets numerous, elongate, slender, much branched, with the cells scattered on their sides; cells distant, subcylindrical, and fringed on the edge with unequally prominent spicules, the outer spicules being generally the longest and most prominent ; the polypes pale yellowish, being generally nearly contracted into the cells, rarely prominent. Hab. Bellona Reefs, at 17 fathoms. Some of the polypes on the lower part of the branchlets seem to be somewhat crowded. ‘This species is easily known from S. florida and S. wnicolor by the general colour of the coral and by the slender- ness and length of the branchlets. It agrees with the former in the coral and spicules being red, and the polypes being more or less pro- minent and of a different colour from the coral, and with the latter Dr. J. E. Gray on new Species of Spoggodes. 71 in the form of the cell; but the cells are very differently disposed, and of a slender, attenuated form. We have in the British Museum a new form of tlie ‘“ Alcyoniens armés” of M. Milne-Edwards (Coralliaires, vol. i. p. 127), which, in my idea, form a family that may be called Nepthyade. This coral differs from the three genera of this family mentioned 72 Zoological Society :— by Milne-Edwards, in the lower part or stem being coriaceous and destitute of any spicules, and in the upper part being spiculose, and furnished with short clusters of polype-cells, giving it much the ap- pearance of the Fungi called Morchella and Helvella. MoRCHELLANA. The coral subclavate, coriaceous, subcalcareous, and loosely cellular within ; the stem subeylindrical, elongate, hard, coriaceous, and mi- nutely granular on the surface. Dr. J. E. Gray on some Claviform Pennatulide. 73 The head formed of numerous, irregularly dispersed, short-lobed prominences, which are covered at the end with diverging conical prominent polype-cells,—the lobes and cells being strengthened with superficial fusiform spicules, slightly covered with the skin of the coral ; the polypes entirely retractile. The whole substance of the coral is loosely cellular, and the lobes of the head are brittle and easily broken off when in spirits. The base of the stem is furnished with some large tubular fibres, which seem to act as roots to attach it to rocks. The spicules on the edge of the polype-cells are rugulose or spi- nulose. MOoRCHELLANA SPINULOSA. (Woodcut, p, 72.) Hab. Indian Ocean. Notes ON SOME SPECIMENS OF CLAVIFORM PENNATULIDE (VERETILLEZ) IN THE COLLECTION oF THE BrirtisH Museum. By Dr. Joun Epwarp Gray, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S., F.L.S., &c. Since my paper, entitled “ Revision of the Family Pennatulide, with description of some New Species in the British Museum,” was printed in the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for January 1860, we have received several specimens of club-shaped Sea-Pens (Veretillee) which further illustrate the species of this roup. 3 Batenace Milne-Edwards, in the first volume of his ‘ Coralliaires,’ published in 1857, divides the Claviform Pennatule into three genera, thus— 1, Liruarta, with a distinct, well-developed, quadrangular central stony axis. 2. VERETILLUM, with a rudimentary hard central axis. 3. CAVERNULARIA, without any hard central axis, but with four large longitudinal central cells. Dr. Herklots, in his ‘‘ Monograph of the Pennatulida,”’ in the ‘ Bijdragen tot die Dierkunde’ for 1858, divides them into four genera, adding the genus Sarcobelemnon to the above list. The species of Lituaria and Sarcobelemnon are found in the Indian and Australian Oceans, and those of Veretillum and Cavernularia are con- fined to the Mediterranean. The Veretillee in the British Museum appear to belong to only two genera, viz.— 1. VeretTiLttuM. The club with a short thick base, with four more or less large longitudinal cells in the centre. 2. Lirvaria. The club with an elongated base, and with a strong, subquadrangular, central, more or less stony axis. The former group seems to be synonymous with the genera Vere- Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 6 74 Zoological Society :— tillum and Cavernularia of Milne-Edwards and Sarcobelemnon of Her- klots. I call the first genus by the name Veretillum, because I find that the specimen of Pennatula Cynomorium which we have in the British Museum does not appear to have any rudiment of an axis, and has the four large longitudinal cavities in the centre of the coral which are described as characteristic of Cavernularia and Sarcobe- lemnon. Can the septa between these cells have been considered as the rudimentary axis? VERETILLUM. The pen club-shaped, with a short, thick, fleshy base ; the upper part of the club short and thick, or more or less tapering, covered with close longitudinal rows of polypes ; the interspaces between the polypes marked with very close, opake, imbedded granules; the opening of the polype-cells, when contracted, transverse ; the middle of the coral furnished with four quadrangular tubes, and without any hard central axis. 1. VERETILLUM CyNOMORIUM. Veretillum Cynomorium, Pallas, Spic. Zool. t. 13. f. 1-4. We have a single specimen of this species in the British Museum, which I believe is the specimen described by Ellis, on the Sea-Pens, as Cynomorium (Phil. Trans. 1765, vol. lili. 434, t. 13. f. 3); for it has the label on it, written by my late uncle who died in 1806, like the label on the specimen of Stren which was presented by Ellis. It certainly has no appearance of any hard central axis, un- less the rather hard septa between the central cells may be considered as an axis; if they are, then the same kind of axis is found in each of the other species which I have referred to this genus. 2. VERETILLUM AUSTRALASIA. Sarcobelemnon Australasia, Gray, Ann. and Mag. N. H. 1860, v. 24 Al tL The polypes far apart. Hab. Australia; Port Essington (J. B. Jukes, Esq.). This specimen chiefly differs from the ’. Cantori@ in the substance of the coral being harder, and in the cells of the polypes being fur- ther apart and more scattered, not appearing to be placed in such regular and close longitudinal rows. ‘The specimen seems to have been placed in very strong spirits when first collected, as almost all the polypes are retracted, and the base of the club is wrinkled, as if strongly contracted, and the cavities in the axis are smaller; but all this may have been produced by the sudden and great contraction of the animal at the time it was preserved. 3. VERETILLUM CANTORIZ. Cells of polypes close together, in regular longitudinal series. Hab. Penang (Dr. Cantor). We have a large series of specimens of this species from Penang, Dr. J. E. Gray on some Claviform Pennatulide. 75 where, I am told, they are collected for food. They differ exceed- ingly from each other ; and if they are all of the same species, as I suspect is the case, it shows how difficult it is to give a character that shall define the species of the genus. Some are short, thick, oblong, rounded at each end, varying from 2} to 3 inches long, with a short thick base to the club of about half an inch long. In most of the specimens of this form, the polypes are retracted ; but in one, some of them are expanded. In the second group the club is much larger, varying from 3 to 7 or 8 inches long, and is attenuated upwards. The base of the elub is short and thick, as in the former group of specimens. The polypes are generally expanded; they are much more slender and more elongate than the polypes of Lituaria australis. Probably the Jength and tapering form of these specimens may be dependent on their having been placed originally in weaker spirits. The size of the cavities or tubes in the specimens also differ; they are largest in the short broad specimens, but very distinct in all. I am therefore inclined to believe that there are only two distinct genera of the Claviform Sea-Pens. LITuUARIA. The pen elongate, the upper part slender, tapering, with close longitudinal rows of polypes; the interspace between the polypes covered with close longitudinal rows of distinct circular pores; the opening of the polype-cells, when contracted, longitudinal; the lower part elongate, subcylindrical, smooth; the axis hard, stony, distinct, well developed, quadrangular. The lower part of the coral, which is destitute of polypes, is elon- gate, often one-third and rarely nearly half as long as the upper polype-bearing portion of the club; the length of the stem, as compared with the club, appears to differ, within certain limits, in different specimens of the same species from the same locality, but it is always larger and more slender than the same part in the genus Veretillum. The specimens of this genus in the British Museum appear to separate themselves into two very distinct groups, which may repre- sent so many species, or may only depend on the manner in which the specimens have been preserved, or even on the strength of the spirit in which they were at first immersed. In four specimeng, from Penang, collected by Dr. Cantor, which are slender and whité; all the polypes are entirely contracted, leaving a compressed slit over the cell, except in one of the small specimens, in which a few of the polypes are partly exserted ; they are pale brown. In one of the specimens the fleshy part of the base is thickened, and has contracted so much that the hard axis is exserted nearly an inch beyond the base. In this specimen the base of the club is much shorter and thicker than in the others. From this specimen I am led to believe that the length and slenderness of the club in the genus, when in spirit, is preserved by the rigidity of the internal axis, These specimens are probably the Lituaria phalloides of Milne- 6%* 76 Miscellaneous. Edwards (Coralliaires, vol. i. 217), founded on the Pennatula phal- loides of Pallas (Mise. Zool. t. 13. f. 5, 6, 7, 8). The second group of specimens were collected by Mr. Rayner in Sharks’ Bay, Australia. They are three in number; they are softer and less contracted than the preceding; the pores on the surface are more distinct, and are furnished with more or less dark polypes, which are all expanded. The polypes in one specimen (which is in the most perfect condition) are all entirely of uniform black- brown colour. In one of the other specimens (also in good con- dition) the polypes are pale brown, with a broad black lower ring at the upper part of the tubular body, near the base of the arms. In the other specimen (which is imperfect) the polypes are all pale brown, like the coral. In all the three specimens the polypes at the lower half of the club are further apart than they are at the tip; this is especially the case in the specimen which has the dark ring on the polypes, in which the polypes in the lower part of the club are very far apart and few in number, and appear as if placed in longitudinal lines, I should propose to call this species provisionally Lituaria australis. MISCELLANEOUS. On the Animal of Zonites excavatus, §e. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural Mstory. GENTLEMEN,—In the first volume of my work on ‘ British Concho- logy,’ which contains an account of the Land and Freshwater Mol- lusca, Zonites excavatus is one of the very few species of which I could only give a meagre and unsatisfactory description of the animal. I am now fortunately enabled to supply this deficiency, having last week found and observed live specimens of the species in question near Tunbridge Wells; and this new locality will also be interesting to those who study the distribution of the British Mollusca. Body slender, greyish white, with three or four raised lines along the neck: mantle closely covered with milk-white specks : tentacles diverging; upper pair rather long and cylindrical, coarsely granu- lated ; lower pair short: foot thick, obtusely rounded in front, and gradually narrowing behind to an angular or keeled point. The slime is rather copious and iridescent. In the same spot were Zonites alliarius, Z. nitidulus, Z. purus, Z. radiatulus, Z. fulous, and Helix rotundata. The pulsations of Z. alliarius varied within the space of ten mi- nutes, having from 48 to 56 beats per minute. I am, Gentlemen, Yours faithfully, J. GwyN JEFFREYS. 25 Devonshire Place, Portland Place, June 4, 1862, Miscellaneous. 77 On the Occurrence of Gyrodactylus elegans in Shropshire. To the Editors of the Annals of Natural History. GenTLEMEN,—I have to record another locality for the occurrence of this singular and highly interesting parasite, which, though first discovered by Nordmann, some years ago, has only recently (January 1860) been known to oceur in this country, having been found on Sticklebacks in the Hampstead ponds by Mr. Bradley (Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean Society, 1860, vol. v. p. 209). Dr. Spencer Cobbold has also recorded the occurrence of Gyro- dactylus in great numbers in the Serpentine. With these two exceptions, I am not aware of any other recorded localities for the Gyrodactylus. I first observed this parasite in May last, on the pectoral fins and the tail of some young Sticklebacks (Gasterosteus leiurus), which I had hatched from a nest of ova brought home from a ditch on the Eyton moors. On close examination of the father-fish, I discovered that he was literally covered all over the surface of the body with Gyrodactyli; there must have been two or three hundred of these creatures infesting him. I found, on the death of the fish, that his gills were likewise full of them. I subsequently examined freshly captured specimens from another ditch which abounded with Gas- terosteus leiurus and contained also a few specimens of the much more uncommon G. pungitius, and found Gyrodactyli on most of them, only in moderate numbers. When once the eye has become acquainted with these minute parasites on the fin of a fish, their detection by means of a lens is an easy matter. All the specimens I examined were of the same species. I suspect that careful observation will determine the Gyrodactyli to be not uncommon parasites upon various freshwater fish. I remain yours truly, W. Hovenron. Preston Rectory, Wellington, Shropshire, June 6, 1862. Experiments on the Migrations of the Entozoa. By MM. Povcuet and VERRIER. One of the authors, in a work published in 1859, gave a careful - exposé of the doctrines of the naturalists who have studied the meta- morphoses of the Entozoa and their peregrinations, in Germany and Belgium. The result of such an investigation, they say, is to raise great doubts upon these points; and they quote the opinion of M. Davaine, ‘“‘that the question still waits for a sound criticism and fresh investigations.” A naturalist asserts that he has succeeded nine different times in 78 Miscellaneous. producing Tapeworms in the intestines of the Dog, by administering Cenuri. The authors have had as much success as this experiment- alist ; indeed, their success has been too great, for they sometimes obtained more than they had sown. After briefly describing the supposed relation between the Cenurus cerebralis of the Sheep and the Tenia serrata of the Dog, and the cycle of development by which this is considered to be set up, the authors proceed to discuss the difficulties in the way of these views. Cenurus cerebralis, according to Siebold, Van Beneden, and others, is the larva of Tenia serrata. On the contrary, this Tenia serrata is produced by Cysticercus pisiformis, according to Kiichenmeister, Van Beneden, Baillet, and Siebold himself, or by Cysticercus cellu- lose and C. tenuicollis, according to other statements of Siebold. This produces a great embarrassment. Referring to the general view that the Tenie found in the intes- tines of the Carnivora are due to Cystic worms inhabiting their prey, the authors inquire how the Sheep, which never devours animal food, sometimes has its intestines so filled with T’enie as to be abso- lutely obstructed. This was the case in an epidemic occurring in 1852 amongst the sheep in the environs of Rouen. Amongst the causes tending to produce uncertainty in the results of experiments are the natural frequency of the animals which are said to be communicated, and the practice of some experimentalists of administering worms at several times: the unsuccessful experi- ments also should be noted ; but of these frequently no account has been taken. With the view of rendering their experiments exact, the authors counted the number of heads or Scoleces administered each time, and always ascertained that they were completely developed and alive. In a dog which had swallowed Cenuri sixteen days before, the authors found Teenie of only 2 millimetres in length, whilst others measured 20 millimetres. In the same time an experimentalist ob- tained Tenie which had reached a length of 80 millimetres. In another case, when the experiment had lasted twenty-three days, they found in the same dog Tenie of 4 millimetres in length, and others which had reached the length of 60 centimetres. It is im- possible that the sccleces implanted on the same vesicle, and all of the same age, should have produced Teenie presenting such a differ- ence of size as this; but the authors remark that, had they adopted the plan of administering the worms several times, such an experi- ment would have appeared a positive demonstration. They administered to a dog sixty scoleces of Cenurus; nm eleven days its intestine contained thirty-six Tenia. In another case, sixty scoleces were given, and in eleven days fifty-one 7'’enie were found. But in a third case, in which the dog also received sixty scoleces, seventy-eight T@nie were discovered in its intestine at the end of sixteen days. Another case gave results calculated to raise still Miscellaneous. 79 greater doubts. One hundred scoleces of Conurus were given to a young dog taken from its mother and carefully isolated. Twenty days afterwards its intestine contained 237 Tenia, the size of which varied from 4 to 60 millimetres. Other experiments afforded abso- lutely negative results. The authors also made experiments as to the production of the Cenurus in the Sheep by the administration of proglottides of Tenia serrata. To each of two young sheep they administered ten seg- ments of Tenia serrata, all containing a number of perfectly mature eggs, in which the embryo, furnished with its hooks, could be distin- guished. These sheep never presented any of the phenomena of staggers, which are stated to occur from the fifteenth to the twentieth day after administration. Not to be in too great a hurry, they were kept for fonr months. Then, although they appeared perfectly healthy, they were killed in order to allow the examination of the brains: no trace of Cenurus could be detected. From this, and considering the doubts arising when the assertions of experimentalists are attentively examined, the authors do not hesitate to affirm that the progeny of the Tenia of the Dog never arrives at the brain of the Sheep. Whilst denying the necessary transmission of the Entozoa as described by most modern zoologists, the authors recur to the old notion that the Cystic worms are produced from germs of Tenie which have found their way into places not fitted for them.—Comptes Rendus, May 5, 1862, p. 958. On the Early Stages of Microdon mutabilis. By M. Exopirt. An enigmatical animal, which appears to be a Mollusk, and yet, on closer examination, exhibits many characters foreign to the Mol- lusea, and presents few points for comparison with other animals, was known to some of the older zoologists, such as Aldrovandus, but was first described and figured by Von Heyden in 1823. At p- 1247 of the ‘Isis’ for that year is Von Heyden’s memoir “ Ueber ein sonderbar gestaltetes Thierchen,’’ which he found in 1818 at a considerable elevation on the Hoche Mountain, under the moist bark of an oak-stump standing near water. Only one example could be found. Von Heyden thought that it was not a larva, but rather a Mollusk which would prove a new and very remarkable genus. In the following year Spix described, before the Academy of Sciences in Munich, a new genus of terrestrial Mollusca to which he gave the name of Seutelligera Amerlandia, because he found it at Amerland, on the Stahrenberg Lake, in the interior of old rotten oak- and pine- stumps still rooted in the ground, always in company with the Her- cules and Red Ants (‘ Hesperus,’ No. 295). In 1825, Von Heyden called attention, in the ‘Isis,’ to the great resemblance between the animals described by Spix and himself, but expresses his opinion 80 Miscellaneous. that their characters are those of two nearly allied but distinct ge- nera. For his animal he proposes the name of Parmula cocciformis. In 1832, Schlotthauber discovered the animal described by Spix in the neighbourhood of Gottingen, and, following its development, found it to be the larva of Microdon mutabilis. In 1839 he coni- municated to the Meeting of Naturalists in Pyrmont a full descrip- tion of the metamorphoses of this species, which he proposed pub- lishing ; but it seems never to have been printed. The author, in 1844, met with bodies resembling coffee-beans, with a reticulated surface, on the inside of the bark of oak-stumps in the Neuhauser Forest, from which he obtained specimens of Micro- don mutabilis. He afterwards found single pupe in similar stumps inhabited by ants, and finally, also a larva, which, however, soon died. M. Sauter has also met with these larvee; and Dr. Hensche, whilst residing at Kreuth, found amongst earth-dwelling ants three Mollusk-like animals, which he preserved in spirits, and which turned out to be larvee of Microdon. As the Microdon mutabilis is a British species, it hight interest some of our entomologists to look out for the singular larva here referred to, as the nature of its metamorphosis, and especially its relation to the ants with which it seems to be always associated, appear to be by no means cleared up.—Schriften der Konigl. phys. okon. Gesellschaft cu Konigsberg, 1862, Sitzungsberichte, p. 9. On a New Species of Bird of the Genus Lipaugus of Bove. By P. L. Scuater, M.A., Pu.D., F.R.S. LIPpAUGUS SUBALARIS. Viridescenti-olivaceus, dorso imo, ventre et cauda cinerascentio- ribus, cauda fere tota cinerea; erisso albicante; pilei semt- cristati plumis interne nigris : gutturis et pectoris plumarum scapis conspicue flavicanti-albis : plumis axillaribus et sub- alaribus lete citrino-flavis : alis fusco-nigricantibus, extus dorso concoloribus : rostro et pedibus nigris. Hab. In rep. Aiquatoriana, ad ripas fl. Napo. This Lipaugus will be easily recognized by the beautiful bright yellow colour of the axillaries and under wing-coverts and the slightly crested head, the feathers of which are black underneath. In struc- ture it appears to be a member of the group dulia: the outer and middle toes being completely united to the end of the second pha- lange, and the form otherwise resembling that of Lipaugus hypo- pyrrhus. The single example in the collection of the British Mu- seum, acquired in 1857, is labelled “‘ Rio Napo.’’—Proc. Zool. Soc. May 28, 1861. THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. [THIRD SERIES. ] No. 56. AUGUST 1862. VIII.—On the Age of the New South Wales Coal-Fields. By the Rev. W. B. Cuarxe, M.A., F.G.S. &c. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. GENTLEMEN, In the February Number of the ‘ Annals’ (No. 50) you have printed a communication from Professor M‘Coy of Melbourne, in which, under the head of the “‘ Upper Paleozoic” and “ Meso- zoic” Periods, he introduces some remarks reflecting upon the differences of opinion existing between himself and me respecting the position of the Coal-beds of New South Wales, and marking by ztalics, not only in the text, but in the notes, certain expres- sions which appear to me as unjust to himself as they are also to me. When the paper, from which the portion is republished, first came out, I replied in the postcript of a “ Review of Recent Geo- logical Discoveries in Australasia” (a copy of which I herewith forward to you), read before the Philosophical Society of New South Wales in November 1861, to the italicized passages in Professor M‘Coy’s essay of which I complained ; and in the body of my paper I made reference to the state of the question as to the evidence obtained. You will, probably, be willing to do me the justice of allowing the readers of Mr. M‘Coy’s remarks to know what may be said on the other side. But I hope you will also allow me to add in this communication a brief reply to the notes in pp. 142, 143, 144, which I had not seen till I read them in your Journal. The existence of the differences of opinion between Mr. M‘Coy and some geologists at home, as well as here, is too well known to make necessary any further recapitulation of them than may be found in my publication above mentioned. Mr. M‘Coy, in 1847, maintained that our New South Wales Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. ff 82 Rev. W. B. Clarke on the Age of coal was “Oolitic,” and as recently as August 18, 1857, he stated before the Select Committee of the Melbourne Parliament that the coal in Victoria, which he considers the same as that in New South Wales, is “really to be compared to those thin Oolitic coal- fields on the Yorkshire coast.” There can be no mistake as to this being the position he assigned to our Coal-beds Jess than five years ago. To this I was all along opposed; and, from circumstances in the experience of numerous other geologists (among them Jukes, Stutchbury, Dana, &c.), as well as my own, in common with them, I held the opinion, right or wrong, that our New South Wales coal is not “oolitic,’ but very much older, lyimg as it does over an enormous area in immediate juxtaposition with and succession to beds which Mr. M‘Coy and other geologists in England have regarded as “ Paleeozoic” and Lower Carboniferous. All Mr. M‘Coy’s knowledge of the fossiliferous evidence on this question, previously to his arrival in Victoria, was derived from the examination of collections I had sent to England. Since his arrival, his attention has been directed to the palzon- tological evidence collected in Victoria; but he has never yet set foot on the New South Wales territory, and consequently knows nothing whatever, by observation, of the position of the Coal- beds of this colony. I admit, nevertheless, it is possible he may be right in his views, and that all observers in New South Wales have been wrong. But when he quotes, in his note at p. 142, evidence from Victoria, and puts in italics the assertion that “no such sectional evidence has been found by Mr. Selwyn, the Government Geologist [of Victoria], in his careful surveys of the coal-bearing sections of Victoria and Tasmama,” it must be borne in mind that this assertion is without any weight as concerns Victoria, because Mr. Selwyn himself has stated in print, in the same ‘Catalogue of the Victorian Exhibition, 1861,” in which Mr. M‘Coy’s original paper appears, that “the only fossils that have been found” in the Upper Paleozoic rocks of Victoria are a Cyclopteris and Lepidodendron, and even the position of these is assigned as “ only provisional ;” “they may,” he says, “ be Lower Mesozoic.” How, then, can “sectional evidence” from Victoria be used in argument, seeing that there no zoological fossils to compare with those of New South Wales? As to Tasmania, Mr. Gould agrees with me rather than with Mr, Selwyn. I have published a list of beds at Stony Creek, near Maitland, in which the Paleozoic fossils are found over and below and around a set of coal-beds having the same general dip and dis- arrangements as the supposed older beds; and in the Coal-beds occur the plants which Mr. M‘Coy, up to 1857, considered the the New South Wales Coal-Fields. 83 equivalents of those in the cliffs near Scarborough. In Mr. M‘Coy’s note he rejects this list, because a section of the neighbourhood for twelve miles or more had been exhibited to show the position of the Coal-beds, and this was not drawn on equal scales, and because a fault occurs at Bed No. 5, as any one could see from the fact of the dip mentioned at the head of the list. But this fault, which cuts through all the beds alike, could not put younger beds under older. Mr. M‘Coy thinks I have relied solely on this section; but there are many other localities in New South Wales which speak as mysteriously as Stony Creek, though no particular notice of them has been as yet taken in discussions. There does not ap- pear to me anything more anomalous in finding an intercalation or a colony of so-called Jurassic plants in so-called Lower Car- boniferous beds, than in finding the Carboniferous fauna amidst the Belemnite-beds of Savoie. But I am quite ready to give up Stony Creek on sufficient proof that its evidence is not trust- worthy. A kind of charge against my honesty is alleged in the note at p. 143. This demands an explanation. In 1849 I requested the late Admiral P. P. King to take with him to England some additional New South Wales fossils. Among them was a sup- posed Lepidodendron, found by my late friend Leichhardt about seventy-five miles from the coal-beds of Mount Wingan, and only a short distance from another locality where the supposed Jurassic fauna exists. Mr. M‘Coy rejected this, not solely be- cause it did not come from the Gilossopteris-beds, but (though he says nothing about it in his paper) because, as I did not find it myself, it was not admissible in evidence, and because it was probably a European specimen, being like L. tetragonum of the English coal-fields! It is clear, therefore, that, in 1849, Prof. M‘Coy did not believe in the existence of any Upper Palzozoic plants in New South Wales. Since that time, Mr. Stutchbury and myself collected such Lepidodendra abundantly, as may be seen by reference to our Geological. Reports. One was figured by Mr. Stutchbury in 1858. In 1835, Sir T. L. Mitchell discovered one. In 1852 I found, in the same beds at Goonoogoonoo with the Lepidoden- dron, a Knorria and a Syringodendron, which Mr.M‘Coy himself saw and recognized at Melbourne in 1860; and in 1855 I ex- hibited at Paris a Sigillaria, not formed from ‘ misconceptions of portions of ordinary Mesozoic forms,” as is hinted in the note at p. 148, but acknowledged to be genuine articles of the New South Wales flora, though certainly the late Professor E. Forbes doubted the Leichhardt specimen to be a Lepidodendron* ; and * Lectures on Gold, Lect. 2. p. 53. Ah 84. Rey. W. B. Clarke on the Age of since that, Mr. Salter has pointed out to me, in a letter, that mee are essential differences between this plant and ordinary orms. Whether, therefore, we are all right or all wrong, the sono- rous periods in which Professor M‘Coy introduces his Gipps Land Lepidodendron as the mate of the “only characteristic Paleozoic Carboniferous genus,” and “of the same species as the only Paleozoic coal-plant ever collected in New South Wales,” ‘found by the lamented Leichhardt near the borders of Queens- land,” hundreds of miles from the beds containing the (as I be- lieve) Mesozoic plants, weigh but little with those who know (as Mr. M‘Coy himself must know) that the actual position of the Lepidodendra-beds is as much in the dark as the antiquity of the Glossopteris-beds. These beds are not actually identical. And I have never said they were*; but I have held the opinion that they are both parts of a descending Carboniferous formation; and I know, from actual observation, that if the Glossopteris-beds lie imme- diately over the Lower Carboniferous fauna in the Illawarra and on the Hunter, so the Lepidodendron- and Syringodendron-beds lie over the Paleozoic Carboniferous fauna of the Peel River, for which Mr. Odernheimer’s memoir in the ‘Quarterly Journal of the Geol. Soc.’ may be taken in evidence without consulting my own Reports. At this moment, Mr. M‘Coy does not know with any precision what stratigraphical relationship exists between the beds with Lepidodendra and those with Glossopteris ; nor does he know, from observation or geological sections, how far they are apart. A Lepidodendron has been reported to me from the Glossopteris-beds of Newcastle by the inspector of coal-fields ; and from the same locality a Palgozoic fish, named by Agassiz and figured by Dana, was taken in a bed of shale filled with all the distinguishing plants of Professor M‘Coy’s Oolitic flora. The discovery of a Secondary formation in Queensland during * J have already affirmed the contrary. Neither in the list I gave of supposed genera in 1847, and of which some are held not to be verified, nor in the subsequent remarks upon it, is there any statement to show that they all came from the same beds. On the contrary, the localities mentioned are numerous and ranging over a very extensive area. It would be uncandid in the highest degree not to admit that there may have been misconceptions of genera in that list, made at a time when no reference could be had to collections for comparison. But Lepidodendra are men- tioned from localities where they have since been verified. The ‘‘Uloden- dron from Pine Ridge, Wellington,” also agrees in geological position with Lepidodendra from numerous other localities. There are but jive members out of the twenty that can justly be excluded. It must also be remem- bered that at that time I was single-handed, without a fellow-worker, and with no acknowledged palzontologist to appeal to. Moreover, greater mis- takes than any alluded to have been made by paleontologists of eminence. the New South Wales Coal-Fields. 85 the present year, under my auspices, and by a friend of mine, the particulars of which I have given in p. 27, ‘ Recent Geolo- gical Discoveries,’ &c., has not helped us out of our dilemma. Mr. M‘Coy sees in it a total overthrow of my positions, and states that the Wollumbilla fossils “ ave the marine equivalents of exactly the same age as that he assigns to the plant-beds, 1. e. Lower Mesozoic, not older than the base of the Trias, and not younger than the lower part of the great Oolite.” In these fossils the Professor detected “numerous Lower Oolite, Liassic, and Triassic forms, and among them a distinct species of the Muschelkalk genus Myophoria, &c.” Now, if they are “the marine equivalents of exactly the same age” as the Scarborough Oolites, which was Mr. M‘Coy’s plant-horizon in 1857, how came the Liassic and Triassic, and especially the Muschelkalk species there? This apparent paradox is adroitly veiled under the word Mesozoic, which word has gradually crept into the discussion, and took precedence in 1860. “ Meso- zoic”’ everywhere supplants “Oolitic” in Professor M‘Coy’s present essay, and he speaks of his having held the same views respecting the “ Mesozoic” plants in contradistinction to the Paleozoic fauna fourteen years ago, though, ten years after, he maintained the supremacy of the “‘ Yorkshire Oolite.” It is, notwithstanding this convenient merging of the Scar- borough horizon in Mesozoic indistinctness, perfectly clear that if I have adopted “a new view” (p. 144, note), so has Professor M‘Coy; and as he is happy in knowing that I have done so, I am equally happy at finding that he is getting below the Oolite into a region where, perhaps, our views will meet after all. Judging from my own examinations, and from the admission of Mr. Selwyn, I do not believe there is at present any evidence on which can be founded a thorough comparison in Victoria with facts patent in New South Wales. In chap. xiv. of my ‘ Researches in the Southern Gold Fields of New South Wales,’ I have stated as distinctly as I could the natural divisions in the series comprising the beds above, with, and below the coal-seams of that colony ; and in the ‘ Quarterly Journal of the Geol. Soc.’ vol. xvii. p. 858, &c., I have repeated that arrangement, specifying only the plants determmed by M‘Coy, Morris, and Dana in each division. Now, according to my view, the Victoria Coal-beds belong to the upper and perhaps second division of the New South Wales series. In Gipps Land I know, from my own researches, that there do exist limestone-beds with fossils of Paleozoic age, pro- bably upper ; and it is in another part of that large region that Mr. M‘Coy’s Lepidodendron was found! But under the Victoria Coal-beds no such deposits have been found by the geologists of 86 Rev. W. B. Clarke on the New South Wales Coal-Fields. that colony as occur in New South Wales, in the Illawarra, or about Maitland on the Hunter River. And from what I per- sonally know, I believe the Gipps Land Upper Paleozoic Fauna is lower in the series than the beds just alluded to. Mr. Dana considered those Hunter-River beds to be either Carboniferous or Permian. If so, the beds above, including the coal-seam, may range from Permian to Triassic, or even higher. That is what I am willing now to admit, and, further, that it is possible the Wollumbilla rocks may be ‘the equivalents of the Wiana- matta, or upper, division of the New South Wales Carboniferous series. But this at present is a matter of conjecture. Acknowledging the value of that discovery, and rejoicing to have been able to assist in it, I repeat that, at the present time, we do not know whether it bears or not on the actual subject of the controversy. No paleontologist has yet compared the Queensland Carboni- ferous flora with that of New South Wales or Victoria; and we have yet to learn the accuracy of the information which I have collected and am now collecting by the aid of observers on the Maranoa and Fitzroy Downs, all of which, however, tends to show that the Wollumbilla “ Lower Mesozoic fossils” come from a higher horizon than the Urosthenes- and Glossopteris-beds of Mulubimba. Professor M‘Coy states that I requested him to “ determine the geological epoch to which the Wollumbilla fossils belong.” T have never, in the recent controversy respecting the Coal-fields, done otherwise than request his determinations of fossils, think- ing it due to him to lay all fresh information before him, and being willing to defer in paleontological questions to his judg- ment. But I retain to myself the right of forming an opinion as to the structure of a country with which I am familiar, and which he has never seen. It is under this consideration that I now demur to the admis- sion of inferences from the paleontology of distinct and widely separated districts without regard to the order or succession of deposits. In conclusion, I think that I do not act otherwise than con- sistently in considering the question still an open question ; and though much has been done to reconcile apparent differences, much more remains to be done before any dogmatic opinions ought to be proclaimed. I have the honour to be, Gentlemen, Your obedient servant, W. B. Crarke. St. Leonard’s, New South Wales, April 26, 1862, r Dr. F. Miller on a new Parasitic Isopod Crustacean. 87 IX.—On Entoniscus Porcellane, a new Parasitic Isopod Crusta- cean. By Dr. Fritz Misuumr, of Desterro*. [Plate II. figs. 8-16. ] THE genus Bopyrus has hitherto passed as the extreme member of the series of Isopod Crustacea, stunted in development by a parasitic existence. Much further removed from the mode of life and structure of the free Isopods, and from its own youthful form, is a parasite of the same Porcellana round the intestine of which Lerneodiscus twines its roots, and in the branchial cavity of which, it may be remarked, in passing, a Bopyrus not unfrequently takes up its abode. The female of this parasite lies in a thin-walled sac between the liver, intestine, and heart of the host ; its head has lost both eyes and antenne, and taken the stomach up into itself; the thorax has become an irregular inarticulate sac beset with enor- mous brood-lamine ; the long, vermiform, and extremely mobile abdomen has sword-shaped legs ; and, swelling out above it in a globular form, as if in a hernial sac, the heart lies at the base of its first segment ! As the first-known internally parasitic Isopod, I have given the animal the name of Hntoniscus Porcellane. The female (P1.II. fig. 8) attains a length of from 10 to15 milli- metres. The head forms a whitish, soft, roundish mass, about 1 millim. in length and 1°5 millim. broad. Above, it is divided somewhat like a brain, by a shallow longitudinal furrow, into two convex halves, between which a short rounded lobe springs before and behind. A little before the middle of the rather flat under surface, the mouth is seen, in the form of a minute longi- tudinal fissure; and around this are various lines, probably indica- tions of oral organs which were more distinct at an earlier period. The resemblance of the head to a brain is further heightened by irregular furrows which pass through it, giving it the appearance of convolutions. If the outer skin be torn to pieces, these are found to be due to numerous conical ceca, to the fatty contents of which the head is indebted for its white colour, and which may correspond with the cca described as the liver on the an- terior part of the intestine of Bopyrus. Antenne and eyes are not to be found in mature females; in a younger specimen I once saw a pair of short thick processes above the single lower lobe, which were probably remains of antenne. Bending upwards, the head forms an obtuse angle with the thorax, and is capable only of an inconsiderable vertical movement. The long, sacciform, inarticulate thorax appears to be quite shape- * Translated from Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1862, by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S. 88 Dr. F. Miller on Entoniscus Porcellane, less; it is almost entirely filled by the liver and ovaries, which immediately strike the eye by their vivid coloration, the former being of a splendid deep orange-colour, and the latter reddish violet. The liver consists of two tubes, about 0:2 to 0°3 millim. in width, placed close together on the ventral surface, which commence cecally at the posterior extremity of the thorax, and extend to the head. The ovaries occupy the back, upon which they project in irregular eminences, leaving anteriorly as much free space as the liver does behind. Feet I have generally entirely missed finding, even in young females, which, from their less- developed brood-plates, are more easily examined for them. Sometimes, however, and, indeed, not in very young specimens, I found one or two, in the form of short, pointed, conical points, curved backwards and beset with small scattered bristles. The brood-plates, on the other hand, are developed into enormous, much-folded, lobate and slit membranous lobes. When I could count them distinctly (for frequently they appear as a single, large, almost inextricable laminar frill), I found six pairs! They are permeated by narrow arborescent ducts, into which the biliary secretion from the ruptured liver may sometimes be driven by the pressure of the glass cover, and contain extremely numerous, densely aggregated, fatty globules. If we are astonished, even in Bopyrus, at the quantity of eggs which accumulates under its broad shield-like thorax, this is still more surprising in Entoniscus: the eggs form irregularly ageregated masses, often equal in width to the length of the thorax, which they sometimes far exceed both before and behind, so that not unfrequently the whole body is completely concealed in them. And whilst Bopyrus, like other Isopods, allows each brood to become perfectly developed and to escape before laying new eggs, Hntoniscus accumulates a whole series of consecutive broods about it simultaneously; so that the material for the whole developmental history might be obtained from the brood- leaves of the same animal. The thorax is followed by a much thinner and extremely mo- bile six-jomted abdomen, of very variable length, sometimes much shorter than, sometimes more than half as long again as, the thorax. These differences in its length arise chiefly from the first two segments, which are produced into long cylinders. In an animal 14 millim. in length, I find the length of the first abdominal segment 2°3; of the second, 2; of the third, 1:2; of the fourth, 0°32; of the fifth, 0°25; and of the sixth, 0°38 millim. The thickness of the first segment was 0°25, and that of the last 0:2 millim. The first five segments each bear a pair of inarticulate, sword-shaped feet, without any bristles, near their posterior extremity ; those of the'third pair are the longest, and a new Parasitic Isopod Crustacean. 89 reach to the extremity of the penultimate segment. The feet can not only be raised and depressed, but also extended laterally. The last segment of the abdomen is truncated at the apex above, and has on its lower surface a V-shaped notch reaching to its middle. On the ventral surface of the first and second abdomi- nal segments, and less developed on that of the third, there is on each side a very prominent contractile fold of skin; its strongly undulated margin contains a vessel-like cavity, which is continued into the margin of the corresponding foot. At the base of the first abdominal segment its dorsal surface bears a hernioid diverticulum, of about 0°5 mill. in length and the same in height; in this is the heart, which pulsates rather sluggishly. Although in the structure of the female the ceca at the com- mencement of the alimentary canal, the two hepatic tubes, and the heart situated at the base of the abdomen scarcely remind one of Bopyrus, the affinity to that Isopod shows itself unmis- takeably in the males (Pl. II. fig. 9), which, as in Bopyrus, are the almost constant companions of the female, but are much more diminutive, and therefore may easily be overlooked amongst the immense masses of the eggs. In general there is only one of them; in a single instance I saw two walking about upon the body of the same female. The male is about 0°8 millim. in length, or scarcely 3-4 times the length of the newly hatched young; in the middle of the thorax the breadth attains nearly 3 of the length; and from this point the body diminishes slightly in front, and greatly be- hind. The thorax is distinctly separated into seven, and the abdomen into six segments; but the boundary between the head and the first thoracic segment is indicated only by a deep lateral constriction. The head is trapezoid in form, with rounded angles; its height is about equal to the shorter of the parallel sides, and to the half of the longer posterior one. It bears a pair of short, inarticulate, flat, quadrangular antennz; by the mner side they spring from the lower surface of the head, the anterior side coincides with the frontal margin, the posterior is nearly parallel to this, and the outer side runs obliquely back- wards and outwards. On the anterior obtuse angle, there stands a group of short bristles, curved inwards. The eyes are often wanting ; when present, they are moved backwards from the head nearly to the posterior margin of the first thoracic segment, which coalesces with it. The triangular rostrum originates at the hinder limit of the head; its apex lies between the origin of the antenne. The six anterior thoracic segments bear near the margins feet reduced to nearly sessile, inarticulate, roundish lumps, with 90 Dr. F. Miller on Entoniscus Porcellane, which, however, the animal moves pretty quickly from ‘place to place. The seventh segment has no feet, but bears on each side at the posterior margin a wart-like process, and on this the genital orifice. The abdomen, which is much diminished posteriorly, bas no appendages, as in the males of two other Bopyride found here ; the last segment is distinguished from the rest by its greater length, and is beset with minute spines at the extremity. Of internal organs, the most striking are two wide, brownish, contractile hepatic tubes, which commence cecally in the first or second abdominal segment, and extend to the second thoracic segment. Between these runs the intestine. Above the intes- tine and liver is situated on each side a wide tubular testis, which extends forward from the genital orifice already mentioned, through three or four segments, and usually has an external lateral diverticulum in each. ‘The heart is seen pulsating close behind the liver. The larvee (Pl. II. fig. 10) are as like those of Bopyrus as the males. The flat oniscoid body is about 0-2 millim. in length, and half that width; the greatest breadth is at the second and third thoracic segments, from which the body narrows posteriorly to 0:04 and anteriorly to 0:06 millim., the width of the nearly straight frontal margin. Of the length, about + is occupied by the head, the remainder is taken up in equal parts by the thorax and abdomen, each of which is distinctly divided into six seg- ments. The head bears above, near the hinder angles, two roundish, black eye-spots, apparently without refractive bodies, and beneath, two short, thick, biarticulate anterior antenne, of which only the terminal bristles project beyond the margin of the head, and two longer posterior antenne, which spring just under the eyes, and peaeh to the base of the abdomen; these are six-jointed ; the penultimate joint and the last setiform one are the longest. In the mouth, which is situated near the hinder margin of the head, I could only distinguish two jaws. Close to the anterior margin of the head a roundish spot, emar- ginate in front, and composed of pale round granules, is seen; it reminded me of the spot which is observed in the head of many Amphipoda (very distinctly in the Gammarus ambulans of the Pomeranian peat-bogs, and also in Leptocheirus pilosus, Zadd.). The five anterior segments of the thorax bear similar feet, originating near their margins; in these may be distinguished two long cylindrical basal joints, a short third joimt, a thickened, ovate palm, of the length of the first basal jomt, and a slightly curved powerful claw, which is fully half as long as the palm. In the sixth pair of feet, which does not originate so near the a new Parasitic Isopod Crustacean. 91 margin, only three joints can be distinguished, namely, a cylin- drical basal joint, a minute second, and an elliptical terminal joint, the latter 0-04 millim. in length, and half that breadth. This pair of feet is usually applied close to the body, with the basal joint turned inwards, and the terminal jot backwards. The abdomen bears, first of all, four pairs of natatory feet with a crescentiform basal joint, which is attached nearly by the middle of the convex side in such a manner that one horn, which is a little the shorter, is directed inwards and somewhat back- wards, and the other forwards and outwards. The distance be- tween the horns is 0°03 millim. The outer horn bears a lancet- shaped terminal joint, which fits exactly into the emargination of the crescent, and bears at its obliquely cut-off extremity three bristles of about twice the length of the joint. Sometimes this terminal joint is distinctly smaller on the fourth pair than on the three preceding ones ; but usually they are all alike. On the inner horn of the three anterior basal joints there is a single bristle ; sometimes I found all these bristles of equal length, rather longer than those of the terminal joint; but more fre- quently the second and third perceptibly shorter, and the last only one-third of the length of the first. The fifth abdominal segment bears a narrow and short appendage, without any bris- tles (fig. 15), which is cleft into a longer interior and a shorter exterior point. Lastly, at the sides of the last abdominal seg- ment, there are appendages of considerable size, with a thick basal joint and two slender biarticulate terminal branches, of which the outer is slightly the longer. The last, spiniform joint of this branch is straight ; a shorter spine occurs externally at the apex of the basal joint and of the first joint of the branch. The little animals do not creep with much activity, but swim very rapidly. Their dorsal natation, combmed with the long bristles of the swimming-feet and the forked appearance of the tail, owing to the lateral appendages, gives them a distant re- semblance to Cyclops. The female of Entoniscus is so placed in the interior of the Porcellana that its head lies concealed amongst the ceca of the liver ; it then passes backwards and beneath the heart to the extremity of the cephalothorax, the brood-leaves even reaching sometimes pretty far into the abdomen. The entire animal, including even the head and mouth, is rather closely embraced by a membranous sac, which is continued posteriorly into a narrow efferent canal, and may be traced as far as the suture, between the sternum and the free segment, which, in the Por- cellane, bears the rudimentary fifth pair of feet. This envelop- ing sac is probably produced by the young Entoniscus, in its passage into the interior of the Porcellana, not breaking through 92 Dr. F. Miller on Entoniscus Porcellane. the soft membrane of this articulation, but carrying it in before it. Thus, regarding this as residing in an inversion of the external skin of its host, it might be called an external parasite, like Bopyrus and other Isopods, although it buries itself between the liver, intestine, and heart, and is entwined by the convolutions of the seminal ducts. Not unfrequently there are two, and I once found even three, Entonisci in the same Porcellana. Safely enclosed in the enveloping sac, the male of Entoniscus does not require the sharp-clawed clinging feet of the male of Bopyrus; and the female has a sufficient security for the con- jugal fidelity of her mate in his club-feet, which render it im- possible for him to make an excursion into the open sea. With regard to the occurrence of this parasite, I have yet one circumstance deserving of notice to mention, namely, that Lerneodiscus and Entoniscus frequently occur on the same Por- cellana. Having noticed this relation, and knowing well how deceptive estimates of comparative numbers are without actual counting, I kept a record of the parasites of 1000 Porcellane examined between the 4th of July and the Ist of August. For- tunately this investigation was facilitated by the circumstance that Entoniscus also is recognizable from without, as, when the tail is strongly bent back, the liver, or the ovaries, or the eggs between the brood-leaves, or even the black eye-spots of the young brood shimmer through the articulation behind the sternum. Lerneodiscus occurred in 84, and Entoniscus in 49, of these 1000 Porcellane ; hence we ought to find the two parasites together in 49 x 84 in a million, or 4 in a thousand, whilst they did occur together 21 times*, and therefore five times more frequently than the frequency of each individual species would lead one to expect. The explanation of this frequent common occurrence, I believe, may be that Lerneodiscus prevents a close approximation of the tail and sternum, and thus facilitates the access of the young Entoniscus to the ventral surface of the Porcellana. EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. figs. 8-16. ‘ig. 8. Entoniscus Porcellane, female, after the removal of the eggs from the brood-leaves, magnified 15 diameters: e, ovary; h, heart; l, liver. Fig. 9. Male: a, magnified 15 diameters; 6, magnified 90 diameters ; h, testes ; /, liver; a, eyes. * In this neither the younger Entonisci not recognizable from without, which afterwards occurred in Porcellané bearing Lerne@odiscus, nor the Porcellane harbouring Entoniscus and bearing only the golden coronet of cast Lernéodisci, were counted. Rey. R. T. Lowe on some Land-Mollusca of Madeira. 98 Fig. 10. Larva taken from the brood-leaves of the female, magnified 180 diameters. Fig. 11. Foot of the male. Figs. 12-16. Feet of the larva: 12, from the last thoracic segment ; 13, from the first; 14, from the third; 15, from the fifth; and 16, from the last abdominal segment. X.—WNotice of the Discovery, by the Bardo do Castello de Paiva, of the Fossil Helix coronula recent, and of other new Land- Mollusca, in Madeira. By R. T. Lown, M.A. TEN or twelve years ago I showed the proportion between the apparently extinct or yet undiscovered recent shells of Canigal, and those of the same deposit which had been then found living in Madeira, to be as 10 to 35 or 88, 7. e. as 1 to 83 or 34,— a. e. very nearly 29 or 27 per cent. (See Prim. Faune et Flore Mad. ed. 2. App. p. xiv.) However, even this per-centage had been plainly on the wane—reduced directly by the discovery, in 1855 and several following years, at three or four points along the north coast of Madeira, by Mr. Wollaston and myself, of living Helix tiarella, Webb, and affected, doubtless, indirectly by that of H. spherula, Lowe, y major, found alive in Porto Santo by myself, and of the peculiarly Porto-Santan fossil, H. Lowei, Fér., living at a considerable depth below the surface in the Ilheo de Cima, off the east end of Porto Santo, by SJ. M. Moniz. To these two latter facts, indicative of the probability of still further actual diminution of the ratio between the extinct and still existing shells of Canical, I may add my own discovery in Madeira proper, two years ago, of a living species (H. delphi- nuloides, Lowe) so nearly allied to the very abundant and cha- racteristic Canigal fossil H. delphinula, that the occurrence of that remarkable species itself recent in Madeira may be some- what confidently looked for. I am now authorized by my excellent and zealous friend, the Bardo do Castello de Paiva, to announce some late discoveries of his, still further tending in the same direction. One of these is that of a living Helia (H. galeata, Paiva, MSS.) so remarkable in form and aspect that my first impression was a ready acqui- escence in the Baron’s proposal to bestow on it, as an entirely new species, the very appropriate name of H. galeata, referring appositely to its peculiar helmet-like or beehive shape. A close comparison, however, of his shells with numerous examples of the Canical fossil “ Helix calva, Lowe (var. fere major),” Prim. ed. 2. App. p. xiii., has since led me to believe it to be rather a singularly convex extreme form of that variety, differing, indeed, remarkably from the usual aspect of the shell in question in its 94 Rev. R.T. Lowe on the Discovery of Helix coronula recent. peculiar globosely conoidal shape, elevated cupola or dome-like spire, flattened volutions, and distinct fine superficial spiral lines (like those of the common normal recent var. a), but passing so gradually into the flatter normal forms of 8 major, through cer- tain intermediately convex examples of the latter, that, consider- ing also the width of varietal range exhibited already under H. calva, I cannot venture to go further than regard it as consti- tuting at most a third var., y. galeata, of that species. Several examples of this fine and interesting shell were found, late in the spring of 1861, by a man employed in collecting for the Baron along the new Levada da Fajaéa dos Vinhaticos, in the Ribeiro do Fayal, towards or near the place where I discovered, two years ago, H. delphinuloides (Ann. Nat. Hist. July 1860). 2. The discovery of two recent living examples, in Madeira proper, of H.coronula, Lowe (a shell only hitherto known as a fossil of the South Deserta, or Bugio) is a second and still more im- portant addition, by the Baron’s persevering industry, to the existing Molluscan Fauna of Madeira. They were found, two or three months ago, along the south coast of the island, to the east of Funchal, “on declivities above the sea between the Garajio or Canicgo and S* Cruz,” unwittingly, by a collector employed by the Baron de Paiva, who himself happily detected them amidst a miscellaneous heap of various other living Ma- deiran submaritime Pneumonobranchiates, consisting chiefly (as I myself observed) of Achatina tornatellina B, Helix bifrons, H. polymorpha «, Cyclostoma Moniziana, &c., such as occur usually along the south coast of Madeira to the eastward. One of the examples is considerably more convex than the other, which is also frequently the case in the South Desertan fossils, and is pale chalky white, like H. tiarella, Webb ; whilst the other is of a brownish flesh-colour, like H. delphinuloides usually. The sculpture altogether, and especially the spiral grooves and can- cellations underneath, are in both examples less distinct than in the fossil shells from the Bugio; but they are both more deci- dedly bicarinated than the latter. The animals were almost colourless or pale subpellucid whitish ash, tinged with very pale ochraceous or raw sienna, strikingly different from the peculiarly dark or blackish animals of H. tiarella. These two most rare and interesting shells have been generously added by their fortunate discoverer to my own collection. On revision, therefore, of the list in my Appendix above quoted of the Canigal fossils, the only absolute corrections will be the insertion of H. trarella, Webb, in the right-hand column of re- cent homologues at p. xi., reading, moreover, H. arcinellaa & B for H. fausta B. minor and y. minima, and Achatina Cylichna for A. truncata (a name preoccupied by Gmelin) in the left-hand Rev. R. T. Lowe on a new Species of Helix. 95 column at p. xiv., and adding Cyclostoma flavescens, Lowe, to both columns. Thus the apparently extinct or yet undiscovered living shells of Canical will now stand to the recent of the same deposit in the diminished ratio of 9 to 86 or 39, i.e. of 1 to 4 or 44, 2. e. 25 per cent. exactly, or 23+ very nearly. But if the fossil shells of the entire Madeiran group, consist- ing of Madeira, Porto Santo, and the three Desertas, be regarded as one whole, it is evident, from the facts above mentioned, that the proportion between the apparently extinct and recent shells in these deposits, considered jointly, will be much more con- siderably reduced than it appears in the above corrected list confined to Madeira proper. For thus, in fact, there will remain no characteristic or conspicuous fossil shell undiscovered recent, except H. delphinula, which, however, may itself be reasonably expected to reward, with the few other minuter species, the close researches of some future naturalist. 3. Helix tetrica, Paiva. T. supra nigricans vel latissime nigro fasciata, depresso-discoidea, sub- planata, carinata, solida, undique confertissime granulis distinctis- simis albidis prominentibus grosse scobinata ; carina acuta, expres- siuscula, vix limbata, subsupera; spira convexo-depressa, subpla- nata, pulvinata, se. anfractui ult. antice tumidulo superimposita ; anfractibus convexiusculis, penultimo antice subdepresso, sutura distincta ; umbil. maximo, aperto, patulo, spirali, } diam. maj. latitudine eequante. Diam. maj. 13-15, min. 11-12, alt. 7-8 mill; anfr. 7-8. Hab. in ins. Deserta Australi in preeruptis excelsis maritimis “inter lichenes.” A fine and certainly new species of the H. polymorpha tribe, very distinct from H. senilis @*, to which, when sent to me last year by the Bardo de Paiva, I at first referred it, by reason of its large wide open umbilicus and much coarser granulations. In both these points, with the addition of its flattened discoidal shape, it is also quite distinct from H. polymorpha or H., pulvi- nata. A few examples were found by a man collecting for the Baron “on the S. Deserta, or Bugio, amongst lichens on the sea- cliffs,” in the spring of 1861. The colouring is precisely that of H. polymorpha, var. B. nigricans, subyar. 1 or 3,—viz. dark coffee-brown above, relieved only in two of the four specimens before me by a pale line along the keel and suture. Beneath, * Lowe, Syn. Diagn. in Ann. and Mag. ser. 2. vol. ix. p. 116; and Catal. Moll. Mad. in Proc. Zool. Soc. (1854), part xxii. p. 189. Supposing, how- ever, H. senilis, Morelet, in Journ. de Conch. (1851) ii. 353, to be a good species, H, senilis, Lowe, must be changed into H. salebrosa. 96 Mr. J.O. Westwood on a new Species of Mormolyce. all of them are pale, with two broad dark-brown bands, the upper of which is subdivided into two or three in two of the examples. 4, A Physa, which in degree of ventricosity is intermediate between P. acuta, Drap. t. 11. f. 10, 11, and the more elongated or slender common Canarian shell so called by Webb, has been also given to me by the Baron de Paiva, as found in the Rib. dos Soccorridos and that of Gongcalo Ayres, near Funchal. It closely resembles “ the rare long-spired var.” of P. fontinalis(L.), Forbes and Hanl. iv. 142, t. 122. f. 10. Lea Rectory, June 25, 1862. XI.—Notice of a new Species of the Carabideous Genus Mormo- lyce. By J. O. Westwoop, M.A. &e. Tue confirmation of genera, established upon unique species, and often even upon single specimens, by the discovery of addi- tional members of the group, is always satisfactory, and, in the case of very extreme types of form, highly interesting with re- ference to the question of the development of particular organs or portions of organs, as well as to that of the modification of form resulting from geographical distribution or other analogous causes. The genus Mormolyce, founded by Hagenbach upon one of the most remarkable types of Carabideous insects, has long been known only by a single representative, M. phyllodes, a native of Java. Its relations have, as may easily be conceived, been the subject of much discussion, the genus having been placed im the great division Truncatipennes, as well as in that of the Tho- racici. Instead of the compact, robust form which is typical of the Carabide, we have an attenuated structure, with slender limbs, indicating great weakness of locomotive powers, united to a slightly developed oral structure, proving the insect to be desti- tute of those predaceous habits which are so eminently charac- teristic of the family as to have earned for them the sectional name of Adephaga. We must suppose a Carabus or Harpalus to have been both drawn out longitudinally and flattened out laterally, so that the elytra present great flattened dilatations extending beyond the body in the form of two rounded spatul, —the whole represented best by a piece of the thin kind of gingerbread known by the name of “jumbles.” Although originally known as a native of Java, specimens of M. phyllodes have been received from Malacca; and with the latter there has been found associated a considerable number of individuals of a distinct species, of which the following diagnosis Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology. 97 will indicate the chief distinctions from the previously known species. M. Hagenbachi. M. capite postice in collum longissimum subcylindricum attenuato ; prothorace elongato-hexagono, angulis anticis porrectis conicis ; lateribus spinis tribus zeque distantibus armatis (spatio inter spinam posticam et basin fere dimidium prothoracis sequante); elytris foliaceo-dilatatis, angulo basali in lobum transversum antice trun- catum porrecto, dilatatione magis cordiformi, latitudine maxima ante medium posita; antennarum articulo secundo longitudine latitudinem ejus duplo superante ; scutelli apice rotundato. Long. corp. unc. 23, ad apicem elytrorum unc. 3¢; capitis lin. 9 ; prothoracis lin. 75; elytrorum ad apicem suture lin. 14; lat. elytrorum ante medium lin. 17. Habitat Malaccam in insula Sumatra. The fact of this species being found in the same locality with M. phyllodes forbids our regarding it as a geographical variety ; whilst the specific characters given above equally militate against its being a local modification, such, for instance, as occurs in many species of Carabi or Harpalide, respecting which so much discussion has recently taken place amongst Continental ento- mologists. The specific name given above was suggested by Mr. Adam White, in honour of the original founder of the genus. XII.— Notes on Cambridge Geology. By Harry Sezxey, F.G.S., Woodwardian Museum. I. Preliminary Notice of the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata*, One of the last labours in England of Mr. Lucas Barrett was the production of a geological map of the country around Cam- bridge. Of the Lower Secondary deposits, he therein coloured the Kimmeridge Clay, Upper Calcareous Grit, and Oxford Clay. The chief novelty in this was the introduction of the Calcareous Grit ; for Professor Sedgwick, many years before, when riding in the neighbourhood of Conington, had somewhere seen a drab-coloured deposit, which, without dismounting, he very na- * Communicated by the Author, having been read at the Meeting of the British Association at Manchester, Sept. 1861. This paper was to have been incorporated with one on the Strata of England between the Portland and Great Oolites, an intention reluctantly postponed. It will be followed by four papers which were to have been other chapters in the scheme :— 1. On the Kimmeridge Clay; 2. On the Tetworth Clay and Coral Rag; 3. On the Rocks of the Oxford Clay; and 4. On the Oxford Clay. Ann. & Mag. N. Mist. Ser.3. Vol. x. 8 98 Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology :— turally supposed to be an outlier of the Shanklin Sands ; and so it continued to be regarded until Mr. Barrett discovered that it was really a member of the Oolitic series. On what grounds it was determined to be the particular rock mentioned, or Calca- reous Grit at all, 1 am not aware, unless, indeed, it were from Dr. Wright’s speculation that Lower Calcareous Grit had a pro- bable existence in this district ; nor have I learnt why the clay above was mapped as Kimmeridge Clay. Some fossils were collected and placed in the Woodwardian Museum. So remark- able was the assemblage, and in some respects so unlike what would have been anticipated, that, after a careful examination of the specimens, I could not but suspect that, in the haste with which the north-west corner had been mapped, something must have been wrongly interpreted. Accordingly, at the first oppor- tunity, I established myself in the village of Elsworth, and pro- ceeded to investigate the nature and relations of the rock on which it stands. Elsworth is four miles and a half due south of St. Ives—the well-known locality for Oxford Clay,—nearly the same distance due north of Bourn, and about eight miles W.N.W. of Cam- bridge. The country about is, on a small scale, quite hill and valley, the village of Elsworth itself being built in a rather deep hollow. The hills are mostly of boulder clay, while the valleys produced by its denudation often expose the stratified beds be- neath. A brook runs through the village, and ultimately finds its way into the Ouse. As the streamlet flows between the principal rows of houses, its banks were naturally the first places examined ; and here and there along them was seen peeping out a reddish-brown calca- reous rock, highly charged with iron-shot: oolitic particles, and very hard, but readily separating by cracks into small pieces. It extends throughout the length of the village, and at its southern end dips under a hill of dark-blue stratified clay ; to the north it is denuded: this is the nearest approach to a section to be seen. I wished, however, to see the rock where it had not been weathered, as also to obtain fossils from the clay above ; and so the Rev. H. Dobson, the rector, kindly granted permission to sink the necessary pits through the rock. The first attempt was a failure ; for, though a very promising site was selected within four yards of an exposure by the roadside, it was found, after a large excavation had been made, that the whole deposit was bouldered away. The next trial was more successful; and, sin- gularly, though in the immediate vicinity of the other, there was no trace whatever of the drift clay. We sunk through six feet and a half of a dark-blue laminated clay, which here and there contained a layer, of chocolate- or ferruginous colour, abounding On the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata. 99 in minute crystals of selenite and sulphate of barytes, and became extremely hard as we descended. very now and then, speci- mens were met with of the Ammonites vertebralis, in which the body-chamber was filled with calcareous matter, and the rest of the shell pressed flat, forming what well-diggers call “ shapes ;” some specimens were also found of the Gryphea dilatata. From these fossils I was inclined to regard the deposit above the rock as Oxford Clay instead of Kimmeridge—a conclusion afterwards in some degree confirmed by the abundance in which the latter fossil occurred in another section. Indeed, the fossils from the clay immediately above were scarcely to be distinguished from those in the clay below. And so, instead of Upper Calcareous Grit, the phenomenon presented appeared to be that of a lime- stone dividing two beds of Oxford Clay. Continuing the digging, the rock was reached; and here, where protected, its appearance is very different from the wea- thered aspect seen by the brook-side. It is a dark-blue homo- geneous limestone, which I can compare to nothing but the un- septarious cement-stones of the clays. The oolitic grains were abundant, and as deeply ferruginous as though they had been exposed to the air; while scattered irregularly about, branching and interlacing, were masses of undecomposed iron pyrites. A rock of undivided structure, such as that described, will be easily understood to be difficult to work ; and I cannot convey a better idea of its hardness than by stating that, during the ten hours during which two men continued thumping away at it, they succeeded in breaking a five-foot iron crowbar, the iron of one pickaxe, and the handle of another, and did not get up a quarter of a hundred-weight of fragments; and yet it is so easily de- composed by the weather as to be utterly useless for road- mending, building, or any economic purpose. Before the deposition of the superimposed clay, the rock ap- pears to have been much denuded, and consequently its thick- ness is very variable. It is commonly about 3 or 4 feet, though in some places not less than 7 feet. The clay immediately above it is of a reddish brown, and, judging from its contents, appears to be coloured by the rubbing up of the rock below. But 7 feet must not be supposed to be the total thickness of the deposit ; for on the top of it is a clay of about 5 feet in thickness, and then an upper rock of 18 inches, which forms the surface, and above which, at the places where exhibited, there is very little clay. This middle clay is of a brown-black, and is nowhere well exposed; where best seen, it contained numerous specimens of a small variety of Ostrea Marshit. The rock above it has all the outer characters of that below, being equally rusty and quite as oolitic—except, however, at one point, where, getting a section 100 Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology :— in a ditch, it was found to be yellowish white, more sandy, and almost free from oolitic particles. The fossils here were few, but, under the slightly altered conditions, differed a little from those met with in other places. In general they are very similar to those of the inferior deposit, though including some forms which, so far as yet explored, have served to distinguish it. This thickness of about 14 feet appears here to form the en- tire mass of this peculiar rock. And yet, in tracing the brook to the south, I found in its bed three successive layers of a hard whitish-grey rock, of 6 or 8 inches in thickness, occurring in the clay at heights above the rock of Elsworth of about 7, 15, and 20 feet. However, these only contain a few Gryphea dila- tata, and resemble more than anything else layers of hard, dark Lower Chalk. There is nothing to suggest any connexion with the Inferior beds ; but it is just possible that they represent the extreme limits of strata which may elsewhere thicken and unite with them. The dip to the south seems to be about one foot in two hundred. Having become thus far familiar with the exhibition of the rock about Elsworth, I endeavoured to discover whether it were merely local, or a regular stratum which might serve as a boun- dary between great thicknesses of clay. From the great accumulation of the clay, sinking for water here is scarcely more profitable than sinking for coal would be ; and therefore in the smail neighbouring villages there are few deep wells. However, some have been attempted. One of these was at a point rather more than three miles 8S.S.W. of Elsworth, and sunk to the depth of 150 feet. They dug through 84 feet of a hard dark-blue clay, from which many Ammonites were obtained ; but, as the well was made thirty-six years ago, these are not now to be heard of. Below this they came upon 14 feet of alternate bands of stone and sand (the stone was full of small shells), and an extremely hard grey-blue rock, which they had to get up with chisels and blacksmith’s hammers, working for six months before they got through it. The dip of the Elsworth rock has already been given as one foot in two hundred, and the distance of this digging from Elsworth as about 16,000 feet ; therefore, if the rock extended continuously, and preserved the same angle of dip, it ought to be found, at this distance, at a depth of 80 feet ; and so, when a rock is found there, at that depth, of a thickness, hardness, and appearance identical with that of Elsworth, I must urge that the evidence approaches the conclusion that in both places the rock is one and the same. In Papworth Everard, a village a mile and a half to the west of Elsworth, a rock was met with in a well-sinking at a depth of 7 feet, but not pierced. Papworth On the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata. 101 is on higher ground, but the rock at Elsworth dips to the east ; hence this stratum will probably be a band some depth under- neath it. , Northwards from Elsworth to St. Ives, the country is perfectly flat, and occupied at the surface almost continuously by gravel, the rock having disappeared, probably by denudation. But, on approaching St. Ives from the south, a ridge of high land is seen flanking the town on the west; and on carefully exploring a brick-yard at the base of it, I found abundant remains of a rock which an old brickmaker told me once extended con- tinuously all over the pit to a thickness of 3 feet, quite at the surface, and sometimes parted into two beds by an intervening layer of clay. Where visible, the rock here is much weathered, but is the same kind of reddish-brown deposit, full of oolitic grains, which occurs at Elsworth. It has long been mistaken for drift, and, as such, is alluded to in the ‘ Oolitic Echinodermata ;’ but, though quite at the surface, thin, and often overlain by boulder-clay, there cannot be the least doubt that it is a solid rock of Secondary age accumulated on the clay below. Passing a little to the east, I learned that, in another brick-pit there, a rock had formerly existed, but was now all removed at the surface, having dipped down into the clay to thé east of the pit. And still further to the east, at the point where the roads branch to Needingworth and Somersham, it appeared that, in another brick-yard, they sometimes, when digging, came down upon a floor of hard stone, which they have never attempted to get through. To one going over the ground, the conclusion is irresistible that the rocks men- tioned at all these pits are one deposit dipping down to the east; but whether this rock is an extension of that of Elsworth, or another bed inferior or superior to it, 1s a very complex question, difficult to answer. Rather more than two miles N.N.E. of the last-mentioned pit, and three miles from the pit exposing the rock at St. Ives, is the Bluntisham cutting of the Hastern Counties Railway. This is a piece of high land, which has been cut through to a depth of about 40 feet, and yet the base of the cutting is so elevated that the line descends towards St. Ives at an incline of one foot in less than two hundred ; so that the rails here cannot be less than 50 feet higher than they are two miles to the south. Now, in this cutting, just below the surface, is found a rock, of a grey- blue colour and unknown thickness, which was so hard that it had to be blasted in laying the railway drain. I have a frag- ment, containing iron-shot oolitic grains and shells, quite resem- bling the rock of Elsworth. It extended continuously for dis- tances of about 100 feet, when, as I was informed, short inter- 102 Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology :— vening spaces occurred, in which it was so soft that “ one could put his arm in and move it about,’’—a circumstance probably indicating a water-bearing stratum at no great depth beneath. The question here arises, Is this calcareous band identical with that of St. Ives, above which it would seem to be at least 30 feet? If this is assumed, it is clear that as the Elsworth rock dips south, it cannot be identical with the stratum at St. Ives, which also would dip south, and therefore be at a very great depth beneath it. Another conclusion from this assump- tion would be, that the fossils in the clay at Bluntisham should be identical with those of the clay above the rock near St. Ives ; while we should expect a considerable difference between the fossils of the St. Ives limestone and that of Elsworth. But neither of these conditions is met with. Although the clay at Bluntisham is capped with boulder clay, and the fossils of both, which were collected for me, are mixed together, and are therefore to be appealed to with great caution, I think it can yet be said with confidence that they mdicate a zone above that of St. Ives; while, after some hours’ work in the St. Ives rock, I only obtained, in nineteen, three species not pre- viously met with at Elsworth. This must be conclusive that the Bluntisham rock is superior to that of St. Ives, while it strongly suggests that the latter is not far removed from the zone of the Elsworth limestone. The few fossils from the clay above the rock at the latter place are such that there can be no doubt that the rock beneath is not inferior to that of St. Ives: it may be su- perior or on the same parallel ; while the alternatives with respect to the Bluntisham bed are that it should either be continuous with or inferior to it. Thus, then, we shall have the point of up- heaving force greatest either between Elsworth and St. Ives, or at some unknown place further north. If the latter condition obtained, the St. Ives rock would be inclined to the horizon; and as the bed at Bluntisham is in elevation apparently only 30 feet above it, it would, even if the angle of inclination were less than that of the Elsworth bed would lead us to expect, become, when it reached Bluntisham, either coincident with the deposit there or many feet above it. Moreover, the Elsworth rock would be 100 feet above that of St. Ives. The fossils, however, as has already been seen, indicate conclusions very different; and so the supposition may safely be dismissed. The point of least resist- ance in the upheaval, then, was between Elsworth and St. Ives ; and therefore the rock, which rises to the surface at Elsworth, must dip down again somewhere to the north in the St. Ives neighbourhood. Hence the question stands thus: Is the Blun- tisham rock (or are both it and the St. Ives beds) a continuation of those at Elsworth? If the supposition be adopted that the On the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata. 103 two northern bands represent the Elsworth beds, it will be seen that the apparently thick stratum of Bluntisham becomes very thin at Elsworth, being represented by the layers mentioned in the bed of the brook, and that they have ceased to exist at Bourn. The only fact bearing against this view is, that, so far as known, the fossils from the clay above the rock at Elsworth are not identical with those from the clay near Needingworth, but very different. If the other view is taken, the St. Ives rock will be an inferior band separated by a considerable thickness of clay from that above. Now, if the upheaving force met with anything like the same amount of resistance to the north which it did to the south, it will be clear that as Bluntisham is 3 miles north, and Elsworth about five miles south, of St. Ives, there ought to be an anticlinal outcrop of the St. Ives rock in the neighbourhood of Fenstanton, that is, two miles south of its St. Ives outcrop, where it should dip south into the clay, so as to pass under the rock of Elsworth. However, as Bluntisham is on high ground, it will be necessary to allow a further exten- sion of a mile or two north, to balance its height. And so it is highly probable that the pressure from below was greatest very little to the south of St. Ives. Now, in the village of Coning- ton, a mile and a half north of Elsworth, and three miles and a half south of the pit showing the rock at St. Ives, a well was sunk to a depth of 250 feet; and herein, after digging for 100 feet, a rock was pierced 5 feet in thickness. It has already been shown that the rock will dip south. If we suppose this incline to be the same as between Elsworth and Bourn, when the rock reached St. Ives, it would only be 18 feet below the surface ; and as no rock is found there at that depth, and as the angle of the incline may be expected to increase as the plane inclined approaches nearer the central action of the inclining force, and also as some allowance must be made for possible difference of heights at the places mentioned, the evidence will be perfectly conclusive that this deep-seated rock of Conington is really the “old red rock” of St. Ives brick-yards, and, therefore, that the Elsworth rock, 130 feet above it, is essentially identical with the limestone at Bluntisham. And this explains the discrepancies between the fossils from the clay above the rock at St. Ives and those met with in the clay at Bluntisham, while the character- istic fossils of the Elsworth clay are, so far as is yet known, iden- tical with those of the latter place. At present I have no fur- ther evidence of the extension, in a longitudinal direction, of the Elsworth rock, which has thus been traced for a distance of eleven miles, with every circumstance to indicate that it extends far both to the north and to the south of these limits. It will, however, be readily seen that this argument is not 104. - Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology :-— necessarily infallible; the facts on which it is founded are too few for it to claim to be more than an induetive guess. Indeed, seeing that it is built fundamentally on the assumption that the rocks at Elsworth and Bourn are the same, it might be quite wrong, All the facts certainly appear to be in its favour; but it must not be forgotten that simplest explanations are often truest ; and in this case, if we suppose the country flatter than the preceding argument required it to be, the deep-seated rock at Bourn (80 feet) would be continuous with the deep-seated rock at Conington (100 feet) ; and therefore the rock at St. Ives would be the Elsworth rock, and the band at Bluntisham pro- bably identical with those in the bed of the Elsworth brook. Nothing but its simplicity is known in support of this hypo- thesis, which is only mentioned here as a contingency which has not been overlooked. ven should it be ultimately proved true, the result would in no way affect the principal object of this paper, except in giving the arguments greater weight, by show- ing that the Elsworth rock is really lower in the Oxford Clay than it is now supposed to be. Meanwhile I adopt the explana- tion previously given as the true one. It has already been seen that the St. Ives rock dips to the east; therefore the Elsworth beds also will dip in the same di- rection, and hence the clay to the east will be above the latter deposit. Two miles eastward of Elsworth is Boxworth*; and here the land rises so that one can see over the Elsworth valley and the country north and north-east of it. Now, on the easterly slope of this hill is a brick-yard ; and here also is a rock, about a foot and a half thick. The workmen call it “ flint,’ a name I have also found given in the surrounding district to the septarious concretions of the clays. It is dark blue, very hard, and divided ito layers, much as is the Elsworth rock. The only specimen of it | saw was a slab from the upper part, about six inches in thickness, which consisted of two layers—an upper dark-blue one, with a few small shells scattered about in it, and a lower pale- brown layer composed almost entirely of shells, chiefly univalves. From the rock I only succeeded in obtaining, in a determinable condition, Ammonites biplex, part of another Ammonite, appa- rently alternans, Pecten lens, and a new species of Pecten, also found at Elsworth, Alaria bispinosa, and Cerithium muricatum. In the clay beneath I found a single specimen of Ostrea del- toidea, another of Gryphea dilatata, and two or three of an Oyster nearly resembling O. leviuscula, hereafter to be described as O. discoidea. This same Oyster occurs somewhat sparingly, with * Pronounced Els'er and Box'er, Papworth is sounded Parper. On the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata. 105 the Gryphea dilatata, in the clay at Elsworth, and also sparingly, with the Ostrea deltoidea, in the clay to the north-east, at Wil- Ingham. Thus the Boxworth rock is a stratum above the Elsworth rock, just as the St. Ives bed is beneath it. It was seen that the Elsworth beds dipped to the south ; and consequently the clay in that direction will also be above them. Seven miles south of Elsworth is Gamlingay; and here, in a brick-yard near the bogs, I heard of a rock about a foot and a half thick, seven feet below the level of the pit. From the clay above were obtained single specimens of. Ostrea deltoidea, Gry- phea dilatata, and Ammonites bipler. Also, in a brick-yard at the top of Tetworth Hill, the Ostrea and Gryphea were found abundantly in unexpected combination with Serpula tetragona and portions of Ammonites Achilles, which occurs at Bluntisham and in the bed of the Elsworth brook; and beneath was a floor of rock, covered with water at the time I was there; the rock was said to be white, and 18 inches thick. Between these two pits there is another; but during my short stay I failed to get any characteristic fossils, except two or three Gryphee dilatate ; from this circumstance, and as it is in a hollow, it is probable that the rocks at Tetworth and Gamlingay bogs are the same, and that this is the clay beneath, but at present it is impossible to say so with certainty. - Supposing it should be so, I should be still less mclined to express an opinion as to whether this Tetworth rock is the same as that of Boxworth; though, so far as the evidence goes, the natural conclusion would be that it is the same. They are clearly deposits in very nearly the same position, and are mutually inclined ; so that, had they extended continuously, and been different beds, there ought to be a second rock in the vicinity of Boxworth; but, as this has not been met with, the probabilities are strong, taken in conjunction with the other circumstances, that the outcrops are both of the same stratum. Above this I know of no other stone bands for a long way up; but there is another one beneath the lowest yet men- tioned. Six miles west by south of Elsworth is St. Neots ; and a little to the south of the latter place, near Hynesbury, in laying the plates of the Great Northern Railway, a rock was cut down to. The uppermost band, of about 8 inches, was removed: it held beneath a large quantity of water, which produced the singular effect of giving all the workmen who drank of it the ague. Be- low this bed of stone was another of clay, and then another of the rock; but whether there were any further alternations was not determined. ‘The rock is described as having the aspect of Cornbrash. In the well at Conington, 150 feet below the St. Ives rock, another rock was reached, but not pierced, a small 106 Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology :— supply of very salt water being obtained : it is just possible that this rock may be that of St. Neots. There can be no doubt that it holds a place at least that depth below the rock of St. Ives ; for the prevailing fossils at St. Neots (Ammonites spinosus, Duncani, and athletus), which occur almost to the exclusion of other forms, will, with Ammonites coronatus, dicate a bed much lower than that of St. Ives, which has Ammonites cordatus, Lamberti, Eugenii, &c., as most common. A considerable thick- ness of strata is probably represented by this change of life in time. Therefore, notwithstanding the circumstance that Prof. Buckman has given the Ammonites Duncani and athletus (St. Neots fossils) as occurring in the same highest bed of clay with Ammonites Marie and Goliathus (St. Ives fossils), it will be readily granted that the St. Neots rock is lower than that of St. Ives ; and this being so, it cannot but happen that it dips to the east, passing under Elsworth ; and therefore, if persistent, it ought to occur that the St. Ives rock, by a synclinal, should again crop out somewhere S.W. of St. Ives, while both it and the Elsworth rock should occur between Tetworth and St. Neots. Though I have gone over the whole of this country with some minuteness, it must be reserved for a future paper to say whether they are to be seen or not. But the whole of Huntingdonshire is much obscured by gravel ; so that, in the absence of brick-yard evidence or wells, the chances of detecting them would be slight. Such, then, so far as is yet observed, is the succession of clays and stone bands in the east of Huntingdonshire ; but, from observations made in Bedfordshire, there appears to be a great thickness of clay beneath the lowest zone here seen ; and there- fore it would be premature to conclude that the St. Neots rock is identical with the Kelloway rock, which may yet be found lower down. This being so, the Elsworth and other rocks can- not but be regarded as strata high up in the Oxford Clay, and probably of similar importance with that occurring near its supposed base—conclusions which, it will presently be seen, are also indicated by the fossils. Facts of no less interest than the succession of rocks are pre- sented by the succession of the clay, which by them is separated into well-marked subdivisions, each distinguished by a peculiar assemblage of fossils. But not only do the organic remains ‘differ, but as the series of strata is ascended a gradual transition is observed from those forms characterizing lower beds to those occurring higher up, until at last some of the peculiar fossils of the Kimmeridge Clay are found blended with those of the Oxford Clay; and further on, the true Kimmeridge Clay itself is met with, as at Cottenham. In the absence of the Coral Rag, this eveat succession has the appearance of one deposit, admitting, On the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata. 107 however, of subdivision mto the parts characterized by Gryphea dilatata, by this species and Ostrea deltoidea associated, and by the latter fossil and Exogyra virgula. In this country there is nothing to indicate that the middle group should rather be added either to the upper or the lower of these beds. In the South of England, Mr. Pease Pratt added it to the Oxford Clay—a conclusion in which he has been fol- lowed by the gentlemen of the Geological Survey. But if it is contended that at Upware, midway between Cambridge and Ely, the Coral Rag occurs beneath the Kimmeridge Clay, it must also be confessed that we are ignorant of what fossils may occur at the base of the clay there, while, on the other hand, the Elsworth rock clearly separates the clay above from the Gryphea-dilatata clay below; so that, did the Elsworth rock attain the thickness of the Coral Rag, there could not be a question about the claim of the middle clay to be considered distinct and intermediate between the Kimmeridge and Oxford Clays. Nor, as it is, can there be any doubt about it, seeing that duration in time is not represented by thickness of deposit, but by change in life ; and in this respect the paleontological evidence is conclusive. The fact, too, of the existence of an isolated reef of Coral Rag will be evidence that other deposits must have been made around it. It is therefore proposed to distinguish the stratum as the Tet- worth Clay. The fossils from Bluntisham, which it must be remembered are from the lowest part of the clay, are Gryphea dilatata abun- dantly, Ostrea deltoidea rarely, Ammonites alternans, biplex, ser- ratus (which is erroneously given in Morris’s Catalogues as from the Oxford Clay of Huntingdonshire), and an Ammonite figured by D’Orbigny as the female of Duncani, but which is neither that species nor spinosus, which latter form has, in the adult state, the characters of its youth, only more developed, while this bears to it much the same resemblance that Callovicensis has to A, Duncani; and Belemnites excentricus. To these may be added, from Elsworth, Alaria bispinosa, Lima pectiniformis, Pecten lens, and Ostrea discoidea. Of course it is certain that the agencies depositing strata have ever acted without intermission ; and therefore it is that all rocks can only over a limited surface preserve the same lithological characters. Clays being the most persistent of strata, because the most flocculent and therefore widest spread, are less likely to thin out than limestones; and yet it singularly happens that the Tetworth Clay has only been noticed in a few places, and never in company with the Coral Rag, which appears to have a much greater extension. The explanation would appear to be this :—The deposition of the Coral Rag and its associated grits 108 Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology :— must have occupied a long period of time: this has usually been regarded as equivalent to the ages required for the change of the fauna of the Oxford Clay to that of the Kimmeridge ; it must at least have occupied a large part of that period ; and its absence as a representative of time would be indicated by a cor- responding break in life. Now, in the country between Elsworth and Cottenham, where the Coral Rag does not occur, it has been seen that there is no break in life: hence there cannot be a great break in time ; and so the Coral Rag must be present as a period, although it has ceased to exist as a calcareous formation. The clay, then, must represent it ; and hence the Tetworth Clay will be regarded as the argillaceous contemporary of the Oxford Oolite ; and therefore it results that the Elsworth rock is directly underneath the Coral Rag, on the one hand, and above the Oxford Clay, on the other; so that the only remaining question about its position is to determine whether it is rather to be classed with the Oxford Clay or with the Lower Calcareous Grit. And this is a problem of some difficulty, since there is no calcareous grit in this district for comparison. If the Tetworth Clay were replaced by Coral Rag, the Elsworth rock would then be a calcareous bed at the base of it, and appa- rently forming part of it ; but it would also be an Oolitic stratum at the top of the Oxford Clay, and zdentical in lithological struc- ture with similar beds occurring lower down, from which, as already remarked, its species differ but little. In estimating the weight of the fossils as influencing the question, it must not be forgotten that many species are peculiar to clay, and others to limestone; so that, as the gap between the Oxford Clay and Calcareous Grit cannot be very great, there will almost neces- sarily be many forms in common between the Elsworth rock and the Grit above, which would not occur in the Clay below, while the same cause would prevent the Oxford-Clay fossils hving on into the rock above. The species of the rock are numerous. A good proportion of the forms are peculiar. The following list will serve as indi- cating the general character :— Ammonites vertebralis. Ammonites Herici. biplex. canaliculatus. perarmatus. — Goliathus, var. It is to be noticed that all these species occur in the Oxford Clay of France, while only two of them have yet been published from the Calcareous Grit. Besides them, there are two new forms, and the Ammonites Riippellii of Minster from Solenhofen, which species must not be confounded with the Corallian Ammonites Riippellensis of D’Orbigny, being nearly related to the A. biplez. On the Elsworth Rock and associated Strata. 109 The Belemnites are hastatus and tornatilis, both of which occur in the Oxford Clay below, but neither, so far as I have collected, in superior beds. The hastatus is an inflated variety. The Gasteropoda are Pleurotomaria reticulata, a fossil of the Calcareous Grit and Kimmeridge Clay in England and of the Oxford Clay in France, being identical with the Pleurotomaria Miinstert of D’Orbigny ; Pleutomaria amphicelia, a new and pe- culiar species resembling the Inferior-Oolite P. ornata ; Littorina perornata, a new form intermediate between the Inferior-Oolite L. ornata and the Corallian muricata (I believe that it occurs in the Coral Rag, Calcareous Grit, &c.); a new species of Littorina, a new Cerithium, and a Phasianella. The bivalves are extremely numerous, and the new species many. A few only need be given now. Among the new spe- cies are Avicula pterosphena and Gryphea elongata. Among the known species are Pecten fibrosus (including vagans); Terebratula ornithocephala, T. perovalis, and T. spheroidalis ; Pecten lens and Pecten vimineus; Gryphea dilatata; Lima pectiniformis ; Avi- cula expansa, A. ovalis, and A. elliptica; Trigonia costata, and a slight variation of Dr. Lycett’s variety decorata of Trigonia cla- vellata; Astarte ovata, A. lurida, Opis Phillipsii, and a variety of Myacites recurva. Although most of these species occur in the Coral Rag and Calcareous Grit, I think, when the circumstances already pointed out are remembered, and also that many Coral- Rag forms range down to the Cornbrash, the fossils will be re- garded as far more closely linked to the beds below than to the equivalents of strata above. When one remembers the super- position, I see no ground whatever on which the conclusion need be disputed ; and therefore the Elsworth rock will be placed as about the highest zone of the Oxfordian series. There are, then, in this district at least three well-marked rocks dividing the Oxford Clay, to the different zones of which it will be necessary to apply distinctive epithets when the whole succession shall be satisfactorily elucidated. It would be beyond the object of this paper to add anything further on either the rocks or clay zones; but as it has already been mentioned that the Upper Elsworth rock differs somewhat in fossils from the lower bed, it may be remarked that the circumstances which most attract attention are the presence in the upper band of numerous masses of Serpule, a difference in the Brachyurous Crustacea, in the spines of Cidarvs, in the enormous size of Gry- phea dilatata (some being 11 inches long), the absence of Gry- phea elongata, the presence of plates of a Star-fish, the greater abundance of Littorina perornata and of Pleurotomaria reticulata, species of Perna, many Ostree gregaria. These distinctions may be but local, but in this locality they 110 Mr. H. Seeley on Cambridge Geology. will be found constant. In the lower bed are some shell-less Annelides. It ought to have been previously mentioned, that at Over*, a few miles east of St. Ives, and west of the Kimmeridge Clay, the Belemnites excentricus and some other fossils have been met with, identical with those of Bluntisham ; and therefore it might be ex- pected that the Elsworth rock should crop out near Holiwell, which is an intermediate point between Over and St. Ives. Now, im the collection of Mr. James Carter of Cambridge is a series of fossils, collected for him twenty years since, which he believes came from Holiwell. The series contains Ammonites Herici and many Elsworth fossils, as also some few new forms and several which Elsworth has not produced and probably does not contain, such as Dysaster bicordatus and Holectypus hemisphericus, these two species being very abundant. The lithological character of the bed is quite the same as that of the Elsworth rock. I do not insist upon a necessary identity ; for the locality is not given with that certainty which such an assumption ought to require ; and the pits being now abandoned and filled in, verification will be impos- sible. The fact must go for what it is worth, and, judging from circumstances in the country to the north-east, where there are other outcrops of rock, it will not be worthless. It may indicate an interesting synclinal between St. Ives and Over, which is probably a consequence of a vast downthrow fault known to exist far to the east. W. E. St. Neots. Papworth. Elsworth. Boxworth. B a, Boxworth rock; 8, Elsworth rock ; y,?St. Ives rock; 6, St. Neot’s rock; A, Oxford Clay. Ss. _ Conington. -Bluntisham. “~~~ Tetworth. ~---Gransden. St. Ives. P -~~ Waresley. @ ——-Caxton. Q —~---------- Elsworth. A Y A Y T, Tetworth Clay; G, Shanklin Sands; B, Boulder Clay; F, Flint gravel. Thus it has been endeavoured to illustrate a succession which will hereafter be elaborated at more appropriate length. * Pronounced Uv'er. M. L. Garreau on the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 111 XIII.—On the Functions of the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. By M. L. Garrzav. [Concluded from p. 43. ] Il. Of the Circulation. The intracellular circulation observed by Corti, and since studied by Treviranus, Amici, Robert Brown, Schultz, Raspail, Meyen, Slack, Pouchet, Dutrochet, Schleiden, Steinheil, Bec- querel, Dujardin, Schacht, Trécul, Hugo Mohl, &c., in a small number of plants, has been hitherto generally regarded as a simple motion of rotation, and as peculiar to certain plants. But, from the constant presence of living nitrogenous material in cells in course of growth, the modifications in form that it undergoes, and the vital movements with which it is endowed, and which we shall presently point out in detail, I hope to show that we have not always to deal with a simple act of rotation, and that this movement is as general as the cell. All plants, and their parts, in which the nucleus and its appendages are readily discoverable, are suitable for the study of the vermicular movements of the intracellular circulation; and it is sufficient to select for examination a hair or a thin slice of tissue, in the conditions before indicated, to demonstrate this beautiful pheno- menon. One plant in which it displays itself under the greatest variety of form is the Salvia sclarea. This vigorous labiate plant has its surface everywhere covered over, and particularly its young merithalli, with large hairs, beautifully transparent, and formed by two or three superimposed cells, the septa between them being also perfectly translucent. Ifa small slice of the hairy epidermis of this plant be examined under water, the canals through which the circulation is carried on are perceived at once in the hairs fringing the section ; and on following atten- tively their course from the periphery, or from any other point, towards the central nucleus, the granules which stream through them may be noticed making their way to the nucleus, whilst some of them are driven against the lateral and opposite por- tions of the canals in which they circulate. The rapidity of these currents is augmented by heat, and varies in each canal: it is almost inappreciable at 10° Cent., but considerable at 25° to 30°; the granules in one stream sometimes traverse the half of the long diameter of a canal in a few seconds, whilst those in others occupy some minutes in accomplishing the same distance. Again, in some canals the circulation becomes arrested for a moment, and sometimes this stoppage is instan- taneous. All these centripetal currents are equally distinguish- able both through the anastomosing canals and through those that 112 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of do not anastomose ; and, during their continuance, these canals are some of them stretched like rigid threads across the cell-cavity, whilst others are slack and more bulky. On my first observation of these currents, I speculated on the causes of the movements ; but I might have probably ended with the simple recognition of the fact of their existence, had not the cause itself been unfolded to my observation, viz., the power of contraction. On seeing this strange phenomenon, which I looked upon for a long time with that restless curiosity which astonishing and entirely unexpected circumstances produce in the mind, I was disposed to attribute it to some illusion ; but at length I was perforce obliged to yield to evidence obtained by ob- servations repeated 500 times during a period of ten years, upon the Salvia named and on very many other plants, and all of which have led to the same results. The contractions of the canals usually proceed progressively, in such a manner that the granular fluid is propelled gradually onwards—a dilatation larger or smaller appearing in advance of the contracted portion, and pre- ceding it, until the granules reach the nucleus, where their course is arrested until they coalesce with it. In their progress towards the nucleus, these dilatations are frequently retarded in their course by the spots where anastomosing canals meet ; and they do not reach the nucleus until after they have proceeded upwards, downwards, or laterally, according to the disposition of the anastomosing parts. Whilst these contractions continue, the canal, contracted behind and much dilated in front, seems to outstretch itself, and to be thrown into undulations or folds, which are most numerous near the nucleus. It might be sup- posed at first that, as is seen in most of the membranous pro- cesses of the hairs of the pumpkin or gourd, and in those of still very young cells, the membraniform, soft, very extensible material is a viscid matter which has an inherent motion towards the nucleus; but if we observe a canal having a direction parallel to the axis of the cell, and bearimg an anastomotic branch perpendicular to it, the latter is gradually pushed to- wards the nucleus, forming a more and more acute angle; and when the contraction is past, as relaxation slowly succeeds, it is seen to resume more or less closely its original relations, and form anew a right angle to the canal it communicates with. Nevertheless, in citing this example, it is not my intention to assert that the canals have a permanent fixed position; for this is not in accordance with fact, since we know that the organic matter they are composed of is susceptible of movement and of displacement. The distinguished observer Meyen seems to have obtained the first perception of a portion of the move- ments which take place in the living matter of cells; but his the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 113 conclusions testify to his having made observations under un- favourable conditions; for he assumed them all to result from the currents of the intracellular mucilaginous matter which successively coalesced and separated from each other. But there is no question that this naturalist would have given a better description of them if he had persevered in the examination of what he saw, varying the subject and the conditions of observa- tion ; for he then might have convinced himself that most of these currents take place in actually contractile canals, through which the numerous granules circulate with a greater rapidity than the centripetal movements of the soft matter which consti- tutes them—a fact which could not take place if they were transported with this matter ; moreover, he would have likewise witnessed the minute granules circulate in tense and com- pletely motionless canals, the contents of which received their impulse from contractions remote from the communicating canals. Hugo Mob! has certainly seen some of the facts that Ihave remarked; for he recognized the existence of minute canals in the intracellular animal matter which he calls the protoplasm ; and Slack, whilst denying the existence of canals in certain cells, remarks on the subject of the circulation in the cells of Hydrocharis morsus-rane, “The small globules follow the larger; and occasionally one of the green globules crosses the cell in a current of still more minute particles, forcibly tra- versing a canal which can scarcely admit them.” The canals which are formed in the animal azotized material of a cell do not always contract themselves gradually ; it is not uncommon to see several of them at a time, by a brusque movement, drive forward the granular fluid that they contain. Under such circumstances these canals insensibly enlarge ; and whilst the fluid that is to be propelled by their contraction flows through them, they may often be seen to change their relative position, and to undulate like imperfectly stretched cords until they acquire an increased rigidity and an enlarged capacity; then they become out- stretched, assume a dull-white hue, and contract once or oftener in succession. After these contractions have occurred, the partially emptied canals, more elongated than formerly, occa- sionally reunite in a bundle, fixed on one hand to the extremity of the cell, and on the other hand to the nucleus—a bundle which then simulates a mucilaginous-like axis without distinction of parts. However, if the observation be pursued, after half-an- hour or sometimes more, according to conditions which I have found it impossible to appreciate distinctly, these same canals fill themselves afresh and resume their contractility. Such is the mechanism by the aid of which the granular fluid contained Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 114 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of within the living azotized material flows from the periphery towards the nucleus. There likewise exists a centrifugal movement, which goes on by a series of slower contractions, also less marked, and of vari- able rapidity in different canals. The nucleus itself contracts ; but its contractions are slow and gradual, and its movements are only appreciable through its changes in relative position and volume ; for when these contractions take place, it is seen to diminish almost insensibly in magnitude, and to assume a dull- white tint, undergoing at the same moment an inconsiderable amount of displacement. At the least, this organ, suspended like the canals and the viscous currents in the cell-cavity, suffers displacements to a much less limited extent than is generally imagined: this depends on causes inherent in the contractile and extensile properties of the nucleus and its appendages. I have not as yet succeeded in determining whether the granular fluid can return from the centre to the periphery through the whole of the canals that it has traversed to reach the nucleus; but we may convince ourselves that, among the parallel canals through which the circulation proceeds, it is in some of them centripetal, in others centrifugal. But as the canals are all in connexion with the nucleus, we must assume that this organ is capable of effecting partial contractions, as the canals themselves can do; for otherwise, if its whole mass were acted upon at the same moment, it would not be conceivable how centripetal and centri- fugal currents should proceed simultaneously. The fluid in circulation is ordinarily limpid ; however, in plants having a white latex, such as Campanula pyramidalis, Sonchus oleraceus, &c., it has a certain degree of opacity ; and in Cheli- donium majus, yellowish granules are interspersed within it. Consequently it may at least be supposed, if it be not admis- sible as a legitimate conclusion, that the matters contained in the laticiferous vessels derive their source from the granules of the nutrient fluid within the cell-cavity. The granules carried for- ward in the currents are of two sorts: one, tolerably numerous and nearly spherical, congregates in the nucleus in much greater abundance than in the canals ; the other occurs in molecules of extreme tenuity and less regular in outline, which seem to be slightly more dense than the fluid in which they float ; for im Tradescantia virginica and Erodium moschatum, plants in which they are readily discernible, they are more aggregated at the lower part of the canals than at their centre. The nutritive fluid not only moves through the canals which float freely within the cell-cavity, but also in those which con- stitute a network in the primordial membrane, and in those of less size which are obliquely distributed on its internal surface. the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 115 To detect this portion of the circulation, considerable patience and -care are required, The canals in which it goes forward are, by artificial light, more transparent than the membrane they per- meate; and in tracing their course little dilatations may be observed to slowly form and presently vanish ; in these we have the counterparts, on a minuter scale, of those dilatations seen to arise during the contractions of the free canals stretched across the cell-cavity. Lastly, to sum up this list of facts, if a still fresh hair be selected, having however the primordial membrane of its cell de- tached to a very limited extent from its cellulose wall, the same movements are discernible in the unbroken filaments connecting those two lamine of the cell ; only, owing to the extreme tenuity of these filaments, the saccular dilatations are very minute, though always visible bya magnifying power of 300 or 400 diameters. The whole of the movements going forward within the intracellular nitrogenous material are arrested when the cells are immersed for a few minutes in an aqueous solution of sulphate of strychnine, containing one part of the salt in 200 parts of water. The acetate of morphine, of the same degree of dilution, produces similar effects, though not in less than double the time taken by the strychnine. The transparent hairs of Erodium moschatum, from the young merithalli, are well suited for making these observations on. The same may be said of the hairs of Chelidonium majus, Glaucium glaucum, of the cellular tissue of the epidermis of Sedum, and of that of the petiole of Dipsacus fullonum and of Arum, &e., except that in the last-named examples it is less easy to study the phenomenon, because their vital movements are more obscure, and their cellular walls less transparent. The movements that take place in the nitrogenous matter of cells are not limited in their effects to the circulation of the gra- nules contained in the canals and nucleus, but produce also an — incessant fluctuation in the aqueous fluid which surrounds them and fills the cells, and so cause a movement of rotation of the same character (though less marked, it is true) as that observed in the cells of Chara, Nitella, Hydrocharis morsus-rane, of Stratiotes aloides, &e. Still it is very visible, the liquid having numerous small molecules suspended in it, if attentively observed ; and its course may be detected in the hairs of Labiate, &c. Thus there are two sets of distinct movements within the interior of cells,— one spontaneous, due to the contractility of the living material itself; the other passive, dependent on displacement of the sur- rounding liquid. In the exposition just made of the mode of existence of the living matter of cells, of its proper movements, and of those it impresses on the fluid surrounding it, our se a have 116 -M. L. Garreau on the Functions of been restricted to only that portion of it which enters inte the formation of the nucleus and of the canals and contractile fila- ments ; however, in many plants, and among others in the epi- dermic cells of young Arums, in the hairs of Umbelliferee and of Boraginacez, in the epidermic cells of the leaves of Scolopen- drium officinarum vel undulatum, the azotized or living material loses the characters detailed, and is represented only by filaments which emerge from a semifluid mass and stretch themselves towards the primordial membrane, exhibiting changes of position very slowly, and impressing some movement on the fluid bathing them. It is a fact that most physiologists who have interested themselves in the rotary movement which occurs in the cells of Chara attribute it to other causes; but in our opinion there is only one true explanation of it, as pointed out by Schleiden, Hassall, and Hugo Mohl, who have rightly perceived its mechanism, and attributed it to the dense fluid which occupies the inner wall of the cell-cavity. Dutrochet and Donné have inspected its cause in the nearly mature merithalli of plants,—the first-named in the course of attempts to suspend its course by means of poisonous agents, and the second in recognizing the spontaneous move- ments of detached and vermiform fragments of the primordial membrane. Nevertheless these naturalists seem to assign an influence to the green globules which they do not possess; for these chlorophyl-granules are scarcely apparent in the very young ramifications of Nitella flevilis, and are entirely absent in the cortical cells of the rhizomes of Chara. Nevertheless the circu- Jation is very much more active in those parts than in merithalli of greater maturity, wherein the green globules more abound. They, in fact, contain a nitrogenous plastic material, filled with excessively minute molecules, which creeps along the wall of the tube, and impresses upon the aqueous liquid in contact with it, and loaded with globules, a similar movement. What proves that such is the cause of the motion in young cells is, that though this nitrogenous matter be more dense than the fluid with which it is bathed, it raises itself and moves along the tube contrary to the action of gravity, and advances with incompa- rably greater velocity than that of the fluid which accompanies it in its course. In proportion as the merithalli are developed, this matter gets fixed to the primordial membrane, in the forma- tion of which, indeed, it takes part, and which, though adherent to the cell-wall, propels onward the enclosed liquid of the cell, not, as has been suspected, by the aid of vibratile cilia, but by tolerably rapid undulations similar to those produced on the sur- face of water ruffled by a gentle breeze. If, instead of limiting the examination of the vital movements of the nitrogenous matter in the interior of the cells of phanero- the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 117 gamous plants and of some Characez, we extend it to Crypto- gamia generally, both vascular and cellular, it will be found that this vital act, whilst the subject of various metamorphoses, pre- sents itself in individual organisms of determinate form, which have for a long time been confounded with Infusoria. The antherozoids of Chara, Nitella, of Ferns, Mosses, Equi- setacee, Hepaticeze, &c., have been well studied, and described in relation to their development, forms, and vital endowments, by Thuret, Nageli, Suminski, Pringsheim, Derbés and Solier, and others. Let us examine and discover whether the spontaneity of movement with which these organisms are endowed be open to question, and whether their origin in the metamorphosis or de- velopment of the living proteme matters of the cells be still a debatable point. For ourselves, we have examined them in several Chare, in Nitella flexilis, in Marchantia polymorpha, &c.; and both the contractility and spontaneity of their movement have appeared so decided that we have no hesitation in saying, with all deference to those naturalists who deny them these pro- perties, that their observations must have been made at inoppor- tune seasons. The zoospores of Vaucheria clavata, mistaken by Nees von Esenbeck for Infusoria, have been examined with respect to their origin by Meyen, whilst Unger and Thuret have presented an accurate history of their organization. Likewise the sporozoids of different Fucaceze have been studied by Decaisne and Thuret, particularly by the latter observer, who has investigated with the greatest care both their organization and their vital endowments, in a large number of species. Now, on contemplating these loco- motive organisms we shall perceive that, if the living nitrogenous materials seen in movement within the cells of phanerogamous plants have not the determinate form of Infusoria, like that of the animalcular beings of antheridia and zoospores, there exists nevertheless between the two the signs of a common parentage. And it is a striking circumstance that the actually living and moving zoospores proceed, so soon as fixed by one end, to change their shape and to develope cells; but aithough dead so far as concerns our view, by reason of the screen which conceals them from our research, still their substance carries on a latent mode of life, and elaborates a plant which in course of time resus- citates the motile organisms. Is not this circle of life sufficiently remarkable to attract the highest attention of micrographers and physiologists ? for does it not seem to reveal to us the true nature of plants? It is true that the differences between the Algze and the immense majority of other plants are very wide; still we must not seek after the affinities between them in accessory 118 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of functions, but in the movements and principal functions of their nitrogenous matters. These movements are visible in all plants in process of growth, but exert no marked action upon their cell-walls, because these last are too resistant. However, in Oscillarie (some of which are elongated in the form of worms, whilst others are coiled in spirals) we meet with novel conditions of existence, by the operation of which the living matter of those plants, without any perceptible change of nature, subsists without the presence of that cuticle or epiderm which limits their motions. Suppose, for example, an Oscillaria to be enveloped in a more resistant cellulose coat, and we shall realize to our minds the presence of all the organic elements of a ligneous fibre. Or suppose, again, a similar covering imposed upon Ameba diffluens, and we shall recognize in it all the elements of a parenchymatous cell. Granting that the nitrogenous matters within the cells of plants possess the property of motion and of reproduction like animals, do they, let us next inquire, partake those other functions which belong to the latter ? The proteine matter of plants, which serves for the development of that of animals, has hitherto not been completely separated from the organic and inorganic elements with which it is asso- ciated; but we have elsewhere shown that it tends to isolate itself in seeds containing earthy and alkaline phosphates. On analyzing the gluten obtained from cereals we discover the same animal and mineral substances, very little modified, as are found in our own tissues. If this same gluten be brought into contact with a globule of yeast, it becomes entirely transformed into a mass of globules resembling those of the fungus, which is itself composed, with the exception of its scarcely visible enve- loping lamina of cellulose, of the elements of gluten, and in the same proportions. On cautiously removing the endochrome of the merithalli of Chara, the same chemical compounds, besides the fatty matters and the traces of starch, are discoverable. And, indeed, the fact seems well established that there is no difference between the com- position of the living matter of plants and that of animals. It is, notwithstanding, true that the proteine matters of plants are constantly impregnated with cellulose, whilst those of animals are only exceptionally so, as in the example of Tunicata and Diselmis. In the views we propound regarding the vital movements and the chemical composition of the proteine material of plants, it is not our intention to maintain that animals and plants are orga- nized in the same manner, and have the same sensibility ; the the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 119 only principle we advance is that the living matter of plants and animals has a similar chemical constitution, and that this mate- rial in plants performs essential functions similar or analogous to those of animals. It has for a long time been the general belief that plants, re- versing the rule prevailing in animals, respire carbonic-acid gas, which they extract from the soil or withdraw from the atmosphere, .and that whilst they assimilate its carbon they throw off its oxy- gen—or that, in other words, a plant seems to respire by the medium of an asphyxiating agent. However, when we consider that the Fungi, the majority of Algz, the Orobanchez, the roots, stems, flowers, the green fruits, &c. of all phanerogamic plants constantly give off carbonic acid as a result of a process of com- bustion between their carbon and the surrounding oxygen, we must feel obliged to admit that plants respire like animals, and that the final result of the respiratory act consists, equally in the two, in the decarbonization of their fluids or of their tissues, and in the production of heat. M. Bérard, in a prize thesis of the Academy of Sciences, has shown that green fruits, even the youngest, exspire, whether in sunshine or in the shade, notable quantities of carbonic acid. I have moreover proved, in a series of memoirs published in the ‘ Annales des Sciences Naturelles,’ by means of numerous experi- ments, that buds and the young shoots succeeding them, adult leaves, &c. consume a portion of their carbon by the aid of the sur- rounding oxygen, or of that which they form within their tissues; and that this function, which diminishes in activity as the leaves grow old, is more marked when it proceeds under the influence of a higher temperature. These facts, confirmed as they are by the most recent researches, establish clearly enough that plants are endowed with a respiratory function like that of animals, ex- tending over the day as well as the night. At the same time it must be granted that their diurnal animal respiration is rendered more or less obscure in its results, as it can be accomplished by the aid of the oxygen derived from the decomposition of the car- bonie acid it produces, and which it incessantly gives off within the laminz of their tissue or in the atmosphere. It is very easy to demonstrate this double interchange by placing a green plant or the leaves of one in a limited amount of atmospheric air, and in the presence of some solution of baryta, when the latter will be soon covered with a pellicle of the carbonate of that earth ; where- as if the experiment be performed under the same conditions, omitting the baryta, no trace of the carbonic-acid gas will be discoverable. It is equally easy to establish the relation that subsists between this act of animal respiration and the development of caloric from 120 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of it as a natural result. We may here recall some experiments made by De Saussure, Dutrochet, and Adolphe Brogniart, as sup- plementary to those which we can ourselves adduce in support of the same truth. | Dutrochet has demonstrated (‘Annales des Sciences Naturelles,’ 1845, p. 5) that all parts of plants possess a degree of heat superior to that of their surrounding medium, and that the elevation of temperature noticed in the Arum, the Caladium, &c., is only a more marked manifestation of a phenomenon common to all living beings. But this phenomenon itself is nothmg more than a feeble reflex of a more material fact, viz., that of the chemico-vital combustion of carbon by oxygen. Thus, in the instance of plants as of animals, the respiratory act has for its final appreciable result to carry off carbon and to raise their temperature ; and these two effects are intimately correlated in both sets of organisms ; for the researches of De Saussure show that tubers, roots, ligneous stems, &c., give off only one-half of their volume of carbonic acid in the twenty-four hours; whilst those of Dutrochet have demonstrated that the heat belonging to those parts is scarcely appreciable. The former of these observers has remarked that in mone- cious flowers the males consume more oxygen than the females ; and the latter has noticed that their temperature is also more elevated. The researches of Sennebier on the heat of Arum maculatum, those of Schultz on Caladium pinnatifidum, those of Goeppert on Arum dracunculus, of Brongniart, Vrolicke, and Vriese on Colocasia odora, as well as those long ago made by Lamarck, and our own on the spadix of Arum italicum, establish most distinctly the cause of the phenomenon and its relations with the oxygen and the carbon consumed. The following Table of the heat of certain plants, and of the quantity of carbonic acid expired by them during a certain time, represents the approxi- mative results arrived at by Dutrochet and other observers :— Name of plants. ev eED Observer. Medium Observer. in 24 hours. Hane (CRECNIPCAR: teneecaneescncecsaeess 0:50 Bérard. 0-06 Dutrochet. Green (Pear S.cn-socsasseecoceer vce 0:70 Id. 0:06 Id. Plum (Reine Claude) ......... 1:60 Id. 0:09 Id. 10 grs. of leaves of House-leek}) 0:20 Garreau. 0:03 Id. Spathe of Arum maculatum...| 4:00 | De Saussure. | 0:22 Id. Sadie Of(O:.s.-c-ceces ons tne er 38:00 Id. 4:60 Id. SEAMENSIOL Os,.cc00cecsceccssnnes 135-00 Td. 7:00 Id. iStuSTOMtlOsreuccecssssasesceecene 10:00 Id. 1:50 Id. Flower of the Gourd ......... 7°60 Id. 0:50 De Saussure. Boletus QUrEUS secseccsccoeececee 7:50 Id, 0°45 Dutrochet. From these facts, derived from different sources, it is at once the Nitrogenous Matter of Plants. 121 evident that a well-marked relation subsists between the quantity of carbon consumed and the elevation of temperature produced. These results, it is true, are deficient in that degree of precision that researches of this nature should possess ; for it is to be regretted that De Saussure and Bérard have neglected to indi- cate exactly, as Dutrochet has done, the mean temperature at which the observations have been conducted. Notwithstanding this omission, however, the relations pointed out are real. The following Table, conveying the results of our own obser- vations, moreover shows the relations subsisting between the oxygen consumed and the degree of heat emanating from its union with the carbon in the plant :— Respiration of the spadix of Arwm italicum, at the temperature of 20° Cent., and during the period of its sexual activity. Volume of oxy- Hestof spedix..| “neue | Soul tae cea taken as the unit. i ie econ Ist hour i z aay 32 39 Wl 2nd hour { £ 30 ey 53 57 16-2 ard hour] § 3) | gf 78 73 21-4 4th hour § 3) at 8:3 100 28:5 Sth hour 1% 35 | fat 6-0 50 14-2 6th hour {5 Es iat 27 20 5-7 WIG To daacncsbancrnnncdoconunebossnenc 53 56'8 Oxygen consumed in the 6 hours It may be objected that the production of carbonic acid within the vegetable tissue, and that of the calorie which results from it, are the consequences of a purely chemical action, and not of a physiological process. But if we consider that the researches of Théodore de Saussure, of Bérard, and of Dutrochet have been made on living organs in process of growth, that parts of plants when broken or bruised up cease to form car- bonic acid, as the experiments of De Saussure, Frémy, and our- selves demonstrate, and, lastly, that the death of the tissue, as evidenced by the persistent loss of movement of the nitrogenous living material, involves the cessation of the development of this gas, the conclusion is inevitable that its formation is the conse- quence of a vital act. What, in conclusion, along with the causes just enumerated, convinces us that the animal respiration 122 M. L. Garreau on the Functions of of plants has its seat in the living nitrogenous matter which is seen in circulation within the cells is the relation which exists between the quantity of this matter contained in a living organ and that of the carbonic-acid gas exhaled, The subjoined Table, taken from our first memoir on the respiration of plants (‘ Annales des Sciences Naturelles,’ 1851, p. 5) appears to bear out this assertion :— Acid exspired Matters examined. Temperature.| 5, 04 hours. Obseryations- White pith of Elder .................. 17 0:0 The yeast was Wood of oak, in fine chips ......... 17 0-0 spread on unsized Carmotigi sess reccccaces ss cones srenceres 17 08 paper, and suspend- Fresh alburnum of Elder .....+...... 17 45 ed in the air of the Do. do. of Horse-chestnut...... 18 5:0 apparatus. Root-fibres of Groundsel ............ 17 55 do. of Mercurialis............ 17 7:0 TIDIGTUS GUPCUSI«\cncan seh ct terete case 153 Ss height towards front ............ 15 Pectorals, distance from snout .............. 7t pind PREMISES Gapot occ insets stare a tek se arn ORSON 43 5 WHC UUG DASE: wepcdxe icicle tt Crapo oe 5 Ventrals; length on right side’ ...2.).2.52.4.. 105 2 * Jett. sides t a oeht Ail aes fee 84 Vent, distance of its vertical from snout ...... 13 Anal distance from vent 3). 608! e as Ne ovate 3 Soe) ETRE Gt DASE OSL toa eb aa See 11z Tail, height behind second dorsal ............ ly Caudal, length at middle. >... 22. soe. eae. 3y “7 as SIGER AG ceo iagheaceeerer see aa 45}, Order MALACOPTERYGII. Suborder APODES. Saccopharynx ampullaceus, Harwood, sp. The curious fish which I am about to describe was taken in the month of March, off the coast of Madeira, but under what cir- cumstances I could not learn. The man from whom I obtained it stated that he had a fish with two heads, two mouths, four eyes, and a tail growing out of the middle of the back, which had astonished the whole market; and the fishermen one and all declared they had never met with anything like it before. At first sight it really did appear to be the monster described ; but a short examination brought to light the fact that one fish had been swallowed by another, and that the features of the former were seen through the thin extensible skin of the latter. On extracting the fish that had been swallowed, it proved to be a Gadoid *, and to have a diameter several times exceeding that of its enemy, whose stomach it had distended to an unnatural and painful degree. As to the fish whose voracity had brought it to an untimely end, it was immediately pointed out to me by Dr. Gunther, when I showed him a sketch of the head, that it is closely related to a fish described at some length by Dr. Harwood, in a memoir printed in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions, in the year 1827, under the name of Qphiognathus ampullaceus. That eminent ichthyologist also informed me that a member of the same genus had been previously described by Dr. S. L. Mitchill, in the Annals of the Lyceum of New York’ for 1824, under the name * This Gadoid is the type of a new genus, and has been described by Dr. Giinther under the name of Halargyreus Johnsonii. 278 Mr. J. Y. Johnson on rare and little-known of Saccopharynx flagellum. On referring to these descriptions, I am led to think that, although the three fishes fall into the same genus, the Madeiran fish is specifically distinct from that forming the subject of Dr. Mitchill’s memoir, but is perhaps specifically identical with Dr. Harwood’s fish. I will first de- scribe the specimen obtained at Madeira (which now forms part of the rich collection in the British Museum), and then make some remarks on the relationship of the three. The Madeiran fish is 32 inches in length. It has a thin, soft, scaleless skin, which is jet-black. From its narrow elongated form, and from the absence of ventral fins, it would be referred, at the first glance, to the Eels ; but from that tribe it is distinetly separated by the structure of its singular jaws. The upper Jaw is apparently composed of the maxillary or premaxillary—bones which are invariably wanting in the tribe of true Eels. The bones of both jaws are slender and curved; those of the under jaw meet at an acute angle in front, and they are armed with a single row of small, sharp, delicate teeth, similar to those of the upper jaw, but rather more numerous. There are no teeth on the palatine bones or elsewhere in the mouth. The gape is of enormous extent ; and the animal had the power of throwing down the lower jaw until it was almost in a line with the upper, the two being subequal, and 24 inches in length. There is no tongue in the mouth, nor are there any branchio- stegal rays. A conical snout projects nearly four-tenths of an inch beyond the upper lip; and the small oval eye, which is co- vered with skin, is placed on the head not far from the base of the snout. In front of each eye is a single small nostril, which does not issue in a tube. The gill-openings are small slits, seven-tenths of an inch in length, on the underside of the body, placed only one-sixth of an inch apart, and at a distance of about 32 inches from the tip of the snout. What is very remarkable about these apertures is that, within the lips of each, the opposite sides are connected by three narrow cutaneous bands—two near the anterior end of the aperture, and one near the posterior end. The minute pectoral fins are placed immediately behind the gill-openings, but a little above them. ach is about one-fifth of an inch in length, and has about thirty-two delicate rays. In reference to the pectoral fins of the fish described by Dr. Har- wood, he mentions that they were principally composed of an adipose disk terminated and nearly surrounded by the rayed portion of the fin. In my fish I do not see anything of this kind; but that may be owing to the specimen being young. A low dorsal fin, having extremely slender rays, commences in front of the vent, and at a dist«. e of about 73 inches from Fishes taken at Madeira, 279 the tip of the snout. There is no trace of ventrals. The vent is about 84 inches distant from the snout; and behind it begins a low anal, which, though it may be traced for a considerable distance, stops, like the dorsal, short of the end of the tail. The hinder part of the body tapers off gradually ; and the fin- less tail is characterized by extreme tenuity, being reduced to the thinness of a thread. ‘Two bluish-white, parallel, closely approximated lines begin at the distance of rather more than an inch from the tip of the snout, and are traceable for a consider- able space along the back, one at each side of the dorsal fin. Dr. Mitchill speaks not only of a whitish line extending on each side of the dorsal fin of his fish, but of a similar stripe at each side of the anal fin. No lateral line is visible. The vertebre are without ribs, and all the bones are weak. And now as to the relationship of these three fishes. Whilst it is pretty certain that all three are members of the same genus, and whilst there is scarcely ground for holding that Dr. Har- wood’s fish and the Madeiran fish are specifically distinct (for their differences may be due only to their different ages), yet there is one part of Dr. Mitchill’s description which makes it difficult to suppose that his fish was identical in species with mine. He says that it had filiform processes or exerescences about an inch in length, and about fifty in number, depending on each side of the back, all the way from the head to the tail. In my fish there is no trace of such processes. Hence I venture to conclude that if Dr. Mitchill’s fish retains the name of Sacco- pharynx flagellum, Dr. Harwood’s and mine ought to be desig- nated Saccopharynx ampullaceus. I will only remark that Dr. Mitchill proposed the name Saccopharynx in substitution for Shaw’s Stylephorus, supposing the two fishes thus designated to belong to the same genus. But modern ichthyologists cannot admit this to be the case ; for {to say nothing of other points) the structure of the mouth is totally different, as may be at once seen by an inspection of Shaw’s unique specimen, now preserved in the Museum of the College of Surgeons. Suborder ABDOMINALES. Fam. Scopelide. Gonostoma denudata, Buon. Faun. Ital. (with a fig.). Gasteropelecus acanthurus, Cocco. The genus Gonostoma was indicated by Rafinesque, and defined by Buonaparte, as having an elongated body entirely covered with large caducous uniform, scales ; uniserial teeth in both jaws; pectoral fins inserted loy. -.own; the first dorsal fin rather far 280 Mr. J. Y. Johnson on rare and little-known back, 7. e. behind the ventral and over the anal fin. A single specimen of the genus has been taken at Madeira. isteD515:; 2nd D, radmuentary.5 A 20. Pll: V.S. Coa? 16. av. EBs: The back and belly are black, the sides silvery grey, and there are two rows of small silvery spots extending at each side from the head to the tail, near the lower edge of the body. The skin is delicate, and the large scales easily removed. Their edges are even, and their surfaces concentrically striated. The body is oblong and compressed ; the highest part is at the nape, from which place it attenuates backwards. The sides of the body, when the skin is removed, are seen to be marked with furrows diverging from the lateral line. The head is high, compressed, and unarmed ; the cheeks flat ; the vertex marked with low ridges. The round eye is contained about seven times in the head; it is distant about one diameter from the snout, and it is so high up that its border forms part of the profile. The rictus is large, extending downwards with an oblique curve much beyond the ~ye. The under jaw shuts inside the upper, except anteriorly, where the upper jaw reverses its curve. The mouth is black inside. Its upper border is formed entirely by the premaxillary, which is thin and dilated down- wards, the slender maxillary lying behind. The denéztion is curious. In both jaws there is a single row of delicate, acicular, nearly straight teeth, with four or five very small teeth, of similar shape, in the intervals between two larger ones. Of the larger teeth, in the specimen there are twenty-nine in the upper, and twenty-one in the lower jaw. There is a row of teeth on the palatines, a few teeth on the vomer, and a row along the middle of the fleshless tongue—all very minute. The opercular pieces are delicate, smooth, and with entire margins. There are two low crests on the opercle, starting from the same point, one vertical and the other oblique; the posterior margin of the opercle is nearly vertical. The triangular first dorsal fin is placed far back over the anal fin, and both are sprinkled with minute black dots. The first two rays are very short and unbranched, the third ray is the longest ; the posterior rays are very delicate. The second dorsal fin possesses rays, but is very minute. The pectoral fins are oblong, and inserted very low down near the angle of the subopercle. The ventral fins are rather shorter than the pectoral fins, and-are placed close together a little in advance of the first dorsal. The anal fin commences under the commencement of the first dorsal, but extends beyond it; it is high in front, but the first two rays are short, the third being Fishes taken at Madeira. — 281 the longest in the fin, from which it falls rapidly backwards. The caudal fin is forked. On the under edge of the tail there are five short glassy spines, which curve backwards. The vent is placed at the middle of the total length. The single specimen obtained, though measuring 5,8, inches in length, was extracted from the stomach of a malacopterygian fish, having a length of only 34/5 inches, whose black skin, — frightfully distended, entirely covered it! It was doubled up, and a good deal injured. So many of the scales had been re- moved, that those of the lateral line could not be counted. It is to be observed, with reference to the description of Gono- stoma denudata given in the ‘ Fauna Italica,’ that ten rays are assigned to the branchiostegal membrane, whereas I certainly found thirteen; that the fifth, sixth, and seventh rays of the first dorsal fin are said to be the longest, whereas in my fish the longest rays were the third, fourth, and fifth; and that, whilst the two agree in the number of the rays of the first dorsal fin, there were in my fish eleven in place of the ten rays in the pec- toral fin, eight in place of six rays in the ventral fins, and twenty-nine in place of thirty rays in the anal fin. The fish was taken in the month of March, and is now in the British Museum. The following are the dimensions of the principal parts :— . inches Matallenethy oi: csisie, dca bot oAlelact >. Spat 5 lobe 5385 TCIAH GAG MAPS 8 ft ci oats, to apt bs epee 35 PTCHUCICHE DIE ssee Los ye ce nus + era eer 1+ ve diameter sissies tit kyec vee sy Mouth; width at back 290%). ofa ee a5 Fu vlensth of upperjaw 2. fe eo oe 1 Woneestitectine ts 92 ON eue tt) PS EME ae Ist dorsal, distance from snout.......... 2.5, os lensth of hase! 4.55 $52.8 05780 in en length, of third ray 5) 54.22. ty 2nd dorsal, distance from snout ........ 4 Pectorals, distance from snout .......... 1-3 zr Peri pt Titel ioe he cain ea crane a Ventrals, distance from snout .......... 235 oe HOW UHi SS oe iy ee, ae SO Pe is iunalelensthrot base: s.5 5... Geos nes: . 154 sparucnsth of third ray’... hee sos: s oT Scopelus Bonapartii, Val. H. N. Poiss. xxii. 449. Lampanyctus Bonapartii, Fauna Ital. Ist D. 14, 2nd D. rudimentary. P.14, V.7. The legs are robust, and provided with hairs and sessile spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurring on the inferior surface of the tibize and metatarsi of the first and second pairs ; the first pair is the longest, then the fourth, and the third pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved, minutely pectinated claws, below which there is a small scopula; the co- lour of the femora is brownish black, and that of the genual joint and tibia of the first and second pairs dark reddish-brown; the genual joint and tibia of the third and fourth pairs have a brownish-red hue; the former is marked with dark reddish brown at its extremity, particularly on the sides and inferior surface, and the latter has a dark reddish-brown annulus at its termination ; the metatarsi and tarsi of all the legs have a pale brownish-red colour, and the former have a small reddish-brown annulus at their extremity. The palpi, which are rather long, have a pale brownish-red hue, and are without a claw at their extremity. The cephalothorax is large, glossy, somewhat quadri- lateral, sloping abruptly at the base, and projecting a little be- yond the falces in front ; it is of a very dark brown colour, faintly tinged with red, and the frontal margin is fringed with long yellowish-white hairs. The minute mtermediate eye of each lateral row is rather nearer to the anterior than to the posterior eye of the same row. The falces are powerful, conical, and ver- tical; the maxille are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity ; the lip is oval, and slightly hollowed at the apex ; and the sternum is oval. These parts are of a dark reddish- brown colour, the sternum and the extremity of the maxille being much the palest. The abdomen is oviform, pointed to- wards the spinners (which are prominent), moderately convex above, and projects over the base of the cephalothorax; it is thinly clothed with hairs, and of a dark brown colour, the sides being rather the palest; on each side of the medial line of the upper part there is a series of minute spots, consisting of white hairs, disposed in pairs, those of the penultimate pair, which are much the largest, bemg of an oblong-oval form, and inclined towards each other, Salticus delicatus. Length of the Hele ths of an inch; length = the cephalo- thorax {2 253; breadth TO, ; ‘breadth of the abdomen jy; length of a leg of the third pair $; length of a leg of the second pair }. The minute intermediate eye of each lateral row is nearly Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 24: 354 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders equidistant from the eyes constituting its extremities. The cephalothorax is large, glossy, somewhat quadrilateral, elevated in the cephalic region, and abruptly sloped at the base ; it is of a dull yellow colour, faintly tinged with red, the region of the eyes having a reddish-brown hue. The falces are small, conical, and vertical; the maxille are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity; the lip is somewhat oval, but truncated and slightly hollowed at the apex. These organs have a red-brown hue, the extremity of the maxille being the palest. The legs are robust, provided with hairs and sessile spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurring on the inferior surface of the tibiz and metatarsi of the first and second pairs; the third pair is the longest, then the first, and the second pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved minutely pectinated claws, immediately below which a small scopula is situated ; the palpi are short, and without a claw at their extremity ; the sternum is oval and glossy. These parts have a dull yellow hue, slightlytinged with red. The abdomen is oviform, somewhat depressed and pointed towards the spinners (which are prominent), convex at the ante- rior extremity, and projects a little over the base of the cephalo- thorax ; it is sparingly clothed with hairs, and is of a yellowish- white colour, with an obscure, slightly curved, brownish-black band, having its convexity directed forwards, situated near the anterior extremity of the upper part ; on each side of the medial line of the posterior half there is a series of brownish-black con- fluent spots extending to the spinners, the superior pair of which organs has a dark-brown and the inferior pair a red-brown hue; on the under part there are two longitudinal, faint, brownish- black bands which meet near the spinners; and the colour of the sexual organs is dark red-brown. Salticus cephalicus. Length of the male ith of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax 4; breadth 4,; breadth of the abdomen ;), ; length of a leg of the third pair ;5,; length of a leg of the fourth pair 4. The cephalothorax is large, glossy, somewhat quadrilateral, very elevated in the cephalic region, and sloped abruptly at the base; it is of a dull yellow colour, tinged with red; the region of the eyes has a reddish-brown hue, and that of the frontal margin, which is broad and nearly vertical, is blackish-brown. The falces are long, prominent, subcylindrical, depressed and indented at the extremity (which has a pointed process on the outer and another on the inner side, near the articulation of the fang), and are of a red-brown colour. The maxille are straight, and enlarged at the extremity, which is produced on the outer side; and the lip is oval. These parts have a brownish-yellow captured in Rio Janeiro. 355 colour, tinged with red, the lip being the darkest. The sternum is almost circular, and has a pale yellowish hue. The lateral eyes are seated on black spots, the minute intermediate one of each row being much nearer to the anterior than to the posterior eye of the same row. The legs are moderately robust, provided with hairs and sessile spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurring on the inferior surface of the tibiz and metatarsi of the first and second pairs; the third pair is the longest, then the first, and the fourth pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is ter- minated by two curved claws, immediately below which a small scopula is situated; the base of the femur of the first, second, and third pairs has a dull yellowish colour ; the extremity of the joint and the tibia and base of the metatarsus of the same limbs have a red-brown hue, and the hue of the extremity of the meta- tarsus, with the tarsus, is yellowish-brown; the colour of the posterior legs is pale dull yellow. The palpi are long, slender, and of a yellowish-white hue, the digital jomt having a tinge of brown; the cubital and radial joints are long and somewhat clavate, and the latter, which is the shorter, has a large pointed apophysis at its extremity, on the outer side; the digital joint is subcylindrical, convex and hairy externally, compact at the ex- tremity, but has a cavity near the base, on the under side, which comprises the palpal organs; these organs are moderately deve- loped, not very complicated in structure, with a curved, pointed, black spine at their extremity, and are of a reddish-brown colour. The abdomen is oviform, somewhat depressed and pointed to- wards the spinners (which are prominent), convex at the anterior extremity, and projects a little over the base of the cephalothorax; it is sparingly clothed with hairs, and the upper part, which has a black hue, comprises four minute white spots, disposed in a rectangular figure whose transverse breadth is the greatest, and in the medial line, between these spots and the spinners, there is a larger white spot; these spots consist of short scale-like hairs; the anterior extremity, contiguous to the cephalothorax, the sides, and under part are of a yellowish-white colour, two longitudinal brownish-black bands, which are united near the spinners, occurring on the last ; the colour of the superior spin- ners is dark brown, and that of the inferior pair yellowish-brown. I have given to this spider the specific name of cephalicus provisionally, as it may possibly be the male of Salticus delicatus, though it differs from it in many marked particulars. Salticus properus. Length of the male th of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ;1,; breadth 7; ; breadth of the abdomen 1, ; length of To? 123 5 an anterior leg }; length of a leg of the second pair ,. 24° 356 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders The legs are moderately robust, and provided with hairs and sessile spines; the first pair is the longest, then the fourth, and the second pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved, minutely pectinated claws, immediately below which there is a small scopula; the anterior legs are of a dark brown colour, slightly tinged with red, the metatarsus being the palest, and the tarsus having a reddish-yellow hue; the colour of the second, third, and fourth pairs is dull yellow, the genual joint, tibia, and base of the metatarsus being tinged with red, and the last joint has a small brown annulus at its extremity. The palpi are short, and of a brown colour; the radial joint has a slender pointed apophysis at its extremity, on the outer side; the digital joint is of an oblong-oval form, convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are mode- rately developed, not very complicated in “structure, rather pro- minent at the base, and have a black, curved, filiform spine at their extremity, whose point is directed towards the inner side ; these organs are of a brown colour. The cephalothorax is large, glossy, somewhat quadrilateral, sloping abruptly at the base and projecting a little beyond the falces in front; it is of a very dark brown colour, strongly tinged with red in the region of the eyes. The minute intermediate eye of each lateral row is nearly equidistant from the eyes constituting its extremities. The falces are short, conical, and vertical; the maxille are straight, and enlarged at the extremity, which is produced on the outer side; the lip is short and oval; and the sternum is oval. These parts are of a dark reddish-brown colour, the falces and lip being the darkest, and the sternum much the palest. The abdomen is oviform, pomted towards the spinners (which are prominent), convex above, projecting over the base of the cephalothorax ; it is thinly clothed with hairs, glossy, and the colour of the upper part is brown; a pale, dull yellowish band curves round the anterior extremity, and a broad slightly dentated band of the same hue extends along the middle of the posterior part, and terminates in a yellowish-white spot immediately above the spinners; this band is crossed by several curved, light brown bars, whose convexity is directed forwards, and on each side of it there are two curved yellowish lines, whose convexity is in the same direction; the sides and under part are of a dull yellow colour, a broad, longitudinal, brown band occupying the middle of the latter ; and the spinners, which have a dark brown hue, are tipped with yellowish-white, Salticus scitulus. Length of the male ;5ths of an inch; length of the cephalo- captured in Rio Janeiro. 357 thorax 5, ; breadth $; breadth of the abdomen ,4,; length of an anterior leg 3; length of a leg of the second pair 5%. The cephalothorax is large, somewhat quadrilateral, sloping gradually at the base, and projecting a little beyond the falces in front ; it is densely covered with hairs, and is of a deep black hue, with a broad longitudinal band immediately above each lateral margin, and another extending along the middle, of a yellow-white colour, the anterior extremity of the latter being the palest ; there is a small brown-red spot above each eye of the front row, and a larger one below each lateral eye of the same row. The minute intermediate eye of each lateral row is nearly equidistant from the eyes constituting its extremities. The falces are conical, vertical, and have a long sharp tooth on the inner surface ; the maxille are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity, and the lip is oval. These parts have a dark brown hue, tinged with red, the extremity of the maxillz being much the palest. The sternum is oval; the legs are robust, and provided with hairs and sessile spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurring on the inferior surface of the tibiz and metatarsi of the first and second pairs ; the first pair is the longest, then the fourth, and the second pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved pectinated claws, im- mediately below which there is a small scopula. These parts have a brownish-yellow hue; the legs are marked with a few obscure, longitudinal, brown lines, and the first pair is the darkest, particularly on the anterior side. The palpi are short, strong, and resemble the legs in colour ; the radial jot projects a large pointed apophysis from its extremity, on the outer side ; the digital jot is oval, convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are moderately de- veloped, rather complex in structure, prominent at the base, and have a curved, pointed, black spine at their extremity, which is directed outwards; they are of a yellowish-brown colour, faintly tinged with red. The abdomen is oviform, pointed towards the spinners (which are prominent), convex above, projecting over the base of the cephalothorax, and is densely covered with hairs ; the upper part is of a brownish-black colour, with a broad yellow-white band extending along the middle, which is crossed by a brownish-yellow line at about one-third of its length from the spinners ; the sides and under part are of a yellow-white colour; an obscure brownish-black band extends along the former, and in the middle of the latter there is a large dark brown mark, which is bifid at the anterior and broader extremity ; a small, triangular, yellow-white spot, whose vertex is directed forwards, occurs near the base of each superior spinner. 308 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders Salticus festinus. Length of the male 4th of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax }; breadth 7; breadth of the abdomen ,4,; length of an anterior leg 8; length of a leg of the second pair +. The legs are robust, and provided with hairs and sessile spines ; the first pair is the longest, then the fourth, and the second pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved pecti- nated claws, immediately below which a small scopula is situated ; their colour is brownish-black, with the exception of the tarsi, which have a reddish-brown hue, and a longitudinal line on the upper surface of the femur, a spot near the middle of the tibia, and another at the base of the metatarsus consisting of brilliant white hairs. The palpi are short, strong, and resemble the legs in colour, white hairs occurring on the upper surface of the humeral joint at its extremity, and on the cubital jomt; the radial joint is supplied with long black bristles on the under side, and has a pointed apophysis at its extremity on the outer side; the digital joint is subcylindrical, convex and hairy exter- nally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are highly developed, not very complicated in structure, protuberant near the base, and are of a dark brown colour. The cephalo- thorax is large, glossy, somewhat quadrilateral, sloping abruptly at the base, and projecting a little beyond the falces in front ; its colour is brownish-black, with a broad band on the posterior half of the lateral margins, a spot in the medial line, at the commencement of the posterior slope, another contiguous to the minute intermediate eye of each lateral row, and a transverse lme on the frontal margin consisting of brilliant white hairs. The minute intermediate eye of each lateral row is nearly equi- distant from the eyes constituting its extremities. The falces are short, conical, and vertical; the maxille are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity ; the lip is oval; and the sternum is oval, being rather broader at the posterior than at the anterior part, and is clothed with whitish hairs. These parts have a brown-black hue, the extremity of the maxille being the palest. The abdomen is oviform, pointed towards the spinners (which are prominent), convex above, projecting over the base of the cephalothorax, and is densely covered with hairs; the upper part is of an orange-red colour, with four brilliant white spots disposed in a row in the medial line of the posterior half, the two intermediate ones being much the smallest, and the anterior one the largest ; a white band, curved round the anterior extre- mity, extends along each side more than half its length, and a detached white spot occurs near its termination; the sides, captured in Rio Janeiro. 359 spinners, and under part are of a brownish-black colour, the last having a pale yellowish-brown hue in the middle of the anterior part, which is clothed with whitish hairs. Salticus minaz. Length of the female ird of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ¢; breadth 4; breadth of the abdomen 3; length of a posterior leg 3; length of a leg of the second pair 3,. The cephalothorax is large, glossy, sparingly clothed with hairs, somewhat quadrilateral, and slopes abruptly at the base ; it is of a dull yellow colour, the region of the eyes and a broad longitudinal band on each side, which tapers to its posterior extremity, having a dark red-brown hue; the colour of the narrow lateral margins is dark brown, and the frontal margin is fringed with long yellowish-white hairs. The minute inter- mediate eye of each lateral row is nearly equidistant from the eyes constituting its extremities. The falces are short, powerful, conical, convex at the base, vertical, and armed with teeth on the inner surface; the maxille are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity ; and the lip is short and oval. These organs have a red-brown colour, the base of the falees and the extremities of the maxillz and lip being the palest. The sternum is oval; and the digital joint of the palpi, which is rather long and well supplied with hairs, is without a claw at its extremity. These parts have a pale dull yellowish hue. The legs are robust, and provided with hairs and sessile spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurrmg on the inferior surface of the tibize and metatarsi of the first and second pairs; the fourth pair is the longest, then the third, and the second pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved minutely pectinated claws, immediately below which there is a small scopula; they are of a dull yellow colour, obscurely marked with brown; a smail dark brown annulus occurs at the extremity of each meta- tarsus, and the tibic of the anterior pair have a dark brown hue, except at the extremity. The abdomen is oviform, pointed to- wards the spiners (which are prominent), somewhat depressed, and projects over the base of the cephalothorax ; it is densely covered with hairs, and is of a yellow-grey colour, a broad band of a paler hue, whose lateral margins are somewhat sinuous and obscurely bordered with black, extending along the middle of the upper part ; near the middle of the band there is a black mark in the form of a W, which is succeeded by faint, curved, transverse bars of a yellow-brown colour ; they decrease in length as they approach the spinners, and their convexity is directed forwards ; the sides are thickly spotted with brown; and on the under part there are three dark brown lines forming three sides 360 Rev. T. Hincks’s Catalogue of Zoophytes of a quadrilateral figure, open in front, whose length consider- ably exceeds its breadth ; the sexual organs are of a yellowish- brown hue, passing into dark brown at the posterior part, and have a longitudinal septum in the middle. [To be continued. | XL.—A Catalogue of the Zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall. By the Rev. THomas Hincxs, B.A. [Concluded from vol. ix. p. 475. ] APPENDIX. Classification.—In the Introduction to this Catalogue I have adopted Prof. Huxley’s Systematic Arrangement of the Hydro- zoa. I am now convinced, however, that the groups to which he has assigned respectively the names Hydride, Corynide, and Sertulariade are not entitled to ordinal rank, but should merely be regarded as families. I therefore propose to classify the Hydroid polypes, with Johnston, under one order, Hypro1pa, and to distribute them into the following families :—1. Tubula- riade (embracing both the Tubulariade and the Corynide of Johnston) ; 2. Campanulariade ; 3. Sertulariade ; 4. Hydride. ADDENDA. Class HYDROZOA. Order HYDROIDA. Fam. Tubulariade. Evupenprivum, Ehrenberg. 1. HE. rameum, Pallas. “On Pinna ingens, south of the Deadman Point” (Cowch). 2. E. capillare, Alder. Additional habitat: near Polperro, Cornwall. The specimens received from this locality bear female capsules, which have not hitherto been noticed. They are ranged round the lower portion of the body of the polype, and bear a general resemblance to those of other species of Eudendrium. Mr. Alder, in the Supplement to his Durham and Northum- berland Catalogue, refers this species to the genus Dicoryne. At present I feel doubtful as to its true position. There is much difficulty in classifying the Tubulariadz; and the existing genera will require thorough revision. of South Devon and South Cornwall. 361 Fam. Sertulariade. SertuLaria, Linn. S. filicula, Ellis & Solander. “On Fuci; rather rare. Talland Sand Bay, Polperro” (Couch). [Very abundant on the Yorkshire coast. ] Fam. Campanulariade. CAMPANULARIA, Lamarck. C. integra, Macgillivray. Syn. C. levis, Couch, Cornish Fauna, p. 42. “On stones and shells from deep water, Polperro” (Couch). [Ilfracombe ; Filey, Yorkshire. } - Class ACTINOZOA. Order ZOANTHARIA, Milne-Edwards (pars). Fam. Ilyanthide. Inyantuus, Forbes. I, Mitchellii, Gosse. “Two specimens obtained by a Torquay fisherman near the Start” (HZ. W. H. Holdsworth). MOLLUSCOIDA. Class POLYZOA, J. V. Thompson. Order INFUNDIBULATA, Gervais. Suborder Cheilostomata, Busk. Fam. Membraniporide. FiusrRrequa, Gray. F’, hispida, Fabricius. On sea-weeds between tide-marks, very common. This species was accidentally omitted. CoRRIGENDA. Coryne ramosa, Ehrenberg. This name must be cancelled, and C. vaginata substituted for it. I find that the specimens to which I applied it belong to the latter species. I have received a Coryne from Talland Sand Bay, near Polperro, which I believe to be undescribed, but I am unable to name it at present. 362 Rev. T. Hincks’s Catalogue of Zoophytes. Pioumutaria, Lamarck. I have referred, in the Introduction, to Prof. Forbes’s sugges- tion for a dismemberment of this genus. Mr. Busk has divided it into two very natural groups, for one of which he retains the name Plumularia, assigning to the other that of Halicornaria. They are distinguished by the position of the nematophores (tubules of Johnston)—curious and probably offensive organs, with which one section of the Sertulariade is furnished—and by the character of the gonophores. The following species, included in the Catalogue, belong to Plumularia as now restricted :—eristata, tubulifera, pennatula, and myriophyllum. The rest must be referred to Halicornaria, with the exception of P. falcata, which should be united with Sertularia. Hoplangia durotriz, Gosse. This species must be withdrawn from the Catalogue. I find that the specimens which I referred to it are only a form of Caryophyllia Smithii. Caberea Hookeri, Fleming. Mr. Alder has pointed out to me an error into which I have fallen in my note on this species. I have assumed the Cellularia Hookeri of Fleming to be identical with Johnston’s species of the same name, and with Busk’s Caberea Hookeri. This, how- ever, is not the case. Fleming’s C. Hookeri, which was described from specimens sent from Torquay by Sir W. Hooker, is the Crisia Boryt of Audouin—the Caberea Boryi of Busk’s Catalogue. The species to which Dr. Johnston and Mr. Busk have given the name Hookeri is really the Flustra setacea of the ‘ British Ani- mals,’ which Fleming had previously described and figured in the Mem. of the Wernerian Soc. (vol. i. p. 251) as F. Ellisii. This poimt has been satisfactorily established by Mr. Alder. According to the law of priority, therefore, Caberea Ellisit should take its place as the name of this species instead of C. Hookeri. This form seems to be strictly northern. Now that the syno- nymy is explaimed, there is no ground whatever for supposing that it has been met with in Devon. Lepralia hastata, Hincks. I have described and figured under this name what I supposed at the time to be a new species. J am now convinced that it is only a peculiar variety of the well-known L. linearis. The spe- cies must be cancelled, but the form is remarkable enough to be recorded as L. linearis, var. hastata. In the Introduction to the Catalogue, it was stated that about Rev. W. Haughton on the Unicorn of the Ancients. 363 230 species would be enumerated in it. This number has in- creased to 242, of which 18 are new and 3 have not hitherto been recorded as British; and the wealth of the district is, no doubt, far from being exhausted. Indeed, I learn from my friend Prof. Allman that he has lately discovered several new Tubulariade in the neighbourhood of Torquay. I shall hope to include these and any subsequent additions in a future Supple- ment. The following table shows the number of species under each of the leading divisions :— Piydroidar (6s cee One 77 pea { Pmeernariadis. 3 oie. 5 st. a 2 ae : CAD VN? CONTE Ss ee a te ae Pe 37 aeenqcoe { PRICY OMATIR, cies 2 Seats. one) » tuts 4 rr ee Cheilostomata .. ..). «i702 ok 87 Crclostonaatas 3 56:. acceso ay 14 Holyzoa, {, Ctenostomata, sic). 644.2 25-3 1k Pedicellineay 72. a cena ac. 3 TROPAODGA. ooo. cic pgs te Hen 1 — 122 242 XLI.—On the Unicorn of the Ancients. By the Rev. W. Hauceuron, M.A., F.L.S. Few subjects of zoological interest have from time to time given rise to more discussion than that which relates to the question as to what animal is denoted by the “‘ Unicorn” of the ancients*. * See for instance the following papers, which the reader interested in this question may consult, but which I have had no opportunity of seeing. Bacci, ANp. Discorso dell’ Alicorno. Fiorenza, 1573. BarRTHOLINUS, THomas. De Unicornu observationes nove. Patav. 1645. BarTHOLINuS, Caspar. De Unicornu ejusque affinibus, &e. Hafn. 1628. Bererus, F.C. Diss. de Monocerote. Resp. J. H. Homilius. Lips. 1667. CaATELAN, LAMENT. Histoire de la Licorne. Monpell. 1624. —— Von der Natur, Tugenden, Eigenschaften und Gebrauch des Einhorns ; in franzos. Sprach beschrieben ; von G. Fabroiibersetzt. Frankf. a. M., 1625. Deusine, Ant. Diss. de Unicornu. Groning. 1659. Documents Nouveaux sur Vewxistence de la Licorne, in Féruss. Bull. Se. Nat. iv. 1825, p. 417. FRENZEL, 8. F. Disquis. Naturalis de Unicornu. Resp. Christ. Vater. Witteberg, 1675. : LATERRADE, J.F. Notice en refutation de la non-existence de la Licorne, 364 Rev. W. Haughton on the Unicorn of the Ancienis. Various reports have been given by travellers, that an animal still exists in some parts of the world which bears a marked re- semblance to the one-horned animal under consideration ; and although scientific men have no hesitation in regarding the Uni- corn as a fabulous animal, yet from time to time travellers write home that they are on the track of the veritable creature itself ; and I only read the other day that Dr. Baikie, the African tra- veller, now in charge of the Niger Expedition, is in pursuit of the animal, and thinks that he may be able to discover it in some of the unexplored wastes of Central Africa! He learned from two informants that they had seen the bones of such an animal, and states that they accurately describe the long, straight, black horn, and carefully distinguish between the one-horned Rhino- ceros and the supposed Unicorn! Dr. Baikie gives a list of native names by which this unknown animal is called in various African dialects, and is quite disposed to believe that its non- existence is by no means proved*. What are the chances of our seeing a specimen of the Unicorn brought home to this country, and forming the grand object of attraction to all the world? Why should not a one-horned ani- mal exist such as we see depicted on the royal arms? Father Lobo, in his ‘ History of Abyssinia,’ actually describes the Uni- corn as a beautiful Aorse ; and Barrow, in his ‘ Travels in Southern Africa,’ gives the figure of a head of a Unicorn which he saw drawn on the sides of a cavern, and appears to entertain no doubt that such an animal exists. No traveller, however, has as yet succeeded in obtaining a specimen; and I venture to affirm very positively that the like result will attend Dr. Baikie’s search. But let us take a brief survey of what the ancients have recorded of the Unicorn, or, rather, Unicorns ; for there are at least three, if not more, one-horned animals mentioned by them. in Bull. Soc. Linn. de Bordeaux, i. 1826; Féruss. Bull. Se. Nat. x. 1827, p. 396. LATERRADE, J. F. Sur la Licorne, in Actes de la Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, v. 1832, p. 115. On the Unicorn. Transl. by Jos. Porter, in Silliman’s American Journ. xxi. 1832, p. 123. RevusseEr, G. Sur lexistence de la Licorne, in Millin, Mag. Encyel. iii. 5, 1797, p. 311. Reitz, K.K. Neueste Nachricht vomEinhorn, m Lichtenberg-Voigt’s Mag. Ba. x. St..3, 1797. Sacus, P. Lpw. Monocerologia, seu de genuinis Unicornibus Diss. Raceb. 1676. SToLBERGK, J. CHR. Evxercitatio de Unicornu. Resp. Chr. Sagittarius. Lips. 1652. VERSTER VAN WuLvernorst, A. H. Over den Eenhoorn, in Bijdragen tot de Dierkunde, 1860. * See the ‘ Athenaum’ for August 16, 1862. Rev. W. Haughton on the Unicorn of the Ancients. 365 And first of all, there is the Unicorn of the Bible. Pages upon pages have been written on this subject. Some have said it must have been the Antelope (Orya leucoryx) of North Africa, Syria, &c., that the horns, seen in profile, appear as one, and hence the mistake of regarding it as a one-horned animal; others have no hesitation in referring the Unicorn to the one-horned Rhinoceros (R. unicornis) of Asia; this is the opinion generally entertained at this day. Now, all attempts to discover a one-horned animal that shall represent the Unicorn of our English Bible are beyond the mark entirely, and for this simple reason: the so-called Unicorn is no Unicorn at all ; the Hebrew word (R’ém) denotes a two-horned animal, beyond a shadow of a doubt. The “ Unicorn ” of our English Bible owes its origin to the Septuagint and Vul- gate versions*. In the 17th verse of Deut. xxxii., which con- tains a portion of Joseph’s blessing, it is said, “‘ His horns are like the horns of a R’ém+.” Our translators, seeing the contra- diction involved in the expression “horns of the Unicorn,” have rendered the Hebrew singular noun as if it were a plural form in the text, though they give the correct translation in the margin. The two horns of the R’ém are “the ten thousands of Ephraim and the thousands of Manasseh,” and represent the two tribes which sprang from one (viz. Joseph), just as two horns spring from one head. The Unicorn of the Bible therefore may be dismissed at once, as being a very unhappy translation of the Hebrew two-horned R’ém, the animal denoted being, there cannot be much doubt, some species of “ wild ox,” as ap- pears pretty evident from a comparison of the different passages where the word occurs in Holy Scripture. The R’ém was two- horned ; it is almost always mentioned with bovine animals; it is said to push with its horns; it must have been frequently seen by the ancient Hebrews roaming on the hills of Palestine or in the woods of the Jordan valley, as is evident from the numerous allusions to it. It is true there is no wild ox at present known to exist in Palestine ; but this is no reason why, in early times, some mighty species, allied perhaps to the Urus which Cesar saw in the Hercynian Forest, should not have existed in that country. Lions were certainly not uncommon in Palestine and Syria in Biblical times, as is clear from the numerous allusions to them in Holy Writ ; and it is interesting to note, as an addi- tional proof, that the late Dr. Roth discovered bones of the Lion in gravel near the Jordan: it is therefore quite probable that * Movoxepas in all the passages but one, where the Septuagint has a6poi. The Vulgate has wnicornis, and sometimes rhinoceros. + That the R’ém possessed two horns was shown in 1737 by Schultens, who, in his Commentary on the Book of Job (xxxix.), draws especial atten- tion to the above passage in Deuteronomy. 366 Rev. W. Haughton on the Unicorn of the Ancients. future investigations in Palestine may result in the discovery of the bones of Bos primigenius or Bison priscus or some other once formidable ox. All readers will remember the beautiful description of the R’ém in the Book of Job; now let us compare with it the account Cesar gives of the fierce Urus, which in his time frequented the great Hercynian Forest :—‘“ These Uri are scarcely less than elephants in size, but in their nature, colour, and form are bulls. Great is their strength, and great their speed, nor do they spare man or beast when once they have caught sight of him. The hunters are most careful to kill those which they take in pit- falls, while the young men exercise themselves by this sort of hunting, and grow hardened by the toil; those of them who kill most, receive great praise when they exhibit in public the horns as trophies of their success. These Uri, however, even when they are young, cannot be habituated to man and made tractable. The size and shape of their horns are very different from those of our oxen.”’* . The indomitable nature ascribed to these wild Uri exactly agrees with the description of the R’ém as given in chap. xxxix. of the Book of Job; and the apparently implied contrast which is made between the domestic ox and the wild Urus finds an analogue in the above extract from Cesar. The same remark may be made with respect to the great size and strength of the Scriptural R’ém when contrasted with the domestic oxen of Palestine, the ancient inhabitants of which land would naturally draw the same comparison between their domestic cattle and the mighty R’ém as Ceesar’s legions did between their cattle (Bos longifrons) and the great Hercynian wild bulls (Bos primigenius), whose bones are now occasionally found, together with those of the elephant, hyzena, &c., in the Tertiary deposits of this country. It is time, however, to turn our attention to the Unicorns which are mentioned in the writings of the ancient Greeks and Romans. The earliest record of the existence of a one-horned quadruped is to be found in Ctesias’s Treatise on India (‘Ivécxd), of which we possess an abridgement in Photius and a much more complete edition by Bahr. Ctesias lived in the time of Xenophon (circ. B.C. 400), and resided for many years in Persia as physician at the court of King Artaxerxes Mnemon. It was while he was there that he collected materials for the above-named treatise, which consists mainly of a description of the natural history of the north-west part of India: it must be borne in mind that his account of the natural history of that country was derived second- hand, for Ctesias was never himself in India. He must there- fore be understood simply to give the Persians’ own accounts * Bell. Gall. vi. cap. 29. Rev. W. Haughton on the Unicorn of the Ancients. 367 of their various animals, which were doubtless often mixed with fable. Aristotle regarded Ctesias as a man utterly unworthy of credit*—rather a harsh judgment, it is true, but probably not very far from the mark. However, under the name of dvou aypcot (wild asses) Ctesias describes his Unicorns. He says, “‘ They are as large as horses, and even larger, with white bodies, red heads, blue eyes, and have each on their foreheads a horn a cubit and a half long, the base of which is white, the upper part red, the middle part black. Drinking-cups are formed of these horns; and those who drink out of them are said to be subject neither to spasm nor epilepsy, nor to the effects of poison. Other asses have no astragalus; but these have one, as well as a gall-bladder. The astragalus I have seen myself: it is beau- tifully formed, in shape like that of an ox, and very heavy and red throughout. The animal is so swift that no horse can over- take it, and so strong and fierce that it is with difficulty destroyed by arrows and javelins. It begins its running slowly, but gradually increases its speed ; it shows great attachment to its young, which it defends against its pursuers, fighting with horn, teeth, and heels. The flesh is so bitter that it is not eaten ; but men set a high value on the horns and astragali.” Aristotle + simply mentions this Unicorn under the name of dvos tvdcxos (Indian Ass). “We have never seen,” he says, ‘a solidungulous animal with two horns; and there are only a few solidungulous animals with one horn, such as the Indian Ass and the Oryx (épv&). Of all animals with a solid hoof the In- dian Ass alone possesses an astragalus.” Pliny’s account of the Indian Ass is much the same as Aris- totle’s. “It is the only solidungulous animal that has an astra- galus : the Oryx is one-horned, but it is cloven-footed”t. Pliny, it will be seen, here differs from Aristotle, who represents the Oryx as solidungulous. Here, then, it is evident we have two Unicorns—the solidungulous Indian Ass with an astragalus, and the Oryx. But it appears there is still another one-horned animal, viz. the Monoceros. ‘The Orseean Indians,” says the Roman naturalist$, “hunt a very fierce animal, called the Mono- ceros, which has the body of a horse, the head of a stag, the feet of an elephant, and the tail of a wild boar; it utters a deep lowing noise, and has a single horn, two cubits long, projecting from the middle of its forehead. They say this animal cannot be taken alive.” fBlian ||, who lived long subsequently to any of the above- named writers, mentions the évoe dypioe (the description of * ovk dv a&tdmortos, Hist. An. viii. 27. § 3. + Hist. Anim. 11.2. § 8. t N.H. xi. 46. § N.H. vin. 21. || Nat. An. xvi. 20. 368 Rev. W. Haughton on the Unicorn of the Ancients. which is every word borrowed from Ctesias) and the Monoceros, which he says the natives of the interior of India call Carca- zonon*: it is the size of a full-grown horse, with a mane and yellow woolly hair, of extreme swiftness, with feet like the ele- phant and the tail of a wild boar; it has a black horn growing between the eyebrows, which is not smooth, but with natural conyolutions, and is very sharp at the point ; it emits loud dis- cordant sounds; it lives peaceably with other animals, but quar- rels with those of its own kind, the males even destroying the females, excepting at the breeding-season, at which time the animals are gregarious, but at other times they live in solitude in barren tracts. The Monoceros is endued with great strength, and is armed with an invincible horn.” The whole of the accounts of these Unicorns are so evidently deeply tinged with fable + that it is a matter of surprise how any persons should ever have supposed it possible that such animals might still be existing in unexplored countries. Major Latter, however, some years ago, was very sanguine of being able to find a veritable Unicorn in the interior of Tibet: he was informed by a native, that he had frequently seen these animals, which “were fierce and exceedingly wild, and seldom taken alive, but frequently shot ;” and that they are frequently to be met with on the borders of the great desert, about a mile from Lassa. From a drawing which accompanied Major Latter’s communi- cation, the presumed Unicorn was something like a horse, but with cloven hoofs, a long curved(!) horn growing out of the forehead, and a boar-shaped tail t. Mr. Campbell’s § “discovery of the Unicorn in Africa” was nothing more than that of some species of Rhinoceros, which he identifies with the R’ém of the Hebrew Scriptures. * There can be little doubt that the Rhinoceros unicornis is the animal which forms the groundwork of nearly all that the ancients have written on one-horned animals. The term which A‘lian tells us is used by the natives of India to denote an animal with one horn, is almost identical with that employed by the Arabs and Persians to signify a Rhinoceros. “ Vul- gatissimum monocerotis nomen, nec solum apud Arabes sed et apud Persas, Tartaros atque Indos receptum est Carcaudan vel, ut plerumque scribitur, Carcaddan.”’—Bochart, Hierozoicon, ii. p. 318, ed. Rosenmiller. Car- cadddn or Carcadén is the Arabic name for a Rhinoceros: see Freytag, Lex. Arab. s. v., and Catafagos’s Arab. Dict. + Besides which, it must be remembered that not one of the Greek or Roman writers ever pretended to have seen the animal; the whole founda~ tion rests on the account Ctesias received from the Persians. It is in vain, therefore, to seek for the origin of the story in the supposition that the an- cient Greeks and Romans mistook the horns of some antelope seen in pro- file as if they were only one. The Unicorns, moreover, were supposed to be Indian animals, while travellers are hoping to find them im Africa. } Asiatic Journal, xi. p. 154. § Ib. xii. p. 36. Rey. W. Haughton on the Unicorn of the Ancients. 869 The animal which Mr. Riippell was told by a native existed in Africa, and which had a long straight horn growing from its forehead (?), was also doubtless a Rhinoceros. Under the head of “ Unicorns in Asia,” in the ‘ Asiatic Jour- nal’ (vol. 11. new ser. 1830), a writer revives the opinion of the existence of veritable Unicorns, such as were reporied to Major Latter: the animal in question was of the deer kind, having a single horn at the top of the head; it was known by the name of Seru. The editor of the ‘Asiatic Journal’ makes the follow- ing wise remark hereupon :—“ When we consider that cight years have elapsed since Major Latter’s account was given, and that, notwithstanding increased opportunities with Tibet, no fact has since transpired which supplies a confirmation of. that ac- count, excepting the obtaining a supposed horn of the supposed Unicorn, we cannot participate in these renewed hopes.” In vol. ii. p. 250 of the same Journal we read :—-“ Vertoman gives the following account of two Unicorns in Arabia:—In the other part of the temple of Mecca are parks or places en- closed, where are seen two Unicorns, and these are shown to the. people for a wonder; the one of them, which is much higher than the other, is not much unlike a colt of two and a half years old; in the forehead grows one horn, straight forward, of the length of 3 cubits. The other is much younger, and like a colt one year old. The horn of this is of the length of four spans. The beast is of the colour of a horse, of a weasel-colour, with a head hke a hart, but no long neck, a thin mane hanging only on one side. The legs of both are thin and slender, like a fawn or hind; the hoofs of the four feet are divided in two, much like the feet of a goat; the outer part of the hind feet is very full of hair. They seemed wild and fierce. They are sent to the Sultan of Mecca from the King of Ethiopia ! ” There are other reports as to the existence of real Unicorns, such as those of Sparrmann, Lobo, Thenet (who asserted he had hunted Unicorns with the King of Monomotopa), Garcias, and others ; but where a veritable animal is meant by the term, that animal is unquestionably some species of Rhinoceros ; for all attempts to obtain a specimen of a quadruped with a single horn on its forehead have failed, and the accounts of the existence of such animals are very vague, and entirely unsupported by any- thing approximating to satisfactory evidence. The one-horned animal of which Ctesias speaks is in all pro- bability the Rhinoceros unicornis, exaggerated accounts of which would perhaps have been given him by the Persians, while his own love of the marvellous added the remainder. From Ctesias’s one single-horned animal, in process of time there came to be at least three Unicorns, namely the dpvé, the dyos dypsos or ivdexds, Ann. & Mag, N. Hist, Ser. 3, Vol, x, 25 Eat Bibliographical Notices. and the povoxcepws, no living representatives of any of which animals can be supposed to have any existence in nature*. Na- turalists are, we believe, agreed upon the point that the so-called Unicorn is a fabulous animal from beginning to end. It has merely been my object in this paper to show how utterly ground- less is the foundation on which the whole superstructure rests. We cannot, therefore, participate in the slightest degree in the hope that Dr. Baikie will be more successful than his prede- cessors, BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift (Journal of Natural History), founded by Dr. H. Kroyer; edited by Prof. T. C. ScusopTE at Copen- hagen. Third Series, 1861. [Kroyer, Contributions to the His- tory of Myside ; Meinert, Anatomy of the Larva of Gastrus Equi ; Didrichsen, Botanical Observations ; Schjédte, Danish Harpalini, and Larve of Coleoptera, &c. | Tue ‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,’ or ‘Journal of Natural History,’ founded by Dr. Kroyer of Copenhagen, which, from 1837 to 1849, formed one of the principal means of literary communication for Danish naturalists, will be remembered by all those who occupy themselves with the fauna and flora of the North. The editor com- municated through this channel a great many of his numerous and valuable contributions to,the natural history of Crustacea and Fishes; but in 1849 he was forced by different circumstances to discontinue the journal, six substantial volumes having at that time been published. Travels and declining health afterwards prevented Dr. Kroyer from resuming the publication, which has thus been interrupted for twelve years. At present, however, Professor Schjidte, whose name as an entomologist is also well known in England, has undertaken the task of continuing the journal; and the first part of the third series appeared a twelvemonth ago. ‘That it is an undertaking deserving the attention of English naturalists will appear from a review of the volume before us. It is a matter of course that the majority of the papers will always be in Danish; but the affinity of this language to the English is so great, that any person may easily acquire sufficient Danish for consulting scientific treatises in that language. Besides, the diagnoses and explanations of the plates are given in Latin; this is, at least, the case in the first part of the work, on which we will offer a few remarks. It is headed by a paper from the pen of Dr. Kroyer, containing descriptions of several species of Myside and similar Crustacea. Dr. Kréyer was one of the naturalists who accompanied the great expedition of ‘La Recherche’ to the Arctic regions, in 1838-1840, * Pliny (N. H. viii. 21) says that “there are in India oxen with solid hoofs and a single horn.” So here we have another kind of Unicorn. Bibliographical Notices. 371 of which the results are embodied in Paul Gaimard’s ‘ Voyages de la Commission du Nord en Scandinavie, Laponie,’ &c. ; but although several plates have been published containing drawings and analyses of the animals collected, no text has hitherto appeared. This defi- ciency, the reasons of which Dr. Kroyer promises to explain on a subsequent occasion, he now intends to remedy to some extent; and the treatise before us must in some degree be looked upon as a step in that direction. The descriptions, which in accuracy leave nothing to be desired, are in Danish; but the very full diagnoses, as well as the explanations of the plates, are in Latin. To these we can therefore refer, contenting ourselves with a few general re- marks. In Milne-Edwards’s ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés’ only five species of Myside are described, of which three belong to the northern seas—viz. Mysis spinulosa, Leach, M. Chameleon, Thompson, and M. vulgaris, Thompson. The number of northern species is, however, much greater, as Dr. Kroyer enumerates seven Scandinavian species, amongst which the M. spinulosa, Leach, is probably not included. Three of these seven species are exclusively Arctic, viz. M. oculata, Fabr., M. arctica, Kyr., and M. latitans, Kr. ; the others are found along the shores of Norway, Sweden, and Denmark, from Throndhjem to the Sound. M. flecuosa, Miller, besides, penetrates as far into the Baltic as Gotland. MM. inermis, Rathke, and M. cornuta, Kr., reach into the Arctic seas, but not into the Baltic, whilst M. vulgaris, Thompson, is principally found in the fjords of Jutland and in the Sound. The M. oculata was first described by Fabricius in his ‘Fauna Greenlandica,’ and afterwards by Leach, as M. Fabricii. It is the commonest species in the Arctic seas, and the principal food of whales and sea-birds at different seasons. To this species tab. 8. fig. 2 a-r, in Gaimard’s ‘ Voyages,’ &c., has reference. M. latitans, Kr., is a new species, found together with the M. oculata, which it much resembles. The M. latitans, is, however, smaller and more slender. M. arctica seems to be a rare and very remarkable form, having the dorsal shield very large, covering all the joints of the cephalothorax, and divided by a remarkable, deep transversal groove into two parts ; the frontal rostrum is also unusually distinct, though short. M. flexuosa, Miller (Prodromus Zoologiz Danie, 1776), is the species of Mysis which has been earliest described with sufficient distinctness to be recognized; and Miiller’s name must therefore supersede the Thompsonian M. Chameleon. Dr. Kroyer leaves it undecided whether Thompson’s M. Leachii and Leach’s M. spinulosa also refer to this species. To M. flexuosa belong figs. 1, 2, & 3 on tab. 9 in Gaimard’s work. On page 44 in the ‘ Tidsskrift,’ will be found a table (in Latin) for the determination of the species of Mysis mentioned in Dr. Kroyer’s paper. The author next describes a new Cynthia from the Atlantic, which he proposes to call enermis, and which is distinguished from C. armata, M.-E., by the shortness of the frontal rostrum, and from C. Thomp- sonii, M.-E., by a number of less conspicuous but not less significant marks. Another species shows sufficient peculiarity of structure to 20% 372 Bibliographical Notices. warrant the establishment of a new genus (Anchialus, Kr.), distinguish- able from Mysis principally by the shape of the dorsal shield and by the second pair of foot-jaws terminating in organs of prehension formed by the last three joints: the only species is called typicus. Then follow the descriptions of Promysis Galatee, Kr., from the In- dian Sea, and of Dymas typus, Kr., a new genus belonging to Dana’s subfamily Sceletine, and forming an intermediary link between Mysis and Myto. Myto Gaimardi, Kr., was also discovered during the voyage of ‘ La Recherche,’ and described in the second series of the ‘ Tidsskrift,’ vol. i. pp. 470-476 ; a figure and analyses are found in the ‘ Voyages,’ &c., tab. 7. fig. 1 a-g. Dr. Kroyer gives in the present volume (p. 63) a Latin explanation of the said figure. The other new genera and species are illustrated by two plates closely filled with analytical drawings, with a Latin explanation, a table of measurements being also appended. A continuation of these carcino- logical contributions may be expected in the following parts of the periodical. The history of the larva of Gastrus Equi has been the subject of several treatises by different authors, of which doubtless the most remarkable is one by Schroeder van der Kolk, the celebrated Dutch anatomist. The investigations on which this treatise was founded were partly undertaken before 1830, when some of the drawings were exhibited at a meeting of naturalists in Heidelberg ; but the paper was not published till 1845. It was written in French, and appears in the eleventh volume of the ‘ Nieuwe Verhandelingen der eerste Klasse van het koninklijk-nederlandsche Institut.’ Never- theless this remarkable paper seems to be very little known ; and in the most current handbooks there is no mention of it, not even in the author’s countryman. Van der Hoeven’s well-known ‘ Manual of Zoology.’ This oblivion is highly undeserved; and the only cireum- stance that perhaps in some degree may explain it is that, along with his excellent account of the anatomy of the said larva, Schroeder van der Kolk proposes certain theories concerning the use of the organs he so ably describes which could not but seem suspicious to his con- temporaries, and which also in part have turned out to be fallacious. The volume of the Danish ‘ Tidsskrift’ which we are reviewing con- tains, in a paper by Mr. Meinert, several valuable contributions to our knowledge of this interesting animal, in the shape of a criticism of Schroeder van der Kolk’s statements as to the organs of respira- tion, digestion, and circulation. The respiratory system consists, as is generally the case with the larvee of dipterous insects, of a cavity near the posterior end of the animal, from which several tracheze issue, two being larger than the others, and reaching (one on either side) to the vicinity of the head. Tn the larva of Gasirus Equi the anterior ends of these two long tracheze are horny, and show a great number of perforations. They are attached to the inner extremity of two short tubes, which corre- spond to openings in the skin, and through which the trachese may be cither brought to a level with the general surface of the body or drawn back, and thus protected from injury. Schroeder van der Bibliographical Notices. 873 Kolk has overlooked this remarkable structure, and supposes the tracheze to end blindly, simply attached by their ends to the inner surface of the skin. According to him, the air in the respiratory organs is renewed through an opening in the middle of a horny plate closing the great aériferous cavity, at the posterior extremity of the body from behind. Schroeder van der Kolk even assumes the exist- ence of a sphincter arcund this supposed opening. Mr. Meinert shows that this is a mistake: in the place of the supposed perfora- tion there is merely a pellucid spot, and an impression on the horny plate, caused by the existence in young larvee of a small gland on this spot, which is obliterated in the adult larvae. A communication between the air enclosed in the aériferous chamber and the outer air, through the horny plate closing it from behind, is possible only im so far as it is permitted by the structure of the said plate itself, which consists of a not very close texture of chitinous filaments, externally covered by a firm but thin membrane. When this plate is viewed from behind, it presents six slits of a curved shape, forming concen- trical lines, three on each side of the pellucid point in the middle. Each of these slits opens directly into a double row of vesicles con- taining air. Schroeder van der Kolk supposed these slits to be closed by a very thin membrane, the whole structure representing a kind of trachea-gills; but Mr. Meinert has shown that they are perfectly open, the air being detained in them by their margins being finely denticulated. The number of these slits varies according to the age of the larvee, , According to Schroeder van der Kolk, the alimentary tube is con- nected with the adipose tissue in such a manner that the nutritious fluid may directly flow from one into the other. Mr. Meinert shows that the foremost set of connecting tubes, according to Schroeder van der Kolk, are in reality mere ligaments, and that, as regards the second set of such tubes assumed by Schroeder van der Kolk, this anatomist has been misled by the circumstance that the longer pair of the Malpi- ghian vessels, in the larva of Gasfrus Equi, as well as in many other insects, presents a different structure in their anterior and their pos- terior parts. Their extreme ends are, as usual, fixed to the posterior parts of the intestine, but do not, as Schroeder van der Kolk thought, open into it; and although the said vessels are fixed to the adipose tissue at that point where their two different structures meet, there is no communication between their cavity and the adipose vesicles. With respect to the dorsal vessel, Schroeder van der Kolk has also fallen into a serious mistake, namely, in considering certain lateral ligaments, which keep the vessel in its place, as a kind of aortas. Although Mr. Meinert has thus divested Schroeder van der Kolk’s treatise of much that appeared as its most striking results, there is so much left to admire in it that naturalists will not be justified in disregarding it for the future, as has hitherto been the case. The aim of Mr. Didrichsen’s paper, to which we would next direct attention, is to correct certain mistakes concerning the nature of the thorns in Berderis, Ribes, and Parkinsonia, which seem in a great measure to pervade botanical literature; and also to free the great 374 Bibliographical Notices. Linneeus from the imputation of having but imperfectly distinguished between spina and aculeus. These errors have arisen from the cir- cumstance that, in his ‘ Philosophia Botanica,’ page 50, Berberis is mentioned, together with Rides, Rubus, and Rosa, as having aculei ; and on page 110, Parkinsonia is instanced, with other leguminous plants, as showing examples of aculei, although the thorns in these plants must be considered as spine, according to Linnzus’s own de- finition in page 50. The only mistake of Linnzeus is, according to Mr. Didrichsen’s view, that Berberis has been mentioned (page 50) amongst the examples of aculeus—a circumstance which is easily explained when we remember that, when this part of the ‘ Philosophia Botanica’ was written, Linnzeus was slowly recovering from a dan- gerous illness, as he states himself in the preface, and, while confined to his bed, dictated this immortal work to one of his friends, as fast as the printer could put it in type. Both at an earlier time, in the ‘ Hortus Cliffortianus’ (1737), and afterwards, in the ‘Species Planta- rum’ (ed. 2. p. 472, 1762), he described the thorns of Berderis as spine. Whilst some over-zealous admirers of Linnzeus have tried to defend the excusable, but undeniable, error committed in p. 50 in the ‘ Philosophia Botanica,’ others, misguided by a superficial similarity between the thorns of Berberis and those of Ribes, have maintained that the thorns of Rides had also been erroneously mentioned among the examples of aculei. Others, again, have entirely discarded Lin- neeus’s definitions, and attempted to find some new marks of distine- tion between aculeus and spina, derived from their position, the constancy of their occurrence, and their development during the growth of the plant. Mr. Didrichsen fully concurs with those who reserve the name of spine for such thorns as are only transformations of the ordinary organs or parts of the plants, but describe as aculet all thorns which are merely corticular appendages. But at the same time he shows that Linnzeus’s definition in page 50 of the ‘ Philo- sophia Botanica’ does in reality come to the same, and is the only practically useful one. He shows that the difficulty which DeCan- dolle thought to find in reference to the Monocotyledons does not really exist, and that the investigations as to the development of the thorns in Ribes Grossularia, by which some German authors pretend to prove these to be spinee, are altogether unreliable. Nay, Mr. Didrichsen even goes a step further. It is commonly supposed that what are now called morphology or morphological points of view were quite foreign to the mind of Linnzeus, and that he only took what we should call a terminological view of questions like the one before us. But Mr. Didrichsen maintains that this was not the case. Linnzeus was the founder of botany as a science, and he was well aware that the first thing necessary was to create a fixed terminology; but it needs little explanation to show that for this purpose definitions like those of spina and aculeus in p. 50 of the ‘ Philosophia Botanica’ were vastly preferable to definitions founded on morphological con- siderations. Linnzus’s description of Berberis in the ‘ Species Planta- rum’ (ed. 2. p. 470), in which he says, “ folia in spinas tripartitas mutata,”’ as well as other passages, show that he knew quite well the Bibliographical Notices. 375 morphological difference between spina and aculeus; and hisdescription of Ribes Cynobasti (ibid. p. 292), in which these words occur—“ acu- leus instar spine sub alis’’—shows that he was well aware that the aculeus of the said plant might at a first glance be taken for a spina on account of its place. 'That wide field of research which was opened up by subsequent authors, urging the principles of morpho- logy, was by no means hidden from Linnzeus’s master-mind ; but he left others to do what he could not enter upon himself, if he wished to accomplish the general regeneration of natural history—a purpose so grand in itself that no scientific man has ever grappled with a greater. That the morphological difference between aculeus and spina was before the mind of Linnzeus when he wrote the definitions in page 50 is, in the estimation of Mr. Didrichsen, confirmed by the circumstance that the same matter is treated of once more in a later chapter, but in a different manner. In this second place Linnzeus seems really to have taken a purely terminological view of the matter, describing different kinds of thorns only just as they appeared to the eye. Here aculeus meant only a small, not very rigid thorn, what- ever was its origin; and this fully explains the fact of Rodinia and Parkinsonia being mentioned as instances, although Linnzeus else- where acknowledged them to have spine. That aculeus does not mean the same in pages 50 and 110 of the ‘ Philosophia Botanica,’ might have been concluded from the simple fact that he calls his species of Parkinsonia ‘‘aculeata,’ although he describes it as having spine. In naming the species, he took a purely termino- logical external view ; but in describing it, he did not overlook the morphological nature of its thorns. (It is by a mistake that Kunth mentions this plant as P. spinosa, Linn.) Prof. Schjédte’s paper on the Danish Harpalini has a double in- terest, namely, partly on account of the information afforded on the geographical distribution of certain species, and on the general cha- racter of the Danish fauna, and partly on account of the systematical observations by which it is headed. Of Harpalini, the Danish fauna numbers no less than forty-six species, and presents the peculiarity that, besides the species occurring in other countries under the same latitudes, not a few species are found in Denmark which are charac- teristic of far more southern parts of Europe. This is the case with Anisodactylus signatus and nemorivagus ; Harpalus distinguendus, Suscipalpis, honestus ; Stenolophus melanocephalus (=S. Skrimshi- ranus), vespertinus, and elegans. None of these are found either in Norway, Sweden, or North Germany. Diachromus germanus, Ophonus punctatulus, and Stenolophus anglicus *, reach Denmark through North Germany, but are not found north of the Baltic and the Kattegat. On the other hand, Bradycellus coynatus (Greenland, Norway, North of Sweden) is an instance of a very northerly species which is still commonly found in Denmark, but not further to the * Prof. Schjédte has adopted this name, which dates from 1766 (Voet, i. 67, tab. 35. fig. 18),as the Linnean Carabus vaporariorum cannot possibly be this species, and as Voet’s name is so much older than Schrank’s C. teutonus, which some have adopted in this country. 376 Bibliographical Notices, south; whilst H. ferrugineus is a species peculiar to the east of Europe, which is still found, though very rarely, in Denmark and at the Rhine, but not in England. In “ Moens klint,”’ aud the neigh- bourhood of Silkeborg in Jutland, several species are found which elsewhere are confined to mountains, although the said localities are only 400-600 feet above the surface of the sea: amongst the Har- palini, this is the case with Ophonus azureus and Harpalus serie- punctatus. The species having all been described before, new descriptions are given only of a few. The characters, however, by which Prof. Schjédte proposes to arrange them into groups are indicated (in Latin) ; of the genera new and excellent descriptions are given, and a synoptical table at p. 153. The Danish Harpalini belong to Aniso- dactylus, Diachromus, Ophonus, Harpalus, Bradycellus, Acupalpus, Stenolophus, and Balius, a new genus founded on Stenolophus con- spectus and a very similar species from Bengal, distinguished by the remarkable shape of the liguia*. Prof. Schjédte further proposes the establishment of a new group within the limits of the Harpalini, which he proposes to call Stenolophini, and characterizes by the structure of the maxillee, of which the stipites are prolonged into a remarkable tooth reaching beyond the first jomt of the maxillary palpi. In this group Prof. Schjédte comprises a series of small flarpalint ‘‘spread over the whele earth, and not less so in the scientific systems.’ Besides Balius, Stenolophus, and Acupalpus, he mentions Duptus, Batoscelis, and Agonoderus. Among these, Daptus and Batoscelis are adapted for a manner of living similar to that of the Scaritini; and many entomologists would probably place them near this group on account of their thick heads, broad anterior tibize, linear tarsi, &c. Prof. Schjédte, however, urges that these so-called “biological”? characters do not indicate a real affinity between all the Carabi which exhibit them, but only an analogous mode of life. The structure of every animal is no doubt closely adapted to its habits ; and in so far every peculiarity of structure, and the systematic characters derived from it, might, in some sense of the word, be called biological. But it is only to a small extent that we can indicate the connexion between habits of life and structure ; and, as our knowledge stands at present, every animal and every group of animals appear to us as exhibiting the general feature of some type quite arbitrarily devised by the Creator, and modified in some respects to serve cer- tain purposes. The true conception of these types, of higher and lower order, is the first condition of a natural system; but in this respect great faults have been committed. One great cause of mis- takes is that analogous modifications of the corresponding organs in ani- mals really belonging to different though allied types, but living under analogous external circumstances, have often been erroneously con- sidered as the peculiar characteristics of a type—or, in other words, analogies have been mistaken for affinities. Thus, in the case before * What is called ligula in Carabi, Dytisci, and Gyrini, is, strictly speak- ing, only the fulcrum ligule, the true ligula being represented by the * paraglossie.” Bibliographical Notices. 377 us, most Carabi adapted for digging in the ground undoubtedly be- long to the same natural group—Scaritini ; but this is not the case with all. Some genera also of other groups are adapted for this manner of living by the shape of their heads, their prothorax, an- tennze, and legs, without on that account separating themselves from the group to which they naturally belong. Daptus and Batoscelis amongst Stenolophini, Ditonus, Acinopus, and others amongst the other Harpalini, are in this case. But then the whole set of cha- racters which have reference to this manner of living cannot any longer be considered as the exclusive mark of distinction of any par- ticular group. Prof. Schjédte’s paper is rich in hints towards a better systematic arrangement of this numerous family than the present one, amongst which we will ouly mention the peculiar structure of the mouth in Amblystomus, Barysomus, and Cyclosomus, whose paraglossee, being very broad, unite in front of the ligula. In connexion with the preceding, a few words may not be out of place with reference to Prof. Schjédte’s other contributions to the history of the Caradi. Much valuable information on this subject is to be found in his ‘ Denmark’s Eleutherata’ *, a work which is much less known than it deserves to be. In the second volume of the second series of the ‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,’ p. 346, there is an interesting treatise on two new Caradi from Guinea,—IHiletus ver- sutus, which forms the type of a separate group, and Ochyropus gigas, which belongs to Scaritint, but is remarkable for its long legs and vigorous feet. To the description of these species the author adds a number of highly interesting remarks on the systematic value of certain structural modifications of the thorax, of the position and shape of the antennz, as well as of the different modifications to which the neighbouring parts of the head are subject, corresponding to the peculiarities of the antennee. In the ‘Proceedings of the Royal Danish Society’ for 1855, he reverts to the subject; and the principal results embodied in these papers may be shortly recapitulated in the following manner. In all Caradi the principal part of the epimera metathoracica is co- vered by the elytra, and is therefore quite membranaceous ; but in very many there is an appendix to the said pieces, which descends towards the haunches, and is visible on the ventral surface. These appendices coalesce more or less with the episterna metathoracica, and appear to a superficial observer as belonging to them; hence Carabi pre- senting this structure have formerly, both by Schjodte and others, been described as having episterna metathoracica appendiculata, although it ought to be epimera metathoracica appendiculata. It is by comparison with other Coleoptera where the epimera are less completely covered than in Carati, that Prof. Schjédte has learned the real nature of these appendices. The existence or want of these pieces is of great systematic value. In the family Carabini it * Denmark’s Eleutherata, I. (Carabi, Dytisci, Gyrini), Copenhagen, 1840-42, 25 tables, with analytical drawings. 378. Bibliographical Notices. may be advantageously combined with the shape of the tibiee ante- riores. They are wanting in Cicindelini, Carabini, Elaphrini, Scari- tini*, and in the more isolated genera Siagona and Enceladus. Of these, Scaritini distinguish themselves from the others by having a deep incision on the outer edge of the two anterior tibiee, of which one of the terminal spines of the tibize is removed. All the others have either no incision or only a small one, and both terminal spines in their proper place. Hiletus, Schjédte, combines this last character with the existence of appendices to the epimera metathoracica, whilst all the other Carabi which have not been here mentioned combine the existence of an incision in the two anterior tibiee, carrying one of the terminal spines, with appendiculated epimera. Another point in the structure of the thorax has perhaps in some respects been ob- served, though not clearly expressed, by the American entomologist Leconte, namely, the formation of the sockets of the second pair of legs. Five pieces may participate in the formation of each of these sockets : 1, mesosternum; 2, metasternum ; 3, episternum mesothoracicum ; 4, epimerum mesothoracicum ; and 5, episternum metathoracicum, of the corresponding side. There exist four combinations : the sockets are formed (1) by mesosternum and metasternum alone; (2) by mesosternum, metasternum, and episterna mesothoracica; (3) by mesosternum, metasternum, aud epimera mesothoracica; (4) by me- sosternum, metasternum, episterna, and epimera mesothoracica. In the third and fourth cases a small continuation from the episterna metathoracica sometimes takes part in the formation of the sockets. These four combinations may be represented as in the subjoined diagrams, the numbers indicating the pieces in the order they are mentioned above ft. 1/3 1 I Ir * In some Scaritini the epimera metathoracica present a linear impres- sion near the margin, which may be, and has been, mistaken for a real suture ; and the piece thus isolated has been mistaken for the appendices of which we speak. + Proc. Royal Soc. of Copenhagen, 1855, p. 360. In this place, Prof. Schjodte has communicated various observations, e. g. on the new Niphargus aquilexz, and on Broscosoma and Miscodera, which he shows are so nearly related that, instead of belonging to different groups of Carabi, as some think, they are both true Harpalini, and would form only one genus if there were not some difference in the*construction of the chin and in the shape of the epimera mesothoracica, which are triangular in Miscodera and linear in Broscosoma. It is in so far as Leconte has attended to the shape of these pieces that he may be said to have been on the track of Prof. Schjodte’s beautiful observation; but he has not penetrated the matter, and Prof.Schjodte avails himself of the opportunity to show how unnatural Bibliographical Notices. 379 For want of sufficient material, Prof. Schjédte has not carried out through all the families the systematical results to which a proper consideration of these characters would lead ; he only indicates that the family of Carabi may thereby be divided into two natural divi- sions, and that throughout the order Coleoptera they are valuable as characters of families and groups. There can be no doubt that by this discovery a very important step has been made towards the better arrangement of the Coleoptera. In the paper on Hiletus and Ochyporus (in the second series of the ‘Tidsskrift,’ p. 376), Prof. Schjodte has drawn attention to the differences exhibited by the Caradi as to the place of insertion of the antennze and the corresponding modificatious in the surround- ing parts. The following are the principal variations. I. The antennze may be inserted in the sides of the forehead over the mandibles. The basal joint (scapus) of the antennze is then generally very long, and a little curved so as not to interfere with the eye when the an- tennze are kept quite close to the body, which operation is also facilitated by the socket of the second joint (pedicella) being turned a little backwards. This is the case in Cicindelini, and forms a new mark of distinction for this group, which has since also been observed by Leconte. In Collyris and Euprosopus, each of the cheeks pre- sents a sharp groove under the eye, for the reception of the third joint of the antennze, which is shaped accordingly. In Manticora the basal joint is unusually short, and there is a groove for it closely behind the point of insertion of the antennz. II. In all other Carabi the antennze are inserted in the cheeks, between the root of the mandibles and the eye, almost every genus exhibiting a peculiar arrangement. In some (as, for instance, in Anthia) the cheeks ex- tend so far in all directions that there are no obstructions to the free movements of the antennze, in which cases therefore no special mo- difications of the surrounding parts are necessary. In other cases (e. g. Mormolyce, Helluo, Galerita, Drypta) the cheeks are so long, and at the same time so much extended to the sides, as to present an anterior surface outside the mandibles, in which the antennze are inserted. If so, there is sometimes a groove in the mandibles, in order to facilitate the antennze being turned forward, whilst the op- posite movement is often facilitated by a deep groove prolonging the socket backwards. If the cheeks are short without great breadth, similar grooves in the mandibles and in the cheeks, in infinite variation, constantly occur. Finally, in those which are destined for digging under ground (Scaritini, Acinopus, Broscus, &c.), or for living under bark (Si/phomorpha), or other similar modes of existence (Hiletus), the cheeks are short, but extend considerably downwards (owing to Leconte’s classification often becomes because of his blind adherence to the mere differences of shape exhibited by these pieces. Prof. Schjédte further refutes his erroneous statement that Brachinini alone have seven abdominal joints, but all other Caradi six; the seventh joint is found in all Carabi, only in many it is retracted under the sixth (vide also Denm. Eleutherata, 361, and Germar, Zeitschrift f. Entomologie, v. 476). 380 Bibliographical Notices. the thickness of the head), the bases of the antenne are often pro- tected by the prominent corners of the forehead, the antennze geni- culated, and two foveze antennales provided. Taking all this into consideration, Prof. Schjédte has, in the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society of Copenhagen’ (Joc. eé¢.), proposed the following distribu- tion of Carabi :— I. EPIMERA MESOTHORACICA COXAS INFERIUS ATTINGENTIA, A. Epimera metathoracica appendice exteriori nulla, 1. Antenne frontales. 1. Cicindelini. 2. Antenne pone mandibulas genis inserte. a. Antenne scrobiculis haud recipiendi, basi detects. 2. Carabini (inclus. Elaphrini cum gen. Loricera, Latr., et Miga- dops, Wath.). 6, Antennze scrobiculis recipiende, sapissime fracte. * Antenne basi detectee. Tibia inermes (mentum concretum ; epimera mesothoracica concreta). 3. Siagonini (Siagona, Enceladus). ** Antenne basi lamina frontali supertectee. Tibi antiew pal- mate. 4. Scaritini. B. Epimera metathoracica appendice exteriort iastructa. a. Antenne basi lamina frontali supertectie, scrobiculis recipiende. Tibi antice integre. 5. Hiletini (type Hiletus, Naturh. Tidsskr. J. c.). b. Antenne basi detectee, scrobiculis haud recipiende. Tibi antice emarginatze. 6. Ozznini (types Ozena, Myrtropomus, Mormolyce). Il, EpIMERA MESOTHORACICA COXAS INFERIUS HAUD ATTIN- GENTIA. Tribus Caraborum ceterz. It is to be hoped that Prof. Schjédte will find an opportunity for carrying out in greater detail these new ideas, which certainly seem to promise very useful systematic results. To return to the volume before us: it should be noticed that it contains four excellent plates illustrating a paper by the editor on the metamorphoses of Coleoptera, with drawings and analyses of the larvee of Gyrinus marinus, Hydroiis aterrimus, Hydrophilus cara- boides, Hydrobius fuscipes, Philhydrus testaceus, and Berosus spi- nosus. In the following part this treatise will be continued, and we shall then have an opportunity for a few observations on it. The North-Atlantic Sea-bed ; comprising a Diary of the Voyage on board H.M.S. Bulldog, in 1860, and Observations on the Pre- sence of Animal Life, and the Formation and Nature of Organic Deposits, at great Depths in the Ocean. By G.C.Waxuicu, M.D., F.L.S., F.G.8. &. Part I. 4to. London: Van Voorst, 1862. In, this work Dr. Wallich, who held the office of Naturalist to the Expedition dispatched in 1860 to survey the proposed telegraphic route between this country and America, gives us the results of his investigations into the natural history of the portion of the sea-bed Bibliographical Notices. 381 passed over by the ‘ Bulldog’ during her voyage of about four months. The first section of the part now before us contains his journal of the voyage, which comprises much interesting information, especially upon the nature and mode of formation of the icebergs and ice-fields which constitute at once the greatest wonder and the chief danger of those northern seas in which his investigations were carried on. This portion of Dr. Wallich’s book we shall, however, pass over, in order to direct the reader’s attention more particularly to the remarkable results detailed in the second section, which is devoted to, the consider- ation of the “ Bathymetrical Limits of Animal Life in the Ocean.” The interest attaching to this section of Dr. Wallich’s work arises from the fact that, in some of his deep-sea soundings, the apparatus employed brought up living animals from those abysses of the ocean which, according to the almost universal opinion of naturalists, were uninhabitable by any creatures, thus at once upsetting all our pre- conceived notions as to the distribution and limits of animal life in the sea. The first notice of Dr. Wallich’s remarkable observations appeared in this Journal in December 1860 ; in the present work we have a more detailed account of the mode of occurrence of the ani- mals referred to, which can leave no doubt that the existence of animal life at enormous depths is an actual fact. The most striking of Dr. Wallich’s results was obtaimed in a sounding at a depth of 1260 fathoms: it is to this that his short paper already alluded to refers. The deposit brought up consisted of Globigerine, many of them ina fresh condition, amongst which were some small Serpuloid tubes, composed chiefly of the shells of small Globigerine cemented together, from which Dr. Wallich justly con- cludes that the inhabitants of these tubes live upon the sea-bed among the Globigerine. But the most astonishing circumstance was the oecurrence of numerous living Starfishes of a species (Ophio- coma granulata) well known as an inhabitant of our coasts, adhering to the sounding-line under such conditions as to prove that they also must find a suitable dwelling-place in the profound abysses of the ocean. The evidence of this fact is furnished partly by their position on the line, and partly by the contents of the stomach of a specimen opened by Dr. Wallich. To explain the former proof, our author tells us that, after the regular operation of sounding had been per- formed, the apparatus for bringing up a portion of the bottom was lowered, and, m order to make sure of its reaching and dragging on the bottom, about fifty fathoms of line were paid out in addition to the quantity indicated by the previous sounding. It was only to this fifty fathoms of line, which must have lain along the bottom of the sea, that the Starfishes adhered; and as no fewer than thirteen of them were brought up, it would appear that they must be tolerably plentiful over the sea-bed at the point sounded. The contents of the stomach proved that the Ophiocome feed upon the Globigerine, furnishing additional evidence that the two forms were cohabitants of the sea-bottom at this point. Dr. Wallich refers to other instances in which he obtained living animals, and indications of the existence of other forms, from depths 382 Bibliographical Notices. greater than are usually supposed favourable to animal life: the Globigerine, he states, aré obtained from the immense depth of 3000 fathoms, and from no less than 1913 fathoms the small Annelid- tubes above referred to as fabricated of the shells of Globigerine were brought up. He also cites analogous observations made by various investigators, amongst others by Sir John Ross and Sir James Clark Ross, the former of whom even obtained a Gorgon’s-head Star- fish (Zuryale) adhering to his sounding-line at a depth of 800 fathoms, whilst M. Torell, director of the Swedish expedition to Spitzbergen, is reported to have brought up from 1400 fathoms a “ Crustacean of bright colours.” Dr. Wallich does not, however, refer to the exam- ples adduced by Dr. A. Milne-Edwards in July 1861, before the Se of Sciences of Paris (see Annals, Sept. 1861), of the occur- nce of several species of Mollusca, Corals, Serpule, and Polyzoa, found adhering to a submarine cable recovered from depths between 1000 and 1500 fathoms in the Mediterranean. Having proved experimentally that animals do live at vast depths in the ocean, our author reviews the grounds upon which the oppo- site opinion, to which he gives the title of antibiotic, has been founded. He discusses in detail the various questions connected with the temperature and aération of the water, and the presence in it of mineral and other substances necessary for the existence of the animal forms which have been found in the deepest recesses of the ocean, and, it appears to us, shows satisfactorily that the views hitherto entertained upon these points are erroneous. The argument derived from total absence of light at these great depths is disposed of by reference to the well-known fact that the lower parts of the deep-sea coral zone of Forbes, which are inhabited by numerous and often brightly coloured animals are situated far below the depth (700 feet) to which the smallest amount of light can penetrate. One main reason which has been urged against the existence of any living thing in the deep sea, namely, the enormous pressure which must prevail towards the bottom, appears to offer no further difficulty. Immense as this pressure must be, amounting to no less than 26401bs. on the square inch at a depth of a mile, Dr. Wallich shows that, as every part of the creatures living at the sea-bottom is ‘“ completely pervious to fluids, either by its porosity or through endosmotic action, the state of equilibrium remains undisturbed,” and thus these animals will be enabled to adapt themselves to all circumstances of pressure. There is one point, however, in connexion with the residence of animals at great depths, in which Dr. Wallich seems to find some difficulty, namely, the mode in which they can obtain their nourish- ment. Vegetable substances, in the sea as on land, must be con- sidered to form the basis of the nutrition of animals, either directly or indirectly ; but the growth of plants is limited to those zones of the sea-bed to which light can penetrate; and although the remains of vegetable organisms have been brought up in abundance from great depths, their condition seems to prove that their life was passed nearer the surface of the ocean, and that they did not sink to the bot- tom of the deep waters until after the cessation of their vitality. That Bibliographical Notices. 883 the nutrition of the Starfishes and Annelides may be effected at the expense of the Globigerine and other low forms of animals is shown by the contents of the stomach of one of the Starfishes when brought to the surface ; the question then is, in what manner are these lower organisms nourished? In endeavouring to find a solution of this problem, Dr. Wallich puts forward a hypothesis which we cannot think to be at all admissible, namely, that as the organisms in question possess the power of “ separating carbonate of lime or silica from waters holding these substances in solution. . . . . they may also apply the elements not needed for that purpose to the nutrition of their soft parts, especially since the remaining elements are those which, when united, constitute the proteine-compound of which their soft parts are invariably composed.” In this Dr. Wallich thinks that “no exceptional law is invoked ;”’ but it seems to us that, even if the derivation of mineral elements, such as carbonate of lime and silica, directly from the surrounding water be, as Dr. Wallich considers it, an indisputable fact, it still furnishes us with no analogy to the fixa- tion and combination of the organizable elements into a living body, as the carbonate of lime and silica remain unchanged in their chemi- cal condition ; whilst the analogy supposed to exist with plants is still further from the truth. The very difficulty which this hypothesis is proposed to get over arises from the fact, admitted by Dr. Wal- lich, that plants, which we know to derive their nourishment from inorganic matter, cannot effect the assimilation of the necessary ele- ments without the stimulus of light; and yet we are to assume that animals, none of which, as far as we know, are capable, under the ordinary conditions of plant-life, of availing themselves of the sur- rounding elements for the nutrition of their bodies, may yet do so under the influence of a total absence of all recognizable stimulus, It appears to us, that in this we have an invocation of a very excep- tional law, and one which involves something very like a creation of force. A statement made by Dr. Wallich, a few pages after the pro- mulgation of the above theory, may perhaps serve partly to explain the apparent anomaly. He says, “it is evident that there is an in- timate association between the Globigerina-deposits and the Gulf- stream ; for wherever we trace the one sweeping across the surface of the ocean, we are almost sure to detect the other resting on the sea- bed ; and when we fail to trace the one, we almost as surely fail to detect the other.” This connexion between the Gulf-stream and the deposits of Globigerine is ascribed by Dr. Wallich to the vast quan- tities of carbonate of lime brought down into it by the great rivers of the American continent. The abundant supply of this salt is con- sidered to be so favourable to the growth of Foraminifera as to cause their abundance along the course of the Gulf-stream. Admitting the force of this argument, may not the influence of the Gulf-stream depend also in part, perhaps chiefly, on the vast numbers of or- ganisms which swarm in its genial waters, and which, sinking to the bottom after death, may furnish the food necessary for the sustenance and multiplication of the inhabitants of the abysses beneath them ? Although constrained to dissent on this point from Dr. Wallich’s 384 Bibliographical Notices. views, we nevertheless cordially welcome his work as a most im- portant and interesting contribution to our knowledge of the physical geography of the sea. The reader will find in it a most interesting discussion of some of the most important questions connected with the distribution of marine animals; and many of the statements connecting these with the elucidation of facts in geology and physical geography will be found exceedingly valuable. We look forward with much impatience for the appearance of the second part, com- pleting the work (which is announced to be published in December), as it will contain the results of Dr. Wallich’s investigations into the structure and life-history of the Rhizopodal Fauna of the deep sea ; and from the care with which his researches have been carried on, we have every reason to expect a highly valuable contribution towards the history of those singular creatures. ‘This portion of his subject is barely commenced in the part before us; but, from the few pages here devoted to it, and the lettering of the beautiful plates appended to the work, nearly all of which illustrate the Rhizopoda, it would appear that Dr. Wallich’s researches have led him to important systematic results. On the various Contrivances by which British and Foreign Orchids are Fertilized by Insects, and on the good effects of Intercrossing. By Cuarziis Darwin, M.A., F.R.S. London: John Murray. 12mo. 1862. Among flowering plants there are few which excite our interest more than the Orchids, whether we consider merely the singularities of their external appearance, or the mysterious amalgamation of their male and female organs in a single central column. The strange and often grotesque forms of the flowers (simulating, as they frequently do, certai members of the animal kingdom), the great -beauty of some species, and the remarkable epiphytal habits of others are quite sufficient to attract the attention of both the botanist and the horticulturist to these plants; and when we add to this that the above-mentioned amalgamation of the sexual organs of the flowers, instead of facilitating impregnation, as might have been expected, really seems to place obstacles in the way of the performance of this function, the interest excited by these plants will reach its climax. It is Mr. Darwin’s object in the present work to clear up the mystery hanging over the process of impregnation in the Orchids, in order to apply the results thus obtained to the support of certain opinions ad- vanced in his book on the ‘ Origin of Species.’ In the practical part of his task, the explanation of the mode of fertilization, 1t seems to us that he is completely successful ; but whether the arguments deduced therefrom on the general question be equally valid, is another affair. It has long been supposed by some botanists, amongst whom Mr. Darwin cites Sprengel and Robert Brown, that in the fertilization of Orchids insects play a not unimportant part; but, as remarked by our author, from their assuming the pollen to be applied to the im- Bibliographical Notices. 385 pregnation of the same flower, they have missed discovering the true process. According to Mr. Darwin, the pollen of one flower is almost invariably employed to fertilize the seeds of another; and the con- trivances by which this end is attained in different Orchids appear to us to be amongst the most remarkable presented by the vegetable kingdom. We may select one of the simplest forms of the process, namely that exhibited by Orchis mascula, as this will furnish a clue to the phenomena presented throughout the group. In this plant the top of the column is occupied by the single an- ther, containing two pollinia or masses of pollen-grains, which are produced beneath into small slender stalks, each terminating in a viscid disk which is received into the back of the rostellum. ‘The latter, which is the homologue of one of the stigmata, projects from the front of the column in such a manner as partially to fill up the orifice leading into the nectary, and on each side of it are the true stigmatic surfaces of the remaining two stigmata. The viscid disks of the pollinia are surrounded by a fluid which keeps them constantly moist, being protected from atmospheric influences by the rostellum. The action of this complex apparatus is explained, as follows, by Mr. Darwin :— ** Let us suppose,” he says, ‘‘an insect to alight on the labellum, which forms a good landing-place, and to push its head into the chamber at the back of which lies the stigma, in order to reach with its proboscis the end of the nectary..... Owing to the pouch-formed rostellum projecting into the gangway of the nectary, it is scarcely possible that any object ean be pushed into it without the rostellum being touched. The exterior membrane of the rostellum then rup- tures in the proper lines, and the lip or pouch is most easily de- pressed. When this is effected, one or both of the viscid balls will almost infallibly touch the intruding body. So viscid are these balls that whatever they touch they firmly stick to. Moreover the viscid matter has the peculiar chemical property of setting, like a cement, hard and dry in a few minutes’ time. As the anther-cells are open in front, when the insect withdraws its head, one pollinium, or both, will be withdrawn, firmly cemented to the object, projecting up like horns. The firmness of the attachment of the cement is very neces- sary, as we shall immediately see; for if the pollinia were to fall sideways or backwards, they could never fertilize the flower. From the position in which the two pollinia lie in their cells, they diverge a little when attached to any object. Now let us suppose our insect to fly to another flower: .... by looking at the diagram, it will be evident that the firmly attached pollinium will be simply pushed against or into its old position, namely into its anther-cell. How, then, can the flower be fertilized? ‘This is effected by a beautiful contrivance : though the viscid surface remains immoveably affixed, the apparently insignificant and minute disk of membrane to which the caudicle adheres is endowed with a remarkable power of con- traction, which causes the pollinium to sweep through about 90 degrees, always in one direction, viz. towards the apex of the pro- boscis, in the course, on an average, of thirty seconds. Now, after Ann. § Mag. N. Hist. Ser, 3. Vol. x, 26 386 Bibliographical Notices. this movement and interval of time (which would allow the insect to fly to another flower), it will be seen that if the pencil [or proboscis | be inserted into the nectary, the thick end of the pollininm will exactly strike the stigmatic surface.” That things go on in the way just described was demonstrated experimentally by Mr. Darwin by the simple expedient of thrusting the point of a pencil or some similar object into the orifice of the nectary, when one or both of the pollinia are certain to be removed, and the subsequent change of position for enabling the pollen to reach the viscid stigmatic surfaces of another flower may easily be observed. The occurrence of the same phenomena by the inter- vention of moths and other sucking insects is proved by the frequent occurrence of pollinia adhering to their proboscides. Mr. Darwin gives a list of twenty-three species of Lepidoptera on which pollinia of Orchis pyramidalis have been met with; he figures the head of a specimen of Acontia luctuosa with seven pairs of pollinia attached to its proboscis, and mentions one of a Caradrina which bore no fewer than eleven pairs of these pollen-masses. As the general principle on which the fertilization of Orchids de- pends is nearly the same throughout, although the different means by which its effectuation is ensured present many beautiful and won- derful contrivances, the extract above given may suffice for our pre- sent purpose ; the reader will, however, find the details given by Mr. Darwin on all points connected with the impregnation of these plants most interesting. We may, however, trespass a little further upon his time in order to advert to one case which, appears to us particularly remarkable. In Catasetum, one species of which is now eae to be the male form belonging to a female plant placed by botanists in quite a different genus, the two pollinia are affixed to a common, broad and strong pedicle bearing at its lower end a single disk coated with viscid matter. The latter, however, is so turned into the interior of the column that-no insect can by any possibility get at it, and indeed there seems to be nothing to induce even the most inquisitive insect to push his proboscis into the vicinity of the disk. How, then, is it to be set free? Mr. Darwin describes a pair of long, stiff and taper- ing organs, which he calls antenne, projecting from the sides of the columm close to the insertion of the pedicle of the pollinia; these hang down over the pouch-like labellum, in such a position that an insect moving about upon the latter can hardly fail to touch them. The slight irritation thus caused appears to produce some singular effect upon the tissues about the base of the pollinia: the membranes retaining the common pedicle in its position are ruptured; the heavy viscid disk is set free, and is drawn forth by the sudden extension of the previously curved pedicle, which straightens itself with such force as to jerk the pollinia out of their cells and project the whole organ to a distance often of two or three feet, the disk with its viscid coat being always carried foremost, ready to adhere to any object. Mr. Darwin sums up, as follows, the phenomena presented by the genus including Catasetum, Monachanthus, and Myanthus of bota- Bibliographical Notices. 387 nists. He says, “We see a flower patiently waiting with its an- tenn stretched forth in a well-adapted position, ready to give notice whenever an insect puts its head into the cavity of the label- lum. The female Monachanthus, not having pollinia to eject, is destitute of antennee. In the male and hermaphrodite forms, namel Catasetum tridentatum and Myanthus, the pollinia lie doubled up like a spring, ready to be instantaneously shot forth when the an- tennz are touched ; the disk end is always projected foremost, and is coated with viscid: matter, which quickly sets hard, and firmly affixes the hinged pedicel to the insect’s body. The insect flies from flower to flower, till at last it visits a female or hermaphrodite plant ; it then inserts one of the masses of pollen into the stigmatic cavity. When the insect flies away, the elastic caudicle, made weak enough to yield to the viscidity of the stigmatic surface, breaks, and leaves behind the pollen-mass ; then the pollen-tubes slowly protrude, pene- trate the stigmatic canal, and the act of fertilization is completed. Who would have been bold enough,”’ he adds, ‘‘ to have surmised that the propagation of a species should have depended on so complex, so apparently artificial, and yet so admirable an arrangement ?”’ The consequence deduced by Mr. Darwin from the facts above referred to is stated by him in the following words :—“ Considering how precious the pollen of Orchids evidently is, and what care has been bestowed on its organization and on the accessory parts,—con- sidering that the anther always stands close behind or above the stigma, self-fertilization would have been an incomparably safer pro- cess than the transportal of the pollen from flower to flower. It is an astonishing fact that self-fertilization should not have been an habitual occurrence. It apparently demonstrates to us that there must be something injurious in the process. Nature thus tells us, in the most emphatic manner, that she abhors perpetual self-fer- tilization.” To this conclusion we may be permitted todemur. Even amongst Orchids, according to Mr. Darwin, some species, the most striking of which is the Bee-Orchis (Ophrys apifera), are organized for self- fertilization ; and we do not see why the mere fact of the close juxta- position of the sexual organs, coupled with the necessity for the im- pregnation of one flower by the pollen of another (admitting this to the fullest extent), should have more weight in proving that ‘‘ Nature abhors self-fertilization”’ than the perfectly well-known fact that, whilst the majority of plants bear hermaphrodite flowers, others are moncecious and dicecious. It seems to us that, curious and interesting as are the phenomena revealed to us by Mr. Darwin, they are far from giving any support to the theory that self-impregnation is ab- horrent to Nature, especially as there are many plants and animals in which, as far as we are aware, “perpetual self-fertilization ’’ must prevail. Apart from this theory and that of “natural selection,’ which we cannot think is much advanced by the present volume, we must welcome this work of Mr. Darwin’s as a most important and inter- esting addition to botanical literature. It contains the details of a 26% 388 Zoological Society :— vast number of curious phenomena, observed most carefully, and furnishes a most lucid exposition of the homologies of the singular flowers of which it treats. The illustrations also are excellent. PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY. May 13, 1862.—John Gould, Esq., F.R.S., in the Chair. Notice or a New Species or Dotpnin (DELPuinus Cata- LANIA), DISCOVERED IN Nortu AvustTraAuia By Mr. JOHN Maccituivray. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S., etc. Mr. John Macgillivray has sent to Mr. Cuming, who has trans- ferred them to the British Museum Collection, two skulls of a species of Dolphin or Bottlenose, which he regards as probably new. These skulls were accompanied by the following notes :— “ DELPHINUS, 0.8. * The larger of the two skulls belonged to an individual killed off Cape Melville (within the Great Barrier Reefs), north-east coast of Australia, Sept. 5, 1860. It was a female, 74 feet in length; and from it were taken two foetuses, each 10 inches in length. The adult was of a very light lead-colour above and on the sides, gradually passing into the dirty leaden white of the lower parts, which were covered (as also the flippers) with longitudinally elongated blotches of dark lead-colour. ** The smaller of the two skulls represents another Porpoise of the same species, harpooned off Cape Flattery, on the north-east coast of Australia, Oct. 9, 1860. It was considerably smaller than the first one, being only 62 feet in length. It was a female. The colour was exactly lead-colour, fading into whitish on the lower parts be- tween the anus and the snout. The sides were marked with small oblong spots of the same colour as the back. Measurements when recent :— «Total length, snout to centre of tail, 6 feet 9 inches. ** Snout to base of dorsal, 3 feet ; length of anterior border of dorsal 13 inches; height of dorsal 8 inches; width of dorsal 12 inches ; from posterior border of dorsal to tip of tail, 2 feet 8 inches. « Swimming-paws (midway between snout and dorsal) 13 inches long, and 53 inches broad ; from their base to end of snout, 13 inches. ‘Tail 22 inches across from tip to tip. «‘ Anus 2 feet 2 inches in front of tail (centre of tip). * Rye 3ths of an inch in diameter, situated 1} inch behind angle of mouth, and 12 inches from tip of upper jaw. «* Lower jaw projecting 1 inch beyond the upper. “« This Porpoise was occasionally seen, in small droves of from three to six, along the north-east coast of Australia, within the reefs. Two other species also were seen, but we could not fasten.” Dr. J. E. Gray on Delphinus Catalania. 389 The two skulls slightly differ in shape and size. No. 1 is 17 inches long; the beak to the notch is 10 inches, and the upper tooth-bone 84 inches long; the front lower teeth are worn away and truncated, like the teeth of the common De/phinus tursio, which was described as D. brunatus by Montague. There are twenty-seven teeth on each side in the upper, and twenty-five teeth on each side in the lower jaw. No. 2 is 17 inches long; the beak 93, and the upper tooth-bone 8 inches long. The teeth twenty-four above (perhaps one on each side is deficient, as the end of the jaw is very tender), twenty-three or twenty-four below. The front lower teeth are slightly truncated ; but this skull chiefly differs from No. 1 in being rather more convex and rather narrower, especially in the hinder part, from the middle of its length. T have compared these skulls with those of the different species of Bottlenoses (Tursio) in the British Muscum ; and they are perfectly distinct from any of them. The species may be called Delphinus Catalania. It is smaller in size, and has a much smaller brains cavity than D. Cymodoce (Gray, Zool. Erebus & Terror, t. 19) and D. Metis (Gray, Zool. Erebus & Terror, t. 18); and the beak is not so tapering as in these species, and the teeth are rather more numerous. It is equally distinct from Delphinus Eurynome (Gray, Zool. Erebus & Terror, t. 17), believed to be from the North Sea. It is not easy to point out the distinction of these species in words; but there cannot be a doubt about them when they are compared ~ together. * I may here observe that Delphinus Eutropia (Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1849, 1; Zool. Erebus & Terror, t. 34 ined.), which, in the ‘ Catalogue of Cetacea’ in the British Museum, I have placed in the first section of Tursia, with D. tursio and the species above named, should be formed into a section of itself, characterized by having a very broad muzzle shelving on the sides, and the skull shelving down over the orbits, and thirty-four or thirty-five slender teeth on each side of each jaw. This section may be called Eurroria. Notice or A WINGLEss Brirp, on Mono, AND A RAVEN FOUND IN THE IsLAND oF Hawai By Mr. W. H. Pease. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S., etc. In a note lately received from Mr. W. H. Pease, dated Honolulu, Nov. 20, 1861, he observes, ‘‘I noticed in a late number of the ‘ Annals of Natural History’ a description of a species of bird living in our islands (which was figured many years since in Dixon’s ‘Voyage’), by Mr. Gould; he refers it to the genus ‘ Moho.’ ‘© Please inform him that there is a wingless bird of small size living in the island of Hawaii, which the natives call ‘Moho,’ which is now nearly extinct, having been killed off by the wild cats and dogs within late years; I have seen but a single specimen. There is also living there a species of Raven.” 390 : Zoological Society :— Some Remarks on Aquita Desmursit (J. VERREAUX). By J. H. Gurney, M.P., F.Z.S.* M. Jules Verreaux, who first recognized this Eagle as a distinct species, communicated his description of it to Dr. Hartlaub, by whom the species was made known to ornithologists in his admirable work on the Ornithology of West Africa. My present object is to put on record some information as to this interesting bird, with which M. Jules Verreaux has been so good as to supply me, and also to give some indications of the changes of plumage to which this species appears liable, and which I have had the opportunity of examining in several examples which now form part of the collection of the Norwich Museum. It may, however, be well to premise a few general remarks with reference to the geographical distribution of this Eagle, and to some of the peculiarities by which it is distinguished. Aquila Desmursii has hitherto only been found in Tropical Africa, north of the Equator,—specimens having been obtained at Bissao on the western coast, and also in Nubia and Abyssinia, and on the banks of the White Nile. It is a small species, intermediate in size between Aquila pennata and Aguila nevia. From the former it is readily distinguishable by the greater length of all its measurements ; from the latter (as also from Aquila nevioides) it may, on the contrary, be distinguished by sits less size and, as Dr. Hartlaub well remarks, “by the more deli- cately shaped bill, and by the greater length of the tail” as com- pared with that of the wings. Another well-marked distinction, to which Dr. Hartlaub does not allude, is to be found in the presence in Aquila Desmursii of a well- defined, though small, occipital crest, consisting of from eight to nine pointed feathers, the longest of which are fully an inch and a half in length. The colouring of this Eagle, described in Dr. Hartlaub’s work, is that which characterizes what I believe to be the adult bird after it has newly moulted and has acquired its fresh plumage. In this dress the general colouring of Aquila Desmursii closely resembles that of the adult of Aquila nevioides under similar conditions, being of a rufous brown, varying in intensity in different portions of the same feather. Other specimens of Aguila Desmursit exhibit a plumage of an ex- tremely dark and almost uniform chocolate-colour. These indivi- duals I believe to be immature birds, in which the feathers have been also newly acquired. In this stage they bear a considerable general resemblance in point of colouring to the immature specimens of Aquila pennata, though I have never met with an immature Aquila pennata quite so dark as some specimens I have seen of Aquila Desmursii. In Aquila Gesmursit, as also in Aquila nevioides, * This paper will also be published in the Society’s ‘ Transactions,’ accompa- nied by a plate. Dr. W. Baird on new Species of Phyllopodous Crustacea. 3891 both adult and immature birds appear liable to have their plumage exceedingly bleached by the action of the tropical sun; but it is remarkable that the feathers composing the occipital crest in Aquila Desmursii appear to retain their original tint, notwithstanding the partial loss of colour from the above cause in the portions of the plumage immediately adjacent. It should also be remarked that, in some immature specimens, nearly the whole under surface is of a very pale whitish brown—a variation from the ordinary darker co- louring which cannot be accounted for by the effect of sun and weather only. In conclusion, I will add the remarks on this species communi- cated to me by M. Jules Verreaux, which are as follows :—“ Ac- cording to the notes of the collectors, the irides of the adult birds are of a chestnut-brown tinged with yellow; whilst in the young birds the yellow tint is absent, and the brown is deeper, with but little tinge of chestnut. The natives (at Bissao) give the name of ‘Socolas’ to this species only, it being well known to, them as a very courageous bird, attacking even the small Gazelles (Cephalophorus Mazxwelli) which inhabit the same localities, and also preying on various birds, and especially the Francolinus bicalcaratus.” DESCRIPTIONS OF SEVEN New SPECIES OF PHYLLOPODOUS CRUSTACEANS, BELONGING TO THE GENERA EsTHERIA AND Limnetis. By W. Bairp, M.D., F.L.S. 1. EstuHertia Jonest, Baird. o Carapace of a comparatively hard, horny structure, and of a dark- brown colour. Valves ventricose, rounded, ovate. Umbones pro- minent, nearly central, but a little nearer the anterior extremity ; in- volute and representing exactly those of a bivalve shell. Dorsal margin short; ventral rounded. Anterior extremity swollen, rounded, shorter than posterior extremity, which is somewhat compressed and rounded. Ribs numerous and narrow. Those of the upper half of carapace, from the umbo downwards, strongly developed, the edges being raised and strongly beaded ; the interstices hollow, and more sparsely dotted with rather small irregular-sized punctations. Ribs of lower half of carapace, as far as the ventral margin, much smaller than those of upper half, narrower, and much more numerous ; they are punctate also; but the interstices are so very narrow that no sculpture can be seen. Internally the surface is quite smooth, and of a dark-purple colour. Length of carapace, 6 lines; breadth at umbo, nearly 5 lines. Hab. Brackish water, Island of Cuba (Dr. Dunker). Commu- nicated by T. R. Jones, Esq. (Mus. Brit.) 2. EstoertA DunKeERr}, Baird. Carapace-valves broadly ovate and somewhat elongate. Umbones prominent, and placed at some distance (rather more than a third) from anterior extremity. Dorsal margin short, rather sloping. Ventral margin nearly straight, or only slightly rounded. Anterior extremity swollen, very convex, and rounded. Posterior extremity 392 Zoological Society :— elongate, more compressed, and not so rounded. The carapace is of a uniform yellow horn-colour, thin, and translucent. Ribs numerous, elevated, rather narrow, about twenty-seven in number, with the in- terstices marked with shallow pits and extremely fine punctations. This species approaches somewhat to &. brasiliensis, but differs in the position of the umbones, those of Z. Dunkert being further from the anterior extremity. The relative size of anterior and poste- rior extremities differs also, the former in LZ. brasiliensis bemg much broader than in the present species. It is a larger species also than Lt. brasiliensis. Length of carapace, 7 lines; breadth at umbo, 4 lines. Hab. Zimapan, Mexico; in fresh water (Dr. Dunker). Com- municated by T. R. Jones, Esq. (Mus. Brit.) 3: Esfurria Lortt, Baird. ~ “ Carapace of a very,light amber-colour, oval, rather swollen. Um- bones very prominent, elongate, placed near the anterior extremity. Dorsal margin slightly sloping. Ventral margin rounded. Anterior extremity swollen, rounded, and broader than the posterior, which is rather narrow, and somewhat compressed. ibs of carapace few, broad ; interstices marked with coarse-looking, raised, flexuous lines. This species resembles in form the LZ. ¢etracera as represented by Krynicki, and found by him near Moscow and at Charkow, Russia. Length of carapace, rather more than 4 lines; breadth at umbo, 5 lines. ~ Hab. Stagnant water on the banks of the Tigris, near Bagdad. Collected, along with Z. dahalacensis, by the late W. R. Loftus, Esq., in May 1855. (Mus. Brit.) 4. EsturrtaA RusipeGet, Baird. Carapace-valves ovate. Dorsal margin long, straight. Umbones small, placed near the anterior extremity. Ventral margin slightly rounded, Anterior extremity rounded. Posterior extremity emar- ginate at upper part, giving it somewhat the appearance of the shell of an Avicula. Anterior extremity rather the larger. Ribs of cara- pace not numerous, and wide apart, the surface in the interspaces marked with coarse and flexuously disposed raised lines. This species partakes of the characters of straight-dorsal-margined species, . dahalacensis and EL. Macgillivrayi. From the last spe- cies it differs in size, form of posterior extremity, and markings of interspaces between the ribs, as well as their comparative size and number, those of the present species being fewer and wider apart. Length of carapace, about 34 lines; breadth at umbo, 2 hes. Hab. A dried-up ‘vley” near Port Elizabeth, Cape Colony. Collected by Dr. Rubidge, and communicated to Henry Woodward, Esq., by W. 8S. M. D’Urban, Esq. (Mus. Brit.) 5. EstHertA MAcGciuuivrayl, Baird. 7”! Carapace-valves ovate. Dorsal margin long, straight. Umbones small, placed about 1 line from the anterior extremity. Ventral Mr. G. Krefft on Furina textilis. 393 margin rounded. Anterior extremity rounded, as well as posterior, both being of nearly equal size. Ribs of carapace numerous, narrow, and finely punctate in the interstices. In general outline this species resembles very much LZ’. dahala- censis ; but the ribs are narrower, more numerous, and the surface of the interstices is much more finely punctate. Length of carapace, about 5 lines; breadth at umbo, 3 lines. Hab. Brackish lake, Green Point, Cape of Good Hope (J. Macgillivray). (Mus. Brit.) 6. Esrurrra CALDWELL, Baird. Carapace-valves swollen, ovate, of a pale horn-colour. Umbones large, prominent, and ferruginous-coloured, placed at about one-third distance from the anterior extremity. Dorsal margin short, and nearly straight. Anterior extremity rounded, short, a little broader than posterior extremity, which is long and rounded. Ventral margin rounded. Ribs of carapace numerous, rather'narrow. Interstices roughly and strongly punctate. Length of carapace, nearly 4 lines; breadth at umbo, rather more than 2 lines. Hab. Lake Winnipeg, N. America (W. Caldwell, Esq.). (Mus. Brit.) 7. Limnetis Goutor, Baird. Carapace nearly quite globular, ventricose, and of a light horn- colour. Surface of valves smooth, not ribbed, aid covered entirely with numerous very small hollow punctations exactly resembling those on the top of a thimble. The point to which the adductor muscles are attached is very marked, being slightly prominent and very smooth and shining; and the branchial canals on the surface of the valves are strongly exhibited. This species resembles very much L. Wahlbergii of Lovén, fro Port Natal. In addition, however, to the total difference of habitat, this species differs from the one described by Lovén in size, being double the dimensions of it. The animal, too, differs in some par- ticulars; but as all the specimens I have examined are males, and the one figured by Lovén is a female, I do not know how far these differences may be merely sexual. Diameter of carapace, about 1} line. Hab. Fresh water at St. Ann’s, twenty miles from Montreal, ay Collected by Charles Gould, Esq., June 1857. (Mus. Brit. Note on Furina Textiuis. By Gerarp Krerrr, AcTING Curator Austr. Mus. During my rambles in the neighbourhood of Sydney I have found a number of small Snakes, varying in length from 8 to 12", and an- swering to the description given by Duméril and Bibron of Furina textilis. None of the specimens obtained have exceeded 16” in length ; and I have been naturally anxious to procure the young of this spe- 394, Zoological Society :— cies. During two years I was unsuccessful, and I began to think at last that this Snake was only the immature form of some other species, which supposition became a belief when some months ago I found an egg containing as large a specimen of Furina textilis as I had ever met with before. On further investigation I found that the distinct bands and black spots of this Snake faded with the growth of the individual, and apparently vanished altogether in old specimens. As the egg and young in my possession are of a size generally produced by Snakes from 3 to 4 feet in length, and as I have a series of specimens in which the disappearance of the bands and markings may be clearly traced, I do not hesitate to assert that Pseudonaia textilis is only a young Snake. Inviting the scrutiny of more able naturalists than myself to this fact, I beg to refer at the same time to my collection forwarded to the International Exhi- bition, specimens Nos. 66 and 40, which I believe to be identical. I have since forwarded a full-grown adult Snake of this species to Dr. Giinther, which I have stuffed, as in the dry specimens the re- mains of the rings on the body may be better observed than when preserved in spirits. I have been unable to find any description in Duméril and Bibron of the large Furina of which I suppose the F’. textilis to be the young; and, not being in possession of the British Museum Catalogue, I do not know whether this Snake has been de- scribed at all. Nore on THE DEER oF Formosa. By P. L. Scuater, M.A., Pu.D., F.R.S., SECRETARY TO THE SOCIETY. In some remarks on the Japanese Deer received by the Society in 1860, which I made before the meeting of this Society in the month of November of that year*, I gave some reasons for considering Cer- vus sika of the ‘Fauna Japonica,’ Cervus pseudaxis of the French naturalists, and Dr. Gray’s Rusa japonica as probably synonyms of the same species. In a communication made to the Society in the following year, Dr. Gray ultimately admits that his Rusa japonica is probably the same as Cervus sika, ‘ though it differs so much from the figure and description of that animal in the ‘ Fauna Japonica’ ;”’+ and I believe there is now little doubt upon this point. Mr. Westerman, the Director of the Gardens of the Zoological Society of Amsterdam, to whom we parted with a pair of these Japanese Deer in 1861, has informed me that he was previously well acquainted with the species, and that it is certainly identical with the type of Cervus sika in the Leyden Museum. Since the arrival of the first example of this Deer (the pair presented to the Society by Mr. Wilks, July 21, 1860), we have received several others. In September 1861, a female arrived from our Corresponding Member, Mr. Blyth of Calcutta, being one of the examples he has commented upon in the ‘Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal’ (xxx. p. 90); and in June of the same year we purchased a pair of these animals, the male of which was subsequently parted with to Mr. Westerman. On the 31st of August, * Ann, & Mag. ser. 3. vol. vii. p. 142. T Ibid. vol. viii. p. 341. Dr. P. L. Sclater on the Deer of Formosa. 395 1861, the female presented by Mr. Wilks produced a male calf; and there seems every probability of this Deer doing well in this country. With regard, however, to the Formosan Deer (Cervus taévanus or taiouanus), I was certainly wrong in supposing it to be the same as the Japanese Cervus sika. Knowing nothing about it, except from Mr. Blyth’s description, I supposed that he who created the species was to be trusted when he destroyed it. I therefore put faith in what Mr. Blyth wrote in a letter to me (dated July 4th, 1860), that he was then “satisfied” that the Formosan and Japanese Deer were of “one and the same species.’ It appears, however, from what Mr. Swinhoe says (see P. Z. S. 1861, p. 235), that all the living Deer sent to Mr. Blyth were of the Japanese species, and that Mr. Blyth never had the Formosan species alive*. Mr. Blyth’s comparison, therefore, was made between animals of the same species. All doubt, however, as to the perfect distinctness of the Formosan Deer from the Japanese Cervus sika is removed since we have re- ceived the fine male of the Cervus taévanus, presented to us by our Corresponding Member, Mr. Swinhoe, in December last. It will be evident to any one who inspects this animal and compares it with the adjoining specimen of Cervus sika, that, though probably nearly allied to the latter and belonging to the same group of Deer, it is quite distinct specifically. Its larger size and the deep-red colouring of the posterior part of the neck are quite sufficient to distinguish it. With the true form of the horns in Cervus taévanus we are not yet acquainted, owing to our specimen having broken and worn down his horns while in confinement. But we have to thank Mr. Swinhoe (who is now Vice-Consul in Formosa) for another and most valuable addition to our series of Deer. On April 28th, a specimen of what I suppose Mr. Swinhoe to mean by the “ Roe-Deer” + of Formosa arrived, and is now doing well in our Menagerie. It turns out to be a species of the Rusine group of Deer, quite distinct from any of the four species of this * Mr. Blyth says, “ Mr. Sclater is wrong in identifying the Japanese and For- mosan species” (Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1861, p. 192, note); but he neglects to add that my mistake arose from the incorrect information with which he himself had furnished me. t+ Mr. Swinhoe writes to me, ‘Four if not five Deer are on their way to you. The buck (C. ¢taévanus) left me in high condition; and a lovely animal he was. The doe of the same species sent was with young; and I have some apprehensions about her. The two buck Roe-Deer will, I think, delight the Society, as they must surely be new species. I did not know of their existence till my visit to Taiwanfoo. They are known to the Chinese here as Cheeangs, and are procured by them from the aborigines of the inner hills. The C. taévanus, which is pro- cured from the same savages, is distinguished as the Lok or Stag; and the Cer- vulus as the Kiung. I have seen nothing as yet of the Bear or the Mountain Sheep, said to be found in Formosa ; but since my arrival here I have sent a fine pair of Monkeys to my friend in Hong Kong for transmission to the Gardens. They may turn out novelties, and I have no doubt you would like more; so I will try and procure a few more. The Tortoises from Southern Formosa I take to be peculiar, and I have accordingly forwarded you a few; I have also preserved some in spirits.” [These Tortoises have arrived, and turn out to be Emys Bennettii, Gray.—P. L. 8.] 396 Zoological Society. section* we at present possess, and in all probability of a species hitherto unknown, and for which I propose the temporary designa- tion Cervus Swinhott. It would appear, therefore, that there are four distinct species of Deer inhabiting the coasts of China and Japan, concerning which we require much more information :— 1. Cervus sika, Temm. & Sieb. (Rusa japonica, Gray), from Japan. 2. Cervus pseudaxis, Kyd. & Soul. (Gray, P. Z. 8. 1861, p. 236, pl. xxvii.), from Northern China. 3. Cervus taévanus, Blyth (Journ. A. 8. B. xxix. p. 90), from Formosa. 4. Cervus Swinhoii, sp. nov., from Formosa. Our single male specimen of Swinhoe’s Deer stands about 2 feet 8 inches in height, and presents the general appearance of a small Deer of the Sambur group (Rusa). ‘The head, neck, and fore legs are greyish black, growing more rufescent on the back, and passing on the rump and hind quarters into a deep chestnut. The tail is rather long and very bushy, and composed of grizzly-blackish hairs. The cede of the ‘thighs and belly beneath are fawn-colour, passing on the inside of the legs into pale ochraceous. The animal appears to be in about its second year. The present horns have been injured whilst growing, and are much broken. On A New Birp From THE IstE or MADAGASCAR. By Dr. G. Hartuavs, For. Mems. Tyxast, n.g. (Pycnonotine). Char. Gen.—Rostrum satis robustum et elongatum, rectiusculum, emarginatum, dimidio apicali compressum, basin versus dilata- tum; culmine carinato, subarcuato ; naribus apertis, ovalibus ; vlbrissis rictalibus nonnullis conspicuis, mollibus. Ale longi- uscule, caude dimidium superantes ; remige prima subspuria, quarta et quinta longissimis, subequalibus, tertia breviore, se- cunda multo breviore. Cauda longa, equalis. Tarsi brevius- culi; pedibus parvis ; digitis gracilibus, debilibus, interno vie breviore ; unguibus debilibus. Tyxias Epuarpt, sp.nov. Supra subolivascenti-plumbea ; capite toto nigro, nitore chalybeo ; cauda dorso concolore ; scapis rec- tricum supra nitide nigris, subtus albis; corpore subtus cum subalaribus et subcaudalibus ochraceo; capitis nigredine cir- cumscripte albido circumdata ; rostro nigro; pedibus fuscis. Long. tot. circa 8"; rostr. a fr. 9", a rict. 113!"; al. 4" 5"; caud. a bas. 3!" 4; tars. 92"; dig. med. c. ung. 9!" We have named this interesting new form after its discoverer, Mr. Edward Newton, a gentleman who has recently visited Mada- * Cervus Duvaucelii et C. Aristotelis, ex Ind. cont.; C. rusa, ex Malacca; C. moluccensis, ex ins. Moluce. T TvAds, “ayis quedam ignota turdina.” Miscellaneous. 897 gascar, and whose zealous efforts have very materially forwarded our knowledge of the ornithology of the East-African Archipelago. The genus Tylas is nearly allied to Hypsipetes, but differs in the beak being decidedly stronger, broader, and more inflated; in the longer wings, which in Hypsipetes do not reach to the middle of the tail; in the tail being proportionally shorter; and in the rictal bristles being much more developed. The under tail-coverts are very long. The iris is yellow—a colour not found hitherto in the genus Hypsipetes. The whole system of coloration is different from that of the latter genus. MISCELLANEOUS. Notice of a new Species of Cynopterus from Morty Island. By Dr. J. KE. Gray, F.R.S. Tue British Museum has lately received from Mr. A. R. Wallace two interesting specimens of a fruit-eating Bat from Morty Island, col- lected in 1861, which appears not yet to have been registered in the Catalogues. I therefore subjoin a short specific description of it. It is easily known from all the other species by the extraordinary length of its tail; indeed, it seems to form a section or subgenus apart, that may be called Uronycteris. Cynopterus (Uronycteris) albiventer. Tail elongate and free, produced beyond the narrow interfemoral membrane. Nostrils much produced, tubular, and far apart. Brown above, with greyer base to the hairs. Face and throat only slightly hairy, grey; side of the neck and breast yellow-brown ; side of the body brown ; chest and middle of the belly white; the wing brown. Hab. Morty Island. The length of the fore-arm 2 inches; length of tail (dry) nearly ? inch. i The wing-bone on the upper surface of the wings of both speci- mens is marked with some irregular white spots ; these may be only accidentally or even artificially produced in the process of preserva- tion, or by carriage, as the spots on the two sides of the same wing are unlike, and those of the two specimens dissimilar. On the Larve of Hypoderma. By F. Braver. In August 1860, the author communicated to the Zoological and Botanical Society of Vienna some observations on the change of skin in the larvee of Hypoderma. He now calls attention to the agree- ment of his observations with those published by Leuckart on the larvee of the Muscide, which is especially important, as the investi- gations were quite independent of each other. In the @stride change of skin was said to take place by Neuman and Joly; but nejther of these authors had witnessed this pheno- 398 Miscellaneous. menon, the occurrence of which they were led to suppose by observing the difference between young and adult larvee of Gastrus. The investigation of the cause of this change increases the interest attaching to the observations. In a larva living in the same way from its exclusion from the egg to its change to the pupa state, such a cause can hardly be discovered ; but it is otherwise with the larvee of the @stride, which must wander to the place where they can attain maturity. In this respect the @strid@ are divisible into two groups, the egg-laying and larviparous forms. To the former belong Gastrus and Hypoderma ; to the latter, Cephalomyia and Cephe- nomyia. In the former genera, the larva has to get into the stomach or under the skin, as the eggs are deposited by the imago upon hairs. In Cephalomyia and Cephenomyia the female injects the maggots into the nose of the animal on which they are parasitic. The greatest difference between the young and adult larvee occurs in those which have the greatest migration to perform,—consequently in the larvee of Gastrus and Hypoderma. The author’s observations were made on numerous larvee of Hy- poderma Diana, n.sp., from the skin of the Roe. First stage (duration unknown, but probably very long, as the fly appears only for a few days in May, and the larve are found in this stage in the following February. The end of January and beginning of February may be regarded as the period of transition to the second stage).—In this stage the larva grows to a length of 63 lines, but remains nearly cylindrical and scarcely 1 line in diameter. Anterior extremity rounded off ; posterior extremity like the anterior, or the last three segments attenuated into a tail, at the pleasure of the larva. Buccal organs very small. Buccal orifice funnel-shaped; above it projects a straight spike, which rests upon a transverse chitinous piece concealed in the cesophagus, from which on each side a chiti- nous arch proceeds backwards and terminates in a shovel-like plate, as in almost all larvee of flies. The shovel-like plates are on each side of the cesophagus, and their faces are vertical. Close to the first-mentioned spike are two hooks (one on each side); these are bent at right angles, and their free ends are directed outwards and downwards. They can be moved so as to form a single point with the median spike ; if then their points are bent outwards and backwards, it is clear that the larva will push itself forward, and readily bore into any object opposed to it. The anterior stigmata are pretty large; they are on the sides of the upper part of the second segment ; they are round, and bordered on the inner margin by a semilunar chitinous band. Posterior stigmata forming two small, irregular, porous, chitinous plates. Round the stigmata the last segment bears numerous small, round chitinous plates, which give it a punctured appearance. The larva has eleven segments, and ap- pears naked; there are some microscopic spines only in the funnel- shaped pit of the mouth and on the margin of the lower lip. 0-4 Second stage (duration very short, at the utmost one month. This form appears from the end of January to the middle of February, usually together with the first and third forms).—Larva at first Miscellaneous. 899 shorter than in the first stage, but broader. It grows from 5 to 7 lines long, and is easily recognized by the black spots on the lower surface, which consist of dense groups of black spines. Above, the larva is quite naked, with the exception of the first three segments. Mouth forming a V-shaped pit ; its margins bordered laterally and. below by rough, thick chitinous bands, which are firmly united below, and internally spread out into the above-mentioned chitinous plates and numerous filaments embracing the cesophagus. Spike and hooks wanting. No anterior stigmata observed. Posterior stigmata reni- from, forming a very coarsely cellular plate on each side. Form of the larva very changeable; the posterior end is very often much attenuated, like a tail. Third stage (duration from February to April).—Mouth a funnel- shaped pit with membranous margins ; in the pit a small horny ring, immediately followed by the cesophagus, which directly afterwards passes over a chitinous frame from which the chitinous shovel-like plates issue. Above the buccal pit there are two horny rings, as rudimentary antenne. Anterior stigmata very small, on the hinder margin of the first segment. Posterior stigmata reniform, nearly smooth, flat, radiately furrowed. From this it follows that the young larvee can bore their way into the skin, and subsequently undergo a retrograde metamorphosis of their buccal organs. The author remarks upon the fact that thus organs of so much importance as the parts of the mouth may lose their significance in a systematic point of view. A more detailed account of his observations is promised in a forthcoming monograph of the Hstride.— Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1862, p. 210. The King Crab (Limulus Polyphemus) found on the English Coast. By Dr. J. K. Gray, F.R.S. &c. The King Crab has lately been frequently imported into Liverpool, and is shown alive at the Free Museum of that town, and also in the Zoological Gardens in the Regent’s Park. Mr. Walker, the Arctic traveller, lately took a living specimen with him to Paris, with the idea of presenting it to the Jardin des Plantes; but he failed in doing so through the absence of the Professors to whom he had an introduction. Being tired of the charge of the animal, and of providing it with fresh sea-water, &c., he threw it overboard, between Boulogne and Dover, on his way back. The animal must have been washed ashore at Dover; for I have had more than one account of its having been found on that coast, and one kind correspondent offered to secure it for the British Museum at the price of five pounds. , It is as well that this should be recorded ; for otherwise it may at some future day, when the circumstance of its having been thrown into the water is forgotten, be placed in the fauna as a rare or occa- sional visitor, instead of being artificially introduced. 4.00 Miscellaneous. Notice of a new Species of Bosh-Buck (Cephalophus bicolor) from Natal. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. Mr. W. Fosbrook has kindly presented to the British Museum a beautiful small species of Bush-Bock, which was captured by John Dunn, Esq., in the Umgozy Forest, between the river Umbelaus and Umblatore, in the country of the Amazula. The natives have no name for it, as faras Mr. Dunn could learn. It is a most peculiarly marked species, and of very small size; when it died, the mamme were found dilated with milk, showing that it was of adult age. The hunters mistook it for a young animal, and fed it with milk, on which it died. Cephalophus bicolor. Brown ; the rump, the whole of the hind legs, the chin, throat, chest, belly, inner side of the fore legs, a broad ring over the front hoofs, and a large spot occupying the front of the face and forehead pure white. ‘The ears blackish, white within. The sides of the forehead darkish brown. The crumen on the side of the face linear, well marked. Horns none in the female sex. Hab. Natal. The smallest species of the genus, not weighing more than 3 lbs. It is most like C. Whitfieldii, of the Gambia; but the brown is of a different shade, and there is no white, which is so prominent in the Natal animal. On the Natural and Artificial Production of Cork in the Cork-oak. By M. Casimir pr CANDOLLE. This paper is interesting as being the first botanical publication of the inheritor of this honoured name in the third generation of bota- nists, and as an account of the formation and structure of cork in the Cork-oak, both in the natural state and especially under the operation which has to be practised in order to the production of cork of any commercial value. The operation consists in the re- moval from the trunk of the natural corky layer of the bark down to the subjacent cellular envelope or green layer, which is done in Algeria (where young DeCandolle’s observations were made) during the summer or autumn. Shortly after this operation, 2 new corky stratum begins to form in the green layer, at a variable distance from its denuded surface. This grows by annual layers upon its internal face, just as the original and worthless corky layer did; but this is much finer and much more elastic, and is the commercial article. When this valuable cork has attained sufficient thickness (ordinarily after seven or eight years), it also is removed, with the same result as before; 7. e. still another new corky stratum is formed below; and so successive crops may be taken off the trunk every seventh or eighth year for a long while, or even indefinitely.—Ab- stract in Silliman’s Jourial for Sept. 1862 from the Mém. de la Soc. de Phys. et d Hist. Nat, de Geneve, vol. xvi. 1860. THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. [THIRD SERIES. ] No. 60. DECEMBER 1862. XLII.—On the Phenomena of Motion in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda, and especially on the so-called Granular Movement and the supposed Coalescence of the Pseudopodia. By Prof. ReicHErt*. [In the introductory portion of this paper, Prof. Reichert endeavours to controvert what he calls the “‘ sarcode-theory,” under which he sees a revival of the old notion of a living primordial slime capable of being produced in some mysterious manner independently of preexisting organisms. As we cannot see that the idea of the nature of “ sarcode” generally entertained involves any such opinions as to its origin, this part of the au- thor’s paper has been omitted, and the translation commences with his discussion of the motile phenomena presented by the pseudopodia. | Whilst Ehrenberg, in his investigations of living Polythalamia from the North Sea, declares himself expressly against the coalescence of the filaments emitted by them+, Schultze, in his work ‘Ueber den Organismus der Polythalamien’ (Leipzig, 1854), places himself entirely on Dujardin’s side; and to this view the cell-membrane could not but fall a sacrifice afterwards. Accord- ing to him, the body of the Polythalamia consists of a formless substance, comparable, as to its consistence, with fluid wax, containing globules imbedded in it here and there. The phe- nomena of motion in the pseudopodia are described by this au- thor essentially in accordance with Dujardin, but rather more accurately, both with regard to their branching and coalescence and in respect of the so-called granular movement in and upon them. Of the granular movement Schultze speaks as follows :— * Monatsbericht der Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1862, p.406, Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S. + Abhandl. der Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 1839, p. 106. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 27 fo 7 402 Prof. Reichert on the Phenomena of Motion “‘A distinction of membrane and contents does not exist in the filaments (p. 17); observation is against an interior channeled structure in which the larger globules are moved; but the regular flowing to and fro of the contractile substance effects the movement of the granules, and the latter, again, inform us of the movements of contraction. The small granules moreover move with the substance flowing out of the general mass of the body into the filaments themselves ; the larger ones, on the con- trary, appear as corpuscles moving on the filaments. The co- alescence of two or more filaments, the passage of the granules from one into the others united with it, must also remove all doubts raised as to the nature of the substance of the body of the Polythalamia being such as was assumed by Dujardin.” Soon afterwards a parallel was set up between the supposed granular movements in the pseudopodia of the Polythalamia and the currents in the cells of plants, by Unger and Cohn, and thus the bridge was made by which the theory of the proto- plasinic mass was enabled to make good its entry into science. According to J. Miiller, the granular movement in the Poly- thalamia exactly resembles those in the extended filaments of the Thalassicolle, Polycystina, and Acanthometre*. In his descrip- tion of the phenomena of motion in the filaments of the Sphero- zoa (p.7) there is an observation on elongated swellings passing along these filaments like granules, to which I must hereafter refer particularly. During my residence at Trieste last year, my most ardent desire to become more exactly acquainted, from personal obser- vation, with the phenomena of motion in the pseudopodia of the Polythalamia, which have led to such different views upon the organization of animals, was fulfilled. The sea-mud with the hving Polythalamia was procured from the basins which have been shut off in the neighbourhood of Zaole for the manufacture of sea-salt. In this there were a species of Miliola and one of Rotalia which I did not more particularly determine. The ani- mals were examined under magnifying powers of 300, 500, and 700 diameters. The first impression made upon me by the phenomena of motion in the pseudopodia was of such a nature as fully to sup- port the descriptions of Dujardin and Max Schultze: it was as if one had to do with a fluid substance readily changing its configuration and course with a constant flow and return of particles. But any one observing the astonishing spectacle, which appears so wonderful from its opposition to evident facts in the organization of animals, without reposing a blind con- * Abhandl. der Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 1858, p. 2. in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda. 403 fidence in the correctness of the dogmas of the theory of primor- dial slime, sarcode, or protoplasm, must admit, after some con- sideration, that the picture of a fluid and flowing mass may also very easily be produced in separated and not fluid, but solid or semisolid (festweichen) masses whenever two conditions are ful- filled :—1, when the surface of such bodies brings an alternate, more or less regular play of elevations before us in such a man- ner that we are led to conceive a motion like that of waves in water ; and 2, when bodies really separate, but not distinguish- able as such at their mutual points of contact, are constantly changing their relative position, and under these circumstances present themselves as a mass varying at pleasure in form and limits, and possessing properties appertaining to fluid sub- stances. From the point of view which I am convinced is to be maintained, if not alone, still especially, in regard to or- ganisms, the impression made by the phenomena of motion in the pseudopodia becomes essentially different ; the lustre of the dogmas respecting the sarcode-theory is very soon lost, and the heresy then becomes clear and unmistakeable. In order, however, to avoid being misled by the deceptive image, it 1s necessary in this, as in other cases, to take up the microscopic analysis of the individual filaments, and at first to disregard as much as possible their proteus-like complicated mass. According to my observations upon the nature of the individual filaments, the following statements may be made :— The pseudopodia, which, when fully extended, measure six or eight times the greatest diameter of the body, form at their free extremities (where they may with the greatest certainty be found simple and single), extraordinarily fine filaments, even under the highest powers of the microscope. To give some notion of their fineness the observation will suffice, that a perceptible thicken- ing scarcely appears when two or three filaments come together and apparently fuse mto one, or when the magnifying power of the instrument is raised from 450 to 700 diameters. For the same reason nothing definite can be said as to whether they are, as they appear to be, perfectly cylindrical or more or less flat- tened. They appear to be everywhere of uniform thickness. Apparent or real local thickenings occur in consequence of move- ments of contraction, to which I must revert hereafter; I must likewise defer the discussion of the question whether, besides decidedly simple filaments, branched ones occur, issuing from the former by movements of contraction. The individual ex- tended filaments consist of an apparently colourless, transparent, hyaline substance, which at the extreme ends, where they may most readily be observed singly, possesses an index of refraction differmg very little from that of the surrounding fluid (sea- 27% 404 Prof. Reichert on the Phenomena of Motion water) ; it is only with the greatest effort and the most favour- able light that the extreme ends of the filaments can be traced. Where many pseudopodia lie together, the outlines become sharper and at the same time darker, and, in the animals ex- amined by me, a yellowish coloration makes its appearance. If we leave out of consideration the apparent granules occurring in the so-called granular movement, no globules or corpuscles of measurable size were detected at any time or in any place in or on the pseudopodia. Thicker bundles, engaged either in expan- sion or contraction, have usually a finely granulated appearance. It cannct, however, be ascertained by direct observation whether this is produced by fine wrinklings and inequalities of the sur- face, or by fine granules imbedded in the apparently hyaline mass. In the lamelle and structures like swimming membranes formed by the apparent coalescence of the filaments, a granular habitus is also not unfrequently visible. These granules, how- ever, belong either to the so-called granular movement, or it still remains uncertain whether we have to do with a true granule or with a portion of the filament only altered in its form, and resembling a granule. As the granular marking is always lost immediately when the filaments lie quietly in the extended state, or the granular plates and lamelle again break up into quiescent extended filaments, it must be inferred that the granular marking is only apparent, and produced by altera- tions of form in the hyaline filaments. As regards the important question of the state of cohesion and consistence of the substance of the pseudopodia, direct ex- periments for the solution of this cannot be instituted. We are therefore compelled to draw conclusions upon the above-men- tioned physical property from the behaviour of the filaments during active and passive movements, and during their approxi- mation and separation. Here, in the first place, the fact must be proved that, however the filaments may change their form, bend, twist, apparently coalesce, and again separate, their ori- ginal form is finally preserved under all civcumstances, and under- goes no change. From this it follows that their substance can- not be fluid. Moreover, if we will not blindly trust in the dogmas of the various primordial-slime theories, adopt the erroneous theory of the so-called granular movement, and accept the ap- parent coalescence of the filaments as a real one without further examination, we shall be compelled, in the presence of the facts adduced, to declare the comparison with fluid wax or with a mucus of similar consistence to be quite untenable. But, from the behaviour of the filaments during changes of their form by active and passive movements, it may with certainty be inferred that their substance must be extraordinarily soft and flexible. I in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda. 405 may here indicate especially that the quiescent filaments allow themselves to be readily curved into any form by others which are moving, and then remain in this form until they are brought out of it by their own movements or those of other filaments. During the mutual displacements of the filaments, and the mu- tual approximation thereby often produced, another remarkable property shows itself,—namely, their ready adhesion to each other. In consequence of this ready adhesion, it happens that the filaments very commonly issue from the shell in larger or smaller bundles, and only subsequently separate. It is also frequently observed that a filament which has, in consequence of its own movement, got under others and then become quies- cent, clings to other moving filaments during their passage, and is carried forward passively with them, not unfrequently like an anastomosis between them. Phenomena of active Movement in the individual Pseudopodia of the Polythalamia. To the phenomena of active movement in the pseudopodia of the Polythalamia I refer— 1. The issuing of the filaments from the shell, their extension and retraction. If the filamentous pseudopodia, which are originally mor- phologically simple,-could actually become converted into branched forms, and the latter again revert to the original form, this change of form must also have belonged to the category of active movements ; but these changes of form, as I shall afterwards prove, are either only apparent or not capable of being established with certainty. 2. A tortuous or vermiform movement, usually somewhat slug- gish, of the more or less extended filament, either throughout its whole length or in some section of it. 3. The phenomenon described under the name of “ granular movement.” 4, A mutual displacement of the filaments, often occurring im- perceptibly, by their closer approximation or removal to a greater distance, or also by their separation from a bundle in the general radiary complex, under circumstances which do not allow the detection of the active movements of other fila- ments as co-operating causes. To the changes in the arrange- ment and form of the total radiary complex of filaments I would not refer more particularly. In these changes, both active movements of the filaments and passive ones caused by their ready adhesion to each other, participate ; and it is often quite impossible to calculate exactly the part taken by each kind of 406 Prof. Reichert on the Phenomena of Motion movement. Nevertheless other observers, especially J. Miiller, have indicated the imperceptible mutual displacement of the filaments as a phenomenon of active movement ; and the fact must be admitted that such displacements of the filaments do occur, in which neither the other active movements of the filaments themselves nor any causes of motion in the sur- rounding fluid are perceptible. It is exceedingly probable that the causes lie in active movements which occur concealed within the sheli at the base of the filaments. It will be sufficient to indicate preliminarily that the pheno- mena of movement referred to, and indeed, as will immediately appear, also the so-called granular movement, are only to be regarded as the visible effects of those changes in the substance of the filaments which are produced by the so-called contrac- tility. Of these changes in the material no trace can be detected by the microscope either here, under apparently very favourable circumstances, or in any other contractile substances; we find ourselves rather only in a position to infer the existence of those invisible movements which occur in the contractile substance itself from the effects produced by them (which become an ex- pression visible to us) in the change of form of contractile struc- tures or in changes of the relative positions of the organs par- ticipating in them. The supporters of the sarcode-theory have certainly gone a step further by the manner in which they con- ceived the granular movement. To them the apparent granule is a portion of body-substance containing globules, which flows out of the shell ito the extended filament, and again flows back, thus elongating and shortening the filament, or causing the ap- pearance of lamelle and islands in the radiary complex of fila- ments by the local accumulation of sarecode. In sarcode, there- fore, we should succeed in seeing what has hitherto been denied to us in other contractile structures. Contraction would thus consist in a movement of the mass of the contractile substance, in a transfer of it from one place to another far distant, and the changes of form in contractile structures occur as a consequence of this. In this way it becomes intelligible how the notion could arise of identifying the currents of fluid in cells with the currents of contraction in the pseudopodia. As it may be de- monstrated that the granular movement is not produced by the flowing to and fro of portions of the body-substance of the Polythalamia containing globules, I am saved the trouble of entering more particularly into the further consequences of this conception of the contractile movements of the supposed fluid sarcode and its application to other contractile structures. in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda. 4.07 The so-called Granular Movement. With regard to the appearances hitherto known under which the granular movement occurs, I must here give the following indications. Dujardin speaks only of an ebb and flow of body- substance containing globules, in consequence of which the filaments appear uneven and granular. Max Schultze, however, represents the ebbing and flowing mass as advancing partly in, but especially on, the filaments as an apparent granule which contains the larger globules. J. Miiller mdicates that an inter- nal granular movement, like that in the rays of Actinophrys, does not occur in the pseudopodia—that here the granular movement rather resembles a granule advancing on the surface of the filament; and he adds the observation that mucous globules and foreign bodies are also moved to and fro by the granules. In his memoir (p. 7) we also find the following re- markable passage :—‘‘ Not unfrequently the filaments are seen to be thickened or swelled here and there, and this elongated swelling (little knot) is seen to advance upon the rays like the granules, which may be referred either to a progressive contrac- tion or to elongation and shortening, but is perhaps connected with the granular current.”” These words are only thrown out doubtfully, and are not again referred to on other occasions when the movements of the pseudopodia are spoken of; never- theless they contain an observation which, by further investiga- tion of the phenomena, must have led J. Miller to the same conception of the granular movement as that which I have arrived at by my investigations. The animal in which I first observed the granular movements exhibited them only on particular filaments, and there were even moments in which the visible extended pseudopodia were quite quiescent. The granular movement appeared to be, as described by Max Schultze and J. Miiller, an apparent grain or granule moving to and fro on the surface of the filament. I must add, however, that the movement of the granule was not uniform, but that it appeared to jump forward over the surface, or, at least, showed a tremulous movement. But it struck me as very remarkable that, notwithstanding numerous supposed affluxes of granules, and although it is common enough to see that the quiescent granule at the extremity of the filaments does not return, not a single perceptible quiescent globule could be detected in the entire field of vision, either in the surrounding fluid or in or on the substance of the rays themselves. And yet the sarcode-substance flowing out of the body to the rays should contain globules, and the larger globules should not only effect the protrusion of the flowing mass above the level of the fila- 408 Prof. Reichert on the Phenomena of Motion ment, but also cause the optical expression of the granular movement. Therefore body-substance with globules could not have flowed to the rays: the fallacy was evident. The question now was to trace accurately the apparent grain, the true form of which could not be judged of during motion, at the moment of its formation and disappearance. For this there are plenty of opportunities. The shell certainly prevents the observation of many granules ; we cannot say how the appa- rent granules are produced and lose themselves there ; but we cannot assert that they there flow out of or mto the substance of the body of the animal. With some attention, however, it is very soon discovered that both the centripetal and centrifugal movement of the granule may commence and terminate at any part of the extended filaments outside the shell. Here the fol- lowing observations may be made during the appearance of the granule, which has hitherto been considered only in motion. On any spot of the hyaline extended filament, there appears sud- denly an apparent thickening of fusiform outline, of somewhat yellowish colour and dark contour; the apices of the spindle lose themselves quite imperceptibly in the neighbouring parts of the filament which have remained unaltered. Soon after- wards it appears as if the spindle became shorter, but thicker and darker in the middle, where it projects more beyond the level of the filament ; finally, the extremities of the apparently fusiform thickening disappear from the view, and the elevated central part jumps along upon the surface of the filament in the likeness of a granule. On the cessation of the movement, the granule disappears in exactly the same manner, but in a reversed order. Any one who has traced the gradual production and cessation of the granular movement will assuredly ¢ give up the notion of a truly flowing substance in the pseudopodia—a notion which has been derived from an erroneous transference of the phenomena of contraction visible in the Amebe to the pseudopodia of the Polythalamia. In these we have evidently extended contractile organs of the Polythalamion, in which no cavity and no true granule, either in or upon it, is to be detected ; and the pheno- mena described in connexion with the granular movement there- fore require that the latter, as already hinted at by J. Miiller, should be interpreted as a phenomenon of contraction. Our knowledge of visible phenomena of contraction is limited, as already mentioned, to the changes of form occurring in the con- tractile organs in consequence of invisible movements in the contractile substance itself; and even in this respect the scanty observations upon their structure and texture still leave much to be desired. In the present case, only the contraction-wave in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda. 409 which occurs and advances upon the filiform contractile organ, in the form either of a local thickening or of a local curvature and loop-formation, can be referred to. The first question is, whether the described microscopic ap- pearances suit with the assumption that the contraction-wave is caused by local thickening of the filament suddenly occurring at any point and then advancing further: the apparent granule in the so-called granular movement would then have to be re- garded as the thickened point. From a deficiency of observa- tions, nothing can be said as to whether the apparent fusiform thickening of the filament must necessarily precede the forma- tion of a knot-like or grain-like swelling and agrees with the preliminary assumption in regard to the contraction-wave. But it may be affirmed that an advancing knot-like thickening of the filament could not produce the microscopic appearance actually seen—as if a granule advanced by jerks upon the surface. Nor could the microscopical picture be produced even if the local swelling of the filament on all sides were of considerable eleva- tion, forming, as in the case of Astasia flavicans observed by Ehrenberg, a circular disk, through the central poimt of which the unchanged portion of the filament seemed to pass; for, during the progress of such a swelling, the microscopic appear- ance would be as if a ring were drawn along the filament. There is only one case in which, in my opinion, the contraction- wave in the form of an advancing local thickening could corre- spond with the microscopic appearances described: the thicken- ing must occur on one side, and in the form of a clubbed pro- cess or appendage of the pseudopodium ; the club-shaped end would then, as it advanced along the pseudopodium, be espe- cially visible and indeed as an apparent grain, seeming to move along on the surface of the filament. No such contraction-form has, however, hitherto been observed ; and its assumption seems to me rather bold. On the contrary, the granular movement seems to be easily intelligible, and at the same time in perfect accordance with other contraction-forms, both in its occurrence and disappear- ance and in its progress, if we imagine that the contraction-wave is formed by a loop advancing along the filament, produced in consequence of contractile movements of the substance invisible to us. With this supposition the microscopic appearances during the production and, in reversed order, during the cessa- tion of the granular movement especially correspond ; the loop, when just rising, will be seen at first as an elongated swelling, afterwards becoming thicker in the middle, and projecting be- yond the level of the filament. The elevated loop will also, in consequence of the refraction of the vertex of the curve, present 410 Prof. Reichert on the Phenomena of Motion exactly the appearance of a granule, or roundish or oval corpus- cle, lying upon the filament, as is very frequently the case in transverse folds of smooth muscular fibres. Thus it is clear that the loop, when in motion, must appear as a granule progressing on the surface of the filament, and, lastly, that it must present the microscopic image of a jerking granule, as it may be pre- supposed that the loop, in its continual new formation and dis- appearance, will not always retain the same elevation, and this will cause the appearance of a vacillation of the vertex of the curve or of the apparent granule. On the apparent Amalgamation and Coalescence of the Pseudopodia. Of the phenomena which, it was supposed, justified the con- clusion that two pseudopodia of the Polythalamia coalesced on touching, the granular movement has already been discussed and its validity disproved. The other evidence adduced may be referred, lst, to the absence of visible lines of separation during the immediate contact of two actually or apparently simple pseu- dopodia ; and 2nd, to the variability of the configuration of the entire extended radiating complex of filaments under appearances which it was supposed were only possible by an actual coalescence of the filaments. This must be seen, says Dujardin, to remove all doubt that we have to do with a fluid substance, with a true coalescence of the contractile organs. In order to estimate correctly the value of this evidence and obtain an unprejudiced notion of the changes of form in the whole system of filaments, the behaviour of two (in most cases only apparently) simple pseudopodia must be studied under different circumstances. ‘Two such filaments lying beside each other longitudinally, or crossing each from any cause, exhibit no line of separation at their point of contact: this is what is directly observed. Does it follow from this that the parts in contact have coalesced ? Certainly not. Every microscopist is aware that under certain circumstances two decidedly solid parts, such as cells or fibres, may lie together so that the line of sepa- ration is not perceived. Some time since, I observed innumerable Amebe enclosed in an egg-membrane of Tichogonia. Some of them, when flattened, came close together, and at this moment all visible line of separation was wanting ; afterwards their bodies became cylindrical, and then a line of separation made its appear- ance at their point of contact. Is it at all remarkable that the line of separation between two contiguous pseudopodia is not seen, when their outlines are so faintly marked, and they possess an index of refraction differing so little from that of water ? The following observations may be made upon two filaments in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda. 411 applied to each other entirely or partially in the direction of their length. The united filaments, except when very thick bundles come together, do not appear thicker than the separate ones; if one of the filaments be shorter than the other, the point at which it terminates is not perceived. From this it follows, as already observed, that we can never say with certainty that any filament is simple. Further, the united fila- ments, im consequence of active movement in one or both of them, may separate again partly or entirely. By this means an orifice may occur in the united filaments, which closes again ina state of repose ; or only the apex of one filament separates from the other, and the united, apparently simple, filament then possesses a branch, and appears branched. My attention having been attracted to this, I could not but ask myself the question, whether the ramifications are not throughout only apparent. From my investigations, this question must be answered in the affirmative. I have met with no case of ramification which could not have been explained in the most natural manner by the protrusion of the extremities of filaments from an apparently simple pseudopodium ; nay, the usually sudden shooting forth of such branches is not in favour of their production being effected by movements of contraction. In two filaments crossing each other at an acute angle, an appearance is observable upon which, asa proof of the coalescence of the pseudopodia, great stress has been laid, especially by Dujardin ; the angle is very frequently seen to be occupied by a web-like structure. When the angle is very acute, and the ap- pearance not much diffused, the suspicion that there is some optical illusion cannot be altogether got rid of; in other cases it is seen quite distinctly that the angle formed by the two fila- ments is occupied by a hyaline or generally finely granular sub- stance. The comparison with a swimming membrane is, however, not quite suitable; for no filament is to be distinguished on the margins or in the region of the apparently membranous struc- ture. From the microscopic appearance, it might equally well be said to be atriangular plate from the angles of which fila- ments issue. I will not deny that such a web-like structure may be pro- duced by the overflow of the mass of two fluid filaments ap- proaching each other at an acute angle. But in the present case, taking into consideration our previous knowledge of the morphological conditions of the organization of animals, in order to show that they make their appearance by such a mode of pro- duction it must first of all be proved that the filaments consist of a fluid substance ; or, if the web-like plate itself is to serve as evidence of the fluid consistence of the pseudopodia, it would 412 Prof. Reichert on the Phenomena of Motion have to be shown that their production can be imagined only by truly fluid substances, and not by means of semisolid filaments of the nature described by me. In vain we seek, in the works of Dujardin, Max Schultze, and other adherents of the sarcode-theory, for any such scientific treatment of the problem before them. The granular move- ment is at once explained as the optical expression of the ebbing and flowing body-substance ; there is no hesitation about infer- ring from the uniting of the filaments into bundles, without lines of separation, that they coalesce ; and when once the notion of the slimy consistence of the sarcode was entertained, the forma- tion of the apparently membranous plates only furnished a fresh proof of the preconceived opinion. The confusion of the observers is so great that it never seems to have been thought worth while to notice the behaviour of the apparently membranous plates during their disappearance, or the movements of tke pseudo- podia, and thus to raise the question whether the appearances here seen could be brought imto accordance with the view set up. Thus, the plate supposed to be fluid and formed by a fresh accession of body-substance disappears without a trace of re- siduum on the separation of the united filaments; nay, further, the two crossed filaments are seen to be pushed continually to and fro, still retaming their original form, with as much facility as if there existed no such membrane, i. e. a spot in their course at which the filamentous structure ceases and in its place a fluid plate is introduced. On the other hand, in the apparently membranous plates, phe- nomena are observed from which, according to the above state- ments regarding the granular movement, we must necessarily infer the presence of filaments in the plates, and consequently the composition of the latter out of filaments. It is well known that the granular movement is perceptible in the apparently membranous plates. The apparent granules are seen to pass from the proximal end of the filament in more or less curved lines through the plates to the peripheral end of the same fila- ment, or vice versd ; the granule is also seen to run in a straight or curved line from one filament to the other. And it is further observed that, during the separation of the two contiguous fila- ments from the webs which as it were distort them, filaments quite distinctly separate and become free. I remember one case in which a filament even separated from the free margin of the membrane, subsequently presented itself as a branch of one of the filaments, and finally became perfectly free as a third fila- ment. Hence we may, or rather must, conceive that the appa- rently membranous webs and plates are produced in this way : in the pseudopodia, or rather bundles of pseudopodia, which ap- in the Pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda. 413 proach each other and cross at an acute angle, some of the fila- ments are moved out of their place, and pushed together into the angle so as to form an apparent plate. The extraordinary flexibility of these filaments, and their great tendency to adhere to each other, are properties which evidently assist in the forma- tion of such membranes and plates. It is evident that the conditions for the displacement of the simple filaments contained in two approximated pseudopodia so as apparently to form membranous plates are not limited to the crossing of such pseudopodia under an acute angle: two bundles of pseudopodia merely touching each other with the vertices of their curves, and then again separating a little, will also give rise to the appearance of seemingly membranous plates; and a case has even occurred to me in which an apparently membranous bridge-like union was formed at the spot where the separation of two pseudopodia issuing from one bundle had not quite been completed. After these explanations, I believe there will not be the least difficulty in the comprehension of the multifarious changes of form in the whole radiary complex of pseudopodia, in which, by local contraction in any section, however small, of each filament, innumerable moving particles may be represented. When the animal extends its pseudopodia, the more simple radiate arrange- ment predominates ; soon afterwards the apparent ramifications commence, and become constantly more numerous. The branches, after issuing or being set free, easily reach neighbouring filaments, apply themselves to these, and then appear as anastomoses. By the multiplication of such apparent anastomoses, those reticulated figures are produced which are known under the name of the sarcode-net. At the same time, when the conditions are favour- able, numerous membrane-like structures and bridge-like unions between the filaments become visible. These are more widely stretched the more numerous the filaments or the thicker the bundles which touch each other at the part implicated, and, by the imperceptible displacement of the finer filaments contained in them, furnish a more abundant material for the formation of the apparently membranous plates. The causes of the altera- tions of form in the general radiary system of the pseudopodia are to be sought chiefly in their movements, either active or passive—i. e. produced by the ready adhesion of the filaments to each other; by these are effected the displacements of the innu- merable particles in the general radiary system, which are often imperceptible, and limited to the very smallest space. Favour- able conditions for the multiplicity of forms, and for their ready and often imperceptible change, are also furnished by the extra- ordinary number of the filaments and their ready flexibility. 414 Mr. W. H. Benson on a singular Shell from South India, Finally, the appearance produced by these readily moveable and extraordinarily flexible parts in the protean system of filaments, as if a moving fluid substance assumed any form, or spread and poured itself into any shape, is an illusion which is set up especially by the circumstance that individual minute parts which are readily displaceable throughout can never be distinguished at their points of contact. XLIII.—Description of a singular Shell from Southern India, allied to Tanalia; with Remarks on a Travancore Batissa, and on the Himalayan Form Tricula. By W. H. Benson, Esq. Tanalia(?) Stomatodon, Bens., n. sp. T. testa ovato-globosa, solida, leeviuscula (juniorum polita), striis spiralibus obsoletis induta, olivaceo-nigrescente ; spira brevi erosa, sutura impressa; anfractibus 3 superstitibus, superioribus con- vexiusculis, ultimo convexo ; apertura ovato-acuta, albida, intus demum angustiore, sinuata; peristomate integro, margine dextro basalique acuto, columellari late calloso, infra latiore, subito intus truncato, dente prominente crasso munito. Axis 14, lat. 12 mill. Habitat in aquis dulcibus montium prope Cottyam, regionis Travan- coriz. Invenit D. Kohlhoff. This very interesting shell was sent to me by pase Charles Annesley Benson, at whose request the discoverer —= had kindly searched the Travancore Hills behind Trevandrum for land and freshwater shells. Among the former was a specimen of Helix Basileus, Bens., larger than the type-specimen described in the — qanatiay?) Annals of Natural History for February 1861. pare The form now made known is a very distinct species of the Paludomoid type; and should it prove to be a Tanalia, as sur- mised by Mr. H. F. Blanford, who has carefully studied the family, it will stand as the first of the genus which has occurred out of Ceylon. Unfortunately, all the specimens were deficient in the operculum, which, when examined, may possibly authorize its transfer to a new genus, in which case the specific name may fairly be employed to designate it. In my remarks on Clea Annesleyi, from Quilon, in the Ann. Nat. Hist. for October 1860, I observed that, notwithstanding the basal emargination, Clea, with reference to its unguiculate operculum, would proba. bly be found to have nearer relations with the Cingalese genus Tanalia than with Melania and its congeners. Stomatodon seems partly to supply one of the absent links, inasmuch as its oper- culum must necessarily be provided with a basal projection, and on a Travancore Batissa and Himalayan Tricula. 415 while its construction is also likely to be unguiculate. There is some resemblance in this shell to Nerztina, for which genus a specimen might, on a cursory glance, be taken. The upper part of the columellar callosity exhibits in some specimens a blackish- brown tint, and a patch of the same colour may occasionally be observed at the base, in the interior of the aperture, the throat of which is tinged with violet and purple and presents a minutely corrugate surface. Since the publication of Corbicula Quilonica, Bens., in the Ann. Nat. Hist. for October 1860, where it was described from young specimens, I have received from Capt. C. A. Benson a single large and solid example, found at the same place. It belongs to Gray’s Batissa, a genus intermediate between Cordi- cula and Cyrena. The shortness of the serrulate lateral teeth was recorded in the Latin characters, and alluded to, as well as their comparative brevity on the anterior side, in the subsequent remarks as worthy of notice. The continent of India had not previously furnished any examples of Batissa, of which some fine species inhabit the Eastern Archipelago. The following are the dimensions of the adult shell : — Long. 21, lat. 34, diam. 15 mill. In the original description of the young, the breadth was by mistake stated as 10 instead of 8 mill., and the length as 8 mill. instead of 10. I am informed that the conchological writer, M. Brot, has, in his Catalogue of Melaniadz (a copy of which has not yet come under my inspection), referred my minute Melaniadous Tricula, from the Himalaya, to the genus Paludina. M. Brot can scarcely have examined the subspiral operculum of the shell, or consulted the original description published in M‘Clelland’s ‘Calcutta Journal of Natural History’ for 1842; otherwise he would not have overlooked the differences presented by such an operculum from the concentric laminations of that of Paludina, the animal of which differs altogether from that of the mountain form, which nearly approaches that of Melania; while the shell of Tricula bears the same relation to Melania as that observable in the Egyptian and Syrian Paludomus bulimoides, Olivier, when compared with the more Eastern forms of the genus. Tricula occurred at an altitude of 4000 feet. It may now possi- bly inhabit the plains, as I placed living specimens in a pond at Moradabad. I add an extract from the paper in the Calcutta Journal :-— “Subgenus Tricuna. «Teste spira elongatiuscula ; apertura obliqua, ovata, integra, su- 416 Rev. W. Houghton on the Unicorn of the Ancients. perne angulata ; peristomate continuo, subreflexo ; anfractu ulti- mo subumbilicato. “Animal Melanie simile, proboscide elongata, antice emarginata; tentaculis filiformibus duobus oculos postice prope basin geren- tibus ; pede mediocri ovato, antice subquadrato. Operculo corneo subspirali. “ T. montana. «« T. testa olivacea, ovato-conica; anfractibus sex, rotundatis, suturis impressis ; apertura intus albida; peristomate nigrescente; apice obtuso, plerumque decollato. “Hab. in rivo, apud lacum Kemaonensem Bhimtal dictum. “This little shell I first found adhering to the prone surface of a leaf of Potamogeton, in a clear and weedy stream running through a marsh at the head of Bheemtal and supplying that lake ; and subsequently Dr. Bacon and myself found it abun- dantly on the stems of a water Iris which we drew up by the roots from the bed of the stream for examination.” I further remarked that it exhibited a tendency towards Pa- ludina in form and in the continuity and incrassation of the peristome. Cheltenham, Nov. 12, 1862. XLIV.—On the Unicorn of the Ancients. By the Rev. W. Hoveuton, M.A., F.LS. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. GENTLEMEN, I hasten to correct a serious error which I committed in my paper ‘On the Unicorn of the Ancients,” published in the last Number of your Magazine. I there stated (p. 369) that “the animal which Mr. Ruppell was told by a native existed in Africa, and which had a long straight horn growing from its forehead (?), was doubtless a Rhinoceros.” I grounded this somewhat hasty conclusion on a short paragraph that appeared in the twentieth volume of the ‘ Asiatic Journal’ (July 1825), published the year before Riippell’s ‘Atlas zu der Reise im nérdlichen Africa.’ I have since referred to this work, in which, at pt. i. p. 29, Mr. Riippell has made some observations on the Unicorn, which, under the name of Nidlekma, is known to the natives of Kordofan. “The accounts which I obtained,” this traveller remarks (p. 30), “from persons of the greatest respectability concerning the Nillekma all perfectly agreed,—to wit, the animal’s hide was of a reddish colour, its size that of a pony, its form slender like the Antelope’s; the male had a long straight horn upon its brow, which was wanting in the female. Some added that it Mr, A. Adams on the Animal and Float of Yanthina. 417 has cloven hoofs, others said the hoof was entire. It inhabits, according to report, the desert lying south of Kordofan, and is remarkably swift.” From this it is quite clear that this supposed animal is some- thing very different from any species of Rhinoceros. I ought, therefore, perhaps to modify my assertion when I boldly denied the existence of any such animal, seeing that so distinguished a naturalist as Edward Riippell was inclined to believe in it. But even if future investigations should result in the discovery of such an animal as that described above (which, to say the least, is in the highest degree improbable), it is certain that it can have nothing to do with the two-horned R’ém of the Bible, nor, as it seems to me, with any of the one-horned animals mentioned in the writings of the ancient Greeks and Romans. The au- thority for the existence of the animal rests entirely upon the assertions of natives, whose veracity is not often to be depended upon. I remember being told by a traveller in Palestine that it is perfectly useless to attempt to obtain reliable information from the Arabs of that country. They will tell a traveller almost anything that comes into their heads, no matter how improbable it may be,—though in the question at issue it is but fair to state that Mr. Riippell was perfectly satisfied with the accuracy of the information he had received from his native servant on questions relating to animals, With regard to the zoological objection to the possibility of the existence of an animal with a single horn on the middle of the forehead (viz. that no horn can grow upon a suture), Mr. Riippell replies by instancing the case of the Giraffe, the male of which, he states, is possessed of a third horn, placed on the very centre of the frontal suture. This fact, though denied by Prof. Owen, was maintained by Cuvier, and has lately been insisted upen by Dr. Cobbold. I remain, Gentlemen, Very truly yours, Preston Rectory, Nov. 3, 1862. W. HouvcutTon. XLV.—On the Animal and Float of lanthina. By Artuur Apams, F.L.S. &e. In the North Atlantic Ocean, about four hundred miles from the Azores, I obtained a considerable number of lively Ianthinas ; and I believe there are one or two points of interest in the his- tory of this beautiful Mollusk which deserve mention, as they seem to have escaped the notice of previous observers. I will first of all consider the animal, and then the float by means of which it is supported at the surface of the water. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 28 418 Mr. A. Adams on the Animal and Float of Tanthina. The animal is entirely blind. I sought in vain for eyes, both at the base and apex of the longer, external, pointed tentacle, and likewise at the truncated apex of the inner and shorter ten- tacular process. No trace of eyes was visible, although an acci- » dental dark round spot of pigment may have been mistaken for those organs. The head is proboscidiform, and the muzzle is contractile only. The muzzle is susceptible of considerable inflation; and the apices of the large horny mandibles and the rounded extremity of the tongue, armed with its formidable array of sharp, curved, slender teeth, are observed protruding from the extremity when the animal is engaged in exploring for food, Although doubtless the chief food of the Janthina consists of Physalia, Porpite, and Velella, which are usually seen floatmg in its society, on the surface, in calm weather, yet an occasional Barnacle does not seem to come amiss to the blind Snail of the ocean. From the stomachs of several I extracted fragments of the tufted feet of Lepas, and in one which I examined the Lepas- remains occupied the entire length of the cesophagus. On each side of the broad short tongue, or lingual membrane, are two large horny jaws, which, when rempved, present an elongate-quadrate form. They are convex externally, very thin, and quite pellucid; the inner free edge is straight and slightly thickened, the outer attached edge is membranaceous and convex. The anterior lower angle is the pointed apex of the jaw, from which proceed radiating striz and grooves, curving upwards and outwards at the anterior upper angle, and becoming nearly straight as they approach the straight inner margin. The mantle, on the left side, has a distinct siphonal fold cor- responding with the angle formed by the union of the mner and outer lips of the shell. The bar-like gills are placed far back under the arched cavity of the shell, in a diagonal direction, and in none of my specimens do they exhibit the appearance of an extruded tuft, as represented in some figures of the animal. The sides of the foot are furnished with a lateral membrane (without fringes, furbelows, or filaments) which, in lively indivi- duals, is reflexed on the right side on the penultimate whorl of the shell. Anteriorly, this membrane terminates in a simple angular lobe, and posteriorly forms a truncate vertical margin. The foot is narrow, elongated, rounded in front, tapering behind, and not circular and contracted as shown in some figures taken from animals in spirits. The under surface of the foot, like the under surface of the shell, is of a deeper violet-colour than the upper portions ; for these are the parts exposed to the hght, the under surface both of animal and shell becoming the upper in the usual position of the living animal. The animal always Mr. A. Adams on the Animal and Float of Tanthina. 419 floats shell downwards, with the vesicular buoy above it directed backwards. The anterior part of the foot is mobile, free, rounded, and dilated, and the sides are usually folded inwards, forming a shallow cup, which embraces the smooth anterior rounded end of the float. When the animal wishes to bring its head to the surface of the water, this part of the foot is made to glide over the back of the float. Thus the animal can raise and lower itself at pleasure by means of its own float. The violet liquid which is ejected in considerable quantities when the animal is irritated is at first equably diffused, but shortly sinks to the bottom in the form of a deposit, leaving the water pellucid. The bag or reservoir containing the colouring- fluid is visible through the skin on the back of the neck, and the fluid is poured direct into the branchial cavity, and makes its escape from under the free edge of the mantle. My dyemg operations with this purple fluid were not crowned with success, the beautiful colour fading gradually away, leaving “ magenta” and “mauve” yet possessors of the field. The float is attached to the under surface of the caudal end of the foot, where what appear to be the muciparous follicles give it a striated appearance. In this species, which is J. violacea, the float is quite colourless; but in J. evigua it is of a faint pinkish tinge, and in that of I. globosa it is frequently of a pale delicate lilac. In Recluzia Bensoni, A. Ad., which has a pale yellow shell, the float is of a light straw-colour. None of the floats of my specimens had ova affixed to them; but the surface of many of the shells was studded with the young of Lepades, which appeared to me to have been described as a genus of Entomostracans, under the name of Evadne. When the animal is weakly or dead, the float readily becomes detached, for there is no organic connexion between it and the foot. The mucous film of which it is composed appears to be of the same nature as that glutinous fluid emitted by Litiopa and Alaba, but which, in these genera, instead of forming vesi- cles containing air, is spun out into filmy threads, which, how- ever, are sufficiently buoyant to support the animals. The vesi- cles are probably formed in the same manner as the frothy spume of the little green Homopterous larva which is seen on bushes in the spring, and which, in Hampshire, usually goes by the name of ‘‘ Cuckoo-spit.” When a portion is cut off, the float is enlarged at the end next the foot of the animal, and is not regenerated at the excised part. The float is often seen lacerated by the teeth of fishes ; and hundreds of detached floats are observed in the water. With a pair of sharp-pointed scissors I made incisions into the floats, and allowed the air to escape, when the animals gradually 28% 420 Mr. A. Adams on the Animai and Ajjinities of Scaliola. descended, and remained helpless at the bottom of the vessel : the floats were not regenerated or renewed during the period the animals remained alive. Crepitating portions, when sepa- rated, continue buoyant until the vesicles of which they are composed gradually collapse from the escape of the air with which they are distended; and the floats, when pounded in a mortar, are readily reduced to a mucus. XLVI.—On the Animal and Affinities of Scaliola, a Genus of Mollusca from Japan. By Axtuur Apams, F.L.S. &e. In the ‘ Annals’ for 1860 (vol. vi. p. 120), I gave, under the name of Scaliola, a short description of what I then believed to be a new subgenus of Scala. Sinee then, however, I have discovered the Mollusk in a living state, and have ascertained, from an examination of the animal, that it is furnished with a rostri- form head, as in Rissoide, and not with a retractile proboscis as in Scalidee. In all the species I have met with mm Japan, its curious habit of agglutinating grains of sand to the surface of the shell is observable. In this peculiarity the genus resembles Onustus and Xenophora ; a species of Helicina likewise exhibits the same remarkable feature. In the original specimens from which I took my first description the foreign particles were worn off. Genus Scaxioia, A. Adams. An. capite proboseidiformi. Rostrum elongatum, cylindricum, annulatum. ‘Tentacula filiformia. Oculi prominentes, nigri, ad basin externam tentaculorum positi. Pes brevis, ovatus, postice subacuminatus. Operculum corneum, ovatum, subspirale ; nucleo subterminali. Testa turrita, umbilicata seu rimata; anfractibus agglutinantibus, arenaceis. Apertura plus minusve circularis, peritremate continuo ; margine recto, acuto. The species the animal of which I observed was S. bella, A. Ad. It occurred in considerable numbers at Takano-Sima, a small island near Tatiyama, on the coast of Niphon, im from two to three fathoms, on a bottom of sandy mud. The rostrum is long, large, annulate, bifid at the end, and of a pale yellow colour. The tentacles are small and filiform, with large black eyes at their outer bases. The head is elongated, with a dark median linear mark on the upper surface. The foot is short, ovate, semipellucid, with an opake white blotch on the side near the operculum. 1. Scaliola bella, A. Adams. S.testa pyramidato-turrita, late umbilicata, alba ; anfractibus arenaceis, Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders. 421 _ conyexis, suturis canaliculatis; anfractu ultimo soluto; apertura circulari. Hab. Takano-Sima; 24 fathoms. Tabu-Sima; 25 fathoms. ) 2. Scaliola arenosa, A. Adams. S. testa turrita, rimata; anfractibus convexis, arenosis, suturis pro- fundis ; anfractu ultimo ad peritrema contiguo; apertura vix cir- culari. Hab. O-Sima; Tanabe; Simoda. 3. Scaliola glareosa, A. Adams. S. testa graciliori, turrita, imperforata, alba; anfractibus convexis, arenosis, suturis impressis; anfractu ultimo ad peritrema consoli- dato; apertura ovata. Hab. Tsu-Sima; Takano-Sima. 4. Scaliola gracilis, A. Adams. S. testa turrita, gracili, alba, subarenosa ; anfractibus convexis, sub- nudis, suturis profundis; anfractu ultimo vix soluto; apertura subcirculari. Hab. Gotto; 71 fathoms. XLVII.—Descriptions of newly discovered Spiders captured in Rio Janeiro by John Gray, Esq., and the Rev. Hamlet Clark. By Joun Buackwatt, F.L.S. [Continued from p. 360.] Family THomisip&. Genus Tuomrisus, Walck. Thomisus gibbosus. Length of the female ,4ths of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ;4,; breadth ;5; breadth of the abdomen 4; length of an anterior leg 34; length of a leg of the third pair 4}. The eyes are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalo- thorax in two transverse curved rows, forming a crescent; the two anterior intermediate ones are the smallest ; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated on tubercles, and the anterior ones are the largest of the eight. The cephalothorax is short, broad, convex, slightly compressed before, rounded on the sides, abruptly sloped at the base and in front, where it 1s truncated; it is sparingly clothed with hairs, and has a yellowish-brown hue, with dark reddish-brown spots; the frontal margin, a transverse line be- tween the two rows of eyes, and another situated behind the posterior row, which is slightly angular with its vertex directed 4.22 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders backwards, have a yellowish-white tint; and a large, triangular, reddish-brown spot, on a yellowish-white ground, occurs on each side of the posterior slope. The falces are short, strong, conical, and vertical ; the maxillee are convex near the base, obliquely truncated at the extremity on the outer side, and slightly in- clined towards the lip, which is triangular and pointed at the apex ; and’ the sternum is heart-shaped. These parts are of a yellowish-brown colour, the maxille and sternum being the - palest. The legs are robust, provided with hairs and spines, and are of a yellowish-brown hue, with red-brown and yellowish- white spots; the first and second pairs, which are much longer than the third and fourth, are equal in length, and the third pair is the shortest; each tarsus is terminated by two curved pectinated claws. The palpi are short, and resemble the legs in colour. The abdomen is very gibbous on the upper part of the posterior region, and is much broader there than at the anterior extremity, which has the appearance of having been cut in a direct line across ; it is of a yellowish-grey colour, with numerous red-brown spots, and has several transverse red-brown and yel- lowish-white sinuous lines on its gibbosity ; the under part is of a yellowish-white hue, with minute brown spots, and a broad dull yellow band extends along the middle; the colour of the branchial opercula is yellowish-white, and that of the sexual organs reddish-brown. Genus Eripus, Walck. Eripus spinipes. Length of the female th of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ;4,; breadth ;1,; breadth of the abdomen }; length of an anterior leg 7; length of a leg of the third pair 4. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, abruptly sloped at the base, depressed, with two conical tuber- cles in front, placed transversely ; it is provided with numerous spines enlarged at the base, those on the sides being disposed for the most part in oblique rows forming slight ridges con- verging towards the centre, and those in the middle constituting three longitudinal rows; three spines are situated between the bases of the tubercles in front, and three others on the frontal margin, the six being directed forwards ; it is of a reddish-brown colour, the sides and a broad and somewhat raised band extend- ing along the middle being much the darkest. The falces are short, cuneiform, and vertical; the maxille are enlarged and rounded at the extremity, and inclined towards the lip, which is semicircular. These parts are of a reddish-brown colour, the extremity of the maxillz and lip having a yellowish tinge. The sternum is heart-shaped, thinly clothed with whitish hairs, and captured in Rio Janeiro. 423 has a yellowish-white colour, with brown spots on the lateral margins, opposite to the legs. The eyes are nearly equal in size, and are disposed on and about the cephalic tubercles ; two are situated in front below the tubercles, one in front of each tu- bercle near its middle, one on the side, and another behind, at the base of each; the two seated on the side of the tubercles are rather the smallest of the eight. The first and second pairs of legs are much longer and more powerful than the third and fourth pairs; all are provided with numerous strong spines en- larged at the base, those on the first and second pairs being much the largest; the colour of the first and second pairs is dark brown, tinged with red, with the exception of the tarsi and the sides and under part of the base of the metatarsi, which have a yellow-brown tint; the third and fourth pairs are of a brownish-yellow hue, with a few dark brown spots on the under side; each tarsus is terminated by two curved pectinated claws. The palpi are short, and resemble the legs in colour. The abdo- men is convex above, with whitish hairs and spines enlarged at their base distributed over its surface ; the anterior part, con- tiguous to the cephalothorax, has the appearance of having been cut in a direct line across; and in the middle region, which is broader than the extremities, three long, conical, pointed pro- cesses or tubercles are situated in a transverse row, the inter- mediate one being the largest ; it is of a dark brown colour, with a yellowish tinge in the medial line and at the base of the inter- mediate tubercle, and the point of each tubercle has a yellowish- white hue; the colour of the anterior region of the sides and of the under part is brownish-yellow ; the sexual organs have a small process connected with their anterior margin which is directed backwards, and are of a dark reddish-brown hue, that of the branchial opercula and spinners being yellow-brown. The collection of Brazilian spiders made by Messrs. Gray and Clark contained, besides this new and very interesting Hripus, two specimens of the Kripus heterogaster of Walckenaer, both of which were females. The males of E. spinipes and E. hetero- gaster, the only species of the genus at present known, have not yet been discovered. Genus Sparassus, Walck. Sparassus sylvaticus. Length of the male trd of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ¢; breadth +; breadth of the abdomen 3; length of an anterior leg 2; length of a leg of the third pair 7 The eyes are seated on black spots, and are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalothorax in two transverse rows ; the two intermediate ones of the anterior row, which is straight and 424, Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders situated immediately above the frontal margin, are the largest of the eight, and the posterior row, which is the longer, is slightly curved, with its convexity directed backwards. The cephalo- thorax is large, somewhat compressed before, greatly rounded on the sides, sparingly clothed with hairs, convex, glossy, and has a very slight longitudinal indentation in the medial line; the faleces are short, subconical, vertical, and armed with a few teeth on the inner surface; the maxille are straight, convex near the base, and rounded at the extremity ; the lip is quadrate; and the sternum is heart-shaped; the legs are robust, and pro- vided with hairs and sessile spines, a row of the latter occurring on each side of the under part of the tibize and metatarsi; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved minutely pectinated claws, below which a small scopula is situated. These parts are of a brownish-yellow colour, with the exception of the sternum, which has a yellowish-white hue. The palpi resemble the legs in colour, but the digital jomt has a dull brown spot near its extremity, and several streaks of the same hue on its convex surface ; the cubital and radial jomts are short, and the latter projects from its extremity in front a red-brown crescent- shaped apophysis, whose outer limb is the shorter; the digital joint is of a curved oblong-oval figure, and is deeply emarginated towards the extremity on the outer side; it is convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs; these organs are highly developed and complicated in structure, with a large prominent spiral process, which extends beyond the extremity of the joint, and has a long slender filament in con- nexion with it, and a prominent spine near its base towards the outer side; their colour is red-brown, tinged with yellow. The abdomen is oviform, convex above, pointed at the spinners, and clothed with short hairs; it is of a dull yellowish hue, with a series of reddish-brown angular lines, whose vertices are directed forwards, extending along the middle of the upper part, and diminishing in extent as they approach the spinners; from the extremities of the angular lines spots of the same colour extend in oblique rows to the sides, and a few obscure spots of a similar hue occur on the under part. Sparassus maculatus. Length of the female ;3,ths of an inch ; length of the cephalo- thorax 4; breadth 1; breadth of the abdomen ,4,; length of a 107, ‘ leg of the second pair +1; length of a leg of the third pair $4. The legs are long, and provided with hairs and fine sessile spines; the second pair is the longest, then the first, and the third pair is the shortest; each tarsus is terminated by two captured in Rio Janeiro. 425 curved, minutely pectinated claws, below which a small scopula is situated; and the palpi have a curved, slightly pectinated claw at their extremity ; the cephalothorax is compressed before, truncated in front, greatly rounded on the sides, convex, and glossy, with a narrow longitudinal indentation in the medial line; the falces are powerful, subconical, vertical, and armed with teeth on the inner surface; the maxillz are short, straight, convex near the base, and rounded at the extremity; and the sternum is heart-shaped. These parts are of a pale yellowish colour, the sternum beimg the palest. The hp is somewhat quadrate, rather broader than long, and has a brownish-black hue. The eyes are seated on black spots, and are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalothorax in two transverse straight rows; they are nearly equal in size, and those constitutmg the anterior row, which is the shorter, are situated immediately above the frontal margin. The abdomen is oviform, convex above, thinly clothed with hairs, and of a dull yellow-brown colour, with numerous minute yellowish-white spots, a broad space occupying the entire medial line of the under part, and a band extending from the anterior extremity of the upper part nearly half its length, being devoid of spots; to this band suc- ceeds a large oval space, comprising numerous yellowish-white spots which extend about two-thirds of its length along the middle, and two parallel reddish-brown spots near its extremity. This Sparassus, though the specimen described was immature, is a distinct and well-marked species. Family Drassipm. Genus Drassus, Walck. Drassus insignis. Length of the male 4 an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax 3 +; breadth +; breadth of the abdomen ;%,; length of a posterior leg 43 ; length of a leg of the third pair 3. The eyes are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalo- thorax in two transverse curved rows having their convexity directed backwards ; the posterior row is longer and more curved than the anterior row, which is situated near the frontal margin ; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated on a tubercle, but are separated by a moderate space, and the four intermediate ones nearly form a square, the two anterior ones being much the largest of the eight. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, convex, with a narrow longitudinal in- dentation in the medial line, and is densely clothed with short, yellowish-grey hairs; it is of a reddish-brown colour, the ante- rior part being much the darkest, and has narrow, brownish- 4.26 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders black lateral margins. The falces are powerful, conical, vertical, and armed with teeth on the inner surface; the maxille are strong, convex on the outer side, obliquely truncated at the ex- tremity on the inner side, and curved towards the lip, which is quadrate ; the sternum is heart-shaped and glossy, with small prominences on the sides opposite to the legs. These parts have a reddish-brown hue, the falces being the darkest, and the ster- num much the palest. The legs are long, robust, provided with hairs and sessile spines, and are of a yellowish-brown colour ; the fourth pair is the longest, then the first, and the third pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved minutely pectinated claws, below which there is a small scopula. The palpi have a red-brown hue, the radial and digital jomts bemg much the darkest ; the radial is larger than the cubital joint, and projects three apophyses from its extremity on the outer side; the superior one is slightly curved and pointed, the inter- mediate one is large and crescent-shaped, and the inferior one has a slender process near its termination, which is abruptly curved and pointed at its extremity; the digital joint is of an elongated-oval form, convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are moderately developed, not very complicated in structure, with a strong curved process at their extremity, which has a small prominent pointed process near its base, and are of a dark reddish-brown colour. The abdomen is oviform, convex above, hairy, with a large dull yellow band extending from its anterior extremity along the middle of the upper part, more than a third of its length; a large dark brown spot occurs in the middle of the posterior ex- tremity of this band, which is the broadest and trifid, and on each side of the intermediate prolongation, which is the narrowest and most elongated, there is a series of dark brown spots ; these spots converge, and become confluent above the spimners, where they form short transverse bars; the sides are spotted and streaked with dark brown, and the under part, spinners, and branchial opercula have a pale yellowish-brown hue, the last being the palest. After the description of this species was made, an adult male was received from Mr. Eyton Williams, who captured it in Pernambuco. Genus Crusrona, Latr. Clubiona subflava. Length of the female ;3,ths of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax 1; breadth *,; breadth of the abdomen 4; length of an anterior leg 3; length of a leg of the third pair ;%.. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, captured in Rio Janeiro. 427 depressed and truncated in front, sparingly clothed with short hairs, convex, glossy, and has a slight longitudinal indentation in the medial line; the falces are long, powerful, subconical, vertical, and armed with a few small teeth on the inner surface ; the maxille are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the ex- tremity; the lip, which is longer than broad, is truncated and somewhat hollowed at the apex; and the sternum is heart- shaped, with small prominences on the sides, opposite to the legs; the legs are long, slender, and provided with hairs; the first pair is the longest, then the fourth, and the third pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved pectinated claws, below which there is a small scopula; the palpi are mo- derately long; the abdomen is oviform, somewhat pointed at the spinners, convex above, and clothed with short hairs. This spider is of a pale dull yellow colour, with the exception of the falces, the maxillze, the lip, the sexual organs, and the extremity of the palpi, which have a red-brown hue, the circular sexual organs and the extremity of the falces being the darkest. The eyes are disposed in two transverse rows on the anterior part of the cephalothorax ; the four intermediate ones nearly form a square, the two anterior ones, which are the largest of the eight and are situated immediately above the frontal margin, being somewhat nearer to each other than the posterior ones ; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated obliquely on a tubercle, but are not in contact. ; Clubiona fasciata. Length of the male ,5,ths of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax 3, ; breadth +; breadth of the abdomen 1; length of an anterior leg 33; length of a leg of the third pair 4. The eyes are seated on black spots, and are disposed in two transverse rows on the anterior part of the cephalothorax ; the four intermediate ones form a trapezoid whose anterior side is the shortest, the two eyes constituting it, which are situated immediately above the frontal margin, being the smallest of the eight. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, depressed and broadly truncated in front, sparingly clothed with short hairs, convex, glossy, and has a narrow longitudinal indentation in the medial line; the legs are long, slender, and provided with hairs and fine sessile spines; the first pair is the longest, the second and fourth pairs are equal in length, and the third pair is the shortest; each tarsus is terminated by two curved pectinated claws, below which there is a small scopula ; the sternum is heart-shaped, and has small prominences on the sides, opposite to the legs. These parts are of a pale dull yellow colour, the cephalothorax, which has a very obscure longitudinal brownish band on each side, being rather the darkest ; and the 428 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders sternum has minute brown spots on the lateral margins. The falces are very long, very prominent, somewhat cylindrical, and armed with a long fang, and an obtuse process resembling a double tooth on the inner surface; the maxille are straight, and enlarged and somewhat quadrate at the extremity; and the lip, which is longer than broad, is truncated and hollowed at the apex. These organs have a yellowish-brown hue. The palpi are slender and of a yellowish-white colour, with the exception of the digital jot, which has a yellowish-brown hue; the radial is longer than the cubital jomt, and has a small, red-brown, crescent-shaped apophysis at its extremity, on the outer side, whose superior limb is the longer; the digital jot is of an oblong-oval form, convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are moderately developed, not very complex in structure, and whose colour consists of mixed shades of yellowish-brown. The abdomen is oviform, somewhat pointed at the spinners, convex above, and is clothed with hoary hairs; a broad, dentated, yellowish-grey band, which is bordered laterally with pale brown, extends from the anterior extremity of the upper part along the middle, diminishing im breadth to its termination at the spmners; the sides and under part are yellower than the medial band, and are without spot. Clubiona affinis. Length of the female ,*,ths of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ;),; breadth ;4, ; breadth of the abdomen ,1,; length of a posterior leg 3; length of a leg of the third pair }. The legs are long, provided with hairs and sessile spines, and are of a yellowish-brown hue, with the exception of the anterior ones, which are slender, devoid of spines, and have a yellowish- white tint ; the fourth pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved pectinated claws, below which a small scopula is situated. The palpi resemble the legs in colour. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, truncated in front, sparingly clothed with short hairs, convex, glossy, and has a narrow longitudinal indentation in the medial line; it is of a dull yellow colour, with a brown band extending along each side. The eyes are seated on black spots, and are disposed in two transverse rows on the anterior part of the cephalothorax; the four intermediate ones form a trapezoid whose anterior side is the shortest, the two eyes constituting it, which are situated immediately above the frontal margin, being the smallest of the eight. The falces are long, powerful, conical, rather prominent, armed with a few small teeth on the inner surface, and are of a red-brown colour. The maxille are straight, and enlarged and - captured in Rio Janeiro. 429 rounded at the extremity; and the lip, which is longer than broad, is truncated and hollowed at the apex. These organs have a yellowish-brown hue. The sternum is oval, with small prominences on the sides, opposite to the legs, and is of a pale yellowish-white colour, with minute brown spots on the lateral margins. The abdomen is oviform, convex above, and clothed with hoary hairs; a broad pale grey band, minutely spotted with dark brown, extends from the anterior extremity of the upper part about two-thirds of its length along the middle; the lateral margins of this band, and the space comprised between its extremity and the spinners, have a dark brown hue; the sides and under part are of a yellowish-grey colour, spotted with dark brown, the spots on the latter being few in number, minute, and obscure ; a dark brown longitudinal streak occurs on the upper surface of the superior spimners, and the colour of the sexual organs is reddish brown. I have given the specific name affinis to this spider provision- ally, as it appears to be very closely allied to Clubiona fasciata, and may perhaps be the female of that species. It is true that it differs from it remarkably in the relative length of its legs ; but a careful examination of the anterior pair has induced a suspicion that the antecedents of those limbs may have been simultaneously detached at the coxee before the spider had arrived at maturity. Now, if such were the case, it is evident, from known physiological facts, that, on being reproduced, they must be defective in development, though, as in the present instance, they might be symmetrical in structure. Family THERIpiipA. Genus THERIpIon, Walck. Theridion coniferum. Length of the female 3yths of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax +; ; breadth 5; breadth of the abdomen zs3 length of an anterior leg 73; length of a leg of the third pair ¢. The abdomen is ea oviform, with a ieee pointed, conical protuberance near the middle of the upper part ; it is sparingly clothed with hairs, of a yellowish-white colour, ob- scurely marked with minute spots of a paler hue on the upper part, and the sexual organs are prominent and of a red-brown colour. The cephalothorax is short, broad, oval, convex, and glossy, with an indentation in the medial line; it is of a yel- lowish-white hue, with a faint orange-coloured band extending along the middle. The falces are slender, conical, prominent, and are terminated by a small, curved, red fang; the maxille are obliquely truncated at the extremity, on the outer side, and 430 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders are inclined towards the lip, which is triangular and pointed at the apex; and the sternum is heart-shaped. These parts, with the palpi, which are slender and have a curved pectinated claw at their extremity, are of a dull whitish hue. The eyes are dis- posed on the anterior part of the cephalothorax in two transverse rows, and are seated on black spots; the four intermediate ones form a square, those of the anterior pair, which are the smallest of the eight, being placed on a tubercle ; the eyes of each lateral pair are also placed on a tubercle, and are nearly in contact. The legs are long, slender, and provided with hairs ; the first pair is the longest, then the fourth, and the third pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by three claws, the two su- perior ones are curved and pectinated, and the inferior one is inflected near its base; their colour is dull yellowish-white, that of the extremity of the tibize and metatarsi of the first, second, and fourth pairs, and an obscure annulus on the tibiz of the first pair, being orange-brown. Family Epriripz. Genus Eprirna, Walck. Epeira lepida. ae of the ale ith of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax —! 183 breadth 3, ; brenda of the audaren 1 163 length of an anterior leg 7; length of a leg of the third pair ;%,. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, convex, particularly in the posterior region, glossy, and has an indentation in the medial line; the falces are powerful, conical, vertical, and armed with a few teeth on the inner surface; the maxille are short, strong, straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity; the lip is semicircular, but somewhat pomted at the apex; the sternum is heart-shaped, and is supplied with long brownish hairs; the legs are long, and provided with hairs and spines; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest; the tarsi are terminated by claws of the usual number and structure; the palpi are slender, and have a curved claw at their extremity. These parts have a yellowish-red colour; the base of the lip has a brown hue, and an oblong black spot occurs above each lateral margin of the cephalothorax. The eyes are seated on black spots on the ante- rior part of the cephalothorax ; the four intermediate ones nearly form a square ; those of the anterior pair are placed on a promi- nence, and are slightly nearer to each other than those of the posterior pair, which are the largest of the eight; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated obliquely on a small tubercle, and are contiguous. The abdomen is oviform, rather broader at the captured in Rio Janeiro. 431 posterior than at the anterior extremity, sparingly clothed with short hairs, convex above, and projects over the base of the cephalothorax: it is of a dull yellow colour, with numerous white spots on the upper part, forming broad oblique bars on each side of the medial line; above the spinners there are three black spots, the intermediate one being much the largest; and a minute white spot occurs on each side of the under part, near its posterior extremity ; the sexual organs are rather prominent, and of a brownish-yellow colour, tinged with red-brown. Epetra elegans. Length of the female 2ths of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax 4; breadth 4; breadth of the abdomen 3; length of an anterior leg +7; length of a leg of the third pair 3. The eyes are seated on black spots on the anterior part of the cephalothorax ; the four intermediate ones are placed on a pro- minence, and nearly form a square, the two anterior ones, which are rather wider apart than the posterior ones, being the largest of the eight; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated obliquely on a tubercle, and are near to each other, but not in contact. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, somewhat pointed in front, moderately convex, with a large in- dentation in the medial line; it is clothed with short hoary hairs, and of a reddish-yellow colour, with a broad longitudinal brown band on each side, and a narrower one of the same hue, which extends from the eyes to the medial indentation. The falces are powerful, conical, vertical, armed with teeth on the inner surface, and of a reddish-yellow colour. The maxillee are short, straight, and enlarged at the extremity; the lip is semicircular, but somewhat pointed at the apex; and the sternum is heart- shaped, with small eminences on the sides, opposite to the legs. These parts have a dark brown hue, the maxille and lip having a yellowish-brown tint at the extremity. The legs are long, robust, provided with hairs and spines, and of a yellowish-red colour, the extremity of the joints being the darkest ; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest ; the tarsi are terminated by claws of the usual number and structure. The palpi have a yellowish hue, tinged with red, and have a curved pectinated claw at their extremity. The abdomen is oviform, clothed with hairs, convex above, and projects over the base of the cephalothorax; the upper part is of a dull yellow colour, reticulated with fine pale brown lines; a brown streak in front, whose posterior extremity is pointed, is succeeded by a large leaf-like band, with sinuous margins, that tapers to the spinners; the anterior part of the band, which has a brown hue, and is freckled and spotted with 432 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders dull yellow, comprises four indented brown spots nearly forming a square, the two posterior ones being separated by a rather wider interval than the anterior ones; and the colour of the posterior part of the band is brownish-black, intersected by narrow, transverse, dull yellow bars ; the sides have a brownish- yellow hue, and are marked with oblique brownish-black streaks; - the middle of the under part is of a dark brown hue, bordered laterally with dull yellow ; the sexual organs are well developed, prominent, of a dark reddish-brown colour, and have a long, slender, brownish-yellow process, directed backwards from their anterior margin, which is curved at its base and recurved at its extremity. Epeira multiguttata. Length of the female 4rd of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax 3,; breadth +; breadth of the abdomen +; length of an anterior leg 11; length of a leg of the third pair ,%,. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded in front and on the sides, thinly clothed with hairs, convex, with a large in- dentation in the medial line; the falces are powerful, conical, convex in front near the base, vertical, and armed with teeth on the inner surface; the maxille are short, straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity ; the lip is semicircular, but some- what pointed at the apex; the sternum is heart-shaped, with small eminences on the sides, opposite to the legs; the legs are robust, and provided with hairs and a few spines; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest ; the tarsi are terminated by claws of the usual number and struc- ture; the palpi are rather short, and have a curved pectinated claw at their extremity. These parts are of a red colour, the sternum being the palest; the maxillee and hp are tinged with brown at the base and dull yellow at the extremity; on the anterior part of the cephalothorax: there is a large triangular black mark, whose base comprises the eyes, and whose vertex extends to the medial indentation ; a black annulus occurs near the middle, and another at the extremity of the tibia of the first and second pairs of legs, the latter bemg the broader; and the extremity of the tibia, metatarsus, and tarsus of the third and fourth pairs, and that also of the digital joint of the palpi, are of the same hue. The eyes are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalothorax, in two transverse rows; the four intermediate ones nearly form a square, the two anterior ones, which are the largest of the eight, and rather wider apart than the posterior ones, being placed on a prominence; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated obliquely on a tubercle, and are near to each other, but not in contact. The abdomen has a short, broad, oviform figure; it is sparingly clothed with hairs, very convex captured in Rio Janeiro. 433 above, and projects greatly over the base of the cephalothorax ; the upper part is soot-coloured, a broad space in the anterior region having a brown hue; two pale yellow lines, whose bifid extremities are widely divergent, meet in an angle in front, and project within the angle a short streak of the same hue on each side of the medial line ; to these streaks succeed two series of spots disposed in pairs, and exterior to each of these series there is a row of spots, the anterior one of which is the largest and somewhat curved, having its convexity directed oulgwands.; sia minute spot occurs near the extremity of the stronger branch of the bifid termination of each frontal line, and a series of oblong oblique spots extends along the upper part of each side; all the spots have a pale yellow hue; the colour of the under part is pale yellow, with the exception of a broad space in the middle, which has a brownish-black hue; the sexual organs are pro- minent, but not highly developed; connected with their ante- rior margin there is a small brownish-yellow process, which is curved backwards and recurved at its extremity; their colour is reddish-brown, and that of the branchial opercula is brownish- yellow. Epeira fumida. Length of the male ;%ths of an inch ; te of the cephalo- thorax 4 ; canis ; breadth of the abdomens a. me of an anterior leg /, ; length ‘ot a leg of the third pair + The lees are long, provided with hairs and spines, eal have a brownish-yellow hue, the femora and extremity of the joints being the brownest ; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest; the tarsi are terminated by claws of the usual number and structure. The palpi are short, and resemble the legs in colour; the cubital joint has several long bristles directed forwards from its extremity; the radial joint has a large protuberance on its outer side, fringed with hairs ; the digital joint is oval, with a process at its base, curved outwards, whose obtuse extremity is glossy; it is convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are highly developed, protuberant, complex in structure, with an obtuse prominent process at their base, having a pro- jection near its base, on the inner side, whose dark extremity is bifid; they are terminated by the dark- coloured points of several strong processes, and their predominant colour is pale dull yel- low faintly tinged with red-brown. The convex sides of the digital joints are directed towards each other. The eyes are seated on black spots on the anterior part of the cephalothorax ; the four intermediate ones nearly form a square; the two ante- rior ones are placed on a prominence, and are rather wider apart Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser, 3. Vol. x. 29 434 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders than the posterior ones, which are the largest of the eight; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated obliquely on a tubercle, and are near to each other, but not in contact. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, hairy, somewhat glossy, convex, depressed in front and in the posterior region, with a large indentation in the medial line; the falces are powerful, conical, vertical, and armed with teeth on the inner surface. These parts are of a yellowish-brown colour, faintly tinged with red. The maxille are short, straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity ; the lip is semicircular, but some- what pointed at the apex; and the sternum is heart-shaped. These parts are of a dark brown colour, the extremity of the first two and the middle of the last having a dull yellow-brown hue. The abdomen is subglobular, hairy, convex above, and projects over the base of the “cephalothorax ; the upper part and sides are of a greyish-brown colour, and a series of obscure, transverse, soot-coloured bars, which have their extremities en- larged, and decrease in length as they approach the spinners, extends along the middle ; a curved line passes round its anterior extremity and along the lower part of the sides ; two short streaks in front converge to an angle in contact with the curved line, and are succeeded by a small spot on each side of the medial line; the line, streaks, and spots have a yellowish-white hue ; the under part is of a brownish-black colour, with two minute yellowish-white spots placed transversely near the middle, and two others of the same hue are situated on each side of the spinners, at their base; the colour of the branchial opercula is brownish-yellow. Epetra grammica. Tenet of the soe ith of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax +53 —o qe: breadth of the abdomen 4 3; —— of an anterior leg 54; length of a leg of the third pair 1. The cephalothorax is "compressed before, rounded on the sides, convex, thinly clothed with pale hairs, and has an indentation in the medial line; the falces are long, conical, vertical, somewhat divergent at the extremity, and armed with teeth on the inner surface ; the maxille are short, straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity; the lip is semicircular, but pointed at the apex; the sternum is heart-shaped, with smal] eminences on the sides, opposite to the legs; the legs are long, and provided with hairs and spines; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest ; the tarsi are terminated by claws of the usual number and structure; the palpi are slender, and have a curved pectinated claw at their extremity. These parts are of a yellowish-brown colour, the base of the lip and obscure captured in Rio Janeiro. 435 spots on the lateral margins of the sternum having a brown hue. The eyes are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalothorax ; the-four intermediate ones are placed on a prominence, and nearly form a square, those of the anterior pair, which are the largest of the eight, beg rather wider apart than those of the posterior pair; the eyes of each lateral pair are in a horizontal line, and separated by a conspicuous interval; the anterior one is seated on a minute tubercle, and the posterior one is the smallest. The abdomen is oviform, thinly clothed with short fine hairs, convex above, projects over the base of the cephalo- thorax, and is of a dull yellowish colour; a fine black sinuous line originates in a large brown spot on each side of the anterior extremity of the upper part ; and these lines, which converge to the spinners, comprise in the anterior part of the space included between them two other fine, black, slightly sinuous lines, which somewhat abruptly converge to a point nearly equidistant from the two extremities of the abdomen; on each side of the medial line there is a row of minute brown indented spots, and a series of obscure, brown, transverse, curved bars whose convexity is directed forwards extends from the anterior region to the spinners ;_ the under part has a pale brown hue tinged with yellow, the medial line, which is much the darkest, having a pale yellow longitudinal line on each side; and small spots of the same hue surround the spinners; the sexual organs are moderately developed, promi- nent, and of a yellowish-brown colour, the orifice, situated at the base of an oval process connected with their anterior margin and directed backwards, having a dark reddish-brown hue. Epeira luteola. Length of the male 4th of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ;,; breadth 4,; breadth of the abdomen ;4,; length of an anterior leg 5’, ; length of a leg of the third pair }. The eyes are seated on black spots on the anterior part of the cephalothorax ; the four intermediate ones form a square, the two posterior ones are rather the largest, and the anterior ones are placed on a prominence; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated obliquely on a tubercle, and the anterior ones are much the smallest and lightest-coloured of the eight. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, moderately convex, glossy, and has an indentation in the medial line; it is of a red- brown colour, with a short yellowish line in the middle of the cephalic region. The falces are small, conical, vertical, armed with a few teeth on the inner surface, and have a brownish-yellow hue. The maxille are straight, and enlarged at the extremity ; and the lip is semicircular, but somewhat pointed at the apex. These organs are of a yellowish-brown colour, being much the 29* 436 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders brownest at the base. The sternum is heart-shaped, with emi- nences on the sides, opposite to the legs ; it is clothed with hairs, and of a yellow-white hue, with dark brown spots on the margins. The legs are long, provided with hairs and spines, and are of a yellowish-brown colour, the metatarsi and tarsi being much the palest ; the femora, genua, and tibiz are tinged with red, and minutely spotted with black; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest; the tarsi are ter- minated by claws of the usual number and structure. The palpi are short, and have a pale dull yellow hue ; the cubital is smaller than the radial joint, and projects a bristle in front; the radial joint is protuberant on the inner and outer sides; the digital joint is oval, with a process at its base curved outwards; it is convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are highly developed, protuberant, complex in structure, with a trifid process near the middle, which projects a fine point from its anterior side, and a strong, brownish-black, curved spine at their extremity, whose prominent termination is directed downwards; the colour of these organs is pale red- brown. The convex sides of the digital joints are directed to- wards each other. The abdomen is oviform, slightly prominent on each side of its anterior extremity, sparigly clothed with hairs, moderately convex above, and projects over the base of the cephalothorax ; it is of a pale dull yellowish colour, with a row of minute depressed brown spots on each side of the medial line of the upper part, and two small, nearly contiguous, yellow spots placed transversely above the spinners; the sides and under part are marked with short black streaks and spots, the latter, which is the darker, having a slightly curved yellowish-white band on each side; and on the outer side of the base of each inferior spinner there is a spot of the same hue. Epeira tristis. Length of the female ,5,ths of an inch; length of the cephalo- thorax ;1,; breadth ;4,; breadth of the abdomen 4; length of an anterior leg 2,; length of a leg of the third pair 3. The abdomen is of a somewhat depressed oviform figure, pro- jecting a little beyond the spinners and greatly over the base of the cephalothorax ; it is thinly clothed with hairs, and has a large chocolate-brown oval band, whose slightly smuous margins are bordered with yellowish-white, extending along the middle of the upper part; the anterior extremity of this band tapers to a point, and the posterior part comprises four longitudinal rows of very minute, obscure yellowish-brown spots; the sides have a yellowish-white hue, tinged with brown at the lower part, and are marked with black and dark-brown streaks and _ blotches ; captured in Rio Janeiro. 437 the under part has a brownish-black hue, and there is an oblong white spot immediately behind the sexual organs; these organs are moderately developed, with a longitudinal transversely stri- ated septum in the middle, whose anterior extremity is directed forwards, and whose posterior extremity is much the broadest ; they are of a yellowish-brown colour, marked with dark brown at their termination. The eyes are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalothorax ; the four intermediate ones nearly form a square, the two anterior ones, which are seated on a protuberance, being slightly wider apart than the posterior ones; the eyes of each lateral pair are placed horizontally on a minute tubercle ; they are separated by a conspicuous interval, and the posterior ones are the smallest of the eight. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded in front and on the sides, convex, depressed be- fore, abruptly so at the base, with a narrow indentation in the medial line; it is clothed with hoary hairs, and of a yellowish- brown colour, with narrow dark brown lateral margins, and a dull yellow triangular spot at the posterior point of the cephalic region. The falces are powerful, conical, vertical, and armed with teeth on the inner surface ; the maxille are short, straight, and enlarged at the extremity ; “and the lip is semicircular, but somewhat pointed at the apex. These parts are of a dark brown colour, the first at the base in front, and the last two at their extremity, having a yellowish-brown hue. The sternum is heart- shaped, with small eminences on the sides opposite to the legs ; it is of a pale dull yellowish colour, with a dark brown band extending along each side; these bands meet at its posterior extremity, and have their inner margin strongly sinuous. The legs are long, provided with hairs and a few spines, and are of a yellowish-brown colour, with brown annuli, those at the extre- mity of the femora of the first, second, and fourth pairs being the broadest, and, with the genua, almost black ; the first pair is the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest ; the tarsi are terminated by claws of the usual number and struc- ture. The palpi resemble the legs in colour, and have a curved pectinated claw at their extremity. Epeira gracilipes. es of the male gth of an inch; length of tus cephalo- thorax +5 ; ae si “breadth of the abdomen Ts i, length of an anterior leg $3; length of a leg of the third pair ;%. The legs are very long , Slender, provided with ‘hairs and spines, and of a pale reddish-brown colour, the femora and the extremity of the tibiz of the anterior pair and the extremity of the tibize of the second pair having a dark brown hue; the 438 Mr. J. Blackwall on newly discovered Spiders first pair is much the longest, then the second, and the third pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by claws of the usual number and structure. The palpi are short, and of a dull yellowish colour; a long slender bristle projects from the ex- tremity of the cubital joint in front; the digital joit is oval, convex and hairy externally, concave within, and with this con- cavity the dark brown palpal organs are connected; they are highly developed, prominent, not very complex in structure, subglobose at the base, from which projects a long slender pro- cess, directed obliquely downwards and outwards, whose pointed extremity is curved. The convex sides of the digital jomts are directed towards each other. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, thinly clothed with hairs, convex, glossy, with a shallow indentation in the medial line, and is of a dark brown colour, with a large reddish-brown triangular mark, whose vertex is directed backwards, in the cephalic region. The eyes are seated on black spots on the anterior part of the cephalothorax; the four intermediate ones form a square, the two anterior ones, which are placed on a prominence, being the largest of the eight; the eyes of each lateral pair are seated obliquely on a small tubercle, and are near to each other, but not in contact. The falces are long, conical, vertical, and of a brownish-red colour. The maxille are straight, and enlarged at the extremity ; and the lip has a short, oval form. These organs have a dark brown hue, the apex of the latter being tinged with dull yellow. The sternum is heart-shaped, and of a dull brownish- yellow colour, with dark brown lateral margins. The abdomen has an oblong-oviform figure ; it is somewhat depressed, sparingly clothed with short hairs, glossy, and projects over the base of the cephalothorax ; the upper part is of a yellowish-brown co- lour, with a dark brown band in the middle, which tapers to the spinners, and is somewhat irregular in outline; the under part has a dark brown hue, with an obscure pale yellow line extend- ing from each branchial operculum to the spmners, and on each side of those organs there are two minute spots of the same colour. Epeira mucronata. Length of the male ;3,ths of aninch; length of the cephalo- thorax ;!,; breadth ~,; breadth of the abdomen ;4; length of an anterior leg 33; length of a leg of the third pair }. The cephalothorax is compressed before, rounded on the sides, convex, glossy, with a large indentation m the medial line; the falees are conical, vertical, and armed with a few teeth on the inner surface; the maxille are short, powerful, obliquely trun- cated at the extremity, on the outer side, and inclined towards captured in Rio Janeiro. 439 the lip, which is semicircular, but pointed at the apex; and the sternum is heart-shaped. These parts have a pale dull yellow hue, and the cephalothorax, which is rather the darkest, has a black line extending from the medial indentation towards the intermediate eyes, which gradually diminishes in breadth to its anterior extremity. The eyes are seated on black spots on the anterior part of the cephalothorax; the four intermediate ones are placed on a prominence and nearly form a square, the two posterior ones, which are the largest of the eight, being rather wider apart than the two anterior ones; the eyes of each lateral pair are the smallest ; they are seated on a minute tubercle, and are almost in contact. The legs are slender, provided with hairs and spines, and are of a brownish-yellow colour, the extremity of the joints being much the darkest ; the first pair is the longest, the second pair slightly surpasses the fourth, and the third pair is the shortest; each tarsus is termmated by the usual number of claws of the customary structure. The palpi are short, and of a pale yellow colour, with the exception of the digital joint, which has a yellowish-brown hue; the radial is stronger than the cubital joint; a long bristle projects forwards from the ex- tremity of the latter, and the former is prominent on the outer side; the digital joint is oval, with an obtuse, glossy process at its base, curved outwards; it is convex and hairy externally, concave within, comprising the palpal organs, which are highly developed, prominent, complicated in structure, with several projecting processes, and a prominent spine, originating near the middle of the inner side, which curves across towards the outer side, and then passes downwards towards the extremity ; they are of a yellowish-brown colour, intermixed with dark reddish- brown. The convex sides of the digital joints are directed to- wards each other. The abdomen is subcylindrical, somewhat convex underneath, and sparingly clothed with hairs ; from the middle of the anterior extremity of the upper part a small acute corneous spine is directed obliquely upwards and forwards, and the posterior extremity, which is slightly elevated, projects be- yond the spinners ; it is of a dull yellow colour, with three narrow white bands extending from the anterior to the posterior extre- mity of the upper part, a small cruciform black spot occurring on the latter; the medial band is fusiform, and comprises a longitudinal line of a dull yellow hue ; the colour of the spinners is dark brown, and that of the branchial opercula yellowish- brown. (To be continued. } 440 On the supposed Discovery of a minute Vertebrate Jaw. XLVIII.—Note on the supposed “ Discovery of an extremely minute Vertebrate Lower Jaw in Mud dredged at St. Helena, by Dr. Wallich, F.L.S.” By C. Spence Barz, F.R.S., F.L.S. &e. No doubt every naturalist must have received with astonish- ment Dr. Wallich’s recent announcement of his discovery of the jaw of so minute a vertebrate animal as he records in the ‘ Annals’ for October last. Iam sure he will not think that I am intrusively officious im pointing out some conditions in the specimen that appear to throw considerable doubt upon its being the jaw of any animal at all. I would premise that, upon the announcement of any new or important circumstance, it is imcumbent that we should first ascertain whether or not it be consistent with our present know- ledge, before the discovery be accepted as a fact. Assuming that Dr. Wallich’s figure in the ‘ Annals,’ as I have no doubt, is correct, there are two features that seem to be in- consistent with the idea of the specimen being the jaw of a vertebrate animal: I allude to the circumstance of there being no condyloid process, and the character of the teeth. I believe that I am correct in asserting that we have not a single instance of an animal having the marginal process of the jaw developed into a serrature such as Dr. Wallich has figured. In those reptiles where the teeth anchylose with the bone, the teeth are yet implanted in alveoli of their own. In fish (of which this cannot be a jaw), the dermal attachments of the teeth, when removed, leave the jaw smooth. The question will probably be put, If it be not the jaw of a vertebrate animal, what is it? In reply, I would state that it appears to me to be the dactylos or last joint of a leg of a small Hyperine Crustacean, and that the circumstance which has misled Dr. Wallich is that, the animal being near the period of moulting its skin, the jomt exhibits, within, a second row of marginal armature, which has been mistaken for a second ramus. I have repeatedly seen specimens under such conditions as I mention, which, though not agreeing in exact detail of serrature with that figured in the ‘ Annals,’ may yet be sufficiently near to identify the group to which the part belongs. In the sketch below, I figure a leg of Phrosina longispina, as well as one in which a drawing of the supposed jaw is sub- stituted for that of the true dactylos, for comparison with Dr. Wallich’s drawing. The genus Phrosina is very abundant in the tropical and sub- tropical Atlantic Ocean. On the supposed Vertebrate Lower Jaw. 441 Of course, in making this statement, I do so with all re- servation, since I know nothing of the specimen beyond what has appeared in the ‘Annals of Natural History’ for October last. — bs roe 9 : 1 PL ; J YS ih tp Fig. 1. Supposed vertebrate jaw ; reduced from the figure in the ‘ Annals,’ page 304. Fig. 2. Dactylos of the fourth pair of pereiopoda of Phrosina longispina. Fig. 3. Leg of ditto, with dactylos in situ, as it appears a short time pre- viously to moulting. - Fig. 4. Ditto, with fig. 1 inserted mstead of the true dactylos. XLIX.—On the supposed Vertebrate Lower Jaw, dredged in Mud at St. Helena. By Dr. Watticu, F.L.S., F.G.S. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. GENTLEMEN, In the October Number of the ‘Annals’ you were good enough to insert my notice regarding the supposed discovery, in mud dredged at St. Helena, of a minute vertebrate lower jaw. That notice was more hastily penned than it should or indeed would have been, had I not been desirous of exhibiting the spe- cimen at the then approaching meeting of the British Associa- tion. Although more than one distinguished naturalist coincided in the opinion expressed by me as to its nature, there were others who at once pronounced it to be no part of a vertebrate struc- ture, but referred it, each in turn, to portions of the invertebrate division very widely removed one from the other. My own im- pression, entertained and expressed from the first, was that, if not a vertebrate jaw, the object in question formed part of an Kchinoderm, this supposition being based on a faint trace of reticulated texture observable under a high power at the point answering to the angle of the right ramus in the lateral view. 442 Dr. G.C. Wallich onthe supposed Vertebrate Lower Jaw. In order to show how diverse were the opinions expressed, I may mention that the specimen was pronounced to be—the mandible of a fish, a portion of the lingual ribbon of Mitra, a claw of a minute Crustacean, part of the manducatory appa- ratus of Notommata or an allied species, and, lastly, a valve of a Pedicellaria; some of the advocates of these conflicting judg- ments still retaining their views unchanged. To Mr. Busk is due the merit of pointing out the extremely close analogy between the object in question and certain Pedi- cellarie,—his intimate acquaintance with every kind of minute organic structure leading him to regard its Pedicellarian origin at all events as highly probable, if not certain. On being made aware of Mr. Busk’s opinion, I immediately examined the Pedicellarize of Hchinus lividus, of which I possess a specimen obtained in the same locality, The valves, although not identical, bear a sufficient resemblance, both in configuration and detail, to satisfy me of the probable accuracy of Mr. Busk’s view; at the same time I thmk it better to reserve my final determination of the structure, pending still further inquiry and comparison. The communication on the subject by Mr. C. Spence Bate ~ (politely submitted to me, at his request, prior to its publication in the present Number of the ‘Annals’) will show how far the occurrence of pseudomorphs in the organic world should put us on our guard against hasty generalisation founded on semblances in figure alone. In the case more immediately under notice, I was by no means insensible to the facts that the appearance of minute teeth along the greater portion of each ramus of the supposed jaw might be due, in reality, to simple serrature of its margin, and that the true texture of vertebrate bone was not visible in its substance. But, on the other hand, it seemed unreasonable to assume that absolute identity in structural detail should exist between an object of such minute dimensions and the homolo- gous parts of the larger animals to which it is allied. Or, even assuming that the intimate structure must be identical in type, we might fairly suppose that minute details, observable only under the microscope in the larger orders, would become so in- ordinately reduced in size in an organism already microscopic, as to be invisible. The figure accompanying my former note, although accurate as a sketch, fails to convey the full extent of the resemblance to a jaw, the projecting digitate-like processes in the region corre- sponding to the articulation being too jagged, and the serrature too saw-like. Probably the true figure of the object, seen from above, is that Mr. G. R. Gray on a few West-African Birds. 4.43 of an elongated spoon, as shown in the adjoining diagrammatic woodcut, the serrature being present along the entire margin except at the broader extremity, where it takes the form of the digitations which, on a side view, constitute the most elevated portion; and anteriorly, where it is interrupted by the four large hollow teeth in the neighbourhood of the symphysis; the intermediate mass, seen in profile in the original figure, being a a triangular and somewhat irregular flattened ridge. I remain, Gentlemen, Your most obedient Servant, G. C. Watticu. L.— Descriptions of a few West-African Birds. By G. R. Gray. To the Editors of the Annals of Natural History. GENTLEMEN, : The following descriptions of a few birds, which appear new to the fauna of West Africa, may interest some of your readers. They were collected on the Cameroons Mountains, at an eleva- tion of 7000 feet above the level of the sea. They were brought to this country by Mrs. Isabel Burton, the estimable lady of the distinguished traveller and Vice-Consul, Capt. Burton, and kindly presented by her to the British Museum. Pratincola salaz. Pratincola salaz, Verr., Rev. et Mag. de Zool. 1851, p. 307, Cossypha Isabelle. Head biack, with a shining white mark between the nostril and the middle above the eye; back olivaceous-black ; wings black, each feather margined with olivaceous ; beneath the bod rufous-buff, deeper on the breast ; rump and outer tail-feathers deep rufous, with the tips of the second, third, and fourth fea- thers, and tip and outer margin of the first feather, black; the four middle feathers black, with the outer margin of the fifth near the base deep rufous. Total length, 6"; wings, 2’ 11"; tarsi, 13”; bill from gape 9", This bird is named in compliment to Mrs. Isabel Burton. 44.4, Mr. G. R. Gray on a few West-African Birds. Zosterops (Spewrops) melanocephalus. Mouse-colour, washed with olivaceous ; head sooty black, with a spot on each side between the nostril and eye; mentum and under wing-coverts white; beneath the body pale obscure grey, tinged with olivaceous; quills and tail fuscous-black, the former margined outwardly with grey. Bill and feet whitish horn- colour. Total length, 4" 9"; wings, 2" 5"; tarsi, 9/3 bill; irom gape, 7” Trichophorus tephrolemus. Yellowish-olive ; head and throat slate-colour, darker on the head; abdomen yellow; breast, sides, and under tail-coverts olivaceous-yellow ; quills fuscous-black, with outer webs oliva- ceous, the inner web margined near the base with buff; tail dull olivaceous, the end of the outer feather slightly tipped with yellow; bill black; feet plumbeous. Total length, 7” 6”; wings, 3” 3”; tarsi, 10”; bill, from gape, 10". Closely allied to Trichophorus canicapillus, Hartl.; but the throat is pale ash-colour. Euplectes phonicomerus. Black ; rump and wing-coverts pale clear yellow; under wing- coverts pale rufous-white; thighs pale brown. like E. wanthomelas; but the yellow on the rump and wings is paler, and the thighs are pale brown instead of black. Total length, 5” 3"; wings, 2” 10"; tarsi 11’; bill, from gape, 73!", Ligurnus* olivaceus, Hartl. Coccothraustes olivaceus, Fras., Proc. Z. S. 1842, p. 144. Adult male yellowish-olivaceous ; head and throat deep black; sides and a narrow band round the neck, rump, and beneath the body bright orange-yellow ; quills black, with the tertials and larger wing-coverts margined outwardly with bright yellow, and the quills inwardly with white ; tail olivaceous-green, with each feather margined on the sides and tip with bright yellow ; bill orange ; feet pale. The female agrees with Mr. Fraser’s typical specimen, said * Ligurnus rufobrunneus. Rufous-brown, slightly darker along the shaft of each feather; wings and tail dull brown, margined with rufous-brown ; beneath the body much paler, varied in some places with darker; bill and feet horn-colour. Length, 6”; wings, 3” 5’; tarsi, 9’”; bill, from gape, 7’”. This bird has been many years in the collection of the British Museum. It was brought to this country from Western Africa by Capt. (now Major- General) Sabine, R.A., and was presented by him to that institution. Mr. G. R. Gray on a few West. African Birds. 445 to have been obtained at Fernando Po, and which is now deposited in the British Museum. It is figured im the ‘ Zoologica Typica,’ pl. 47, by Mr. Fraser. Young.—Dull olivaceous-green ; beneath the body dull oliva- ceous-yellow ; bill and feet blackish lead-colour. Strobilophaga Burtone. Fuscous, varied with pale olivaceous on the sides of the plumes; wing-coverts fuscous-black, tipped with white; quills and tail fuscous-black, margined narrowly with yellow; abdomen obscure white, spotted with fuscous-black down the shaft of some of the feathers ; upper mandible horn-colour, lower mandible white ; feet plumbeous. Total length, 7” ; wings, 3" 6"; tarsi, 9”; bill, from gape, 8!" The formation of this bird agrees in every respect with the genus Pinicola or Strobilophaga. A species of this genus has not hitherto been recorded as found in Africa. To these may be added the Cosmetornis Burtoni. It is very similar to the Cosmetornis vexillarius (Gould),G. R.Gr., but differs in the white spot at the base of each quill being nar- rower, while the white at the tip of the second, third, fourth, and fifth quills is more prominent and slightly mottled with rufous on the outer web ; the first quill longer than the second, fuscous-black, and partly margined with rufous on the outer webs ; the sixth feather is rather longer than the fifth, the seventh rather longer than the latter; both are fuscous-black, slightly mottled with pale rufous, having the bases of the inner webs white; the eighth is much longer than the first quill, and fus- cous-black, slightly mottled with pale rufous, the base of the inner web white or pale rufous; the ninth feather (or, as it has been termed, “ standard feather ”’) is the longest of all, measuring more than 17in.; it is white at the base of both inner and outer webs, but passing into pale rufous, or rufous-white mottled with black, on the outer web, while the inner is only rufous-white for its entire length from the basal white. The specimen is in an imperfect state, and only sufficient to afford the above description so as to distinguish it from the previously known species. The British Museum is indebted to the liberality of Capt. Burton, H.M. Vice-Consul, who has just sent it with other zoological specimens, all marked as from Fernando Po, and after whom I have the pleasure of naming this interesting bird. 446 Dr. G. Rolleston and Mr. C. Robertson on the Aquiferous LI. On the Aquiferous and Oviducal System in the Lamelli- branchiate Mollusks. By Grorce Rouzeston, Esq., M.D., F.L.S., Linacre Professor of Anatomy; and C. Ropertson, Esq., Demonstrator of Anatomy, Oxford*. Very different explanations have been offered of the means by which certain of the Lamellibranchiata are enabled to distend their muscular foot until the fluid with which it is swollen up causes it to appear all but transparent. These explanations, dif- ferent as they are both in principle and in detail, admit yet of being reduced under one or other of three heads. Hither they postulate the existence of a system of tubes homologous with the trachez of insects, and, like them, distinct from the animal’s blood-vessels, as necessary for the explanation of the great changes of volume observed to take place in the mollusk’s body; or they suppose these alterations of size to be effected by the agency of the blood-vascular system alone ; or, thirdly, they hold the effect in question to be due to the joint working of these two systems of tubes. Agassiz} refers the great distention observable in the foot of the Natica heros, of the Pyrula carica and canaliculata, and the Acephalous Mactra solidissima, to water inhaled by orifices more or less numerous, of less or greater calibre, in the muscular foot : these orifices, and the tubes in connexion with them, he speaks of as a water-vascular system, but he holds that they come into more or less direct and constant communication with the true blood-vascular system. Theodor von Hessling {, who obtained the same result of in- jecting fully the blood-vascular system, by throwing in fluid from the glandular depression in the foot of the Unio margaritifera, as Agassiz did by a similar procedure with the similar depression in the foot of the Gasteropodous Pyrule, speaks of the system (which on these grounds he holds to be continuous) as but one system and that a blood-vascular system, with certain orifices patent and communicating with the external medium in which the animal hves. Von Hessling holds also that the distention of the foot may be in part due to water inhaled through the organ of Bojanus, and mingled thus with the blood, as we shall presently describe. M. Langer § holds that the organ of Bojanus is the route by which the water, upon which the change of volume in the animal’s body depends, passes into it, and that this water passes into the blood-vessels, and not into any specialized water-vascular system. * From the Philosophical Transactions, Part I. for 1862, p. 29. + Zeitschrift fiir wiss. Zoologie, Pt. 7. p. 176, 1855. { Perlmuscheln und ihre Perlen. Leipzic, 1859: p. 241. § Denkschriften d. Kaiserlich. Akad. Wiss. xii. p. 55, 1856. and Oviducal System in the Lamellibranchiate Mollusks. 447 M. Lacaze-Duthiers has discovered and described* yet another route than that of the organ of Bojanus, by which, in the Den- talium and Pleurobranchus, water from without can find its way into the interior of vessels carrying blood, and carrying it in these instances towards the heart, and not towards the gills. Gegenbaur+ differs from these authors merely in postulating the existence of orifices of exit as well as of entrance for the water; and these he holds to correspond with the puncta scat- tered over the foot-surface, and visible in great abundance occa- sionally along and near its free edge. Von Rengarten t exactly reverses the functions thus supposed to belong to the punctated foot-pores, and the passage through the organ of Bojanus severally. In a paper read by us§ before the Royal Society, February 3, 1859, we spoke of the water-vascular system as having its outlet in close approximation to the external orifice of the organ of Bojanus ; and its inlet we suggested might be indicated by the position of the parasites which are not rarely to be seen studding the foot-surface and marking out the presence of its numerous pores. Gegenbaur, we observe ||, considers that the great lia- bility of the foot to injury from the entrance of foreign bodies into these pores is an argument for regarding them as exhalant rather than inhalant orifices. ( Further iuvestigations, carried on by us subsequently to the reading of that paper, showed us that our views as to the oviducal system in the Lamellibranchiata were founded in error. An exceedingly courteous notice of this mistake by M. Lacaze-Du- thiers{ in the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society’ rendered an earlier retractation of this part of our paper unnecessary. Our views, on the other hand, as to the permeation of the bodies of the Lamellibranchiata by a system of vessels distinct from those in which the blood is contained remain much what they were. Before stating our views, and the arguments by which we would support them, we would say that the “ perivisceral cham- ber”’ of the Brachiopoda, as described by Mr. Hancock** in a paper in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions,’ which was published subsequently to the reading of our paper already referred to, holds much the same relation to the circulatory and reproductive and other viscera, as the system which we have called “aqui- ferous”’ in the Lamellibranchiata. As Mr. Hancock++ has * Ann. des Sciences Naturelles, tom. xi. 1859, p. 255; Ann. Nat. List. ser. 3. vol. v. p. 225. + Grundziige der vergleichenden Anatomie, p. 352, 1859. { Diss. Inaug. Dorpat, 1853, cit. Von Hessling, loc. cit. p. 236. § Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 3. vol. iv. p. 65. || Loe. cit. p. 352. q Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 3. vol. v. p. 225. ** Philosophical Transactions for 1858. Read May 14, 1857. +t Loc. cit, p. 844. 448 Dr. G. Rolleston and Mr. C. Robertson on the Aquiferous himself pointed out the close correspondences of the two systems, we will but remark upon one point of discrepancy between them. In the Brachiopods the genitalia are packed into the main stems of the arborescent perivisceral system, in the direct course of the stream, if we may speak of it as a water-vascular system ; in the Lamellibranchiata, or, at all events, in the family Unionide, the ceca of the generative gland are appended laterally to the divergent twigs of the principal branches of the water-vascular tree ; they do not lie in the direct course of the current of the aquiferous canals, and these canals, beyond and outside of them, break up into a very delicate minutely divided system of capil- lary tubes. What we shall attempt to prove is, that the orifices on either side of the foot in the Unionide lead not only to the generative gland, the products of which may be seen to issue forth from them at the spawning-season, but also to a system of tubes widely spread through the entire foot. We do not believe that any direct communication subsists either between the blood- vascular system and this system of tubes, or between either of these systems and the punctated depressions and inlets along the foot-edge. The blood-vessels seem to us to constitute a system of tubes closed, save at one point and at one lacuna. That point and that lacuna is the pericardial space—a cavity into which, besides the blood of the animal, the water in which it lives also finds its way. As the bivalve shell opens, it necessarily dilates this lacuna, and water is thus drawn into it through the compound sac known in the Acephala as the organ of Bojanus. The water then gains access to the interior of the blood-vessels, as we shall proceed to show, and is carried onward within them. From the blood- vessels we suppose it to transude into the system of water-tubes everywhere in apposition with them, and, under normal conditions, to find its exit by these tubes, whilst under such abnormal cir- cumstances as the sudden removal of the creature from the water, the sudden contraction of the muscular foot, causing jets of water to pour forth from the dilated semitransparent mass, may unload the infiltrated organ in a yet more expeditious manner. As to the way by which the water used by the mollusk for distend- ing its foot comes into the body, we are at one with many other writers upon this subject ; but we are not aware that our views as to the method by which the animal disencumbers itself of the ingested fluid are shared in by other authors. Our arguments will be principally based upon the results of experiments made in the way of injection. The animals we operated upon were almost exclusively of the family Unionide ; and, on account of the size of the specimens, as well as for other reasons, we employed chiefly the species Anodon cygneus and Unio margaritifera. In all our experiments we strove to repro- duce, as nearly as possible, the conditions of the animal’s na- and Oviducal System in the Lamellibranchiate Mollusks. 449 tural life : our injections were always performed under water, by which and by other means as much support was given to the animal’s body and its several parts as the water and the shell gave to it during life. Means were always adopted for securing that the animal died with its muscular system in a state of re- laxation. We found the prussian blue injecting-fluid of Prof. Beale’s * invention to possess many properties especially recom- mending it for use in our experiments, but we employed several other fluids as well. Experiment 1.—If an Anodon or Unio (size is of little conse- quence in this experiment, though large size is a convenience in most) be removed from its shell without injuring the some- what easily injured tissues which limit the secreting-structure of the organ of Bojanus, and supported in water with its foot downwards in such a manner as to put its pericardial laeuna, and the parts in connexion with it, as nearly as possible into the condition in which they may be supposed to be in in the shell during life, and if an injection be then made into the pericardial lacuna, the following results will be seen to take place. The so- called ‘reddish-brown organ of Keber” (a plexus of vessels rich in pigmentary deposit, continuous with other vessels not so coloured in the mantle and elsewhere, and bounding the pericardium on either side, and opening into it by several patent orifices at its anterior end) will become filled with the injecting- fluid first ; next the gill-vessels, and sometimes together with them, yet not invariably, the systemic veins; and lastly the external orifice of the organ of Bojanus will, on removing the animal from its prone position, be seen pouring out the injec- tion on either side of the animal’s foot. Experiment 2.—A large Anodon was injected with a red stiffening-injection from the central branchial vein, a vessel readily injectible, lying as it does in the gill-cavity superiorly between the two innermost laminz of the gills, in the angle where they become continuous with each other posteriorly to the posterior edge of the foot, with the following results :—The auricle and ventricle were filled to distention, the reddish-brown organ as well, and, besides the reddish-brown organ, the rest of the mantle, up to within a quarter of inch of its free edge. No fluid, however, had penetrated into the pericardial space. The absence of penetration into the pericardium we have invariably had to record in our numerous injections from the branchial veins, even when the injection is noted as having been so en- tirely successful as to have passed through the aorta in such abundance as to inject in fine ramuscular divisions the edge of the muscular foot. * © Tow to work with the Microscope,’ p. 78, ag Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. x, 450 Dr.G. Rolleston and Mr. C. Robertson on the Aquiferous The former of these two experiments is so easy of perform- ance, and yet proves so much, that we cannot but express our surprise at nowhere finding any record of its having been made by any of the different experimenters who have employed in- jections as a method for investigating the economy of mollusks. We have repeated it so frequently with the same results, as to have become quite convinced that the pericardial lacuna com- municates, on the one hand, with blood going gillward, and, on the other, with the water in which the animal lies. The uniformity with which our repetitions of Experiment 2 have led to the same negative result inclines us to doubt the existence of any direct communication between the aquiferous pericardial lacuna and the branchial veins properly so called. We are the more disposed to accept this conclusion, as in no mollusk whatever which is possessed of branchial vessels, except the Pleurobranchus *, has the renal organ been shown to con- duct the external water into the cavity of vessels homologous, not with the afferent, but with the efferent + branchial vessels of higher organisms. Though Experiment 2 may seem to prove that the intravas- cular blood does not set in any very free current outwards into the pericardial space, especially when coupled with the observa- tion that in multitudinous and varied injections of the different systems of blood-vessels we have never succeeded j in filling the pericardium from the blood-vessels, easy though it be, as in Experiment 1, to make the injected fluid take the reverse direc- tion, more direct evidence is yet needed in support of our view of the organ of Bojanus as the channel for an inwardly-setting current of water. The following considerations seem to us to show conclusively that, though Experiment 1 shows that it is possible for intrapericardial fluid to find its way outwards through the renal organ, such is not the direction usually taken by the fluid contained in the complex aquiferous system thus consti- tuted. 1st. If we examine with the microscope the fluid contained in the pericardial space, we shall find it to contain, besides the morphological elements of blood, certain foreign bodies, such as the Aspidogaster conchicola and infusoria. Now these creatures must be supposed to have found their way inwards through the organ of Bojanus. * M. Lacaze-Duthiers, Ann. Nat. Hist., loc. cit. + Gegenbaur, Grundziige, p. 367. { M. Langer’s language (Denkschriften d. Akad. Wiss. loc. cit. p. 43), in describing his success in such injections, is so qualified, “und sah, doch nicht immer,” as to allow one, without discourtesy, to give less weight to his views on this than on most other points. and Oviducal System in the Lamellibranchiate Mollusks. 451 2ndly. The external orifice of the organ of Bojanus may be seen in a living Anodon (and, from its lying exposed in the gill- cavity, with yet greater ease in a Unio margaritifera) to execute movements of alternate opening and shutting, similar in charac- ter to those executed, as has been repeatedly noticed, by the analogous organ in the Pteropoda. These movements are re- peated as frequently as once in every ten seconds (or oftener) in the Unio margaritifera; and they possess, there can be little doubt, in these as in other mollusks, the power of filling with water the cavities into which it leads. ardly. The glandular portion of the compound organ of Bojanus has its opening into the pericardium guarded by a funnel-shaped projection which acts as a valve looking heart- wards, and offers resistance consequently to fluid passing out- wards from that lacuna. 4thly (Experiment 3). Fluid thrown in by the external orifice of the organ of Bojanus, as it is either artificially, as in the Anodon, or naturally, as in the Unio margaritifera, exposed in the gill-cavity, finds its way even more easily to the pericar- dium than fluid thrown, as already described, into the pericar- dium finds its way into the gill-cavity by the reverse route. This experiment is but an imitation of what we may suppose to take place whensoever the animal by opening its valves dilates its pericardial space. As an immediate consequence of this dila- tation, water is ingested into the blood-vascular system, and is forthwith applied to the purpose of distending the foot and pro- truding it through the opening valves. Up to this point our views are in accordance with those adopted by several authors, though we are not aware that our method of proof has been employed by any other observers, so far as its detailed application is concerned. We will now proceed to give our reasons for supposing that another system of tubes comes in aid of the blood-vascular system, and receives from it the fluid which that system has been the means of taking up in the manner described. Our arguments will go to show that water is transferred from the blood-vessels in the foot of the freshwater mussel to another set of vessels, the main stem of which has the additional function of outlet to the generative gland. As, however, Von Hessling* holds that the system of pores in the foot plays no inconsider- able part in the work of supplying the distending foot with water, acting in aid of, and in alliance with, the system of the organ of Bojanus, and, with Agassiz and Von Rengarten, as already cited, holds this office to be exclusively discharged by this system of pores and inlets, we will begin by stating our * Perlmuscheln und ihre Perlen, p. 238 ez seq. 30% 452 Dr. G. Rolleston and Mr. C. Robertson on the Aquiferous reasons for demurring to these views, in which we ourselves at one time participated. It will be necessary to give the details of two sets of experiments, to show how we came to give up an opinion which can plead such high authorities as those we have cited for its defence. Experiment 4.—A large Anodon, having died with its foot in a semidistended state, was injected from the venous sinus which receives the blood from the systemic veins and distributes it to the renal-portal system, with the prussian-blue injection already spoken of. The injection spread over the liver and over the whole of the generative gland, and the exclusively muscular part of the foot, spreading itself in especial richness along the free edge. No pressure which we subjected the foot to, when thus fully injected, caused any of the blue injection, easily and readily though it runs, to issue forth. Subsequently to this, a stiffening injection of red colour was thrown into the foot-mass froin the oviducal outlets. This second injection spread itself very richly over the ovary, over the liver, and into the muscular foot, along the free edge of which it issued in small jets without any pressure being applied. We will disregard, for the moment, the bearing which this experiment has upon the distinctness from the blood-vascular system of the system of tubes in the muscular foot, to which the stem opening (under the name of oviduct) into the mantle-cavity leads, and we will relate the details of another set of experiments, which led us to consider the phenomenon of the jets issuing from the foot-edge as due, in spite of the frequency with which we have seen it recur, to violence done, possibly unavoidably, to the delicate limitary tissues of these aquiferous tubes. Experiment 5.—A Unio margaritifera, which had died with its foot quite relaxed, had the blue injecting-fluid introduced into its aorta, its venous system, and through the oviducal ori- fices, until the foot, from a state of perfect softness, became tense and swollen up. On pressure, none of this triply-injected blue fluid could be made to issue forth from the foot-edge ; but small hernia-like projections of transparent membrane rose out like bubbles all along the foot-edge. They contained at first a trans- parent fluid, but after a little pressure they became filled with the blue injection. The thinness and transparency of these little sacs will account for the rarity of their appearance, and the comparative frequency with which jets of injected fluid have made themselves noticed in the region corresponding to the eecal endings of tubes which these sacs must be held to repre- sent. ‘The depressions and pores which do exist in the foot of the Lamellibranchiate mollusk we believe to be glandular in character, and destitute of any direct communication with the and Oviducal System in the Lamellibranchiate Mollusks. 453 blood-vessels or other tubes in the animal’s body. Now the Unio margaritifera stands in the same relation with reference to these foot-pores to the Anodonta cygnea as the Byrula carica and P. canaliculata do, according to Agassiz, to the Mactra; that is to say, the foot of the Unio presents us with a gigantic pore, in the shape of a glandular depression of as much as an inch in length and two lines in diameter, whilst that of the Anodon is pierced but by microscopic inlets. Von Hessling*, by whom this organ has been very accurately described, believes that injections can be made to pass, without rupture of any limitary membrane, from its cavity into the blood-vessels ; and Agassiz holds a similar view with reference to the nearly similar struc- ture in the Pyrula. But in the Unio just spoken of as so fully injected, as well as in several others similarly treated, though the sides and walls of this glandular depression were very richly injected, none of the injection could by pressure be made to issue out into the water in which the animal was lying. We should be inclined to consider this involution or glandular de- pression in the foot of the Unio as homologous with the foot- gland of the terrestrial Gasteropods ; and the communication which has been held to exist between this Lamellibranchiate organ and its vascular system we should not believe to be more direct than that which subsists between the muciparous foot- gland of the Limaz and its venous system. It is not quite beside the purpose, to remark that the foot of one of the Unionide, when thoroughly distended, has a smooth bright appearance, so uniformly spread over the whole surface of its semigelatinous mass as to suggest the idea of the depressions having become everted and thus contributed to increase the size of the infiltrated organism. Though this appearance may not justify such an interpretation, yet it does seem quite inconsistent with the existence of patent pores communicating with the animal’s blood-vessels. We have repeatedly observed that, if a freshwater mussel die with its muscular foot in a state of contraction, no distention of the foot takes place, either by leaving the animal to soak in water till putrefaction sets in, or by artificial injection. We will now proceed to state our reasons for holding the exist- ence of a water-vascular system distinct from the blood-vessels of the Lamellibranchiata. Siebold{ states one of the objections urged against the existence of this system of vessels in the fol- * Loc. cit. p.238. Von Hessling, however, does not mention the occur- rence of calcareous concretions impacted in this gland’s duct. This we have observed. + Siebold, Anatomy of Invertebrata, p. 255, note 6, American edition. t Ibid. p. 213. 454 Dr. G. Rolleston and Mr. C. Robertson on the Aquiferous lowing words :—‘ The existence in these animals of a double system of lacunz having this interpretation is attended with many difficulties. For then it must be admitted that one of these systems contains only water and the other blood, and it is difficult to understand how two kinds of wall-less canals can traverse the body without passing into each other.” It is, how- ever, demonstrable that in the Unionidz, at all events, an all but perfectly closed system of blood-vessels exists. We have again and again, with various injecting fluids, found that they will pass from the aorta through a capillary system into a systemic-venous system, from that into what may be called the renal-portal system of the organ of Bojanus, and from that into the branchie, without any extravasation, or the formation of any lacuna anywhere. The pericardial space is, in the strictest sense of the phrase, a blood-lacuna; but, as already detailed, fluid cannot be made to pass into it from the blood-vessels, though such communication must take place to a certain extent during the life of the animal, and though the reverse direction of current is one easily demonstrable by artificial means, and is doubtless the ordinary one under normal conditions. There are two venous sinuses, however, in the Unionide, receiving, one after the other, the systemic-venous blood, and transmitting it into the organ of Bojanus. The first of these* lies just within the muscular foot, along its superior and posterior edge ; it sub- tends the second, the only one mentioned by authors, and opens into it by an orifice more or less perfectly guarded in different species of Unionide. This second sinus lies between the two opposed organs of Bojanus; and from it the systemic-venous blood passes into the capillaries of the renal-portal system con- tained in those organs. But neither of these sinuses at all answers the character intended to be expressed by the term lacuna ; they are homologous rather with the dilated great veins of certain vertebrata than with the lacune which do exist in certain molluscan families. There is the less occasion, how- ever, to labour further at demonstrating the non-lacunar charac- ter of the blood-vascular system of the Unionide, as Von Hes- slingt, in his recent book on the Pearl Mussel, confirms in this * Into this smus the ceca of the generative gland project somewhat freely from amongst the trabecule which run across what we call the roof of the muscular foot, from one side to the other; and it is here, we believe, that in injections from the oviducal outlets extravasation so often takes place into the blood-vessels. + Loe. cit. p. 219. Gegenbaur, in his ‘ Grundziige,’ p. 344, note, hints at some doubt still remaining in his mind as to the distinctness of these capillaries from the tissues they lie amongst. His work bears the same date (1859) as Von Hessling’s; and we suppose both to have been pub- lished subsequently to the reading of our paper, February 3, 1859. - and Oviducal System in the Lamellibranchiate Mollusks. 455 point the views previously enunciated by Langer, adding to them a description of the histological characters of the vessels intervening between the arterial and venous systems in the Unio, It may be considered as beyond a doubt that a system of tubes all but entirely non-lacunar exists in these Lamellibranchiata, earrying their blood from the heart through a systemic, a renal, and a branchial system. No pressure that can in fairness be applied will cause any extravasation of fluid thus injected. Such pressure we have repeatedly applied to Anodons very fully distended by injection; and though it be not rare for fluid thrown in by the oviducal outlets to find its way out, as already described, by orifices along the foot, we have never found this to take place with the blood-vascular system. In making use of the method of injections as a means for showing the independence of the several vascular trees in the Lamellibranchiate mollusks, we have sometimes injected the animal from the oviducal orifice alone, sometimes we have injected the same animal with a differently coloured fluid from its venous or from its arterial system, or from both ; in a word, our injections have been either single, double, or triple. There is no difficulty in causing an injection to enter the body of any large individual of the family Unionide from its oviducal orifice ; it is especially easy, however, to effect this in the Unio margaritifera, as the orifice is not in them, as in most species of the family, covered by the inner lamina of the inner gill, but, together with the orifice of the organ of Bojanus, lies exposed and uncovered in the gill-cavity, and, besides this, is prolonged out in such a manner as to render the introduction of the syringe-pipe a very easy matter, Experiment 6.—An injection thrown in by this orifice will spread itself over the whole of the viscera contained within the foot, not confining itself by any means to the ovary, but passing on beyond the area occupied by it or the male generative gland, into the exclusively muscular part of the foot, and distributing itself with especial richness along its free edge. That an injec- tion thrown in by this orifice should thus spread itself would go some way towards showing that in the Lamellibranchiate, as in the Brachiopod mollusk, the ducts through which the generative products are extruded lead elsewhere as well as to the generative gland, were it possible to be sure that no transference of the injected fluid had taken place from tubes confessedly in con- nexion with the generative gland to another system of vessels— that, namely, which carries the blood. That such a transference does not rarely take place in one part of the blood-vascular system, we have already mentioned*; and hence arose the | * Note, p. 454. 456 Dr. G. Rolleston and Mr. C, Robertson on the Aquiferous necessity for double injections, im which the blood-vascular system was (as has been and will again be described) injected and fully distended throughout the entirety of its own ramifica- tions, before any fluid was thrown into the oviducal orifices, and by still mapping out a tree for itself showed the independence of the system it led to. Single injections, however inferior to double ones, still furnish us with strong arguments for the view we are supporting. A freshwater mussel may have its whole visceral mass perfectly injected, either from the blood-vessels or from the oviducal system ; but when thus injected, a practised eye has no difficulty in seeing ito which of the two systems the injection has been thrown. The blood-vascular injection is seen to be contained in coarser tubes, and to form a less close network than the aquiferous, which, though confined within fine capil- laries, gives, till closely inspected, an appearance almost of uniform diffusion, on account of the closeness of the network it forms. Secondly, we wili give the details of two double injections. Experiment 7.—A double injection from the venous system and the oviducal in the same Anodon. A stiffening size injec- tion of red colour was used for the oviducal or aquiferous system, and the prussian-blue injection, a more easily running fluid, for the venous system, with the following results. The red injection occupies the area corresponding to the generative gland, with coarse as well as with fine twigs, has imparted a faintish blush to the regions occupied by the liver and stomach, but has filled the interior of the exclusively muscular portion of the foot with so close and fine a network as to give it at a distance a uniform red appearance. ‘The blue injection occupies much of the foot-mass in common with and interposed between the red, its larger trunks holding the same position relatively to the larger red trunks as the larger systemic ves do to the larger generative ducts, but it has spread itself into the gills, which the red fluid has not. Experiment 8.—A similar one to the preceding, but that the blood-vascular system was distended with the fluid used in Experiment 7 for the aquiferous, and vice versd, The red fluid was thrown in by the aorta, it filled a large artery running parallel with the cap of the foot, it filled both labial tentacles, and it set, as it stiffened, in bossy masses along the edge of the foot, lastly it returned to the venous sinus and filled it and the organ of Bojanus,—occupymg thus the entire systemic and renal-portal vessels. The blue cold injection was thrown in by the orifices through which the generative products are extruded ; and we shall see that it, when thus thrown in, disclosed the existence of a system of vessels distinct from those already so and Oviducal System in the Lamellibranchiate Mollusks. 457 clearly marked out as coextensive with the systemic vessels. It spread itself chiefly over the ovary, but formed a fine plexus along the free edge of the foot beyond the artery described as running parallel with the edge of the foot, and figured as doing so by Langer*. This experiment must be thought to go a considerable way towards demonstrating the existence of a system of tubes distinct from, however closely apposed to, the blood-vascular system,— this system having been, in this experiment, filled with a rigid mass, and filled with it most thoroughly, as the injection of the organ of Bojanus proves, and yet allowing the trees injectible from the aquiferous outlet to coexist side by side with it, even though the fluid they contained was so much more easily dis- placed than the stiffening size injection. Thirdly, of triple injections. The readiness with which injections pass from the arterial into the venous system make the triple injections which we have practised of less physiological value than at first sight might appear to be the case ; and consequently we will content ourselves with giving the details of one such injection. Experiment 9.—A large Anodon was injected from the venous sinus with a yellow stiffening injection; after this had been done, a blue-coloured fluid, also with size for its basis, was thrown into the aorta; .and thirdly, a red injection of the same character was thrown in by the aquiferous opening. The blue fluid thrown into the arterial system drove the yellow fluid be- fore it out of the systemic veins almost entirely, but it did not follow it into the renal-portal system of the organ of Bojanus ; this organ and the gills remained richly injected with yellow, to the exclusion of both the other colours; the red fluid, finally, which was thrown in by the aquiferous opening, spread itself in couples with the arterial blue over the entire visceral mass, filling alike the areas of digestive and of reproductive organs, and spreading itself with especial richness over the exclusively muscular part of the foot, which it will be recollected is the part of the animal most preeminently distended and distensible by both natural and artificial means. Lastly, in a large individual of the freshwater-mussel family in which a stiffening or other injection has been thrown in by the orifice through which the generative products are extruded, a simple lens is sufficient to show that the tubes thus injected have the generative ceca affixed to them laterally, and pass on continuously into parts of the foot in which no generative cca are lodged. It is most especially in that part of the muscular foot into which no viscera are packed, and which forms a belt of considerable width beyond and bounding the generative mass, * Denkschriften der K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Bd. viii. Taf, i. fig. 1. 458 Aquiferous and Oviducal System in Lamellibranchiata. . and yet free from any admixture of its constituent elements (as the microscope will show), that we find the capillary network (shown to be in connexion with the oviducal outlet whilst clear of the terminal ceca) of the gland to attain its maximum deve- lopment. Now this area is the area also of maximum disten- tion in the distended foot. If in a Unio which has been in- jected from the blood-vascular system and from the ovidueal, both with differently-coloured injecting-fluids, a portion of the injected tissue be taken from this area and placed under one of the higher powers of the microscope, the fluid which has been thrown in by the oviducal orifice will be seen to be contained in tubes as well and sharply defined as those of the capillaries which the other injected fluid will show to be in connexion with the blood-vessels. Whilst the analogy of the Echinodermata and many Annelids does away with any @ priori improbability which may have seemed to attach to the possession by these mollusks of the sys- tem of tubes the existence of which we have been striving to de- monstrate, the homology of the Brachiopoda furnishes us with a strong @ priori presumption in favour of the correctness of our view. On the other hand, we cannot forbear pointing out the great improbability which must attach to a view which sup- poses a fluid of such morphological and such chemical charac- ters as is the blood of the freshwater mussel to be diluted as it must be diluted on the hypothesis of the blood-vessels being the agents by which the animal voluntarily distends itself often to thrice its undistended bulk. How do the blood-corpuscles which we may take from the interior of the animal’s heart behave when thus mixed with water under the microscope *? But it is not upon considerations such as these that we would lay most weight, but upon the evidence which injections of the several systems furnish to the unassisted eye, and upon the confirmation of that evidence which microscopic inspection furnishes. * “ Reagentien, wie ein Ueberschuss von Wasser, verdiinnte Essigsaure, losen bei der ersteren Art (Blutkérperchen) den scheinbar festen Inhalt auf, und lassen den Kern, wie die eingeschlossenen Kornchen, deutlich hervortreten. Thre haufigen Formveranderungen, z. B. die “ spiessigen hurschgeweihahnlichen Fortsatze,”’ welche sie treiben, hangen von unvermeid- lichen Diffusionverhiltnissen ab, welchen sie bei der grossen Wassermenge gegeniiber ihrer verhaltnissmassig germgen Anzahl ausgesetzt sind. Wah- rend A. Ecker dieselben durch eine Bildung von Vacuolen, in Folge deren Vergrosserung sie einreissen, zu erklaren sucht, halt Lieberkiihn diese Zellenbildungen fiir Amében mit selbstindigen contractilen Bewegungen. In innigem Zusammenhang mit diesen Erscheinungen steht das leichte Aus- treten des Zelleninhalts, welcher bisweilen in hellen und hyalinen Tropfen herumschwimmt, ja nicht selten geht ein Zerfallen desselben in zahlreiche kleine Tropfehen noch innerhalb der Zellen vor sich, welche dadurch ein maulbeerartiges Ansehen bekommen, ebenso vereinigen die ausgetretenen ‘Sarcodetropfen diese Korperchen zu den oben erwahnten Kliimpchen und Flockchen,”’—Von Hessling, loc. cit. pp. 219, 220. ul Rey. T. Hincks on the Production of Gonozooids. . 459 LII.—On the Production of similar Gonozooids by Hydroid Polypes belonging to different Genera*. By the Rev, Tuomas Hincks, B.A. [Plate IX. figs. 1 & 2.] In the course of the past summer I have had the opportunity of studying at [lfracombe the reproduction of the Stauridia producta, a small Tubularian Zoophyte, which abounds in rock-pools and under ledges near the base of the Capstone. It was first cha- racterized by Dr. Strethill Wright (Edinb. New Phil. Journ., N.S., for April 1858) ; but he did not observe the reproductive bodies. It has been my good fortune to meet with one or two polypes on which they were present in an advanced stage of development, and I am thus enabled to complete the history of the species. My principal object, however, in this paper is to put on record the remarkable fact that the gonozooid of the Stauridia producta ts identical with that of the Coryne eximia (Al/man), a member of a distinct genus. Stauridia is nearly allied to Coryne, but is distinguished from it by having tentacles dissimilar in character. The upper, which are arranged in one or more whorls, are furnished with globular tips, as in Coryne, while the lower, which form a single verticil, are filiform. The former are armed with thread-cells, and en- dowed with vigorous percussive power, and constitute offensive and prehensile instruments ; the latter are rigid, and furnished with palpocils, and seem to act as tactile organs only. The S. producta is a small, creeping, unbranched form ; the C. eximia is branched, and attains a considerable size. Yet of the life-series of these two Hydroids, thus dissimilar in general character, one term is identical. The free reproductive zooids of each are, at the time of detachment, undistinguishable from one another. A strictly analogous fact would be the production of flower-buds absolutely identical by two plants of different genera. In his account of Coryne eximia (‘Annals’ for August 1859), Prof. Allman has remarked on the similarity of its gonozooid to that of another species of the same genus—the Coryne Sarsi of Lovén+. He was unable to indicate any character which could be “justly considered as pointing to a specific distinction be- tween the two Medusz,” though he admits that ‘a more exact comparison with the living animal” might probably result in the detection of differences not then apparent. Dr. Wright, * The substance of this paper was communicated to the Natural-History Section of the British Association, at the late Cambridge Meeting. + The Syncoryna decipiens. of Dujardin, : 460 Rey. T. Hincks on the Production of similar Gonozooids who has had the opportunity of observing the reproductive zooids of these two species, informs me that one of them has thread-cells on the umbrella, and the other not. He believes that they are present on that of C. evimia; and this opinion is confirmed by Mr. G. Hodge’s drawing (PI. IX. fig. 1). It may perhaps be doubtful whether the zooid of C. Sarsi is always destitute of them. They seem to be represented in Sars’s figure of this species (Fauna Litt. Norvegiz, tab. 1. figs. 3,4). But, at any rate, if there be a difference between the gonozooids of these two species, it is of the slightest kind. In the case of Stauridia producta and Coryne eaimia the iden- tity is complete ; and it is the more remarkable as the polypes are generically distinct. The gonophores of the Stawridia are produced at the base of the lower capitate tentacles. I have not observed more than two ona polype; and of these one was in a much more advanced stage of development than the other. They are pyriform at first, very slightly pedunculate, and of a pinkish colour. The con- tained zooid gradually assumes a hemispherical form as develop- ment proceeds ; the marginal portion of the disk is folded in, and the knotted arms he in the interior. After a while, the investing sac of the gonophore appears to be ruptured by the frequent contractions of the umbrella, and by the same move- ments the involved portion of the disk bearing the tentacles is slowly forced out. In the case which came under my observa- tion, half the margin, with two tentacles, was first pushed out ; after a few more violent spasms, the other half followed; and almost immediately the little crystal bell, with its rose-coloured manubrium and four rose-coloured tubercles, from which as many beaded arms were pendent, liberated itself and moved gracefully through the water. (Pl. IX. fig. 2.) The umbrella is studded with thread-cells, which show as bright points against a dark ground. From the centre is suspended a rose-coloured manubrium with a simple mouth. Four radiating vessels pass from the base of it to the marginal canal, and are continuous with as many tentacles. The latter originate in four rose- coloured tubercles, on one side of which is placed a dark reddish- brown ocellus*. The arms are very extensile, and are set, along their entire length, with knot-like clusters of thread-cells, and terminate in a large group which forms a spherical bulb at the tip. I have counted about three dozen of these clusters on a single arm. There are no marginal bodies except the tentacles. A comparison of this description (which is taken from the * Dujardin describes the ocellus of Coryne Sarsii as “ black;” Sars, however, calls it “‘ braun-rothen.”’ The colour in the Stauridia is so deep that it might readily be mistaken for black. by Hydroid Polypes belonging to different Genera. 461 Ilfracombe specimen of the Stawridia-zooid) with Prof. Allman’s account of the Medusoid of his Coryne eximia will at once show the perfect identity of the two forms. Mr. George Hodge has kindly permitted me to make use of a beautiful drawing of the latter from his own pencil (Plate IX. fig. 1), and I have placed beside it a sketch of the former by myself (fig. 2). The diversity in shape is probably due to a difference in age. The specimen from which my figure was taken was in an immature state*. The Sarsia turricula of Prof. M‘Crady’s paper on “the Gym- nophthalmata of Charleston Harbour” (Proc. of Elliott Soc. of Nat. Hist. vol. i. p. 138, pl. 8. figs. 6-8) appears to be identical with the form which I have just described. His account, how- ever, of the Coryne from which he supposed it to proceed does not enable me to determine the species with certainty. Throughout this paper I have employed the term Gonozooid to designate the free reproductive body, instead of the more usual term Medusoid. The latter seems to me objectionable, as tending to perpetuate a false conception of the nature of the sexual zooid. It helps to keep up the idea of a distinct and absolute individuality in the latter, and to conceal its real signifi- cance, as the mere equivalent of the flower-bud in the plant. In the life-series of the Hydroid, the polype is the alimentary zooid, and the sexual element or term may be conveniently and correctly designated the gonozooid. EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX. Fig. 1. Gonozooid of Coryne eximia, from a drawing by Mr. G. Hodge. Fig. 2. Gonozooid of Stauridia producta. Fig. 3. Laomedea fragilis, n. sp.; natural size and magnified. Fig. 4. Atractylis margarica, n. sp., with its gonophore; 4 a, one of the tentacular clusters of thread-cells; 2, a single thread-cell from the above; 44, the lid of the gonophore; 4 c¢, one of the branched processes ; 4d, an ovum; 4, a portion of the creeping stem, with cells. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE. Memoir of the Rev. John Stevens Henslow, M.A. By the Rev. LEonarD JeEnyns, M.A. London: Van Voorst, 1862. 12mo. PERHAPS we are guilty of neglect in not having noticed the Life of Henslow sooner. Our readers must take this statement as an apo- logy, if one is necessary, the fact being that no review was required to direct the attention of our readers to this work. All of them knew the lamented Professor by reputation, many personally ; and * There are other slight differences between the figures ; but a comparison of the detailed descriptions of the two forms shows that those belong to the drawings, and not to the objects themselves, 462. Bibliographical Notice. none could do otherwise than highly appreciate his character and lament his death. Mr. Jenyns justly remarks that ‘‘ No man ever lived less to him- selea wa Whatever acquirements he made in the various branches of human knowledge (and the degree to which he was master of many of them was very considerable), whatever he took in hand was done with a view to the benefit of all within his reach. There was no light hid under a bushel, there was no talent laid up in a napkin.” Hence resulted his skill as a teacher, and his distinguished success in reforming a wild and neglected parish, and promoting the moral and religious character of all persons with whom he mixed. In his own University he resided long enough to start the move- ment which is still in progress for the advancement of the natural sciences ; and he just lived to see them take their true position as a means of attaining honourable distinction and academic degree. Mr. Jenyns has entered in considerable detail upon the considera- tion of these subjects, and the mode in which Henslow’s influence was brought to bear upon them. He has said much, but not too much, of the extent of that influence. He has shown how great it must have been had the Professor been resident at Cambridge during the later years of his life; and he causes those who take an interest in the advancement of such scientific studies heavily to feel the loss which the University has sustained. Had he continued an active resident member of that body, it is probable that we should never have heard of the strong opposition which has temporarily frustrated the plan for obtaining museums and lecture-rooms for the Professors of Science. When he attained to the chair of Botany, it had been occupied by an eminent man who, at least thirty years previously, made one attempt to lecture on his science at Cambridge, and failing then to obtain a class, gave up the endeavour, and absented himself from the University until his death. Doubtless he had a tolerably good excuse for doing so; for then he would find all, or nearly all, the leaders of the University discouraging the study of the natural sciences to the utmost of their power. They knew nothing of those studies, and seemed to fancy not “‘omne ignotum pro magnifico,” but exactly the reverse. The study of nature was trifling, if not worse. In their estimation (and we are sorry to add, in the opinion of many good and learned men now), it was of no use as a training for the mind, and utterly worthless by the side of classics and mathematics. The possibility of using it to teach exactness in thought, accuracy in observation, and correctness in language, was first shown to them by Professor Henslow. It is true that they long continued to apply the opprobrious name of “non-reading men” to the lovers of na- tural science ; but by degrees the majority of such persons have at- tained the knowledge that ‘‘non-reading men” (being naturalists) may really be hard and diligent students. It is worthy of remark that several of our most eminent naturalists and geologists of the present day were, from their preference of the study of nature, considered, Bibliographical Notice. 463 when students, as neglecting the opportunities afforded them at Cam- bridge. We venture to say that there is not one of those men who does not now look back to the time of his residence at Cambridge as the period when, under the guidance of Henslow or Sedgwick, he acquired or largely increased the habit of mind and power of observa- tion which has rendered him what he is. Henslow was the chief founder of the now well-known Cambridge Philosophical Society, which originated from conversations with Prof. Sedgwick during a geological tour in the Isle of Wight. Not having at that time attained the degree of Master of Arts, he appeared less prominently amongst the original members of the Society than was due to his real connexion with its establishment. Henslow commenced his study of nature with geology and minera- logy; and in 1822 he became Professor of Mineralogy in succession to the celebrated traveller, Dr. E.D. Clarke. He only held that chair for a short time; for in 1825 the Professorship of Botany became vacant, and he was elected to that office, which he retained until his lamented death. He immediately commenced lecturing on botany, and obtained a good class at once. He also took pains to become acquainted with the students of nature, and opened his house to them on one evening in each week. This had an excellent effect, by making those men acquainted who had congenial pursuits, by help- ing them in their difficulties, and creating emulation amongst them. Henslow’s attention was soon turned to the improvement of the Botanic Garden, which was small and surrounded by houses, and utterly insufficient for the uses to which such institutions are turned in the present day, although, when founded, it was excellently suited to the wants of that time. He hoped to raise the garden to ‘a level with some other establishments of the same kind,” and happily lived to see his wishes attained to a very considerable extent: The garden was removed to the outskirts of the town, very much extended, and an efficient curator appointed. He also commenced the formation of a herbarium ; for very little was left by the Martyns, and even that little in a deplorable state of decay. He took active measures, and has left an immense and valu- able accumulation of specimens in the possession of the University. When the requisite accommodation is provided for them, and his successor has been thus enabled to complete their arrangement, Cambridge will possess an excellent herbarium. Unfortunately for the University, although happily for himself and most providentially for the parish, he was in 1837 appointed to the valuable living of Hitcham in Suffolk, and permanently established himself there in 1839. From that time the University became to him necessarily the second object, his parish taking the first place. Cambridge had the advantage of his presence for only about six weeks in the year. How he converted a place notorious for crime, immorality, and ignorance into a model parish must be sought in in Mr. Jenyns’s book. It is a beautiful lesson to clergymen similarly situated, and ought to be studied by all who are intended for the ministry ; but it is a subject foreign to our Journal. Nevertheless 464 Zoological Society :— we may notice one of the means employed for opening the minds of the young: we mean the introduction of botany into the parish school. The study was optional, but was ultimately pursued by a considerable number of the elder children with very great suc- cess: they took an eager delight in their botanical lessons; and one of the Inspectors of Schools states, ‘‘ that the botanical lessons did draw largely upon the intelligent powers of his little pupils’ minds there can be no question; and that these children, who out of school were much more conversable than the generality of children in rural parishes, owed a considerable share of the general develop- ment of their minds to the botanical lessons and the self-exercise connected with them.” ‘‘ Neither,” says another inspector, “had I any reason to think that the botanical lessons interfered with a due study of the usual subjects of a national school. Independently of the botany, the Hitcham school ranked wed/ among the better class of rural schools in the district.” But we must stop. We have no intention to give an abstract of this book, but to show that it is well deserving of perusal. As such we strongly recommend it to all our readers. PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY. May 13, 1862.—John Gould, Esq., F.R.S., in the Chair. NARRATIVE OF SEARCH AFTER Birps or PARADISE. By Aurrep R. Watuace, F.Z.S. Having visited most of the islands inhabited by the Paradisee, in the hope of obtaining good specimens of those extraordinary birds, and some knowledge of their habits and distribution, I have thought that an outline of my several voyages, with the causes that have led to their only partial success, might not prove uninteresting. At the close of the year 1856, being then at Macassar in the island of Celebes, I was introduced to the master of a prau trading to the Aru Islands, who assured me that two sorts of Birds of Paradise were abundant there, the large yellow and the small red kinds—the Para- disee apoda and regia of naturalists. He seemed to think there was no doubt but I could obtain them either by purchase from the natives or by shooting them myself. Thus encouraged, I agreed with him for a passage there and back (his stay being six months), and made all my preparations to start by the middle of December. Our vessel was a Malay prau of about 100 tons burthen, but dif- fering widely from anything to be seen in European waters. The deck sloped downwards towards the bows, the two rudders were hung by rattans and ropes on the quarters, the masts were triangles stand- ing on the decks, and the huge mat sail, considerably longer than the vessel, with its yard of bamboos, rose upwards at a great angle, so as to make up for the lowness of the mast. In this strange vessel, Mr. A. R. Wallace’s Search after Birds of Paradise. 465 which, under very favourable circumstances, plunged along at nearly five miles an hour, and with a Buginese crew, all of whom seemed to have a voice in cases of difficulty or danger, we made the voyage of about a thousand miles in perfect safety and very agreeably ; in fact, of all the sea voyages I have made, this was one of the pleasantest. On reaching the Bugis trading settlement of Dobbo, I found that the small island on which it is situated does not contain any Para- dise-Birds. Just as I was trying to arrange a trip to the larger island, a fleet of Magindano pirates made their appearance, commit- ting great devastations, and putting the whole place in an uproar ; and it was only after they had been some time gone that confidence began to be restored, and the natives could be persuaded to take the smallest voyage. This delayed me two months in Dobbo without seeing a Paradise-Bird. When, however, I at length reached the main island and ascended a small stream to a native village, I soon obtained a specimen of the lovely P. regia, which, when first brought me, excited greater ad- miration and delight than I have experienced on any similar occasion. The larger species was still not to be seen; and the natives assured me that it would be some months before their plumage arrived at perfection, when they were accustomed to congregate together and could be more easily obtained. This proved to be correct ; for it was about four months after my arrival at Dobbo that I obtained my first full-plumaged specimen of P. apoda. This was near the centre of the large island of Aru; and I there, with the assistance of the natives, procured the fine.series which first arrived in England. While at Dobbo I had frequent conversations with the Bugis tra- ders and with the Rajah of Goram, who all assured me that in the northern parts of New Guinea I could travel with safety, and that at Mysol, Waigiou, Salwatty, and Dorey I could get all the different sorts of Paradisee. Their accounts excited me so much that I could think of nothing else ; and after another excursion in Celebes I made my way to Ternate, as the best head-quarters for the Mo- luccas and New Guinea. Finding a schooner about to sail on its annual trading voyage to the north coast of New Guinea, I agreed for a passage to Dorey, and to be called for on the return of the vessel after an interval of three or four months. We arrived there, after a tedious voyage, in April 1858, and I began my second search after the Birds of Paradise. I went to Dorey in full confidence of success, and thought myself extremely fortunate in being able to visit that particular locality ; for it was there that Lesson, in the French discovery-ship ‘ Coquille,’ purchased from the natives skins of at least eight species, viz. Para- disee papuana, regia, maynifica, superba, sexsetacea, Astrapia nigra, Epimachus magnus, and Sericulus aureus. Here was a pro- spect for me! The very anticipation of it made me thrill with ex- pectation. My disappointment therefore may be imagined when, shortly after my arrival, I found all these bright hopes fade away. In vain I in- quired for the native bird-hunters ; none were to be found there ; and Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. x. 4.66 Zoological Society :— the inhabitants assured me that not a single Bird of Paradise of any kind was ever prepared by the Dorey people, and that only the com- mon yellow one (P. papuana) was found in the district. This turned out to be the case; for I could get nothing but P. papuana sparingly, a few females of P. regia, and one young male of Seleucides alba, a spe- cies Lesson does not mention. Nevertheless Lesson did undoubtedly obtain all the birds he mentions at Dorey ; but the natives are great traders in a petty way, and are constantly making voyages along the coast and to the neighbouring islands, where they purchase Birds of Paradise and sell them again to the Bugis praus, Molucca traders, and whale-ships which annually visit Dorey harbour. Lesson must have been there at a good time, when there happened to be an accu- mulation of birds; I at a bad one, for I could not buy a single rare bird all the time I was there. I also suffered much by the visit of a Dutch surveying-steamer, which, for want of coals, lay in Dorey harbour a month; and during that time I got nothing from the natives, every specimen being taken on board the steamer, where the commonest birds and insects were bought at high prices. During this time two skins of Astrapia nigra were brought by a Bugis trader and sold to an amateur ornithologist on board; and I never lad another chance of getting a skin of this rare and beautiful bird. The Dorey people all agreed that Amberbaki, about 100 miles west, was the place for Birds of Paradise, and that almost all the different sorts were to be found there. Determined to make an effort to secure them, I sent my two best men with ten natives and a large stock of goods to stay there a fortnight, with instructions to shoot and buy all they could. They returned, however, with absolutely nothing. They could not buy any skins but those of the common P. papuana, and could not find any birds but a single specimen of P. regia. They were assured that the birds all came from two or three days’ journey in the interior, over several ridges of mountains, and were never seen near the coast. The coast people never go there themselves, nor do the mountaineers who kill and preserve them ever come to the coast, but sell them to the inhabitants of intermediate villages, where the coast people go to buy them. These sell them to the Dorey people or any other native traders; so that the specimens Lesson purchased had already passed through three or four hands, These disappointments, with a scarcity of food sometimes ap- proaching starvation, and almost constant sickness both of myself and men, one of whom died of dysentery, made me heartily glad when the schooner returned and took me away from Dorey. I had gone there with the most brilliant hopes, which I think were fully justi- fied by the facts known before my visit ; and yet, as far as my special object (the Birds of Paradise) was concerned, I had accomplished next to nothing. My ardour for New Guinea voyages being now somewhat abated, for the next year and a half I occupied myself in the Moluccas; but in January 1860, being joined (when at Amboyna) by my assistant Mr. Allen, I arranged a plan for the further exploration of the country of the Paradisee, by sending Mr. Allen to Mysol, while I Mr. A. R. Wallace’s Search after Birds of Paradise. 467 myself, after making the circuit of the island of Ceram, was to visit him with stores and provisions and proceed to Waigiou, both return- ing independently to meet at Ternate in the autumn. I had been assured by the Goram and Bugis traders that Mysol was the very best country for the Birds of Paradise, and that they were finer and more abundant there than anywhere else. For Wai- giou I had, besides the authority of the native traders, that of Les- son also, who visited the north coast for a few days, and mentions seven species of Paradise-Birds purchased there by him. These two promising expeditions turned out unfortunately in every respect. On reaching Goram, after much difficulty and delay, I found it impossible to make the voyage I had projected without a vessel of my own. I therefore purchased a smal] native prau of about 8 tons, and after spending a month in strengthening and fitting it up, and having with great difficulty secured a native crew, paid them half their wages in advance, and overcome all the difficulties and ob- jections which every one of them made to starting when all was ready, we at length got away, and I congratulated myself on my favourable prospects. Touching at Ceramlaut, the rendezvous of the New Guinea traders, I invested all my spare cash in goods for barter with the natives, and then proceeded towards Mysol. The very next day, however, being obliged to anchor on the east coast of Ceram on account of bad weather, my crew all ran away during the night, leaving myself and my two Amboyna hunters to get on as we could. With great difficulty I procured other men to take us as far as Wahai,-on the north coast of Ceram, opposite to Mysol, and there by a great chance succeeded in picking up a make- shift crew of four men willing to go with me to Mysol, Waigiou, and Ternate. I here found a letter from Mr. Allen, telling me he was much in want of rice and other necessaries, and was waitmg my arrival to go to the north coast of Mysol, where alone the Paradi- see could be obtained. On attempting to cross the strait, seventy miles wide, between Ceram and Mysol, a strong east wind blew us out of our course; so that we passed to the westward of that island without any possibility of getting back to it. Mr. Allen, finding it impossible to live with- out rice, had to return to Wahai, much against his will, and there was kept two months waiting a supply from Amboyna. When at length he was able to return to Mysol, he had only a fortnight at the best place on the north coast, when the last boat of the season left, and he was obliged to take his only chance of getting back to Ternate. Through this unfortunate series of accidents he was only able to get a single specimen of P. papuana, which is finer there than in most other places, a few of the Cictnnurus regius, and of P. magnifica only a native skin, though this beautiful little species is not rare in the island, and during a longer stay might easily have been obtained. My own voyage was beset with misfortunes. After passing Mysol, _ I lost two of my scanty crew on a little desert island, our anchor breaking while they were on shore, and a powerful current carrying 468 . Zoological Society :— us rapidly away. One of them was our pilot ; and, without a chart or any knowledge of the coasts, we had to blunder our way short-handed among the rocks and reefs and innumerable islands which surround the rocky coasts of Waigiou. Our little vessel was five times on the rocks in the space of twenty-four hours, and a little more wind or sea would in several cases have caused our destruction. On at length reaching our resting-place on the south coast of Waigiou, I imme- diately sent a native boat after my lost sailors, which, however, re- turned in a week without them, owing to bad weather. Again they were induced to make the attempt, and this time returned with them in a very weak and emaciated condition, as they had lived a month on a mere sand-bank, about a mile in diameter, subsisting on shell- fish and the succulent shoots of a wild Bromelia. . I now devoted myself to an investigation of the natural history of Waigiou, having great expectations raised by Lesson’s account, who says that he purchased the three true Paradisee, as well as P. magni- fica and P. sexsetacea, with Lpimachus magnus and Sericulus aureus, in the island, and also mentions several rare Psittaci as probably found there. I soon ascertained, however, fromthe universal testi- mony of the inhabitants, afterwards confirmed by my own observa- tion, that none of these species exist on the island, except P. rubra, which is the sole representative of the Paradiseide and Epimachide, and is strictly limited to this one spot. With more than the usual amount of difficulties, privations, and hunger, I succeeded in obtaining a good series of this beautiful and extraordinary bird ; and three months’ assiduous collecting produced no other species at all worthy of attention. The parrots and pigeons were all of known species ; and there was really nothing in the island to render it worth visiting by a naturalist, except the P. rubra, which can be obtained nowhere else. Our two expeditions to two almost unknown Papuan islands have thus added but one species to the Paradisee I had before obtained from Aru and Dorey. ‘These voyages occupied us nearly a year ; for we parted company in Amboyna in February, and met again at Ter- nate in November, and it was not till the following January that we were either of us able to start again on a fresh voyage. At Waigiou I learned that the Birds of Paradise all came from three places on the north coast, between Salwatty and Dorey—Sorong, Maas, and Amberbaki. The latter I had tried unsuccessfully from Dorey ; at Maas, the natives who procured the birds were said to live three days’ journey in the interior, and to be cannibals ; but at Sorong, which was near Salwatty, they were only about a day from the coast, and were less dangerous to visit. At Mysol, Mr. Allen had received somewhat similar information ; and we therefore resolved he should make another attempt at Sorong, where we were assured all the sorts could be obtained. The whole of that country being under the jurisdiction of the Sultan of Tidore, I obtained, through the Dutch resident at Ternate, a Tidore lieutenant and two soldiers to accompany Mr. Allen as a protection, and to facilitate his opera- tions in getting men and visiting the interior. Mr, A. R, Wallace’s Search after Birds of Paradise. 469 Notwithstanding these precautions, Mr. Allen met with difficulties in this voyage which we had not encountered before. To understand these, it is necessary to consider that the Birds of Paradise are an article of commerce, and are the monopoly of the chiefs of the coast villages, who obtain them at a low rate from the mountaineers, and sell them to the Bugis traders. A portion is also paid every year as tribute to the Sultan of Tidore. The natives are therefore very jea- lous of a stranger, especially a European, interfering in their trade, and above all of going into the interior to deal with the mountaineers themselves. They of course think he will raise the prices in the in- terior, and lessen the demand on the coast, greatly to their disadvan- tage; they also think their tribute will be raised if a European takes back a quantity of the rare sorts; and they have besides a vague and very natural dread of some ulterior object in a white man’s coming at so much trouble and expense to their country only to get Birds of Paradise, of which they know he can buy plenty at Ternate, Macas- sar, or Singapore. It thus happened that when Mr. Allen arrived at Sorong and ex- plained his intentions of going to seek Birds of Paradise in the interior, innumerable objections were raised. He was told it was three or four days’ journey over swamps and mountains; that the mountaineers were savages and cannibals, who would certainly kill him ; and, lastly, that not a man in the village could be found who dare go with him. After some days spent in these discussions, as he still persisted in making the attempt, and showed them his au- thority from the Sultan of Tidore to go where he pleased and receive every assistance, they at Iength provided him with a boat to go the first part of the journey up a river; at the same time, however, they sent private orders to the interior villages to refuse to sell any pro- visions, so as to compel him to return. On arriving at the village where they were to leave the river and strike inland, the coast people returned, leaving Mr. Allen to get on as he could. Here he called on the Tidore heutenant to assist him and procure men as guides and to carry his baggage to the villages of the mountaineers. This, however, was not so easily done; a quarrel took place, and the na- tives, refusing to obey the somewhat harsh orders of the lieutenant, got out their knives and spears to attack him and his soldiers, and Mr. Allen himself was obliged to interfere to protect those who had come to guard him. The respect due to a white man and the timely distribution of a few presents prevailed ; and on showing the knives, hatchets, and beads he was willing to give to those who accompanied him, peace was restored, and the next day, travelling over a fright- fully rugged country, they reached the villages of the mountaineers. Here Mr. Allen remained a month, without any interpreter through whom he could understand a word or communicate a want. How- ever, by signs and presents and a pretty liberal barter he got on very well, some of them accompanying him every day in the forest to shoot, and receiving a small present when he was successful. In the grand matter of the Paradise-Birds, however, little was done. Only one additional species was found, the Selewcedes alba, 470 Zoological Society :— of which he had already obtained a specimen on the island of Sal- watty on his way to Sorong; so that at this much-vaunted place in the mountains, and among the bird-catching natives, nothing fresh was obtained. The P. magnifica, they said, was found there, but was rare; the Sericulus aureus also rare; Epimachus magnus, Astrapia nigra, Parotia sexsetacea, and Lophorina superba not found there, but only much further in the interior, as well as the lovely little Lory, Charmosyna papuana. Moreover, neither at Sorong nor at Salwatty could he obtain a single native skin of the rarer species. Thus ended my search after these beautiful birds. Five voyages to different parts of the district they inhabit, each occupying in its preparation and execution the larger part of a year, have produced me only five species out of the thirteen known to exist in New Guinea. The kinds obtained are those that inhabit the districts near the coasts of New Guinea and its islands, the remainder seeming to be strictly confined to the central mountain-ranges of the northern peninsula ; and our researches at Dorey and Amberbaki, near one end of this peninsula, and at Salwatty and Sorong, near the other, enable me to decide with some certainty on the native country of these rare and lovely birds, good specimens of which have never yet been seen in Europe. It must be considered as somewhat extraordinary that during five years’ residence and travel in Celebes, the Moluccas, and New Guinea I should never have been able to purchase skins of half the species which Lesson, forty years ago, obtained during a few weeks in the same countries. I believe that all, except the common species of commerce, are now much more difficult to obtain than they were even twenty years ago; and I impute it principally to their having been sought after by the Dutch officials through the Sultan of Tidore. The chiefs of the annual expeditions to collect tribute, have had orders to get all the rare sorts of Paradise- Birds; and as they pay little or nothing for them (it being suffi- cient to say they are for the Sultan), the head men of the coast villages would for the future refuse to purchase them from the mountaineers, and confine themselves instead to the commoner spe- cies, which are less sought after by amateurs, but are to them a profitable merchandise. The same causes frequently lead the inha- bitants of uncivilized countries to conceal any minerals or other na- tural products with which they may become acquainted, from the fear of being obliged to pay increased tribute, or of bringing upon themselves a new and oppressive labour. I have given this short sketch of my search after the Birds of Paradise, barely touching on the many difficulties and dangers I experienced, because I fear that the somewhat scanty results of my exertions may have led to the opinion that they failed for want of judgment or perseverance. I trust, however, that the mere enume- ration of my voyages will show that patience and perseverance were not altogether wanting; but I must plead guilty to having been misled, first by Lesson and then by all the native traders, it never having occurred to me (and I think it would notjhave occurred to any one), that in scarcely a single instance would the birds be found to Mr. A. R. Wallace’s Search after Birds of Paradise. 471 inhabit the districts in which they are most frequently to be pur- chased. Yet such is the case; for neither at Dorey, nor at Salwatty, nor Waigiou, nor Mysol are any of the rarer species to be found alive. Not only this, but even at Sorong, where the Waigiou chiefs go every year and purchase all kinds of Birds of Paradise, it has turned out that most of the specimens are brought from the central mountain-ranges by the natives of those places, and reach the shore in places where it is not safe for trading praus to go, owing to the want of anchorage on an exposed rocky coast. Nature seems to have taken every precaution that these, her choicest treasures, may not lose value by being too easily obtained. First we find an open, harbourless, inhospitable coast, exposed to the full swell of the Pacific Ocean; next, a rugged and mountainous country, covered with dense forests, offering in its swamps and pre- cipices and serrated ridges an almost impassable barrier to the cen- tral regions; and lastly, a race of the most savage and ruthless character, in the very lowest stage of civilization. In such a country and among such a people are found these wonderful productions of nature. In those trackless wilds do they display that exquisite beauty and that marvellous development of plumage, calculated to excite admiration and astonishment among the most civilized and most intellectual races of man. A feather is itself a wonderful and a beautiful thing. A bird clothed with feathers is almost necessarily a beautiful creature. How much, then, must we wonder at and admire the modification of simple feathers into the rigid, polished, wavy ribbons which adorn P. rubra, the mass of airy plumes on P. apoda, the tufts and wires of Seleucides alba, or the golden buds borne upon airy stems that spring from the tail of Cicinnurus regius ; while gems and polished metals can alone compare with the tints that adorn the breast of Parotia sexsetacea and Astrapia nigra, and the immensely developed shoulder-plumes of Epimachus magnus. I will now point out the distribution of the species of Birds of Paradise, as far as I have been able to ascertain it. The Aru Islands contain P. apoda and P. regia; and we have no positive knowledge of P. apoda being found anywhere else. Mysol has P. papuana, P. regia, and P. magnifica; Waigiou P. rubra only. Salwatty, though so close to New Guinea, has no restricted Paradisee, but possesses P. regia, P. magnifica, Ep. albus, and Sericulus aureus. The island of Jobie, and the Mysory Islands beyond it, certainly contain true Paradisee ; but what species beyond P. papuana, is unknown. The coast districts of the northern part of New Guinea contain P. papuana and P. regia pretty generally distributed, while P. magnifica, P. alba, and Sericulus aureus are scarce and local. Lastly, the central moun- tains of the northern peninsula are alone inhabited by Lophorina superba, Parotia sexsetacea, Astrapia nigra, Epimachus magnus, and Craspedophora magnifica; and here also probably exist the unique Diphyllodes Wilsoni and Paradigalla carunculata. The most widely distributed of the Paradisee is therefore the little P. regia, which is found in every island except Waigiou. Next, and probably most abundant in individuals, comes the P. papuana, 472 Miscellaneous. wanting only in Aru, Salwatty, and Waigiou. The next most widely spread species is P. magnifica, occurring in two islands (Salwatty and Mysol) as well as on the mainland. ‘The other species are all found on the mainland only—with the exception of P. apoda (probably re- stricted to Aru), and P. rubra, which, being certainly confined to the small island of Waigiou, offers the most restricted range of the whole family. It is interesting to remark that all the islands on which true Pa- radisee are found are connected by banks of soundings to the main- land of New Guinea. The hundred-fathom line includes the islands of Aru, Mysol, Waigiou, and Jobie, which have probably been, at no distant geological period, connected with New Guinea; while Ké, Ceram, &c., are separated from it by deep sea, and on them no Pa- radisee exist. The island of Gilolo, on which the genus Semioptera occurs, ex- tends towards Waigiou, and has the island of Guebe exactly between the two, suggesting the probability of a connexion there; but the depth of the intervening sea is unknown. It may be considered as certain that every species of Paradise-Bird yet obtained from the natives has come from the north peninsula of New Guinea, that being the part most frequented by the Malay traders. The vast extent of country east of long. 136° is quite un- known ; but there can be little doubt that it contains other and perhaps yet more wonderful forms of this beautiful group of birds. If we look round the whole circumference of the globe, we shall be unable to find a region at once so promising to the naturalist and so absolutely a ‘‘ terra incognita”’ as this great tropical land ; and it is to be hoped that our explorers and naturalists may soon be induced to direct their attention to this hitherto neglected country. MISCELLANEOUS. Remarks in reference to the Gracula pectoralis of Mr. Wallace. By G. R. Gray. Mr. Watuace has lately described an interesting bird under the appellation of Gracula pectoralis, which bird had been previously recorded by Lesson, under the name of Sericulus anais, from a spe- cimen in M. Bourcier’s collection. Lesson gives a correct description (Revue de Zool. 1839, p. 44) of the bird, so far as a mutilated New- Guinean skin would permit. The late Prince C. L. Bonaparte, in 1850, refers to Lesson’s spe- cies in his ‘ Conspectus Avium,’ but in his very short notice of it he unfortunately uses the word abdomine when it ought to have been pectore, and thus this misapplication of a word has caused a difficulty in defining the bird. This mistake he also continued in the ‘Comptes Rendus,’ 1853, page 831, though he there gave a new and more lengthened description. At the same time he proposed it as the type of a new division, under the name of Melanopyrrhus. Miscellaneous. 473 In 1850, Mr. Cassin unknowingly described this bird under the new name of Pastor nigrocinctus (Proc. Acad. Philad. 1850, p. 68). The description, he informs us, was taken from two specimens—one in the Albany Museum, U.S., and the other in the Philadelphian Academy. ‘The fact of the similarity of this species with that of Lesson was first pointed out by Dr. Sclater (Proc. Zool. Soe. 1857, p- 6). It is one of the birds which I had, in my ‘ List of Genera,’ published in 1855, ‘‘so quietly recapitulated,”’ as the learned Editor of ‘The Ibis’ (1862, p. 291) is pleased to remark, “with the dry interrogatory, ‘ Nonne avis arte facta?’ ”’ I was induced to affix this observation from the appearance presented in my drawing, which was taken from M. Bourcier’s typical specimen. It is now proved, in part at least, that I was not altogether wrong in supposing that the art of the taxidermist had been employed in endeavouring to replace by artificial means what the New-Guinean natives had de- prived the three previously known specimens of,—for example, their wings and legs. The false restoration of these organs was the cause of a wrong position being assigned to the bird in regard to the family it occupied in the system of ornithology. Mr. Wallace’s perfect specimens prove that the true wings and legs are very similar to those of the genus Gracula, both in form and colour ; and it appears to be intermediate between the genera Gracula and Basilornis, being allied to the latter in its more slender-formed bill. The name and synonyma of this fine and singularly coloured bird will now stand as follows :— Gracula (Melanopyrrhus) Anais. Sericulus Anais, Less., Rev. de Zool. 1839, p.44; Pr. Bon., Consp. Av. i. p. 349. Melanopyrrhus Anais, Pr. Bon., Compt. Rend. 1853, p.831; G. R. Gray, List of Gen. 1855, p. 46. Pastor nigrocinctus, Cass., Proc. Acad. Philad. 1850, p. 68. ?Oriolus Anais, G. R. Gray, Gen. of B. App. p. 11; id. Cat. of Birds of N. Guin. p. 26. Gracula pectoralis, Wall., Proc. Z. S. 1862, p. 166. pl. 20. Hab. New Guinea (Wall.). The Gorilla. By Tuomas J. Moore. A statement, resting upon no reliable authority, lately appeared in the Liverpool newspapers, announcing the arrival and exhibition in this port of a young living specimen of a Gorilla. This announcement, having been copied into the ‘Times,’ and continuing to be copied into various other papers, being absolutely untrue, it becomes necessary to give it an unqualified contradiction. The so-called Gorilla is simply a Chimpanzee, standing somewhat over two feet in height, and having the large ears, flesh-coloured muzzle, with white hairs on the chin, and the deeply cleft fingers so characteristic of the species. It is a robust, lively, and amusing creature, imitating its keeper 474 Miscellaneous. in various ways, as in trying to unlock a cupboard and to tack pieces of list over cracks in the door. But how any one who has once seen either a Chimpanzee or a Gorilla could mistake it for the young of the latter passes comprehension. Mr. Bartlett and Mr. Waterhouse Hawkins, who have both seen the animal (the latter coming expressly from Wrexham, on the faith of the above public announcements, to do so), will confirm my statements, if they have not already published protests of their own. One specimen of the Gorilla has certainly been imported into Liverpool alive. This occurred in the winter of 1855-56. This individual, called “‘ Jenny,” was slightly larger, I believe, than the preceding, and was purchased by Mrs. Wombwell, in whose menagerie it lived some short time, and in which, on its subsequent arrival in Liverpool, I first saw it. A short notice of this animal was written by Mr. Waterton, and subsequently published in some local paper. It was active in its habits, and so far from being savage or ferocious, it lived with its mistress in her own special travelling carriage, about which it jumped and climbed freely. Upon its death in March 1856, it was forwarded to Mr. Waterton, in whose museum at Walton Hall the preserved skin may still be seen. The skeleton is in the museum of the Philosophical and Literary Society of Leeds, whither it was forwarded direct from Walton Hall. A young specimen, which died at the Gaboon, in the spring of this year, in the possession of Mr. R. B. Walker, may be seen, stuffed, in the museum of the Natural History Society of Manchester. This is smaller than the preceding, being, as nearly as I can remember, about the size of the young stuffed example in the British Museum. The recent acquisition of the skin of an adult Gorilla, in first-rate condition, tempts me to make public the way in which it was pre- served. It was very carefully skinned, down even to the very tips of the fingers and toes, and the skin preserved in spirit*, The carcase was exposed to insects for a short time, and then packed in a suitable box. By these means both skin and skeleton arrived in excellent condition, and indicate the most reliable methods of preserving future specimens for importation. They were secured for this Museum through the liberality of Mr. Henry Duckworth, F.G.S., of this town. Before concluding, I may note that an enormous skeleton of a male Gorilla, presented to this Museum by Mr. R. B. Walker, mea- sures 16% inches in the length of the femur. Free Public and Derby Museum, Liverpool, Nov. 24, 1862. * Instructions recommending this method of transmitting the skin of the Gorilla were sent to the Gaboon by Dr. J. E. Gray, of the British Museum, in 1861,—Ebs. Miscellaneous. 475 Note on the Otothrix Hodgsoni. By G. R. Gray. In a late Number of ‘The Ibis,’ Mr. Blyth refers to my Otothrix Hodgsoni (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1859, p. 101. pl. 152), and makes it ab- solutely identical with Podargus cornutus. He goes so far as to say that the former is the young of the latter species. If he had, how- ever, actually compared them together, he could never have made such an erroneous identification. In his Catalogue of Birds, Mr. Blyth doubtfully considers the Podargus cornutus as the adult of P. javanensis, while in another work (Journ. A. 8. B. 1847, p- 1180) he tells us that the P. javanensis is the young dress of P. auritus (!). Mr. Blyth has, however, referred to two examples as B & C, under the head of Podargus affinis, in his Catalogue, p. 81, in these words: ‘* Head, wings, and tail of two specimens of a nearly allied but distinct species. From Darjiling.’’ This locality is identical with that from which the Ofothrix Hodgsoni is brought, and I be- lieve therefore that these fragments belong to my species ; so that in these he could see distinctive characters, although he now ventures to judge from the figure only, and pronounces my Hodgsoni to be no other than cornutus, young. The specimen of Otothrix Hodgsoni from which the description and figure were derived is that of an adulé female, taken from the nest with its young ; and it has, among other differences, a smaller bill than that of P. cornutus, its general coloration, the extreme length of the whiskers, &c.- Note on Pleuronectes sinensis, Lacép. By Dr. A. GUNTHER. The generic name of Tephritis has been given by me to the Chinese Turbot, or Pleuronectes sinensis, Lacép. (Catal. Fish. iv. p. 406). Having since found it preoccupied by a genus of insects, I propose to replace it by that of Tephrinectes. Note on the Size of a Seal at the time of Birth. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c. We have received from the Zoological Gardens the body of a Ringed Seal (Callocephalus fetidus), that had died soon after its birth. It was entirely covered with closely set, well-developed fur of a silver-grey colour, being rather browner on the upper surface. It is 2 feet 8 inches long, from the tip of the nose to the end of tail ; the fore paws are 6, and the hinder 8 inches long, and the latter are 7 inches wide when expanded. The webs of the feet are covered with hair, and the claws are well developed and black. The whiskers are white, well developed, and slightly waved.—Proc. Zool. Soc. June 10, 1862. 476 INDEX to VOL. X. Apvams, A., on the animal and affi- nities of the genus Alaba, with de- scriptions of new species, 293; on new species of Scissurellide, 346 ; on the animal and float of Ianthina, 417; on the animal and affinities of Scaliola, 420, Alaba, on the animal and affinities of the genus, 293. Alder, J., on anew genus and some new species of naked Mollusca, 261. Alepisaurus ferox, notes on, 317. Alepocephalus rostratus, notes on, 285. Alligators, synopsis of the species of, 327. Anatomus, new species of, 347. Andrenide, on the form of the pec- ten in, 152. Aphantochroa, new species of, 316. Apide, on the form of the pecten in, 152. Aquila Desmursii, remarks on, 390. Ascaris, new species of, 314. Astianthus, characters of the genus, 31. Astylozoon, characters of the new ge- nus, 260 Australica, new species of, 24. Baird, Dr. W., on some new species of entomostracous Crustacea, 1; on new species of Entozoa, 314; on new species of Estheria and Lim- netis, 391. Baly, J.S., on new species of Phyto- phagous Beetles, 17. Bate, C.S., on the supposed disco- very of a minute vertebrate jaw in mud dredged at St. Helena, 440. Batissa, on a species of, 415. Baur, A., on Synapta digitata and its supposed parasite, 216. Bellonella, description of the new ge- nus, 148. Beneden, P. J. van, on the transform- ation of Entozoa, 157. Bennett, Dr. G., on the habits of Rhinochetus jubatus, 308. Benson, W. H., on Indian and Bur- mese species of Unio, 184; on a singular shell from Southern India allied to Tanalia, with remarks ona Travancore Batissa and on the Himalayan form Tricula, 414. Berberis, on the nature of the thorns ris, GV/B4 Bignoniacez, revision of the order, 29 Birds of Paradise, narrative of search after, 464. Blackwall, J., on newly discovered Spiders from Rio Janeiro, 348, 42]. Bombifrons, characters of the genus, 269. Books, new: — Babington’s British Botany, 50; Gwyn Jeffreys’s Brit- ish Conchology, 53; Hooker’s British Ferns, 140; Sclater’s Cata- logue of American Birds, 143; Stainton’s Tineina, 305; Krodyer’s Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift, 370; Wallich’s North-Atlantie Sea-bed, 380; Darwin’s Fertilization of the Orchids, 384 ; Jenyns’s Memoir of Henslow, 461. Bothriocephalus, new species of, 315, Bowerbank, Dr.J.S., on the anatomy oe physiology of the Spongiadze, 44, Brauer, F., on the larva of Hypo- derma, 397. Ceenopsis, characters of the genus, 334. Caiman, monograph of the species of, 330. Cambridge geology, notes on, 97. Campsidium, characters of the genus, 32. Candona, new species of, 2. Capricornus, new species of, 320. Centrolabrus trutta, notes on, 161. Cephalophus, new species of, 400. Cervus, on a new species of, 394. Charz, onthe pro-embryos of the, 321. Charrs, on the British, 228. Charybdeide, on’ the systematic po- sition of the, 6. INDEX. Chasmatostoma, characters of the new genus, 257. Chlorospingus, new species of, 310. Chrysomela, new species of, 20. Clark, Rev. H., on new species of Hydroporus, 173, 326. Clarke, Rev. W. B., on the age of the New South Wales coal-fields, 81. Clubiona, new species of, 426. Coal-fields of New South Wales, on the age of the, 81. Coccinella, new species of, 337. Colasposoma, new species of, 19. Coleoptera, additions to Madeiran, 287, 331. Cork, on the natural and artificial pro- duction of, in the Cork-oak, 400. Cosmetornis, new species of, 445. Cossypha, new species of, 443. Craniz, on the recent, 126. Crimora, description of the new genus, Crocodiles, synopsis of the species of, i) © e Cyclemys, on a new species of, 157. Cynopterus, new species of, 397. Cyphagogus, description of the new genus, 299. Cypris, new species of, 3. Cythere, new fossil species of, 203. Daniell, Dr. W. F., on some Chinese condiments obtained from the Xan- thoxylacez, 195. DeCandolle, C., on the natural and ar- tificial production of cork, 400. Delphinus, new species of, 388. Diala, new species of, 298. Didrichsen, M., on the nature of the thorns in Berberis, Ribes, and Par- kinsonia, 373. Doris, new British species of, 261. Doto, new British species of, 264. Drassus, new species of, 425. Drepanostoma, characters of the new genus, 209. Dysdera, new British species of, 240. Elditt, M., on the early stages of Microdon mutabilis, 79. Empidochanes, new species of, 312. Emys lutaria, on the discovery of an- cient remains of, in Norfolk, 224. Engelmann, T. W., on the Infusoria, 241, Entomostraca, descriptions of new, 1. Entoniscus Porcellanz, description of, Ole 477 Entozoa, on the migrations of, 77, 157; new species of, 314, Epeira, new species of, 430. Ephedra, observations on, 133. Eripus, new species of, 422. Estheria, new species of, 391. Euplectes, new species of, 444, Kuryope, new species of, 19. Eutriptus, new species of, 292. Fishes, on rare or little-known Ma- deiran, 161,274; death of, m the sea during the monsoon, 320. Flower, W. H., on the brain of the Javan Loris, 150. “ Fregilus, new species of, 316. Furina textilis, note on, 393. Garreau, M. L., on the functions of the nitrogenous matter of plants,33,111. Gastrostyla, characters of the new genus, 209, Gastrus Equi, on the anatomy of the larva of, 372. Gonioctena, new species of, 27. Gonostoma denudata, notes on, 279. Gorilla, on the habits of the, 473. Gould, J., on new species of Hum- ming-birds, 315. Gracula pectoralis, remarks on, 472. Gray, G. R., on some West African Birds, 443; on the Gracula pecto- ralis, 472 ; on the Otothrix Hodg- soni, 475. Gray, Dr. J. E., on new species of Spoggodes and a new allied genus, 69; on claviform Pennatulide, 73; on a new species of Paragorgia, 125; on two new genera of Zoo- phytes, 147; on a new species of Cyclemys, 157 ; on the species of Crocodiles, 265 3 on a new Leopard from Japan, 320 3 on a new Wild Goat from the island of Formosa, 320; on the species of Alligators, 327 ; on a new species of Dolphin, 388 ; on a wingless bird, or Moho, and a Raven found in Hawaii, 389 ; on a new species of Cynopterus, 397; on the occurrence of the King- crab on the English coast, 399; on a new species of Bosh-Buck from Natal, 400; on the size of a Seal at the time of birth, 475. Gunther, Dr. A.,on the British Charrs, 228; on a new Spider from Cochin China, 299; onthe genus Trachinus, 301; on Pleuronectes sinensis, 475, 478 Su J. H., on Aquila Desmursii, 390. Gyrodactylus elegans, on the occur- rence of, in Shropshire, 77. Halerosia, characters of the genus, 273. Halictus, on the alar hooks of the species of, 152. Haloporphyrus lepidion, notes on, 166. Hancock, A., on a new genus and some new species of naked Mol- lusea, 261. Harpalini, observations on the, 375. Hartlaub, Dr. G., on a new bird from Madagascar, 396. Heliothrix, new species of, 316. Helix, new species of, 95. Helix coronula, on the discovery of, in a recent state, 935. Helops, new species of, 338. Hincks, Rev. T., on the Zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall, 360; on the production of similar _ gonozooids by Hydroid polypes be- longing to different genera, 459. Houghton, Rev. W., on the occurrence of Gyrodactylus elegans in Shrop- shire, 77; on the Unicorn of the ancients, 363, 416. Hydropori, new species of, 173, 326. Hylophilus, new species of, 310. Hypoderma, on the larve of, 397. Tanthina, on the animal and float of, 417. Tnfusoria, contributions to the natural history of the, 241. Jacare, characters of the genus, 328. Jeffreys, J. G., on the animal of Zo- nites excavatus, 76; on aspecies of Limopsis now living in the British seas, with remarks on the genus, 343. Johnston, J. Y., on rare and little- known Madeiran fishes, 161, 274; on Alepisaurus ferox, 317. Kirkby, J., on species common to Car- boniferous and Permian strata, 202. Krefft, G., on Furina textilis, 393. Kroyer, Dr. H., on new species of Mysidze and other Crustacea, 370. Laparocerus, new species of, 332. Lema, new species of, 17. Leopard, on a new, from Japan, 320. Leptopogon, new species of, 311. Lernzeodiscus Porcellane, observa- _ tions on, 44. . INDEX. Leucohimatium, new species of, 290. Ligurnus, new species of, 444. ‘aE pees new British species of, Limulus Polyphemus, on the oceur- rence of, on the English coast, 399. Limnetis, new species of, 393. Limopsis, remarks on the genus, 343. Lipaugus, new species of, 80. Lituaria, observations on the genus, Lixus, new species of, 331. Longitarsus, new species of, 336. Lowe, Rev. R. T., on the discovery of the fossil Helix coronula recent, and of other new land-Mollusca, 93, Lycosa, new species of, 349. Macrourus ccelorynehus and levis, notes on, 169, Mecistops, characters of the genus, 273. : Mecocerculus, new species of, 313. Megascolex czruleus, on the habits of, 146. Meinert, M., on the anatomy of the Jarva of Gastrus Equi, 372. Metophthalmus, new species of, 290. Microdon mutabilis, on the early stages of, 79. Microthorax, characters of the new genus, 258. Miers, J., on Ephedra, 133, Molinia, characters of the genus, 272. Mollusca, on the aquiferous and ovi- ducal system in the Jamellibran- chiate, 446, Moore, T. J., on the Gorilla, 473. Morchellana, description of the new genus, 69. Mormolyce, on a new species of, 96. Miiller, F'., on the systematic position of the Charybdeide, 6; on the Rhizocephala, 44 ; on a new para- sitic Isopod Crustacean, 87. Mygale, new British species of, 240. Myiobius, new species of, 312. Mysidez, contributions to the history of the, 370. Newton, A., on the discovery of an- cient remains of Emys lutaria in Norfolk, 224. Nudibranchiata, new British, 261. Ochtheeca, new species of, 313, Oopholis, characters of the genus, 267. Orbiculze, on the recent, 126, Otothrix Hodgsoni, note on, 475. INDEX. Owen, Prof., on the Hyracotherian character of the lower molars of the supposed Macacus from the Eocene sand of Suffolk, 240. Paleozoic rocks, on the discovery of microscopic organisms in the sili- ceous nodules of the, 160. Palinia, characters of the genus, 270. ic Sekai on a second species of, 25, Paralepis coregonoides, notes on, 283. Parkinsonia, on the nature of the thorns in, 373. Pentastoma, new species of, 314. Permian strata, on species common to Carboniferous and, 205. Peters, W., on a new genus of Tree- frogs, 159. Philydor, new species of, 311. Phycis blennoides, notes on, 274. eee Beetles, new species of, l Plagiodera, new species of, 25. Plants, on the functions of the nitro- genous matter of, 33, 111. Plectromantis, description of the new genus, 159. Pleuronectes sinensis, note on, 475. Polypes, Hydroid, onthe production of similar gonozooids by different genera of, 459. Polythalamia, on the phenomena of motion in the pseudopodia of the, 405, Pouchet, M., on the migrations of the Entozoa, 77. Prestwich, J., on the drift deposits containing flint instruments, 57. Pringsheim, M., on the pro-embryos of the Chare, 321. Prion, new species of, 317. Reeve, J., on the recent Craniz and Orbicule, 126. Regalecus, on the anatomy of a species of, 13. Reichert, Prof., on the phenomena of motion in the pseudopodia of the Rhizopoda, 401. Rhinochetus jubatus, on the habits of, 308. Rhizocephala, on the, 44. Rhizopoda, on the phenomena of mo- tion in the pseudopodia of the, . 401. Ribes, on the nature of the thorns in, 373. 479 Robertson, C., on the aquiferous and oviducal system in the lamellibran- chiate Mollusca, 446. Robertson, J., on the occurrence of Dysdera erythrina in Sussex, 240, Rolleston, Dr. G., on the aquiferous and oviducal system in the lamelli- branchiate Mollusea, 446. Royal Society, proceedings of the, 57, 144. is aa ampullaceus, notes on, Sacculina purpurea, observations on, Salmo, new British species of, 238. Salticus, new species of, 351. Scahola, on the animal and affinities of, 420. Schjodte, Prof., on the Harpalini, 375. Scissurellide, new species of, 346, Sclater, Dr. P. L., on a new species of Lipaugus, 80; on new species of birds, 309; on the Deer of For- mosa, 394, Sclerostoma, new species of, 314. Scopelus Bonapartii, notes on, 281. Seal, on the size of a, at the time of birth, 475. Seeley, H., on the Elsworth rock and associated strata, 97. Seemann, Dr. B., on the natural or- der Bignoniacez, 29, Solenocaulon, description of the new genus, 147. Sparassus, new species of, 423. Sphasus, new species of, 350. Sphecodes, on the alar hooks of the species of, 152. Spiders, description of new, 299, 348, 421. Spoggodes, new species of, 69. Spongiadz, on the anatomy and phy- siology of the, 144. Staveley, Miss E. F., on the form of the comb in different Andrenide and Apidz, and on the alar hooks of the species of Sphecodes and Halictus, 152. Stenops javanicus, on the brain of the, 150. Strobilophaga, new species of, 445. Styliferina, new species of, 299. Synapta digitata and its supposed pa- rasite, on, 216. Tanalia, on a singular shell allied to, 480 Tarphius, new species of, 289. Tennent, Sir J. E., on the gigantic earth-worm from Ceylon, 146. Tetrarhynchus, new species of, 314. Theridion, new species of, 429. Thomisus, new species of, 421. Trachinus, remarks on the genus, 301. Trechus, new species of, 287. Trichophorus, new species of, 444. Tricula, remarks on the subgenus, 415. Turdus, new species of, 309. Tylas, description of the new genus, 396. Unicorn of the ancients, on the, 363, 416. Unio, new species of, 184. Uraleptus Maraldi, notes on, 165. Urochroma, new species of, 313. Veretillum, on some species of, 74, Verrier, M., on the migrations of the Entozoa, 77. Walker, R., on the anatomy of a spe- cies of Regalecus, 13. INDEX. Wallace, A. R., on the habitats of the Birds of Paradise, 464. Wallich, Dr., on the discovery of a mi- nute vertebrate jaw in mud dredged at St. Helena, 304, 441. Westwood, J. O., on a new species of Mormolyce, 96. White, Dr. M. C., on the discovery of microscopic organisms in the si- liceous nodules of the Paleozoic rocks, 160. Wollaston, T. V., on new Madeiran Coleoptera, 287, 331. Xanthoxylacez, on some Chinese con- diments obtained from the, 195. Xanthoxylum, new species of, 201. Zonites excavatus, on the animal of, 76. Zoological Society, proceedings of the, 69, 146, 228, 508, 388, 464. Zoophytes, on two new genera of, 147; of South Devon and South Corn- wall, on the, 360. Zosterops, new species of, 444, END OF THE TENTH VOLUME. PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, Ann.’ Mag. Nat. Hist, Ser. 3 VoLIO PLL. 2b. gre. West ad. nat. del. et sc. - Hist. S.3.Vol.10.PLIL « } ag. . Nat. e Ann. & hi Se) See | pa ey 10. Plate IT. a a Ce Sale 4 eee © a) ph —_s . Amn. &Mag.NatHist.S.3 Vol PAT) LEP J Basire se. ef NIFEROUS AND PERMIAN. ARBO ¢ Ma nity tiie |anyacles ) Danio, Berm. Glarnuan, dehel sc. sell “o . 4 v ee oa ata y . e —— 4 _ 2 yy . bao * ¢ it ia rm 4 - < 5 x = i ’ > co ; ie = . i r ' = . a ‘ iy > + g t ed * ~ ~ = woe - M, , ‘ < = 4 om e F ; : > ee, , (mee ivi " <7 “ + - ‘ “4 E : = t — ei ' : * ~ % ‘ ’ th 7 . rt 1 7 “ates, ® ct 2 x ¢ Ann. &Mag Nat Mist.5. 5 VotbtLO PUVA. W West tmp. Emys litaria. GH. Ford det. Ain.deMag. Nat. Lhst. 5.3. Er ee On eA,Y Pers Pufr ENN Vol.10. 72, VIZZ. re yyy Petyhs f I J Basire se. ay Ductal ae Laat Be y 4 pat! i ‘a ei ” ee A A} a 7» ye 2 7 uae 7 Mt Wie wT AL. hth if CLE ET SNEED ESO SPEED IN A GPT AS saree nam geen OE et ene Ae o> oe te SO — A EAS POLE GA a I am te SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES ULL 3 9088 01313 9605